2019 BMW x5 76615

LINK:
CONTENT & A-Z
The Ultimate
Driving Machine®
OWNER'S MANUAL.
THE BMW X5.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402896765 - X/18

WELCOME TO BMW.
Owner's Manual.
BMW X5.
Thank you for choosing a BMW.
The more familiar you are with your vehicle, the better control you will have on
the road. We therefore strongly suggest:
Read this Owner's Manual before starting off in your new BMW. Also use the
Integrated Owner's Manual in your vehicle. It contains important information
on vehicle operation that will help you make full use of the technical features
available in your BMW. The manual also contains information designed to en‐
hance operating reliability and road safety, and to contribute to maintaining
the value of your BMW.
At the time of production at the plant, the printed Owner's Manual is the most
current resource. After a vehicle software update – for example, a Remote
Software Upgrade – the Integrated Owner's Manual for the vehicle will con‐
tain updated information.
You can find supplementary information in the additional brochures in the on‐
board literature.
We wish you a safe and enjoyable ride.
3
TABLE OF CONTENTS
NOTES
Information ......................................................................................................................... 8
Owner's Manual media ................................................................................................ 16
QUICK REFERENCE
Entering ............................................................................................................................ 20
Set-up and use ............................................................................................................... 24
In transit ............................................................................................................................ 28
CONTROLS
Cockpit .............................................................................................................................. 38
Operating state of the vehicle .................................................................................... 43
iDrive .................................................................................................................................. 46
BMW Remote Software Upgrade ............................................................................. 60
General Settings ............................................................................................................ 63
Opening and closing ..................................................................................................... 76
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel ......................................................................... 111
Transporting children safely ..................................................................................... 128
Driving ............................................................................................................................. 133
Displays .......................................................................................................................... 151
Lights .............................................................................................................................. 168
Safety .............................................................................................................................. 176
Driving stability control systems .............................................................................. 213
Driver assistance systems ........................................................................................ 219
Driving comfort ............................................................................................................. 262
Climate control ............................................................................................................. 269
Interior equipment ....................................................................................................... 287
Storage compartments .............................................................................................. 295
Cargo area ..................................................................................................................... 301
4
After a vehicle software update – for example, a Remote Software
Upgrade – the Integrated Owner's Manual for the vehicle will
contain updated information.
DRIVING TIPS
Things to remember when driving ......................................................................... 312
Trailer towing ................................................................................................................ 317
Saving fuel ..................................................................................................................... 321
MOBILITY
Refueling ........................................................................................................................ 330
Wheels and tires .......................................................................................................... 332
Engine compartment ................................................................................................. 364
Operating materials .................................................................................................... 367
Maintenance ................................................................................................................. 374
Replacing components .............................................................................................. 376
Breakdown assistance ............................................................................................... 380
Care ................................................................................................................................. 387
REFERENCE
Technical data .............................................................................................................. 394
Appendix ........................................................................................................................ 397
Everything from A to Z ............................................................................................... 398
© 2018 Bayerische Motoren Werke

Aktiengesellschaft
Munich, Germany
Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the written consent of BMW AG, Munich.
US English ID7 X/18, 11 18 490
Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached without chlorine, suitable for recycling.
5
6
NOTES
Information .................................................................................................... 8
Owner's Manual media ............................................................................. 16
7
NOTES Information
Information
Using this Owner's Manual Additional sources of
information
Orientation
The fastest way to find information on a particu‐ Dealer’s service center
lar topic is by using the index.
A dealer’s service center will be glad to answer
An initial overview of the vehicle is provided in questions at any time.
the first chapter.
Internet
Validity of the Owner's Manual The Owner's Manual and general information on
BMW, for example on technology, are available
Production of the vehicle on the Internet: www.bmwusa.com.
At the time of production at the plant, the printed
Owner's Manual is the most current resource. Integrated Owner's Manual in the
Due to updates after the editorial deadline, differ‐
vehicle
ences may exist between the printed Owner's
Manual and the Integrated Owner's Manual in The Integrated Owner's Manual specifically de‐
the vehicle. scribes features and functions found in the vehi‐
cle. The Integrated Owner's Manual can be dis‐
Notes on updates can be found in the appendix
played on the Control Display. Additional
of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehicle.
information, refer to page 16.
After a software update in the

BMW Driver’s Guide App
vehicle
The BMW Driver's Guide app specifically de‐
After a vehicle software update – for example, a
scribes features and functions found in the vehi‐
Remote Software Upgrade – the Integrated
cle. The app can be displayed on smartphones
Owner's Manual for the vehicle will contain up‐
and tablets.
dated information.
BMW Driver’s Guide Web

Owner's Manual for Navigation,
Driver’s Guide Web shows the most suitable in‐
Entertainment, Communication
formation for the selected vehicle. If possible,
The Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertain‐ only equipment and functions that are actually in‐
ment, and Communication can be obtained as stalled in the vehicle will be explained. Driver’s
printed book from the service center. Guide Web can be displayed in any current
The topics are also discussed in the Integrated browser.
Owner's Manual in the vehicle.
8
Information NOTES
Symbols and displays Vehicle features and

options
Symbols in the Owner's Manual
This Owner's Manual describes all models and
Symbol Meaning all standard, country-specific and optional equip‐
ment that is offered in the model series. There‐
Precautions that must be followed in
fore, this Owner's Manual also describes and il‐
order to avoid the possibility of injury
lustrates features and functions that are not
to yourself and to others as well as
available in a vehicle, for example because of the
serious damage to the vehicle.
selected optional features or the country-specific
Measures that can be taken to help version.
protect the environment. This also applies to safety-related functions and
systems.
"..." Texts in vehicle used to select
individual functions. When using these functions and systems, the
applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
›...‹ Verbal instructions to use with the served.
voice activation system.
For any options and equipment not described in
››...‹‹ Responses generated by the voice this Owner's Manual, refer to the Supplementary
activation system. Owner's Manuals.
Your BMW dealer’s service center is happy to
Action steps answer any questions that you may have about
the features and options applicable to your vehi‐
Action steps to be carried out are presented as
cle.
numbered list. The steps must be carried out in
the defined order.
1. First action step. Status of the Owner's

2. Second action step. Manual
Enumerations Basic information
Enumerations without mandatory order or alter‐
The manufacturer of your vehicle pursues a pol‐
native possibilities are presented as list with bul‐
icy of constant development that is conceived to
let points.
ensure that our vehicles continue to embody the
▷ First possibility. highest quality and safety standards. In rare
▷ Second possibility. cases, therefore, the features described in this
Owner's Manual may differ from those in your
Symbols on vehicle components vehicle.
This symbol on a vehicle component

indicates that further information on the
Validity of the Owner's Manual
component is available in the Owner's Manual.
Production of the vehicle
Owner's Manual is the most current resource.
Due to updates after the editorial deadline, differ‐
9
NOTES Information
ences may exist between the printed Owner's Maintenance and repairs
Manual and the Integrated Owner's Manual in
the vehicle.
WARNING
of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehicle. Improperly performed work on the vehicle paint
can lead to a failure or malfunction of the radar
After a software update in the sensors and thereby result in a safety risk.
There is a risk of accidents or risk of damage to
vehicle
property. Have paintwork or paintwork repairs
After a vehicle software update – for example, a on bumpers of vehicles with radar sensors per‐
Remote Software Upgrade – the Integrated formed by a dealer’s service center or another
Owner's Manual for the vehicle will contain up‐ qualified service center or repair shop only.
dated information.
Advanced technology, e. g. the use of modern
materials and high-performance electronics, re‐
For Your Own Safety quires suitable maintenance and repair work.
The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends
Intended use that you entrust corresponding procedures to a
Follow the following when using the vehicle: BMW dealer’s service center. If you choose to
▷ Owner's Manual. use another service facility, BMW recommends
use of a facility that performs work, for instance
▷ Information on the vehicle. Do not remove maintenance and repair, according to BMW
stickers. specifications with properly trained personnel, re‐
▷ Technical vehicle data. ferred to in this Owner's Manual as "another
▷ The traffic, speed, and safety laws where the qualified service center or repair shop".
vehicle is driven. If work is performed improperly, for instance
▷ Vehicle documents and statutory documents. maintenance and repair, there is a risk of subse‐
quent damage and related safety risks.
Warranty
Your vehicle is technically configured for the op‐
Parts and accessories
erating conditions and registration requirements BMW recommends the use of parts and acces‐
applying in the country of first delivery, also sory products approved by BMW.
known as homologation. If your vehicle is to be Approved parts and accessories, and advice on
operated in a different country it might be neces‐ their use and installation are available from a
sary to adapt your vehicle to potentially differing BMW dealer's service center.
operating conditions and registration require‐ BMW parts and accessories have been tested by
ments. If your vehicle does not comply with the BMW for their safety and suitability in BMW vehi‐
homologation requirements in a certain country cles.
you may not be able to lodge warranty claims for
your vehicle there. Further information on war‐ BMW warrants genuine BMW parts and acces‐
ranty is available from a dealer’s service center. sories.
BMW does not evaluate whether each individual
product from another manufacturer can be used
with BMW vehicles without presenting a safety
hazard, even if a country-specific official approval
10
Information NOTES
was issued. BMW does not evaluate whether hicle. For more information go to
these products are suitable for BMW vehicles www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
under all usage conditions.
California Proposition 65 Service and warranty

Warning We recommend that you read this publication
thoroughly. Your vehicle is covered by the follow‐
California law requires vehicle manufacturers
ing warranties:
provide the following warning:
▷ New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
▷ Rust Perforation Limited Warranty.
WARNING
▷ Federal Emissions System Defect Warranty.
Engine exhaust and a wide variety of Automo‐
bile components and parts, including compo‐ ▷ Federal Emissions Performance Warranty.
nents found in the interior furnishings in a vehi‐ ▷ California Emission Control System Limited
cle, contain or emit chemicals known to the Warranty.
State of California to cause cancer and birth
Detailed information about these warranties is
defects and reproductive harm. In addition, cer‐
listed in the Service and Warranty Information
tain fluids contained in vehicles and certain
Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and
products of component wear contain or emit
Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models.
chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other repro‐ Your vehicle has been specifically adapted and
ductive harm. Battery posts, terminals and re‐ designed to meet the particular operating condi‐
lated accessories contain lead and lead com‐ tions and homologation requirements in your
pounds. Batteries also contain other chemicals country and continental region in order to deliver
known to the State of California to cause can‐ the full driving pleasure while the vehicle is oper‐
cer. Wash your hands after handling. Used en‐ ated under those conditions. If you wish to oper‐
gine oil contains chemicals that have caused ate your vehicle in another country or region, you
cancer in laboratory animals. Always protect may be required to adapt your vehicle to meet
your skin by washing thoroughly with soap and different prevailing operating conditions and ho‐
water. For more information go to mologation requirements. You should also be
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle. aware of any applicable warranty limitations or
exclusions for such country or region. In such
case, please contact Customer Relations for fur‐
ther information.
WARNING
Operating, servicing and maintaining a passen‐ Maintenance
ger vehicle or off-highway motor vehicle can
Maintain the vehicle regularly to sustain the road
expose you to chemicals including engine ex‐
safety, operational reliability and the New Vehicle
haust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead,
Limited Warranty.
which are known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other repro‐ Specifications for required maintenance meas‐
ductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid ures:
breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine ex‐ ▷ BMW Maintenance system.
cept as necessary, service your vehicle in a ▷ Service and Warranty Information Booklet for
well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash US models.
your hands frequently when servicing your ve‐
11
NOTES Information
▷ Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for The processed data is only processed in the ve‐
Canadian models. hicle itself and generally volatile. The data is not
If the vehicle is not maintained according to stored beyond the operating period.
these specifications, this could result in serious Electronic components, e.g. control units and ig‐
damage to the vehicle. Such damage is not cov‐ nition keys, contain components for storing tech‐
ered by the BMW New Vehicle Limited Warranty. nical information. Information about the vehicle
condition, component usage, maintenance re‐
quirements or faults can be stored temporarily or
Data memory permanently.
This information generally records the state of a
General information component, a module, a system, or the environ‐
ment, for instance:
Electronic control devices are installed in the ve‐
hicle. Electronic control units process data they ▷ Operating states of system components,
receive from vehicle sensors, self-generate or e.g., fill levels, tire inflation pressure, battery
exchange with each other. Some control units status.
are necessary for the vehicle to function safely or ▷ Malfunctions and faults in important system
provide assistance during driving, for instance components, for instance lights and brakes.
driver assistance systems. Furthermore, control ▷ Responses by the vehicle to special situa‐
devices facilitate comfort or infotainment func‐ tions such as airbag deployment or engage‐
tions. ment of the driving stability control systems.
Information about stored or exchanged data can ▷ Information on vehicle-damaging events.
be requested from the manufacturer of the vehi‐
cle, in a separate booklet, for example. The data is required to perform the control de‐
vice functions. Furthermore, it also serves to rec‐
ognize and correct malfunctions, and helps the
Personal reference vehicle manufacturer to optimize vehicle func‐
Each vehicle is marked with a unique vehicle tions.
identification number. Depending on the country,
The majority of this data is transient and is only
the vehicle owner can be identified with the vehi‐
processed within the vehicle itself. Only a small
cle identification number, license plate and corre‐
share of the data is stored event-related in event
sponding authorities. In addition, there are other
or fault memories.
options to track data collected in the vehicle to
the driver or vehicle owner, e.g. via the Connec‐ When servicing, for instance during repairs, serv‐
tedDrive account that is used. ice processes, warranty cases, and quality assur‐
ance measures, this technical information can be
read out from the vehicle together with the vehi‐
Operating data in the vehicle
cle identification number.
Control units process data to operate the vehicle.
A dealer’s service center or another qualified
For example, this includes: service center or repair shop can read out the in‐
▷ Status messages for the vehicle and its indi‐ formation. The socket for OBD Onboard Diagno‐
vidual components, e.g., wheel rotational sis required by law in the vehicle is used to read
speed, wheel speed, deceleration, transverse out the data.
acceleration, engaged safety belt indicator. The data is collected, processed, and used by
▷ Ambient conditions, e.g., temperature, rain the relevant organizations in the service network.
sensor signals. The data documents technical conditions of the
12
Information NOTES
vehicle, helps with the identification of the fault, MP3 player. If this data is stored in the vehicle, it
compliance with warranty obligations and quality can be deleted at any time.
improvement. This data is only transmitted to third parties upon
Furthermore, the manufacturer has product personal request as part of the use of online
monitoring duties to meet in line with product lia‐ services. The transmission depends on the se‐
bility law. To fulfill these duties, the vehicle man‐ lected settings for the use of the services.
ufacturer needs technical data from the vehicle.
The data from the vehicle can also be used to Incorporation of mobile end devices
check customer claims for warranty and guar‐ Depending on the vehicle equipment, mobile de‐
anty. vices connected to the vehicle, for instance
Fault and event memories in the vehicle can be smartphones, can be controlled via the vehicle
reset when a dealer’s service center or another control elements.
qualified service center or repair shop performs The sound and picture from the mobile device
repair or servicing work. can be played back and displayed through the
multimedia system. Certain information is trans‐
Data entry and data transfer into ferred to the mobile device at the same time. De‐
the vehicle pending on the type of incorporation, this in‐
cludes, for instance position data and other
General information general vehicle information. This optimizes the
Depending on the vehicle equipment, comfort way in which selected apps, for instance naviga‐
and individual settings can be stored in the vehi‐ tion or music playback, work.
cle and modified or reset at any time. There is no further interaction between the mo‐
For example, this includes: bile device and the vehicle, for instance active
access to vehicle data.
▷ Settings for the seat and steering wheel posi‐
tions. How the data will be processed further is deter‐
mined by the provider of the particular app being
▷ Suspension and climate control settings. used. The extent of the possible settings de‐
If necessary, data can be transferred to the en‐ pends on the respective app and the operating
tertainment and communication system of the system of the mobile device.
vehicle, e.g. via smartphone.
This includes the following depending on the re‐ Services
spective equipment:
▷ Multimedia data such as music, films or pho‐ General information
tos for playback in an integrated multimedia If the vehicle has a wireless network connection,
system. this enables data to be exchanged between the
▷ Address book data for use in conjunction with vehicle and other systems. The wireless network
an integrated hands-free system or an connection is realized via an in-vehicle transmit‐
integrated navigation system. ter and receiver unit or via personal mobile devi‐
ces brought into the vehicle, for instance smart‐
▷ Entered navigation destinations.
phones. This wireless network connection
▷ Data on the use of Internet services. enables 'online functions' to be used. These in‐
This data can be stored locally in the vehicle or is clude online services and apps supplied by the
found on a device that has been connected to vehicle manufacturer or by other providers.
the vehicle, e.g., a smartphone, USB stick or
13
NOTES Information
Services from the vehicle The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record
manufacturer such data as:
Where online services from the vehicle manufac‐ ▷ How various systems in your vehicle were op‐
turer are concerned, the corresponding functions erating.
are described in the appropriate place, for in‐ ▷ Whether or not the driver and passenger
stance the Owner's Manual or manufacturer's safety belts were fastened.
website. The relevant legal information pertaining ▷ How far, if at all, the driver was depressing the
to data protection is provided there too. Personal accelerator and/or brake pedal.
data may be used to perform online services.
Data is exchanged over a secure connection, ▷ How fast the vehicle was traveling.
for instance with the IT systems of the vehicle This data can help provide a better understand‐
manufacturer intended for this purpose. ing of the circumstances in which crashes and
Any collection, processing, and use of personal injuries occur.
data above and beyond that needed to provide EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only if a
the services must always be based on a legal nontrivial crash situation occurs; no data is re‐
permission, contractual arrangement or consent. corded by the EDR under normal driving condi‐
It is also possible to activate or deactivate the tions and no personal data, for instance name,
data connection as a whole. That is, with the ex‐ gender, age, and crash location, are recorded.
ception of functions and services required by law However, other parties, such as law enforce‐
such as Assist systems. ment, could combine the EDR data with the type
of personally identifying data routinely acquired
Services from other providers during a crash investigation.
When using online services from other providers, To read data recorded by an EDR, special equip‐
these services are the responsibility of the rele‐ ment is required, and access to the vehicle or the
vant provider and subject to their data privacy EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manu‐
conditions and terms of use. The vehicle manu‐ facturer, other parties, such as law enforcement,
facturer has no influence on the content ex‐ that have the special equipment, can read the in‐
changed during this process. Information on the formation if they have access to the vehicle or
way in which personal data is collected and used the EDR.
in relation to services from third parties, the
scope of such data, and its purpose, can be ob‐
tained from the relevant service provider.
Event Data Recorder EDR

This vehicle is equipped with an event data re‐
corder EDR. The main purpose of an EDR is to
record, in certain crash or near crash-like situa‐
tions, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a
road obstacle, data that will assist in understand‐
ing how a vehicle’s systems performed. The
EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle
dynamics and safety systems for a short period
of time, typically 30 seconds or less.
14
Information NOTES
Vehicle identification If you believe that your vehicle has a defect

which could cause a crash or could cause injury
number or death, you should immediately inform the Na‐
tional Highway Traffic Safety Administration
Engine compartment NHTSA, in addition to notifying BMW of North
America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, Westwood, New
Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone
1-800-831-1117.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a
recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become involved in in‐
dividual problems between you, your dealer, or
BMW of North America, LLC.
The vehicle identification number can be found
in the engine compartment, on the right-hand To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
side of the vehicle. Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov;
or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh
Windshield Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590. You can
also obtain other information about motor vehicle
safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
For Canadian customers

Canadian customers who wish to report a safety-
related defect to Transport Canada, Defect In‐
vestigations and Recalls, may call the toll-free
hotline 1-800-333-0510. You can also obtain
other information about motor vehicle safety
The vehicle identification number can also be from http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety.
found behind the windshield.
iDrive
It is also possible to display the vehicle identifica‐
tion number via iDrive, refer to page 69.
Reporting safety defects

For US customers
The following only applies to vehicles owned and
operated in the US.
15
NOTES Owner's Manual media
Owner's Manual media

Vehicle features and After a software update in the
vehicle
options After a vehicle software update – for example, a
Remote Software Upgrade – the Integrated
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
Owner's Manual for the vehicle will contain up‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
dated information.
It also describes features and functions that are
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
Printed Owner's Manual
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ Concept
served. The printed Owner's Manual describes all stand‐
ard, country-specific, and optional features of‐
fered with the series.
General information
General information
Media at a glance The Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertain‐
You can use various media formats to call up the ment, and Communication can be obtained as
content in the Owner's Manual. The following printed book from the service center.
Owner's Manual media formats are available:
▷ Printed Owner's Manual, refer to page 16. Supplementary Owner's Manuals
▷ Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle, re‐ Also follow the instructions of the Supplementary
fer to page 16. Owner's Manuals, which are included in addition
to the onboard literature.
Validity of the Owner's Manual
Production of the vehicle Integrated Owner's Manual

At the time of production at the plant, the printed in the vehicle
Due to updates after the editorial deadline, differ‐ Concept
ences may exist between the printed Owner's
The Integrated Owner's Manual specifically de‐
Manual and the Integrated Owner's Manual in
scribes features and functions found in the vehi‐
the vehicle.
cle.
The Integrated Owner's Manual can be displayed
of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehicle.
on the Control Display.
16
Owner's Manual media NOTES
Selecting the Owner's Manual 3. Select the desired page in the Owner's
Manual.
1. Press the button.
4. Press the button again to return to last
2. "CAR"
displayed function.
3. "Owner's Manual"
4. Select the required method of accessing the 5. Press the button to return to the page
contents. of the Owner's Manual displayed last.
To alternate continuously between the last dis‐
Scrolling through the owner's played function and the last displayed page of
manual the Owner's Manual, repeat steps 4 & 5. Opens
Turn the Controller, until the next or previous a new display every time.
contents are displayed.
Programmable memory buttons
Context help
General information
General information The jumps into the Owner's Manual can be
The section of the Owner's Manual relating to stored on the programmable memory buttons,
the function that is currently selected can be dis‐ refer to page 48, and called up directly.
played directly.
Storing
Opening via iDrive 1. Select the desired entry point via iDrive:
Change directly to the Options menu from the ▷ "Keyword search"
function on the Control Display: ▷ "Picture search"
▷ "Quick reference"
▷ "User help"
2. "Owner's Manual"
▷ "Topics"
Opening when a Check Control ▷ "Quick link"

message is displayed
2. Press desired programmable mem‐
Directly from the Check Control message on the ory button and hold for more than 2 seconds.
Control Display:
"Owner's Manual" Executing
Press the corresponding button.
Changing between a function and
the Owner's Manual The owner's manual is directly dis‐
played at the selected entry point.
To switch from a function, for instance radio, to
the Owner's Manual on the Control Display and
to alternate between the two displays:

2. "Owner's Manual"
17
18
QUICK REFERENCE
Entering ....................................................................................................... 20
Set-up and use ........................................................................................... 24
In transit ....................................................................................................... 28
19
QUICK REFERENCE Entering
Entering
Opening and closing 2. Press the button on the remote control.
All vehicle access points are locked.
Buttons on the remote control
Buttons for the central locking
system
Overview
1 Unlocking
2 Locking
3 Open tailgate
4 Press and hold or press three times in quick
succession: panic mode Buttons for the central locking system.
Press briefly: headlight courtesy delay feature
Locking
Unlocking the vehicle Pressing the button locks the vehicle if
the front doors are closed.
Press the button on the remote control.
The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.
Depending on the settings, either only the driv‐
er's door or all vehicle access points are un‐ Unlocking
locked.
Pressing the button unlocks the vehicle.
If only the driver's door is unlocked, press the
button on the remote control again to unlock the
other vehicle access points. Panic mode
Press and hold the button on the re‐ You can trigger the alarm system if you find your‐
mote control after unlocking. self in a dangerous situation.
The windows and the glass sunroof are opened, ▷ Press the button on the remote con‐
as long as the button on the remote control is trol and hold for at least 3 seconds.
pressed. ▷ Briefly press the button on the remote control
three times in succession.
Locking the vehicle
To switch off the alarm: press any button.
1. Close the driver's door.
20
Entering QUICK REFERENCE
Comfort Access Opening and closing the tailgate

with no-touch activation
Concept
The vehicle can be accessed without activating Concept
the remote control. The tailgate can be opened and closed with no-
All you need to do is to have the remote control touch activation using the remote control you are
with you, such as in your pants pocket. carrying.
The vehicle automatically detects the remote Performing the foot movement
control when it is in close proximity or in the car's
interior. 1. Stand in the middle behind the vehicle at ap‐
prox. one arm's length away from the rear of
the vehicle.
Unlocking the vehicle
2. Wave a foot under the vehicle in the direction
of travel and immediately pull it back. With
this movement, the leg must pass through
the ranges of both sensors.
Grasp the handle of a vehicle door completely.
Locking the vehicle
Tailgate
Opening
Touch the grooved surface on the handle of a

closed vehicle door with your finger for approx.
1 second without grasping the door handle.
▷ Unlock the vehicle and then press the button

on the outside of the tailgate.
▷ Press and hold the button on the re‐

mote control for approx. 1 second.
21
QUICK REFERENCE Entering
With Comfort Access: Depending on the set‐ Several lights indicate function checks and light
tings, the lower tailgate may also be opened. up only temporarily when standby state or
standby state are activated.
Closing
1. Without Comfort Access: closing the lower Driver's door
tailgate manually.
With Comfort Access: the lower tailgate will
be closed automatically with the upper tail‐
gate.
2. Press the button on the inside of the upper
tailgate.
1 Safety switch
Displays and control 2 Power windows
elements 3 Central locking system
4 Exterior mirrors
In the vicinity of the steering 5 Seats, comfort features
wheel 6 Opening/closing the tailgate
Switch console
1 Light switch element

2 Turn signal indicator, high beams
3 Instrument cluster 1 Selector lever
4 Wipers 2 Controller
3 Parking brake, Automatic Hold
Indicator/warning lights 4 Driving Dynamics Control
5 Start/Stop button
Instrument cluster
6 Assistance systems
The indicator/warning lights can light up in a vari‐
ety of combinations and colors.
22
Entering QUICK REFERENCE
iDrive If no other commands are possible, operate the

function via iDrive.
Concept
Terminating the voice activation system
iDrive includes a large number of functions.
These functions can be operated via the Control‐ Press the button on the steering wheel
ler and, depending on the equipment version, via or ›Cancel‹.
touchscreen, voice activation system or gesture
control.
Buttons on the Controller
Button Function
Opens the main menu.
Open the Apps menu.
Open the Communication menu.
Open the Media/Radio menu.
Open destination input menu for navi‐

gation.
Open navigation map.
Open the previous display.
Open the Options menu.
Voice activation
Activating the voice activation system
1. Press the button on the steering

wheel.
2. Wait for the signal.
3. Say the command.
The symbol on the Control Display indi‐
cates that voice activation system is ac‐
tive.
23
QUICK REFERENCE Set-up and use
Set-up and use

Seats, mirrors, and steering Distance to back of head
wheel
Electrically adjustable seats
▷ Back: press the button and push the head re‐

straint toward the rear.
▷ Forward: pull the head restraint toward the
front.
1 Backrest width
2 Thigh support Side extensions
3 Forward/backward, height, seat tilt
4 Upper backrest
5 Backrest tilt, head restraint
6 Lumbar support
Adjusting the head restraint
Height
Fold the side extensions forward to increase lat‐
eral support.
Push switch up or down.
24
Set-up and use QUICK REFERENCE
Adjusting the exterior mirrors Storing

1. Set the desired position.
2. Press button on the door. The writ‐

ing on the button lights up.
3. Press selected button 1 or 2 at the door while
the writing is lit. A signal sounds.
Calling up settings
Press selected button 1 or 2.
1 Settings
2 Selecting a mirror, Automatic Curb Monitor
3 Folding in and out
Infotainment
Radio
Adjusting the steering wheel
Electrical steering wheel adjustment
1 Changing the entertainment source

2 Sound output on/off, volume
Move the steering wheel to the preferred height 3 Programmable memory buttons
and angle to suit your seating position by press‐ 4 Change station/track
ing the switch. 5 Waveband/satellite radio
Memory function Navigation destination entry

Concept Entering a destination via quick
The following settings can be stored and, if nec‐ search
essary, retrieved using the memory function:
▷ Seat position. 1. Press the button on the Controller.
▷ Exterior mirror position. 2. "Where to?"
▷ Steering wheel position. 3. Enter at least two letters or characters.
▷ Height of the Head-up Display. The search term may be completed automat‐
ically in gray print.
25
QUICK REFERENCE Set-up and use
Press or move the controller up to apply the The device is connected and displayed in the
suggested search term. device list.
4. Select the symbol, if needed.
Results are displayed in a list. Using the phone
5. "Search location": select search location.
Accepting a call
6. Move the Controller to the right.
Depending on the equipment, incoming calls can
7. Select desired destination. be answered in several ways.
▷ Via iDrive:
Connecting a mobile phone
"Accept"
General information ▷ Press the button on the steering

wheel.
After the mobile phone is connected once to the
vehicle, the mobile phone can be operated using ▷ Via the selection list in the instrument cluster:
iDrive, the steering wheel buttons, voice activa‐ Use the thumbwheel on the steering wheel to
tion, and gestures. select: "Accept"
▷ Via touch screen: tap on the corresponding
Connecting the mobile phone via entry on the Control Display.
Bluetooth ▷ Via gestures: point the index finger into the
Via iDrive: direction of the Control Display.
1. "COM"
Dialing a number
2. If necessary, select the following setting:
"Telephone" Via iDrive:
3. "Connect new phone" 1. "COM"

4. To perform additional steps on the mobile 2. "Dial number"
phone, refer to the mobile phone owner's 3. Enter the numbers.
manual: e.g., search for or connect the Blue‐
4. Select the symbol. The connection is es‐
tooth device or a new device.
tablished via the mobile phone to which this
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle appears function has been assigned.
on the mobile phone display. Select the Blue‐
If connection is to be set up via the additional
tooth name of the vehicle.
phone:
5. Depending on the mobile device, a control
number is displayed or the control number
must be entered.
2. "Call via"
▷ Compare the control number displayed
on the Control Display with the control
number on the display of the device. Apple CarPlay preparation
Confirm the control number on the device
Concept
and on the Control Display.
CarPlay allows certain functions of a compatible
▷ Enter and confirm the same control num‐
Apple iPhone to be used via Siri voice operation
ber on the device and via iDrive.
and iDrive.
26
Set-up and use QUICK REFERENCE
Functional requirements
▷ Compatible iPhone.
iPhone 5 or later with iOS 7.1 or later.
▷ Corresponding mobile wireless contract.
▷ Bluetooth, WiFi, and Siri voice operation are
activated on the iPhone.
Switching on Bluetooth and CarPlay

Via iDrive:
1. "COM"
2. "Mobile devices"
4. "Settings"
5. Select the following setting:
"Apple CarPlay"
6. Activate the function.
Pairing iPhone with CarPlay

Pair iPhone via Bluetooth with the vehicle.
Select CarPlay as the function:
"Apple CarPlay"
The iPhone is connected to the vehicle and dis‐
played in the device list.
27
QUICK REFERENCE In transit
In transit
Driving Releasing
With drive-ready state switched on:
Drive-ready state Press the switch while stepping on the
brake pedal or selector lever position P is set.
Switching on drive-ready state The LED and indicator light go out.
▷ Depress the brake pedal. The parking brake is released.
▷ Press the Start/Stop button.
Parking
The parking brake is automatically set if the vehi‐
cle is being held by Automatic Hold and the
Switching off drive-ready state drive-ready state is switched off or the vehicle is
exited.
Steptronic transmission:
1. Engage selector lever position P with the ve‐ Steptronic transmission

hicle stopped.
2. Press the Start/Stop button. Engaging selector lever position D,
The engine is switched off. N, R
3. Set the parking brake.
Auto Start/Stop function

The Auto Start/Stop function switches the en‐
gine off automatically while stationary to save
fuel. The engine starts automatically under the
following preconditions:
▷ By releasing the brake pedal. ▷ Drive mode D.
▷ When Automatic Hold is activated: step on ▷ Neutral N.
the accelerator pedal.
▷ Reverse R.
Parking brake With the driver's safety belt fastened, briefly push
the selector lever in the desired direction, past a
resistance point, if needed. The selector lever re‐
Setting
turns to the center position in each case.
Pull the switch. To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you
The LED and indicator light light up. select a drive mode or reverse, maintain pressure
on the brake pedal until you are ready to start.
28
In transit QUICK REFERENCE
A selector lever lock prevents the inadvertent Steptronic transmission, Sport

shifting to selector lever position R or the inad‐ program and manual mode
vertent shifting from selector lever position P.
Engage selector lever position R only when the
vehicle is stationary.
Releasing the selector lever lock
Activate the sport program/manual mode:

Press the selector lever to the left out of selector
lever position D.
Manual mode:
▷ To shift down: press the selector lever for‐
Press the button. ward.
▷ To shift up: pull the selector lever rearwards.
Engaging P
End the sport program/manual mode:
Engage selector lever position P only when the
vehicle is stationary. Push the selector lever to the right.
High beams, headlight flasher,

turn signal
High beams, headlight flasher
Press button P.
Push the lever forward or pull it backward.

▷ High beams on, arrow 1.
The high beams light up when the low beams
are switched on.
▷ High beams off/headlight flasher, arrow 2.
29
Turn signal Symbol Function
Instrument lighting.
Right roadside parking light.
Left roadside parking light.
▷ On: press the lever past the resistance point.

▷ Off: press the lever past the resistance point
Washer/wiper system
in the opposite direction.
Switching the wipers on/off and
▷ Triple turn signal activation: lightly tap the
brief wipe
lever up or down.
▷ Brief signaling: press the lever to the resist‐ Switching on
ance point and hold it there for as long as you
want the turn signal to flash.
Lights and lighting
Light functions
Symbol Function
Front fog lights.

Press the lever up until the desired position is
reached.
Night vision. ▷ Resting position of the wipers: position 0.
▷ Rain sensor: position 1.
▷ Normal wiper speed: position 2.
Lights off.
▷ Fast wiper speed: position 3.
Daytime running lights.
Parking lights.
Automatic headlight control.

Adaptive light functions.
Low beams.
30
Brief wipe and switching off Adjusting the sensitivity
Press the lever down. Turn the thumbwheel on the wiper lever.
▷ Switching off: press the lever down until it
reaches its standard position. Cleaning the windshield
▷ Brief wipe: press the lever down from the
standard position.
Rain sensor
Activating/deactivating
Pull the wiper lever towards you.
Rear window wiper
Switching on
To activate: press the lever up once from its

standard position, arrow 1.
To deactivate: press the lever back into the
standard position.
Turn the outer switch upward.

▷ Resting position of the wiper, position 0.
▷ Intermittent mode, arrow 1. When reverse
gear is engaged, the system switches to con‐
tinuous operation.
31
Clean the rear window Button Function

Turn the outer switch in the desired direction.
Seat and armrest heating.
▷ In resting position: turn the switch downward,
arrow 3. The switch automatically returns to
its idle position when released. Open the Climate menu.
▷ In intermittent mode: turn the switch further, For the following settings, for in‐
arrow 2. The switch automatically returns to stance: upper body temperature
its interval position when released. adjustment, parked-car ventila‐
tion.
Climate control
Refueling
Automatic climate control
Refueling
Button Function
Fuel cap
Temperature.
1. Press the rear edge of the fuel filler flap to
open it.
Climate control operation.
Maximum cooling.
AUTO program.
Recirculated-air mode.
Air flow, manual.

2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise.
Air distribution, manual. 3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket attached to
the fuel filler flap.
Defrost and defog the wind‐ Gasoline

shield.
For the best fuel efficiency, the gasoline should
Rear window defroster. be sulfur-free or very low in sulfur content.
Fuels that are marked on the gas pump as con‐
Active seat ventilation. taining metal must not be used.
Wheels and tires
Tire inflation pressure specifications

The tire inflation pressure specifications can be
found in the tire inflation pressure table in the
printed Owner's Manual.
32
After correcting the tire inflation Adding engine oil

pressure
With runflat tires: General information
Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor. Safely park the vehicle and switch off drive-ready
state before adding engine oil.
With Tire Pressure Monitor TPM:
With tires that cannot be found in the tire pres‐ Adding
sure values on the Control Display, reset the Tire
Pressure Monitor TPM.
Checking the tire inflation pressure

Regularly check the tire inflation pressure and
correct it as needed:
▷ At least twice a month.
▷ Before embarking on an extended trip.
Cleaning the wheels Only add engine oil when the message is dis‐
The friction during hard braking may produce played in the instrument cluster.
brake dust and make the rims dirty. Brake dust
can be removed by cleaning the rims. BMW rec‐ Observe the quantity to be added in the mes‐
ommends using vehicle care and cleaning prod‐ sage.
ucts from BMW. Take care not to add too much engine oil.
Observe recommended engine oil types.
Electronic oil measurement
Functional requirements Providing assistance

A current measured value is available after ap‐
prox. 30 minutes of normal driving. Hazard warning flashers
Displaying the engine oil level

Via iDrive:
1. "CAR"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Engine oil level"
Different messages appear on the Control Dis‐
play depending on the engine oil level. Pay atten‐
tion to these messages. The button is located in the center console.
33
Breakdown assistance
BMW Roadside Assistance

Via iDrive:
1. "COM"
2. "BMW Assist"
3. If necessary, "BMW Roadside Assistance"
A voice connection is established.
ConnectedDrive
Concierge service
The BMW Assist Concierge service offers infor‐
mation on events, gas stations or hotels, and
provides phone numbers and addresses. Many
hotels can be booked directly by the BMW Con‐
cierge service. The Concierge service is part of
the optional BMW Assist Response Center.
Via iDrive:
1. "COM"
2. "BMW Assist"
3. If necessary, "Concierge"
A voice connection to the Concierge service is
established.
Teleservices
Teleservices are services that help to maintain
vehicle mobility.
Teleservices can comprise the following serv‐
ices:
▷ BMW Roadside Assistance.
▷ BMW Accident Assistance.
▷ Service Request.
▷ Manual Service Request.
▷ Automatic Service Request.
▷ Teleservice Report.
▷ Teleservice Battery Guard.
▷ Your dealer’s service center.
34
35
36
CONTROLS
Cockpit ........................................................................................................ 38
Operating state of the vehicle .................................................................. 43
iDrive ............................................................................................................ 46
BMW Remote Software Upgrade ........................................................... 60
General Settings ........................................................................................ 63
Opening and closing ................................................................................. 76
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel ....................................................... 111
Transporting children safely .................................................................. 128
Driving ....................................................................................................... 133
Displays ..................................................................................................... 151
Lights ......................................................................................................... 168
Safety ........................................................................................................ 176
Driving stability control systems ........................................................... 213
Driver assistance systems ..................................................................... 219
Driving comfort ........................................................................................ 262
Climate control ......................................................................................... 269
Interior equipment ................................................................................... 287
Storage compartments .......................................................................... 295
Cargo area ................................................................................................ 301
37
CONTROLS Cockpit
Cockpit
Vehicle features and not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due
options also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
cific and optional features offered with the series. served.
In the vicinity of the steering wheel
1 Safety switch for the windows and Unlock 86

roller sunblinds 108
2 Power windows 107 Lock 86
3 Exterior mirror operation 121 5 Seating comfort features

4 Central locking system
38
Cockpit CONTROLS
Gentleman function 114 Active Cruise Control: increase dis‐

tance
Memory function 124 Active Cruise Control: reduce dis‐

tance
Massage function 125 Cruise control rocker switch

10 Instrument cluster 151
6 Opening and closing the tail‐ 11 Steering wheel buttons, right
gate 95 Selection lists 162
7 Steering column stalk, left

Volume, see Owner's Manual for
Turn signal 139
Navigation, Entertainment and
Communication 8
High beams, head‐ Voice activation system 54
light flasher 139
High-beam Assistant 171 Telephone, see Owner's Manual

for Navigation, Entertainment and
Communication 8
Widgets in the instrument clus‐
ter 152 Thumbwheel for selection lists 162
Trip data 163 12 Shift paddle, right
8 Shift paddle, left 13 Steering column stalk, right
9 Steering wheel buttons, left Wiper 140
Manual Speed Limiter 219

Rain sensor 141
Cruise control on/off 221

Clean the windshield and head‐
lights 141
Active Cruise Control on/off 223
Rear window wiper in Canadian
models 142
With steering and lane control as‐
sistant 231: Rear window wiper 142
Cruise control, distance control and
lane guidance on/off
Clean the rear window 142
Cruise control: store speed

14 Horn, entire surface
Pause or continue cruise control
39
CONTROLS Cockpit
15 Heated steering wheel 124 Automatic headlight control 168

Adaptive light functions 171
High-beam Assistant 171
16 Adjust steering wheel 123
Low beams 169
17 Glove compartment 296

Instrument lighting 173
18 Lights
Front fog lights 173
Right roadside parking light 169
Night Vision 194

Left roadside parking light 169
Light switch 168

19 Unlock hood 365
Lights off
Daytime running lights 170
Parking lights 169
40
Cockpit CONTROLS
In the vicinity of the center console
1 Control Display 49 9 Parking brake 136

2 Hazard warning system 380
Automatic Hold 137
Intelligent Safety 179
10 Driving Dynamics Control 148

3 Ventilation 274 SPORT driving mode
4 Glove compartment 295 COMFORT driving mode
5 Automatic climate control 269
6 Radio/multimedia, see Owner's Manual for ECO PRO driving mode
Navigation, Entertainment, and Communica‐
tion 8
7 Controller with buttons 49 ADAPTIVE driving mode
8 Air suspension level adjust‐
ment 262
11 Switch drive-ready state on/
xOffroad driving mode 264 off 133
HDC Hill Descent Control 216
41
CONTROLS Cockpit
12 Auto Start/Stop function 133 Surround View: Panorama

View 245
PDC Park Distance Control 237 DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐

Without Surround View: rearview trol 213
camera 242
13 Steptronic transmission selector lever 143
Surround View 245
Crossing traffic warning 259
Parking Assistant 252
In the vicinity of the roofliner
1 Emergency Request, SOS 382 4 Reading lights 174
2 Glass sunroof 108 5 Interior lights 174
3 Indicator light, front-seat passenger

airbag 179
42
Operating state of the vehicle CONTROLS
Operating state of the vehicle

Vehicle features and Safety information
options
WARNING
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and
cific and optional features offered with the series. possibly roll away. There is a risk of an accident.
It also describes features and functions that are Before exiting, secure the vehicle against roll‐
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due ing.
to the selected options or country versions. This In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ against rolling away, follow the following:
▷ Set the parking brake.
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
served. ▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
turn the front wheels in the direction of the
curb.
General information ▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
also secure the vehicle, for instance with a
Depending on the situation, the vehicle is in one wheel chock.
of the three states:
▷ Idle state.
▷ Standby state. WARNING
▷ Drive-ready state. Unattended children or animals can cause the

vehicle to move and endanger themselves and
traffic, for instance due to the following actions:
Idle state ▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
Concept ▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐
If the vehicle is in idle state, it is switched off. All dows.
power consumers are deactivated. ▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
General information There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
The vehicle is in idle state prior to opening from leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
the outside and after exiting and locking. hicle. Take the remote control with you when
exiting and lock the vehicle.
Automatic idle state

The idle state is automatically established under
the following conditions:
43
CONTROLS Operating state of the vehicle
▷ After several minutes, if no operation takes

place on the vehicle.
Standby state
▷ If the charge state of the vehicle battery is
low.
Concept
▷ Depending on the setting via iDrive, if one of When standby state is switched on, most func‐
the front doors is opened when exiting the tions can be used while the vehicle is stationary.
vehicle. Desired settings can be adjusted.
The idle state is not automatically established

while a phone call is active.
General information
The vehicle is in the standby state after the front
Establishing idle state when doors are opened from the outside.
opening the front doors

Display in the instrument cluster
Via iDrive:
OFF is displayed in the instru‐
1. "CAR" ment cluster. The drivetrain is
2. "Settings" switched off and standby state
3. "Doors/Access" switched on.
4. "Turn off vehicle after opening door"
Manual idle state Drive-ready state

To establish idle state in the vehicle after end of
trip: Concept
Switching on drive-ready state corresponds to
starting the engine.
General information
Some functions, such as DSC Dynamic Stability
Control, can only be used with drive-ready state
switched on.
Safety information
Press and hold the button until
the OFF indicator on the instru‐
ment cluster goes out. DANGER
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventilation is in‐
sufficient, harmful exhaust gases can enter into
the vehicle. The exhaust gases contain pollu‐
tants which are colorless and odorless. In en‐
closed areas, exhaust gases can also accumu‐
late outside of the vehicle. There is danger to
life. Keep the exhaust pipe free and ensure suf‐
ficient ventilation.
44
Operating state of the vehicle CONTROLS
Gasoline engine
WARNING Depending on the motorization, the full drive
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and power may not be available for approximately
possibly roll away. There is a risk of an accident. 30 seconds after starting the engine. In this case,
Before exiting, secure the vehicle against roll‐ the vehicle will not accelerate as usual.
ing.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured Display in the instrument cluster
against rolling away, follow the following: When drive-ready state is switched on, the tach‐
▷ Set the parking brake. ometer shows the current engine speed.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
turn the front wheels in the direction of the Switching off drive-ready state
curb.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, Steptronic transmission
also secure the vehicle, for instance with a 1. Engage selector lever position P with the ve‐
wheel chock. hicle stopped.
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
The engine is switched off. The vehicle
NOTICE
switches into standby state.
In the case of repeated starting attempts or re‐
peated starting in quick succession, the fuel is
not burned or is inadequately burned. The cata‐
lytic converter can overheat. There is a risk of
damage to property. Avoid repeated starting in
quick succession.
Switching on drive-ready state
Concept
Drive-ready state is switched on
via the Start/Stop button:
Steptronic transmission
1. Depress the brake pedal.
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
The ignition is activated automatically for a brief
time and is stopped as soon as the engine starts.
Most of the indicator/warning lights in the instru‐
ment cluster light up for a varied length of time.
45
CONTROLS iDrive
iDrive
Vehicle features and Input and display
options Main menu
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ General information
Menu items with access to all iDrive functions
are available on the left side of the main menu.
served.
Operating concept
Concept
Media/Radio
iDrive includes a large number of functions.
These functions can be operated via the Control‐ All functions of the entertainment system,
ler and, depending on the equipment version, via e.g., radio and TV stations, connection with ex‐
touchscreen, voice activation system or gesture ternal devices and music collection.
control.
Communication
Safety information Phone and SMS functions, e-mail and calen‐
dar and also the connection and management of
mobile devices, such as smartphones.
WARNING
Operating the integrated information systems Navigation
and communication devices while driving can Access to the navigation system, destination
distract from traffic. It is possible to lose control input and traffic bulletins. Configurable map
of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. views and other functions, such as Points of In‐
Only use the systems or devices when the traf‐ terest and areas to be avoided.
fic situation allows. As warranted, stop and use
the systems and devices while the vehicle is My Car
stationary.
Information about vehicle status and trips.
Access to the Integrated Owner's Manual and
also administration of driver profiles and range of
adjustments for vehicle and iDrive.
46
iDrive CONTROLS
Apps Activating/deactivating the

Management and access to apps and vehicle functions
functions. Additional apps can be purchased Several menu items are preceded by a check‐
from the BMW Store. box. The checkbox indicates whether the func‐
tion is activated or deactivated. Selecting the
Widgets menu item activates or deactivates the function.
The widgets are located in the right sec‐ Function is activated.
tion of the main menu. The configured widgets
Function is deactivated.
display dynamic contents, for example the navi‐
gation map, and serve as interfaces at the same
time.
Status information
General information
Letters and numbers
The status field can be found in the upper area of
Letters and numbers can be entered using the
the Control Display. Status information is dis‐
Controller, touchscreen or the voice activation
played in the form of symbols.
system. The keyboard's display changes auto‐
matically.
Radio symbols
Symbol Function
Symbol Meaning
or Change between capital and
lower-case letters. HD Radio station is being received.
Enter a blank space. Satellite radio is switched on.
Use voice activation.

Telephone symbols
Confirm entry.
Symbol Meaning
Slide the input area to the left or
right. Incoming or outgoing call.
Missed call.
Entry comparison
When entering names and addresses, the choice Signal strength of cellular network.
is narrowed down with every letter and number Network search.
and added automatically as needed.
Cellular network is not available.
Entries are continuously compared with data
stored in the vehicle. The critical charge state of the mo‐
▷ Only those letters and numbers are offered bile phone has been reached.
during entry for which data is available. Roaming is active.
▷ Destination search: place names can be en‐
tered in all languages that are available in Locating active.
iDrive. SMS text message received.
Message received.
47
CONTROLS iDrive
Symbol Meaning Settings are stored for the driver profile currently
used.
Reminder.
Sending not possible. Overview
Entertainment symbols
Symbol Meaning
Bluetooth audio.
USB audio interface.
WiFi.
1 Programmable memory buttons
Other symbols
Symbol Meaning Storing a function

A function can be stored on a programmable
Check Control message.
memory button. A button with a stored function
The sound output has been can be overwritten with another function.
switched off. 1. Select function via iDrive.
Request for the current vehicle posi‐
tion. 2. Press and hold the desired button
until the displayed bar on the Control Display
Checking the current vehicle posi‐ has loaded completely.
tion.
Driver profile. Running a function

Messages. Press the button.
Service requirements. The function will work immediately. This means,

Information. for instance that the number is dialed when a
phone number is selected.
Stop.
Displaying the key assignment
Programmable memory buttons Touch buttons with finger. Do not wear gloves or
use objects.
General information The button assignment is displayed at the top
The iDrive functions can be stored on the pro‐ edge of screen.
grammable memory buttons and called up di‐
rectly, for instance radio stations, navigation des‐
tinations, phone numbers and menu entries or
pages in the Integrated Owner's Manual.
48
iDrive CONTROLS
Delete all button assignments Safety information

All button assignments can be deleted.
1. Press and hold buttons 1 and 8 at the same NOTICE
time. Objects in the area in the front of the Control
2. "OK" Display can shift and damage the Control Dis‐
play. There is a risk of damage to property. Do
not place objects in the area in front of the
Control Display and Control Display.
Controller
Switching on/off automatically
Overview The Control Display is switched on automatically
after unlocking.
In certain situations, the Control Display is
switched off automatically, for instance if no op‐
eration is performed on the vehicle for several
minutes.
Switching on/off manually

The Control Display can also be switched off
manually.
1 Control Display with touchscreen 1. Tip the Controller up.
2 Controller with buttons and touchpad 2. "Screen off"
Press the Controller or any button on the Con‐
Control Display troller to switch it back on again.
General information Controller

To clean the Control Display, follow the care in‐
structions, refer to page 391. General information
In the case of very high temperatures on the The buttons can be used to open the menus di‐
Control Display, for instance due to intense solar rectly. The Controller can be used to select
radiation, the brightness may be reduced down menu items and enter the settings.
to complete deactivation. Once the temperature Some iDrive functions can be operated using the
is reduced, for instance through shade or air con‐ touchpad on the Controller, refer to page 52.
ditioning, the normal functions are restored.
Operation
▷ Turn to switch between menu items, for ex‐
ample.
49
CONTROLS iDrive
Button Function
Open destination input menu for navi‐

gation.
Open navigation map.
Open the previous display.
▷ Press to select a menu item, for example. Open the Options menu.
Operating with the Controller
Opening the main menu

Press the button.
▷ Tilt in four directions to switch between dis‐

plays, for example.
The main menu is displayed.

All iDrive functions can be called up via the main
menu.
Select menu
Buttons on the Controller
Select menu items
Button Function
1. Turn the Controller until the desired menu
Opens the main menu. item is highlighted.
2. Press the Controller.
Open the Apps menu.
Select widgets
Open the Communication menu. 1. Move the Controller to the right.
2. Select widgets.
Open the Media/Radio menu. 3. Press the Controller.
It is also possible to select widgets in the instru‐
ment cluster, refer to page 152.
50
iDrive CONTROLS
Adapting the menu

▷ Press the button.
Adjusting widgets The previous display opens.
The widgets can be adjusted in the main menu. ▷ Move the Controller to the right.
It is possible to create multiple pages with widg‐ New display is opened.
ets and switch between pages. The adjustments
An arrow indicates that additional displays can be
can only be performed when the car is stationary.
opened.
Via iDrive:
1. Select the desired page in the main menu. Opening the Options menu
Only the currently selected page can be ad‐ Press the button.
justed.
2. Tip the Controller up. The "Options" menu is displayed.
3. "Adjust main menu" The menu consists of various areas:
4. Select the desired adjustment: ▷ Help for the selected menu, e.g. "Help".
▷ Add new widget: "Add widget". ▷ System settings, e.g. "Control display off".
A maximum of four widgets can be dis‐ ▷ Control options for the selected main menu,
played per page. for instance for "Media/Radio".
▷ Add new page: "Add page".
▷ Delete selected page: "Delete page". Changing settings
▷ Adjust the content of the widget: select Settings, such as brightness, can be entered.
widget. Via iDrive:
5. "Done" 1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
Adjust menu contents
3. "Displays"
The display of the menus of "MEDIA", "COM"
and "NAV" can be adjusted, e.g. to remove the 4. "Control display"
entries of functions that are not used from the 5. "Brightness at night"
menu. 6. Turn the Controller until the desired setting is
1. Select the menu. displayed.
2. "Personalize menu" 7. Press the Controller.
3. Select desired menu contents to be dis‐
played. Entering letters and numbers
Input
Changing between displays
1. Turn the Controller: select letters or numbers.
After a menu item is selected, for instance
"Settings", a new display appears. 2. : confirm entry.
▷ Move the Controller to the left.
Closes the current display and shows the
previous display.
51
CONTROLS iDrive
Deleting Entering letters and numbers

Entering letters requires some practice at the be‐
Symbol Function ginning. When entering, pay attention to the fol‐
Press the Controller: delete letters or lowing:
number. ▷ The system distinguishes between upper
and lower-case letters and numbers. The en‐
Hold the Controller down: delete all
try may require switching between letters and
letters or numbers.
numbers, refer to page 46.
▷ Enter characters as they are displayed on the
Using alphabetical lists Control Display.
For alphabetical lists with more than 30 entries, ▷ Always enter associated characters, such as
the letters for which an entry exists can be dis‐ accents or periods so that the letter can be
played in a text box. clearly recognized. The set language deter‐
1. Turn the Controller to the left or right quickly. mines what input is possible. Where neces‐
sary, enter special characters via the Control‐
2. Select the first letter of the desired entry.
ler.
The first entry of the selected letter is dis‐
played in the list. Entering special characters
Operation via touchpad Input Operation
General information Delete a charac‐ Swipe to the left on the

ter. touchpad.
Some iDrive functions can be operated using the
touchpad on the Controller. Enter a blank Swipe to the right in the
space. center of the touchpad.
Selecting functions
Enter a hyphen. Swipe to the right in the up‐
Via iDrive: per area of the touchpad.
1. "CAR" Enter an under‐ Swipe to the right in the
2. "Settings" score. lower area of the touchpad.
3. "General settings"
4. "Touchpad" Using the map
5. Select desired setting: The map in the navigation system can be moved
via the touchpad.
▷ "Character input": enter letters and num‐
bers. Function Operation
▷ "Map": using the map. Move map. Swipe in the appropriate di‐
▷ "Search fields": write letters without se‐ rection.
lecting the list field.
Enlarge/shrink Drag in or out on the touch‐
▷ "Audio confirmation": pronounces entered map. pad with fingers.
letters and numbers.
Display menu. Tap once.
52
iDrive CONTROLS
Operating via touchscreen ▷ Delete selected page: tap "Delete page".

▷ Adjust content of the widget: tap center of
General information widget.
The Control Display is equipped with a touch‐ 4. Tap "Done".
screen.
You can tap on menu items and widgets. Touch Changing between displays
screen with your fingers. Do not use any objects. After a menu item is selected, a new display
opens.
Opening the main menu An arrow indicates that additional displays can be
Tap on symbol. opened.
▷ Swipe to the left.
▷ Tap arrow.
New display is opened.
Changing settings
Settings such as brightness can be changed via
the touchscreen.
Via iDrive:
The main menu is displayed. 1. "CAR"
All iDrive functions can be called up via the main 2. "Settings"
menu.
3. "Displays"
4. "Control display"
Adjusting widgets
The widgets can be adjusted in the main menu. 5. "Brightness at night"
It is possible to create multiple pages with widg‐ 6. To create the desired setting:
ets and switch between pages. The adjustments ▷ Slide in the selected field to the right or
can only be performed when the car is stationary. left, until the desired setting is displayed.
Via iDrive: ▷ , Tap on symbol.
1. Select the desired page in the main menu.
Only the currently selected page can be ad‐ Entering letters and numbers
justed.
Input
2. Tap the symbol in the main menu.
1. Touch the symbol on the touchscreen.
3. Select the desired adjustment:
A keyboard is displayed in the Control Dis‐
▷ Add new widget: Tap symbol and se‐
play.
lect desired widget.
2. Enter letters and numbers.
The requested widget will be inserted in
the relevant position. A maximum of four
widgets can be displayed per page.
▷ Delete selected widget: Tap symbol.
▷ Add new page: tap "Add page".
53
CONTROLS iDrive
Deleting Functional requirements

To enable voice command recognition, a lan‐
Symbol Function
guage must be set via iDrive that is supported by
Tapping the symbol: delete the letter the voice activation system.
or number. To set the language, refer to page 65.
Tapping and holding the symbol for
an extended period: delete all letters Activating the voice activation
or numbers. system
Using the map General information

The navigation map can be moved with the There are various methods for activating the
touchscreen. voice activation feature:
Function Operation ▷ Press the button on the steering

wheel.
Enlarge/shrink Drag in or out with the fin‐
map. gers. ▷ Say wake word ›Hello BMW‹ or a personal
wake word.
No other commands may be available. In this
Voice activation system case, operate the function via iDrive.
The voice activation can be terminated:
Concept Press the button on the steering wheel
Most functions displayed on the Control Display again or press ›Cancel‹.
can be operated by voice commands via the
voice activation system. The system supports
Button on the steering wheel
you with announcements during input.
The voice control system and the feedback it 1. Press the button on the steering
provides are not a substitute for the printed or wheel.
Integrated Owner's Manual.
2. Wait for the signal.
3. Say the command.
General information
▷ Functions that can only be used when the ve‐ The symbol on the Control Display indi‐
hicle is stationary can only be operated via cates that voice activation system is ac‐
the voice activation system to a limited ex‐ tive.
tent.
▷ The system includes a special microphone Wake word
on the driver's side and the front passenger
side. General information
▷ ›...‹ in the Owner's Manual denotes verbal in‐ Speaking the wake word ›Hello BMW‹ will start
structions to use with the voice activation the system. Immediately following, the voice acti‐
system. vation can be continued with voice commands.
1. Speak the wake word ›Hello BMW‹.
54
iDrive CONTROLS
2. Say the command. The status of the voice recognition is displayed

in the upper area of the Control Display.
Personal wake word
In addition to a preset wake word ›Hello BMW‹, a Example for function
personal wake word can be set up. The commands of the menu items are spoken
Via iDrive: just as they are selected via the Controller.
1. "CAR"
1. Press the button on the steering
2. "Settings" wheel.
3. "General settings" 2. ›Media and radio‹
4. "Language" 3. ›Presets‹
5. "Personal keyword" The stored stations are displayed on the Control
6. "Start recording" Display.
7. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis‐ The voice activation system can also be used to
play. operate most climate control functions, refer to
page 286.
Preset wake word The voice activation system can be used to enter
The preset wake word ›Hello BMW‹ can be acti‐ the destination, refer to Owner's Manual for Navi‐
vated and deactivated. A personal activation gation, Entertainment, Communication.
word that may have been set up previously will
remain active. Help on the voice activation system
Via iDrive: ▷ To have the available spoken instructions
read out loud: ›Voice commands‹.
1. "CAR"
▷ To have information on the operating princi‐
2. "Settings"
ple of the voice activation system read out
3. "General settings" loud: ›General information on voice control‹.
4. "Language" ▷ To have help for the current menu read out
5. "Activation with "Hello BMW"" loud: ›Help‹.
Possible commands Information for Emergency

Requests
General information Do not use the voice activation system to initiate
Most contents on the Control Display can be an Emergency Request. In stressful situations,
spoken as commands, e.g. menu items or list en‐ the voice and vocal pitch can change. This can
tries. Speak these list entries out loud exactly as unnecessarily delay the establishment of a
they are shown in the list. phone connection.
Say the commands, numbers, and letters Instead, use the SOS button, refer to page 382,
smoothly and with normal volume, emphasis, close to the interior mirror.
and speed.
Always say commands in the language of the
voice activation system.
55
CONTROLS iDrive
Settings 4. "Language"
5. "Speaking during voice output"
Setting the voice dialog
You can set the system to use standard dialog or Setting the language
a short version. The language to be used for voice activation and
The short version of the voice dialog plays back system announcements can be set.
short messages in abbreviated form. Via iDrive:
Via iDrive: 1. "CAR"
1. "CAR" 2. "Settings"
2. "Settings" 3. "General settings"
3. "General settings" 4. "Language"
4. "Language" 5. "System language"
5. "Speech mode" 6. Select the desired language.
6. Select the desired setting.
Adjusting the volume
Online speech processing Turn the volume button during the spoken in‐
Online speech processing provides a dictation structions until the desired volume is set.
function, a natural method of entering destina‐ ▷ The volume remains constant even if the vol‐
tions and improves the quality of voice recogni‐ ume of other audio sources is changed.
tion. To use the functions, data is transmitted to ▷ The volume is stored for the driver profile
a service provider via an encrypted connection currently used.
and stored locally there.
Via iDrive: System limits
1. "CAR" ▷ Certain noises can be detected and may lead
2. "Settings" to problems. Keep the doors, windows, and
glass sunroof closed.
▷ Noises from the front passenger or the rear
4. "Language"
seat bench can impair the system. Avoid
5. "Online speech processing" making other noise in the vehicle while
speaking.
Speaking during voice output ▷ Major language dialects can cause problems
It is possible to answer during inquiries of the with the voice recognition feature. Speak loud
voice activation system. The function can be de‐ and clear.
activated if inquiries are often undesirably inter‐
rupted, for instance due to background noise or Using the voice activation
talking.
system of the smartphone
Via iDrive:
A smartphone connected to the vehicle can be
1. "CAR" used via voice activation.
2. "Settings"
56
iDrive CONTROLS
Activate voice command response on the smart‐ The gestures that are performed underneath the
phone for this purpose. interior mirror are captured by a camera in the
roofliner.
1. Press and hold the button on the
steering wheel for approx. 3 seconds. Activating/deactivating
Voice command response is activated on the Via iDrive:
smartphone.
1. "CAR"
2. Release the button. 2. "Settings"
If activation is successful, a confirmation ap‐ 3. "General settings"

pears on the Control Display. 4. "Gesture control"
If it was not possible to activate voice command 5. "Gesture control"
response, the list of Bluetooth devices appears
on the Control Display. Settings
Via iDrive:
BMW Gesture Control 1. "CAR"

2. "Settings"
Concept 3. "General settings"
Several iDrive functions can be operated by hand 4. "Gesture control"
motion using BMW Gesture Control. 5. Select desired setting:
▷ "User help display": the possible gesture
Overview is shown on the Control Display.
▷ "Audio confirmation": an acoustic signal is
emitted once the gesture is recognized.
57
CONTROLS iDrive
Possible gestures
Gesture Operation Function
Move index finger forward and backward in Accept call.

the direction of the screen. Select a highlighted entry in a list
during voice activation.
Confirm the pop-up.
Swipe with the hand across the width of the Reject call.
Control Display in the direction of the front- Close the pop-up.
passenger side.
Terminate voice activation.
Slowly move your hand in a circular pattern Depending on the direction of move‐
with the index finger stretched out forward. ment, increase the volume or de‐
Gesture is detected after one circular motion. crease the volume.
Pinch with thumb and index finger and move Surround View: turn camera view.
hand horizontally to the right or left. This gesture can only be executed
while the vehicle is stationary.
Move stretched out index and middle finger Individually assignable gesture.
forward.
Hold your stretched out thumb to the left. Reverse Skip function.
58
iDrive CONTROLS
Gesture Operation Function
Hold your stretched out thumb to the right. Forward Skip function.
Stretch out five fingers, form a fist and stretch Individually assignable gesture.
five fingers out again.
Carrying out gestures

Perform gestures underneath the interior mirror
and next to the steering wheel.
Execute gestures clearly.
The gestures can also be executed from the
front-passenger side.
Assigning gesture individually

Via iDrive:
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
4. "Gesture control"
5. "Function assignment gesture 1" or
"Function assignment gesture 2"
System limits
Gesture recognition by the camera can be distur‐
bed by the following circumstances:
▷ The camera lens is covered.
▷ Objects are located on the interior mirror.
▷ The camera lens is dirty. Clean the camera
lenses, refer to page 390.
▷ The gesture is executed outside of the de‐
tection range.
▷ Wearing of gloves or jewelry.
▷ Smoking in the car's interior.
59
CONTROLS BMW Remote Software Upgrade
BMW Remote Software Upgrade

Vehicle features and Validity of the Owner's Manual
options Production of the vehicle
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due After a software update in the
to the selected options or country versions. This vehicle
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ After a vehicle software update – for example, a
tems. When using these functions and systems, Remote Software Upgrade – the Integrated
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ Owner's Manual for the vehicle will contain up‐
served. dated information.
Functional requirement
BMW Remote Software The use of the Remote Software Upgrade re‐
Upgrade quires an active ConnectedDrive contract.
Concept Information about the version

Remote Software Upgrade can be used to up‐
date the software of the vehicle. Remote Soft‐ General information
ware Upgrade makes new functions, functional The information about the version contains a de‐
enhancements or quality improvements availa‐ scription of the updates that are included in the
ble. Remote Software Upgrade. During the download
and after the installation has been completed
General information successfully, the information about the version
can be displayed on the Control Display. The in‐
BMW recommends performing the Remote
formation is available in the ConnectedDrive cus‐
Software Upgrade as soon as it becomes availa‐
tomer portal at any time.
ble.
The upgrade will not be installed until it was con‐ Displaying information about the
firmed on the vehicle. version
▷ The installation may take up to 20 minutes. Via iDrive:
▷ The installation can be terminated.
1. "CAR"
▷ The vehicle cannot be used during the instal‐
lation. 2. "Settings"
▷ The vehicle can be exited used during the in‐ 3. "General settings"
stallation. 4. "Remote Software Upgrade"
5. "Installed version:"
60
BMW Remote Software Upgrade CONTROLS
Safety information Via BMW Connected app

1. Download the available upgrade to the smart‐
WARNING phone in the BMW Connected app.
Unattended children or animals can cause the 2. Follow the instructions in the BMW Con‐
vehicle to move and endanger themselves and nected app.
traffic, for instance due to the following actions: 3. Establish a WiFi and Bluetooth connection
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button. between the smartphone and the vehicle.
▷ Releasing the parking brake. The data transfer of the upgrade from the
smartphone to the vehicle occurs while driv‐
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐ ing.
dows.
4. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis‐
▷ Engaging selector lever position N. play.
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not Install the upgrade
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
hicle. Take the remote control with you when General information
exiting and lock the vehicle. After the successful completion the download,
the installation will be offered after the vehicle is
parked.
Search for and download of an
Follow the instructions on the Control Display.
upgrade
After the successful completion of the upgrade,
General information booked services, for example RTTI, will be reacti‐
vated automatically while driving.
There are various options to search for and
download an upgrade:
▷ Automatic.
▷ The battery is sufficiently charged.
▷ Via iDrive.
▷ The external temperature is above
▷ Via BMW Connected app. 14 ℉/-10 ℃.
▷ Vehicle is parked in a horizontal position.
Automatic
▷ Hazard warning system is switched off.
The available data for Remote Software Upgrade
is automatically loaded into the vehicle. ▷ Transmission position P is engaged.
Via iDrive Preparing the vehicle

1. "CAR" ▷ Park the vehicle safely away from the public
road.
2. "Settings"
▷ Ensure cellular network reception so that an
error message can be sent, for example if the
4. "Remote Software Upgrade" installation is terminated.
5. "Search for upgrades" ▷ Close the windows.
6. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis‐ ▷ Close the glass sunroof.
play.
▷ Close the tailgate.
61
CONTROLS BMW Remote Software Upgrade
▷ Remove energy consuming devices, for ex‐ If the malfunction cannot be remedied, contact a
ample a mobile phone. dealer’s service center or another qualified serv‐
▷ Unhitch the trailer or load carrier. ice center or repair shop.
▷ The remote control is in the vehicle at the

start of the installation.
▷ Switch off the exterior lighting.
Additional vehicle related functional require‐
ments are shown on the Control Display.
Install the upgrade later

Via iDrive:
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
4. "Remote Software Upgrade"
5. "Start upgrade now"
Follow the instructions on the Control Dis‐
play.
Functional limitations
During the upgrade, the majority of functions are
temporarily unavailable, for example:
▷ Hazard warning system.
▷ Central locking system.
▷ Parking lights.
▷ Horn.
▷ Alarm system.
▷ Emergency Request.
▷ Power windows.
▷ Glass sunroof.
The driver's door can be locked and unlocked
from the outside using the integrated key.
Malfunction
In the event of a malfunction, follow the instruc‐
tions on the Control Display or in the BMW Con‐
nected app.
62
General Settings CONTROLS
General Settings
Vehicle features and Deleting messages
options All messages, except Check Control messages,
can be deleted from the list. Check Control mes‐
sages are displayed as long as they are relevant.
cific and optional features offered with the series. Via iDrive:
It also describes features and functions that are 1. Tip the Controller up.
2. "Notifications"
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ 3. Select desired message, e.g. SMS.
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ 4. Press the button.
served. 5. "Delete"
Settings
Messages
The following settings can be adjusted:
▷ Select the applications, from which mes‐
Concept
sages will be permitted.
The menu centrally displays all messages arriv‐
▷ All messages or a limited time period for re‐
ing in the vehicle in list form.
ceived messages.
Via iDrive:
General information
The following messages can be displayed: 1. Tip the Controller up.
▷ Traffic messages. 2. "Notifications"
▷ Check Control messages. 3. "Settings"
▷ Communication messages, for example e- 4. Move the Controller to the right.
mails, SMS text messages or reminders. 5. Select the desired setting.
▷ Service requirements messages.
The number of messages is additionally dis‐
played in the status field.
Time
The Messages menu can also be created as
Widget, refer to page 50. Setting the time zone
Via iDrive:
Retrieving messages 1. "CAR"
Via iDrive:
2. "Settings"
1. Tip the Controller up. 3. "General settings"
2. "Notifications" 4. "Date and time"
3. Select the desired message.
63
CONTROLS General Settings
5. "Time zone:" 4. "Date and time"

6. Select the desired setting. 5. "Automatic time setting"
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐ The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used. rently used.
Setting the time

Via iDrive:
Date
1. "CAR"
Setting the date
2. "Settings"
Via iDrive:
1. "CAR"
4. "Date and time"
2. "Settings"
5. "Time"
6. Turn the Controller until the desired hours are
displayed. 4. "Date and time"
7. Press the Controller. 5. "Date:"
8. Turn the Controller until the desired minutes 6. Turn the Controller until the desired day is
are displayed. displayed.
9. "OK" 7. Press the Controller.

8. Make the settings for the month and year.
Setting the time format 9. "OK"
Via iDrive:
Setting the date format
1. "CAR"
Via iDrive:
2. "Settings"
3. "General settings" 1. "CAR"
4. "Date and time" 2. "Settings"
5. "Time format:" 3. "General settings"
6. Select the desired setting. 4. "Date and time"
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐ 5. "Date format:"
rently used. 6. Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
Automatic time setting rently used.
Depending on your vehicle's optional features,
the time, date and, if needed, the time zone are
updated automatically.
Via iDrive:
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
64
Language Trip data settings

Setting the language Concept
Via iDrive: The intervals in which the trip data, refer to
page 163, will be reset can be configured.
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings" Resetting trip data
3. "General settings" 1. "CAR"
4. "Language:" 2. "Settings"
5. "System language" 3. "General settings"
6. Select the desired setting. 4. "Reset trip data"
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐ 5. Select the desired setting.
rently used.
Setting the voice dialog Speed warning

Voice dialog for the voice activation system, refer
to page 56. Concept
A speed limit can be set that when reached will
Setting the units of cause a warning to be issued.
measurement General information

The warning is repeated if the vehicle speed ex‐
Depending on the country version, you can set
ceeds the set speed limit again, after it has drop‐
the units of measurement for some values, for in‐
ped below it by 3 mph/5 km/h.
stance consumption, distances, and tempera‐
ture.
Configuring the speed limit
Via iDrive:
warning
1. "CAR"
Via iDrive:
2. "Settings"
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
4. "Units"
5. Select the desired menu item.
4. "Speed warning"
5. "Warning at:"
rently used. 6. Turn the Controller until the desired speed is
displayed.
65
Activating/deactivating the 4. "Driver Attention Camera"

speed warning 5. Select the desired setting.
Via iDrive:
System limits
1. "CAR"
The Driver Attention Camera may not be fully
2. "Settings" functional in the following situations:
3. "General settings" ▷ When the Driver Attention Camera is covered
4. "Speed warning" by the steering wheel rim.
5. "Speed warning" ▷ When the driver is wearing infrared imperme‐
able sunglasses.
Setting your current speed as
the speed warning
Via iDrive:
popup windows
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings" For some functions, popup windows are dis‐
3. "General settings" played automatically on the Control Display.
Some of these popup windows can be activated
4. "Speed warning"
or deactivated.
5. "Select current speed"
Via iDrive:
1. "CAR"
Driver Attention Camera 2. "Settings"
Concept 4. "Pop-ups"
A camera that monitors driver activity is located
in the instrument cluster. The camera evaluates
the head position and eye opening and uses the The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
data to analyze the attention of the driver. This rently used.
system supports various vehicle assistance sys‐
tems, e.g.:
▷ Alertness assistant, refer to page 211.
Activating/deactivating the
▷ Steering and lane control assistant with As‐
display of the current
sisted Driving Plus, refer to page 231. vehicle position
Position in the instrument cluster, refer to
page 151. Concept
If vehicle location has been activated, the current
Activating/deactivating vehicle position can be displayed in the BMW
Via iDrive: Connected app or in the ConnectedDrive cus‐
tomer portal.
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
66
Activating/deactivating Only make these settings while stationary.

Via iDrive:
1. "CAR" Follow the instructions on the Control Display.
2. "Settings" Via iDrive:
1. "CAR"
4. "Vehicle tracking"
2. "Settings"
4. "Data privacy"
Control Display 5. "Agree to everything and activate"
All services and functions that are relevant for
Brightness data protection will be activated or deacti‐
Via iDrive: vated.
1. "CAR" Configuring the data transfer

2. "Settings" The data transfer can be configured individually
3. "Displays" for separate services.
4. "Control display" Via iDrive:
5. "Brightness at night" 1. "CAR"
6. Turn the Controller until the desired bright‐ 2. "Settings"
ness is set.
4. "Data privacy"
5. "Manual configuration"
rently used.
Depending on the light conditions, the bright‐
ness settings may not be clearly visible.
Deleting personal data in the
vehicle
Data protection
Concept
Data transfer Depending on the usage, the vehicle stores per‐
sonal data, such as stored radio stations. This
Concept personal data can be permanently deleted using
iDrive.
The vehicle offers different services, whose use
requires a data transfer to BMW or a service pro‐
vider. The data transfer can be deactivated for
General information
some services. Depending on the equipment package, the fol‐
lowing data can be deleted:
General information ▷ Driver profile settings.
When the data transfer is deactivated, the re‐ ▷ Stored radio stations.
spective service cannot be used.
67
▷ Stored programmable memory buttons. Function Connec‐

▷ Travel and Onboard Computer information. tion type
▷ Music hard disk. Making calls via the hands-free Bluetooth.
▷ Navigation, for instance stored destinations. system.
▷ Phone book. Using phone functions via iDrive
▷ Online data, for instance Favorites, cookies. or touchscreen.
▷ Office data, for instance voice notes. Other functions, e.g. Contacts or
SMS.
▷ Login accounts.
Altogether, the deletion of the data can take up Playing music from the smart‐ Bluetooth or
to 15 minutes. phone or the audio player. USB.
USB storage device: USB.

Playing music.
Data can only be deleted while stationary.
Playing videos from the smart‐ USB.
Deleting data phone or the USB storage de‐
vice.
The personal data in the vehicle will be deleted
when the vehicle is reset to the factory settings. Using the vehicle Internet ac‐ WiFi hotspot
Reset vehicle to factory settings, refer to cess. via WiFi.
page 75. Use Apple CarPlay apps via Bluetooth
iDrive and voice operation. and WiFi.
Connecting mobile devices Screen Mirroring: WiFi.

to the vehicle Showing the smartphone display
on the Control Display.
Concept
The following connection types require one-time
Various connection types are available for using pairing with the vehicle:
mobile devices in the vehicle. The connection
▷ Bluetooth.
type to select depends on the mobile device and
the desired function. ▷ WiFi hotspot.
▷ Apple CarPlay.
General information ▷ Screen Mirroring.
The following overview shows possible functions Paired devices are automatically recognized later
and the suitable connection types for them. The on and connected to the vehicle.
scope of functions depends on the mobile de‐
vice.
68
Safety information Bluetooth connection

WARNING Functional requirements
Operating the integrated information systems ▷ Compatible device, refer to page 69, with
and communication devices while driving can Bluetooth interface.
distract from traffic. It is possible to lose control
▷ The remote control or BMW display key is in
of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
the vehicle.
Only use the systems or devices when the traf‐
fic situation allows. As warranted, stop and use ▷ The device is ready for operation.
the systems and devices while the vehicle is ▷ Bluetooth is switched on in the vehicle, refer
stationary. to page 69, and on the device.
▷ The pairing readiness is displayed on the
Control Display.
Compatible devices
▷ Bluetooth presettings, such as visibility, may
be required on the device; refer to the own‐
General information
er's manual of the device.
Information on mobile devices compatible with
the vehicle can be found at www.bmwusa.com/ Switching on Bluetooth
bluetooth.
Via iDrive:
Malfunctions may occur with devices not listed
or deviating software versions. 1. "COM"
2. "Mobile devices"
Displaying the vehicle identification 3. Move the Controller to the right.
number and software part number
4. "Settings"
When looking for compatible devices, you may
5. "Bluetooth®"
have to state the vehicle identification number
and the software part number. These numbers 6. Select setting.
can be displayed in the vehicle.
Via iDrive: Activating/deactivating
telephone functions
1. "COM"
To use all supported functions of a mobile
2. "Mobile devices" phone, activate the desired functions in the vehi‐
3. Move the Controller to the right. cle prior to pairing the mobile phone with the ve‐
4. "Settings" hicle as needed.
5. "Bluetooth® info" Via iDrive:
6. "System information" 1. "COM"
2. "Personalize menu"
3. Select desired settings, e.g. "Text
messages".
69
Pairing the mobile device with Too many Bluetooth devices with the same
the vehicle function are paired.
Via iDrive: ▷ The mobile phone is in power-save mode or

has only a limited remaining battery life.
1. "COM" Charge the mobile phone and deactivate the
2. "Mobile devices" power-save mode where required.
3. Move the Controller to the right. Why does the mobile phone no longer react?
4. "New device" ▷ The applications on the mobile phone do not
5. Select the desired function: function anymore.
▷ "Phone calls and Bluetooth® audio" Switch the mobile phone off and on again.
▷ "Audio" ▷ Too high or too low ambient temperature for
mobile phone operation.
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is dis‐
played on the Control Display. Do not subject the mobile phone to extreme
ambient temperatures.
6. On the mobile device, search for Bluetooth
devices in the vicinity and select the vehicle. Why can phone functions not be used via iDrive?
A control number is displayed. ▷ Phone functions are not configured for the
mobile phone.
7. Compare the control number displayed on
the Control Display with the control number Connect the mobile phone with the tele‐
on the display of the mobile device, and con‐ phone function.
firm that the two match. Why are no or not all phone book entries dis‐
8. Select Bluetooth connection if necessary: played or why are they incomplete?
"Use BMW iDrive for phone calls, Bluetooth® ▷ Transmission of the phone book entries is
audio, and apps." not yet complete.
The smartphone is connected to the vehicle and ▷ It is possible that only the phone book entries
displayed in the device list, refer to page 74. of the mobile phone or the SIM card are
transmitted.
Frequently asked questions ▷ It may not be possible to display phone book
All requirements are met and all required steps entries with special characters.
were completed in the specified order. Despite ▷ It may not be possible to transmit contacts
that, the mobile device does not function as ex‐ from social networks.
pected.
▷ The number of phone book entries to be
In this case, the following explanations can help: transmitted is too high.
Why could the mobile phone not be paired or ▷ Data volume of the contact too large, for in‐
connected? stance due to stored information such as
▷ There are too many Bluetooth devices con‐ notes.
nected to the mobile phone or vehicle. Reduce the data volume of the contact.
In the vehicle, delete Bluetooth connections ▷ A mobile phone can only be connected as
with other devices. audio source or as telephone.
Delete the Bluetooth connection from the de‐ Configure the mobile phone and connect it
vice list on the mobile phone and start a new with the telephone function.
device search.
70
▷ Contact was created in the contact list of the ▷ Protect the USB storage device against me‐
phone after the last synchronization. chanical damage.
Synchronize contacts again: "Reload ▷ Due to the large number of USB media avail‐
contacts" able on the market, it cannot be guaranteed
How can the phone connection quality be im‐ that every device is operable on the vehicle.
proved? ▷ Do not expose USB media to extreme envi‐
▷ Adjust the strength of the Bluetooth signal on ronmental conditions, such as very high tem‐
the mobile phone, depending on the mobile peratures; refer to the owner's manual of the
phone. device.
▷ Insert mobile phone into the wireless charg‐ ▷ Due to the many different compression tech‐
ing tray. niques, proper playback of the media stored
on the USB storage device cannot be guar‐
▷ Adjust the volume of the microphone sepa‐
anteed in all cases.
rately in the sound settings.
▷ To ensure proper transmission of the stored
If all points in this list have been checked and the
data, do not charge a USB storage device via
required function is still not available, contact the
the onboard socket, when it is connected to
hotline, a dealer’s service center or another quali‐
the USB interface.
fied service center or repair shop.
▷ Depending on how the USB storage device is
being used, settings may be required on the
USB connection USB storage device, refer to the owner's
manual of the device.
Not compatible USB media:
General information
▷ USB hard drives.
Mobile devices with a USB port are connected to
the USB interface. ▷ USB hubs.
▷ Mobile phones. ▷ USB memory card readers with multiple in‐
serts.
▷ Audio devices such as MP3 players.
▷ HFS-formatted USB media.
▷ USB storage devices.
▷ Devices such as fans or lamps.
Common file systems are supported. FAT32
and exFAT are the recommended formats.
A connected USB storage device will be sup‐
plied with charging current via the USB interface Compatible device, refer to page 69, with USB
if the device supports this. Observe the maxi‐ interface.
mum charge current of the USB interface.
The following uses are possible on USB interfa‐ Connecting the device
ces with data transfer: Connect the USB storage device using a suitable
▷ Playing music files. adapter cable to a USB interface, refer to
page 293.
▷ Playing videos.
The USB storage device is displayed in the de‐
Follow the following when connecting: vice list, refer to page 74.
▷ Do not use force when plugging the connec‐
tor into the USB interface.
▷ Use a flexible adapter cable.
71
WiFi hotspot 6. Hotspot name and hotspot code are dis‐

played on the Control Display. Additionally, a
QR code will be displayed.
Concept 7. Search for WiFi networks on the device. Se‐
Compatible devices with WiFi interface can use lect network name on the device.
the Internet connection of the vehicle via the 8. Enter hotspot code on the device and con‐
WiFi hotspot. nect. Alternatively, the QR code can be used.
The device is displayed in the device list, refer to
General information page 74.
Up to 10 devices can be connected with the hot‐
The initial Internet use via the hotspot requires a
spot of the vehicle at the same time.
registration and possibly a data volume purchase
from a service provider.
Depending on the country version, data volume
▷ Compatible device, refer to page 69, with can be purchased via the connected mobile de‐
WiFi interface. vice or from the ConnectedDrive Store.
▷ WiFi activated on the device. All devices connected via the hotspot use this
▷ Registration and data contract with a service data volume.
provider where required.
▷ Internet use is activated for the vehicle.
▷ Standby state switched on.
Apple CarPlay preparation
Activate WiFi in the vehicle Concept

Via iDrive: CarPlay allows certain functions of a compatible
Apple iPhone to be used via Siri voice operation
1. "COM" and iDrive.
2. "Mobile devices"
3. Move the Controller to the right. Functional requirements
4. "Settings" ▷ Compatible iPhone, refer to page 69.
5. "Wi-Fi®" iPhone 5 or later with iOS 7.1 or later.
▷ Corresponding mobile wireless contract.
Connecting device to WiFi ▷ Bluetooth, WiFi, and Siri voice operation are
hotspot activated on the iPhone.
Via iDrive: ▷ Booking the ConnectedDrive service: Apple
CarPlay preparation.
1. "COM"
2. "Mobile devices" Switching on Bluetooth and
3. Move the Controller to the right. CarPlay
4. "New device" Via iDrive:
5. "Internet"
1. "COM"
2. "Mobile devices"
72
4. "Settings" ▷ Delete the iPhone concerned from the device

5. Select the following setting: list.
"Apple CarPlay" ▷ On the iPhone, delete the vehicle concerned
from the list of stored connections under
6. Activate the function.
Bluetooth and under WiFi.
▷ Pair the iPhone as a new device.
Pairing iPhone with CarPlay
If the steps listed have been carried out and the
Via iDrive:
required function is still not available: contact the
1. "COM" hotline, a dealer’s service center or another quali‐
2. "Mobile devices" fied service center or repair shop.

4. "New device" Screen Mirroring
5. "Phone calls and Bluetooth® audio"
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is dis‐ General information
played on the Control Display. Screen Mirroring enables mirroring (outputting)
6. On the mobile device, search for Bluetooth of the smartphone display on the Control Dis‐
devices in the vicinity and select the vehicle. play.
A control number is displayed.
7. Compare the control number displayed on Functional requirements
the Control Display with the control number ▷ Compatible smartphone, refer to page 69,
on the display of the mobile device, and con‐ with Screen Mirroring interface.
firm that the two match. ▷ Screen Mirroring is switched on on the
8. Select CarPlay: smartphone.
"Confirm note and connect to Apple CarPlay" ▷ WiFi is switched on in the vehicle.
The iPhone is connected to the vehicle and dis‐
played in the device list, refer to page 74. Activate WiFi in the vehicle
Via iDrive:
Operation
1. "COM"
For more information, refer to the Integrated
2. "Mobile devices"
Owner's Manual or the Owner's Manual for navi‐
gation, entertainment, communication. 3. Move the Controller to the right.
4. "Settings"
Frequently asked questions 5. "Wi-Fi®"
All requirements are met and all required steps
were completed in the specified order. Despite Pairing a smartphone with
that, the mobile device does not function as ex‐ Screen Mirroring
pected.
Via iDrive:
In this case, the following explanations can help:
1. "COM"
The iPhone has already been paired with Apple
CarPlay. When a new connection is established, 2. "Mobile devices"
CarPlay can no longer be selected. 3. "New device"
73
4. "Screen Mirroring" Symbol Meaning

The WiFi name of the vehicle is displayed on
Telephone.
the Control Display.
5. Search for WiFi devices in the surroundings Bluetooth audio.
of the smartphone.
WiFi hotspot.
The WiFi name of the vehicle appears on the
device display. Select the WiFi name of the Apple CarPlay.
vehicle. Screen Mirroring.
6. Confirm the connection via iDrive.
The device is connected and displayed in the Configuring the device
device list, refer to page 74.
Functions can be activated or deactivated for
paired and connected devices.
Managing mobile devices Via iDrive:
1. "COM"
General information 2. "Mobile devices"
▷ After one-time pairing, the devices are auto‐ 3. Select the desired device.
matically recognized and reconnected when
standby state is switched on.
If a function is assigned to a device, the function
▷ After stored content on the SIM card or the
will be deactivated where appropriate for a de‐
mobile phone, such as contacts, has been
vice that is already connected and the device will
detected, the data is transmitted to the vehi‐
be disconnected. Observe the information on the
cle and can be used via iDrive.
Control Display.
▷ For some devices, certain settings are neces‐
sary, for instance authorization; see the own‐ Disconnecting the device
er's manual of the device.
Via iDrive:
Displaying the device list 1. "COM"
All devices paired with or connected to the vehi‐ 2. "Mobile devices"
cle are displayed in the device list. 3. Select device.
A maximum of 4 devices can be connected to 4. "Disconnect device"
the vehicle via Bluetooth, and a maximum of 10
The device remains paired and can be con‐
devices can be connected to the vehicle via WiFi.
nected again, refer to page 74.
A maximum of 20 devices will be detected.
Via iDrive:
Connecting the device
1. "COM" A disconnected device can be reconnected.
2. "Mobile devices" Via iDrive:
A symbol indicates, for which function a device is
1. "COM"
used. When the icon is displayed in white, this
function is actively connected to the vehicle. The 2. "Mobile devices"
icon is displayed in gray when the function of the
device is inactive.
74
3. Select device. Via iDrive:

4. "Connect device" 1. "CAR"
The functions that were assigned to the device 2. "Settings"
before disconnecting are assigned to the device
when it is reconnected. If the device is already
connected, these functions are deactivated. 4. "Reset vehicle data"
5. "Reset vehicle data"
Deleting the device When the stored settings in a driver profile are
Via iDrive: synchronized with the ConnectedDrive account,
these settings will remain in the ConnectedDrive
1. "COM" account.
2. "Mobile devices"
3. Select device.
4. "Delete device"
The device is disconnected and removed from
the device list.
Priority of the phones

When two mobile phones are connected to the
vehicle, you can specify the priority of the mobile
phones for reconnection.
Via iDrive:
1. "COM"
2. "Mobile devices"
4. "Settings"
5. "Priorities for telephones"
6. Select the desired device.
7. Turn the controller to select the priority for
the selected mobile phone.
Select the desired priority by sliding.
Resetting the vehicle

configuration
All individual settings can be reset to the factory
settings when the drive-ready state is switched
off.
75
CONTROLS Opening and closing
Opening and closing

options
WARNING
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ People or animals in the vehicle can lock the
cific and optional features offered with the series. doors from the inside and lock themselves in. In
It also describes features and functions that are this case, the vehicle cannot be opened from
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due the outside. There is a risk of injury. Take the
to the selected options or country versions. This remote control with you so that the vehicle can
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ be opened from the outside.
served.
WARNING
For some country versions, unlocking from the
Remote control inside is only possible with special knowledge.
Persons who spend a lengthy time in the vehi‐
cle while being exposed to extreme tempera‐
General information
tures are at risk of injury or death. Do not lock
Depending on the equipment version, the vehicle the vehicle from the outside when there are
is delivered with two remote controls or one re‐ people in it.
mote control and the BMW display key, refer to
page 81.
Each remote control contains a replaceable bat‐ WARNING
tery. Replacing the battery, refer to page 79.
Unattended children or animals can cause the
You may set the button functions, depending on vehicle to move and endanger themselves and
the vehicle equipment and country version. Set‐ traffic, for instance due to the following actions:
tings, refer to page 103.
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
A driver profile, refer to page 97, with personal
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
settings can be assigned to a remote control.
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐
The remote controls hold information about re‐
dows.
quired maintenance. Service data in the remote
control, refer to page 374. ▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
To prevent possible locking in of the remote ▷ Using vehicle equipment.
control, take the remote control with you when There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
exiting the vehicle. leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
hicle. Take the remote control with you when
76
Opening and closing CONTROLS
Overview If, due to the settings, only the driver's door and
fuel filler flap were unlocked, press the button on
the remote control again to unlock the other ve‐
hicle access points.
In addition, the following functions are executed:
▷ If a driver profile, refer to page 97, was as‐
signed to the remote control, this driver pro‐
file will be activated and the settings that are
stored in it will be applied.
▷ The interior lights are switched on, unless
1 Unlocking they were manually switched off. Switch the
interior lights on/off manually, refer to
2 Locking
page 174.
Stationary climate control through Remote
▷ With alarm system: The alarm system, refer
Engine Start 280
to page 105, will be switched off.
3 Open tailgate
After opening one of the front doors, the vehicle
4 Press and hold or press three times in quick is ready for operation, refer to page 44.
succession: panic mode
The light functions may depend on the ambient
Press briefly: headlight courtesy delay feature brightness.
Unlocking Convenient opening

Press and hold the button on the re‐
General information mote control after unlocking.
The behavior of the vehicle when unlocking with
the remote control depends on the following set‐ The windows and the glass sunroof are opened,
tings, refer to page 103, for unlocking and lock‐ as long as the button on the remote control is
ing: pressed.
▷ If only the driver's door and the fuel filler flap

or all access to the vehicle will be unlocked.
Locking
▷ If the unlocking of vehicle is confirmed with a General information
light signal or a sound signal.
The behavior of the vehicle during locking with
▷ If the welcome light, refer to page 170, is the remote control depends on the following set‐
switched on when the vehicle is being un‐ tings, refer to page 103:
locked.
▷ If the locking of the vehicle is confirmed with
▷ If the exterior mirrors are automatically folded a light signal or a sound signal.
out and in when the vehicle is unlocked and
locked. ▷ If the exterior mirrors are automatically folded
in and out when the vehicle is locked and un‐
locked.
Unlocking the vehicle
▷ If the headlight courtesy delay feature, refer
Press the button on the remote control. to page 170, is activated during locking.
77
Locking the vehicle ▷ The interior lights are switched on, unless
1. Close the driver's door. they were manually switched off. Switch the
interior lights on/off manually, refer to
page 174.
2. Press the button on the remote control.
▷ Depending on the settings, the exterior light‐
The following functions are executed:
ing, refer to page 170, will be switched on.
▷ All doors, the tailgate, and the fuel filler flap
The light functions may depend on the ambient
are locked.
brightness.
▷ With alarm system: The alarm system, refer
to page 105, will be switched on.
Tailgate
If the drive-ready state is still switched on when
you lock the vehicle, the vehicle horn honks General information
twice. In this case, the drive-ready state must be
To avoid locking it in the vehicle, do not place the
switched off by means of the Start/Stop button.
remote control in the cargo area.
With Comfort Access: The following settings, refer to page 104, are
available for the operation of the tailgate with the
convenient closing
remote control:
Safety information ▷ Wether the remote control opens only the

upper tailgate or the upper and lower tailgate
at the same time.
WARNING
▷ Determines if the doors will be unlocked
With convenient closing, body parts can be when the tailgate is opened with the remote
jammed. There is a risk of injury. Make sure control.
that the area of movement of the doors is clear
during convenient closing. Safety information
Closing WARNING
Press and hold the button on the remote Body parts can be jammed when operating the
control in the area close to the vehicle after tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that
locking. the area of movement of the tailgate is clear
during opening and closing.
The windows and the glass sunroof are closed,
as long as the button on the remote control is
pressed. WARNING
The tailgate pivots out when it opens. There is
Switching on the interior and a risk of injury or risk of damage to property.
exterior lights Make sure that the area of movement of the
Press the button on the remote control tailgate is clear during opening and closing.
with the vehicle locked.
The function is not available for the first 10 sec‐

onds after locking.
78
cover with a lever movement of the

NOTICE integrated key, arrow 2.
Sharp-edged or pointed objects can hit the
windows and heat conductors while driving.
There is a risk of damage to property. Cover
the edges and ensure that pointed objects do
not hit the windows.
Opening
mote control for approx. 1 second. 3. Push battery in the direction of the arrow us‐
ing a pointed object and lift it out.
Panic mode
You can trigger the alarm system if you find your‐
self in a dangerous situation.
▷ Press the button on the remote con‐
trol and hold for at least 3 seconds.
▷ Briefly press the button on the remote control

4. Insert a type CR 2032 battery with the posi‐
tive side facing up.
Switching on the headlight
5. Press the cover closed.
courtesy delay feature
Have old batteries disposed of by a deal‐
er’s service center or another qualified
mote control for approx. 1 second.
service center or repair shop or take
Set the duration, refer to page 170. them to a collection point.
Replacing the battery Additional remote controls

1. Remove the integrated key from the remote Additional remote controls are available from a
control, refer to page 85. dealer’s service center or another qualified serv‐
2. Place the integrated key underneath the bat‐ ice center or repair shop.
tery compartment cover, arrow 1, and lift the
Loss of the remote controls
A lost remote control can be blocked and re‐
placed by a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
If the lost remote control has an assigned driver
profile, refer to page 97, the connection to this
79
remote control must be deleted. A new remote Switching the drive-ready state on
control can then be assigned to the driver profile. via emergency detection of the
remote control
Malfunction
General information
A Check Control message, refer to page 153, is
displayed.
Remote control detection by the vehicle may
malfunction under the following circumstances:
▷ The battery of the remote control is dis‐
charged. Replacing the battery, refer to
page 79. It is not possible to switch on the drive-ready
▷ Interference of the radio connection from state if the remote control has not been de‐
transmission towers or other equipment with tected.
high transmitting power. Proceed as follows in this case:
▷ Shielding of the remote control due to metal 1. Hold the remote control with its back against
objects. the marked area on the steering column. Pay
Do not transport the remote control together attention to the display in the instrument
with metal objects. cluster.
▷ Interference of the radio connection from mo‐ 2. If the remote control is detected:
bile phones or other electronic devices in di‐ Switch on drive-ready state within 10 sec‐
rect proximity to the remote control. onds.
Do not transport the remote control together If the remote control is not detected, slightly
with electronic devices. change the position of the remote control and re‐
▷ Interference of radio transmission by a charg‐ peat the procedure.
ing process of mobile devices, for instance
charging of a mobile phone. Frequently asked questions
▷ The remote control is in direct proximity of What precautions can be taken to be able to
the wireless charging tray. open a vehicle with an accidentally locked in re‐
Place the remote control down at a different mote control?
location. ▷ The options provided by the Remote Serv‐
In the case of interference, the vehicle can be ices of the BMW Connected app include the
unlocked and locked from the outside with the ability to lock and unlock a vehicle.
integrated key, refer to page 85. This requires an active BMW Connected‐
Drive contract and the BMW Connected app
must be installed on a smartphone.
▷ Unlocking the vehicle can be requested via
the BMW ConnectedDrive Call Center.
An active BMW ConnectedDrive contract is
required.
80
BMW display key

WARNING
Unattended children or animals can cause the
General information vehicle to move and endanger themselves and
The BMW display key is supplied with an addi‐ traffic, for instance due to the following actions:
tional mechanical key. If the display key is used,
the mechanical key should be carried with you,
for instance in the wallet. The mechanical key is ▷ Releasing the parking brake.
used like the integrated key, refer to page 85. ▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐
The display key supports all functions of the dows.
standard remote control. ▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
In addition, the following functions are also avail‐ ▷ Using vehicle equipment.
able: There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
▷ Display status of doors and windows. leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
▷ Display status of the anti-theft warning sys‐ hicle. Take the remote control with you when
tem. exiting and lock the vehicle.
▷ Display service information.
▷ Call up range with available fuel. Overview
▷ Stationary climate control/Remote Engine
Start
▷ Level setting of the vehicle when stationary.
Safety information
WARNING
People or animals in the vehicle can lock the
doors from the inside and lock themselves in. In
1 Open tailgate
this case, the vehicle cannot be opened from
the outside. There is a risk of injury. Take the 2 Unlocking
remote control with you so that the vehicle can 3 Press and hold or press three times in quick
be opened from the outside. succession: panic mode
Press briefly: headlight courtesy delay feature
4 Locking
WARNING
5 Display
6 Back
inside is only possible with special knowledge.
7 Switch the display on/off
cle while being exposed to extreme tempera‐ 8 Micro-USB charging socket
tures are at risk of injury or death. Do not lock
the vehicle from the outside when there are
Reception range
people in it.
The number of available display key functions
depends on the distance from the vehicle.
81
▷ When you are in close proximity to the vehi‐ To return to the original page: tap on the
cle, all functions of the display key are availa‐ symbol beneath the display.
ble.
▷ The status information can be called up in the Lower status line
extended reception range. The lower status line indicates whether or not
With parked-car heating: the parked-car heat‐ the display key is within reception range, refer to
ing can be operated. page 81.
Without parked-car heating: the parked-car ▷ "Connected": the display key is within recep‐
ventilation can be operated. tion range.
▷ Outside of the reception range of the vehicle, ▷ "Updated": the display key is not within re‐
you can display the last transmitted status in‐ ception range. It indicates when the last data
formation from the vehicle. transfer from the vehicle took place.
The symbol is shown on the display if one of
the buttons is pressed outside of the reception Switching on/off
range. The display will go out automatically after a brief
period to conserve battery power.
Display To hide the display manually:
Press the button on the left side of the display
General information key. Overview, refer to page 81.
The display is divided into the upper status line, To show the display:
the information area, and the lower status line.
1. Press the button on the left side of the dis‐
Upper status line play key.
The upper status line displays the following infor‐ 2. Then, swipe with your finger from bottom to
mation: top to unlock the screen lock.
▷ Vehicle secured. To switch off the display to increase the usable

battery life:
Vehicle not secured.
▷ Set time in the vehicle. 1. If necessary, cancel the screen lock.
▷ Charge state of the display key battery. 2. Press and hold the button on the left side of
the display key for longer than 4 seconds.
Information area 3. "OK"
The information area can be used to access in‐ To switch the display on:
formation and perform additional functions. Press the button on the left side of the display
If the information area contains more than one key.
page, then page indicators are shown beneath
the information. Operating concept
The indicator for the current page has The relevant submenues can be accessed from
been filled in. the following main menus:
Swipe to the right or left with a finger to change
between the pages.
If further information is available on a page, tap
the appropriate symbol.
82
Main menu Information/Function ▷ Charge the battery for at least three hours
before using the display key for the first time
"Security / or if the key has not been used for an ex‐
information" Door status. tended period.
Alarm system status. ▷ The display key can be used while it is being
charged via the USB port.If the battery is fully
After alarm triggering: date,
discharged, it may take some time before the
time, and reason for triggering
display key can be used again.
the alarm.
▷ Due to the large number of USB chargers
available on the market, it cannot be guaran‐
Window status. teed that every charger will function properly.
Glass sunroof status. The charging duration depends on the
charger used.
"Entry level" "Height control" Set vehicle
▷ Charging via the USB port may heat up the
level, refer to page 262.
charger and the display key.
"Vehicle Maintenance indicators of Con‐ Charging in the wireless charging tray may
information" dition Based Service CBS, refer heat up the tray and the display key.
to page 374.
At higher temperatures, the display key may
Status of the roadside parking cause a reduction in the charging current,
lights. and in isolated cases the charging process
may be interrupted temporarily.
"Mobility info" Range with available fuel.
▷ When inserting the display key into the wire‐
"Precondit. With parked-car heating: oper‐ less charging tray, make sure there are no
setting" ate parked-car heating, refer to objects between it and the wireless charging
page 278. tray.
Without parked-car heating:
operate parked-car ventilation, Safety information
refer to page 278.
Stationary climate control/
WARNING
Remote Engine Start, refer to
page 280 When charging a device that meets the Qi
standard in the wireless charging tray, any
metal objects located between the device and
Display key battery the tray can become very hot. If smart cards,
memory cards or cards with magnetic strips are
General information placed between the device and the tray, this
Follow the following information: may impair card function. There is a risk of in‐
jury and risk of damage to property. When
▷ If the charge state of the display key battery
charging mobile devices, make sure there are
declines, the display is switched off automati‐
no objects between the device and the tray.
cally. The battery must be recharged so that
the display can be switched back on. The op‐
erability of the standard buttons is retained
until the battery is completely discharged.
83
Charging Malfunction
Via USB General information
Connect the display key via the micro-USB A Check Control message is displayed.
charging socket to a USB port.
BMW display key detection by the vehicle may
malfunction under the following circumstances:
In the wireless charging tray
▷ The battery of the display key is discharged.
Charge the battery, refer to page 83.
▷ Interference of the radio connection from
transmission towers or other equipment with
high transmitting power.
▷ Shielding of the display key due to metal ob‐
jects.
▷ Interference of the radio connection from mo‐
bile phones or other electronic devices in di‐
1. Open the tray cover. rect proximity.
2. Place the display key into the middle of the ▷ Interference of radio transmission by a charg‐
wireless charging tray in front of the left cup ing process of mobile devices, for instance
holder. charging of a mobile phone.
Ensure that the display is facing up. Do not transport the display key together with
metal objects or electronic devices.
3. Close the tray cover.
In the case of interference, the vehicle can also
With thermo-cup holder: in the wireless be unlocked and locked from the outside with
charging tray the mechanical key.
Switching on drive-ready state via

emergency detection of the BMW
display key
1. Open the tray cover.

2. Place display key flush into the recess of the
wireless charging tray.
Ensure that the display is facing up.
It is not possible to switch on the drive-ready
3. Close the tray cover. state if the display key has not been detected.
84
Proceed as follows in this case:

NOTICE
1. Hold the display key with its back against the
marked area on the steering column. Pay at‐ The door lock is permanently joined with the
tention to the display in the instrument clus‐ door. The door handle can be moved. When
ter. pulling the door handle with the integrated key
inserted, paint or the integrated key can be
2. If the display key is detected:
damaged. There is a risk of damage to prop‐
Switch on drive-ready state within 10 sec‐ erty. Remove the integrated key before pulling
onds. the outside door handle.
If the display key is not detected, slightly change
the position of the display key and repeat the
procedure. Removing
Resetting the BMW display key

If the charged display key cannot be switched on
anymore or if the display does not respond to
entries anymore, the display key can be reset.
Press and hold the button on the left side of the
display key for at least 20 seconds, until some‐
thing appears on the display.
Press the button, arrow 1, and pull out the

Integrated key integrated key, arrow 2.
General information Locking/unlocking via the door

The driver's door can be locked and unlocked lock
without remote control using the integrated key.
1. Pull and hold the door handle outward with
The integrated key also fits the glove compart‐ one hand.
ment.
Safety information
WARNING
inside is only possible with special knowledge.
cle while being exposed to extreme tempera‐
tures are at risk of injury or death. Do not lock 2. Guide one finger of your other hand from the
the vehicle from the outside when there are back under the cover and push the cover out.
people in it.
85
Use the thumb for counter support to prevent

the cover from falling out of the door handle.
Buttons for the central
locking system
General information
In the event of a severe accident, the vehicle is
automatically unlocked. The hazard warning sys‐
tem and interior lights come on.
Overview
3. Remove the cover.

4. Unlock or lock the door lock using the
integrated key.
Buttons for the central locking system.
Locking
The other doors must be unlocked or locked Press the button with the front doors
from the inside. closed.
▷ The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.

Alarm system
▷ The vehicle is not secured against theft when
The alarm system is not switched on if the vehi‐ locking.
cle is locked with the integrated key.
The alarm system is triggered when the door is Unlocking
opened, if the vehicle has been unlocked via the
door lock. Press the button.
In order to stop the alarm, unlock the vehicle with

the remote control, if necessary through emer‐
gency detection of the remote control, refer to
Opening
page 80. ▷ Press the button to unlock all the
doors.
Pull the door opener above the armrest.
▷ Front doors: pull the door handle on the door
to open the door. The other doors remain
locked.
▷ Back doors: pull twice on the door handle on
the door to be opened; the first time unlocks
86
the door, the second time opens it. The other ▷ If the unlocking of vehicle is confirmed with a
doors remain locked. light signal or a sound signal.
▷ If the welcome light, refer to page 170, is
switched on when the vehicle is being un‐
Comfort Access locked.
▷ If the exterior mirrors are automatically folded
Concept out and in when the vehicle is unlocked and
The vehicle can be accessed without activating locked.
the remote control.
All you need to do is to have the remote control Unlocking the vehicle
with you, such as in your pants pocket.
The vehicle automatically detects the remote
control when it is in close proximity or in the car's
interior.
General information
Comfort Access supports the following func‐
tions:
▷ Unlocking and locking the vehicle from the
Grasp the handle of a vehicle door completely.
door handle.
▷ Convenient closing.
▷ Touchless unlocking and locking of the vehi‐
Locking
cle.
General information
▷ Unlocking and locking the vehicle using the
BMW Digital Key. The behavior of the vehicle during locking via the
Comfort Access depends on the following set‐
▷ Open the tailgate.
tings, refer to page 103:
▷ Open and close the tailgate with no-touch
▷ If the locking of the vehicle is confirmed with
activation.
a light signal or a sound signal.
▷ If the exterior mirrors are automatically folded
Functional requirements out and in when the vehicle is unlocked and
▷ To lock the vehicle, the remote control must locked.
be located outside of the vehicle near the
doors.
to page 170, is activated during locking.
▷ The next unlocking and locking cycle is not
possible until after approx. 2 seconds. Locking the vehicle
Close the driver's door.
Unlocking
General information
The behavior of the vehicle during unlocking via
the Comfort Access depends on the following
settings, refer to page 103:
87
Opening the tailgate
General information
If the tailgate is opened via Comfort Access,
locked doors are not unlocked.
Touch the grooved surface on the handle of a Safety information

closed vehicle door with your finger for approx.
1 second without grasping the door handle. WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when operating the
Convenient closing tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that
the area of movement of the tailgate is clear
Safety information during opening and closing.
WARNING
WARNING
With convenient closing, body parts can be
The tailgate pivots out when it opens. There is
jammed. There is a risk of injury. Make sure
a risk of injury or risk of damage to property.
that the area of movement of the doors is clear
Make sure that the area of movement of the
during convenient closing.
tailgate is clear during opening and closing.
Closing
NOTICE
Sharp-edged or pointed objects can hit the
windows and heat conductors while driving.
There is a risk of damage to property. Cover
the edges and ensure that pointed objects do
Touch the grooved surface on the handle of a

closed vehicle door with your finger and hold it
there without grasping the door handle.
In addition to locking, the windows and glass

sunroof will be closed.
88
Opening Safety information
WARNING
During no-touch activation, vehicle parts may
be touched, such as the hot exhaust gas sys‐
tem. There is a risk of injury. When moving your
foot, make sure you have a firm stance and do
not touch the vehicle.
Press the button on tailgate's exterior. WARNING

Without trailer hitch: touchless tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that
opening and closing of the the area of movement of the tailgate is clear
tailgate
Concept
WARNING
The tailgate can be opened and closed with no-
touch activation using the remote control you are The tailgate pivots out when it opens. There is
carrying. Two sensors detect a forward-directed a risk of injury or risk of damage to property.
foot motion in the central rear area and the tail‐ Make sure that the area of movement of the
gate is opened and closed. tailgate is clear during opening and closing.
General information
To avoid locking it in the vehicle, do not place the NOTICE
remote control in the cargo area. Sharp-edged or pointed objects can hit the
If the remote control is in the sensor area, the windows and heat conductors while driving.
tailgate can be opened or closed inadvertently by There is a risk of damage to property. Cover
an unconscious or alleged recognized foot the edges and ensure that pointed objects do
movement. not hit the windows.
The sensor has an approximate range of
5 ft/1.50 m extending from the rear of the vehi‐
Performing the foot movement
cle.
1. Stand in the middle behind the vehicle at ap‐
If the tailgate is opened with no-touch activation,
prox. one arm's length away from the rear of
locked doors are not unlocked.
the vehicle.
You can configure if only the upper tailgate will
2. Wave a foot under the vehicle in the direction
open or if the upper and lower tailgate opens.
of travel and immediately pull it back. With
Settings, refer to page 103. When closing, the
upper and lower tailgate will always be closed.
89
this movement, the leg must pass through The unlocking zone is located within a radius of
the ranges of both sensors. approx. 3 ft/1 m around the door handles.
The vehicle will be locked when the remote con‐
trol leaves the locking zone.
The locking zone is located within a radius of ap‐
prox. 7 ft/2 m around the door handles.
If the remote control is located in the unlocking
zone for an extended period of time without
movement, the vehicle will be locked automati‐
cally.
If a passenger is detected in the front passenger
seat during locking and the safety belt of the
Opening front passenger is engaged in the safety belt
Perform the foot movement described earlier. buckle during locking:
Before the tailgate opens, the hazard warning ▷ The vehicle will be locked but not secured
system flashes. against theft.
Moving your foot again will stop the opening mo‐ ▷ The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.
tion, and moving it one more time after that will
The behavior of the vehicle during touchless un‐
close the tailgate.
locking and locking depends on the following
settings, refer to page 103:
Closing
▷ If the automatic unlocking is active.
Perform the foot movement described earlier.
▷ If the automatic locking is active.
The hazard warning system flashes and an
acoustic signal sounds. ▷ If only the driver's door and the fuel filler flap
or all access to the vehicle will be unlocked.
Moving your foot again will stop the closing mo‐
tion, and moving it one more time after that will Only driver's door and fuel filler flap: the driv‐
re-open the tailgate. er's door and fuel filler flap will only be un‐
locked when the driver approaches the vehi‐
cle on the driver's side.
Touchless unlocking and locking
All vehicle entry points: the vehicle will be un‐
of the vehicle
locked depending on the side on which the
driver approaches the vehicle.
Concept
▷ If the unlocking and locking of the vehicle is
The vehicle will be unlocked when the driver ap‐
confirmed with a light signal or a sound sig‐
proaches the locked vehicle with the remote
nal.
control.
▷ If the welcome light, refer to page 170, is
When the driver walks away from the unlocked
switched on when the vehicle is being un‐
vehicle with the remote control, the vehicle will
locked.
be locked.
to page 170, is activated during locking.
General information
The vehicle will be unlocked when an authorized ▷ If the exterior mirrors are automatically folded
remote control is detected in the unlocking zone. out and in when the vehicle is unlocked and
locked.
90
Functional requirements then hand over the remote control, instead of

▷ The drive-ready state must be turned off. your smartphone.
▷ Unlocking: when entering the unlocking zone,

Key card
the doors and tailgate must be closed.
The vehicle is delivered with a key card. The key
▷ Locking: when leaving the locking zone, the
card can be used in the same way as a compati‐
doors and tailgate must be closed.
ble smartphone with a digital key.
▷ If the vehicle was locked with the remote
This key card may not be available. Contact your
control, it cannot be unlocked touchless.
authorized dealer’s service center or another
▷ If the vehicle was unlocked with the remote qualified service center as to whether this addi‐
control, it cannot be locked touchless without tional function is currently in your vehicle or when
driving the vehicle first. it can be installed in your vehicle in the future.
▷ For touchless locking of the vehicle, no sec‐ A digital key that has already been paired with
ond remote control can be located in the the vehicle is installed on the key card. The digi‐
locking zone. tal key must be activated via iDrive, refer to
▷ If the vehicle has been in the idle state for page 92.
several days, touchless unlocking and locking When you exit the vehicle, take the key card with
is not possible until after the vehicle has been you, as it can be used to start the vehicle.
driven.
Connection to the vehicle
BMW Digital Key The communication between the vehicle and the
smartphone uses near-field communication,
Concept NFC.
BMW Digital Key allows the vehicle to be un‐ The vehicle is unlocked with the outside door
locked and locked, as well as started, with a handle of the vehicle. The smartphone must be
compatible smartphone, refer to page 68. placed into the smartphone tray to pair a digital
key and to start the engine.
General information The vehicle also detects a digital key when the
BMW Digital Key varies by country and may be smartphone is switched off.
unavailable.
To unlock and start a vehicle with a compatible Functional requirements
smartphone, a digital key must be installed on ▷ The BMW Connected app is installed on a
this smartphone. Digital keys are installed, man‐ compatible smartphone.
aged and forwarded via the BMW Connected
▷ The rechargeable battery of the smartphone
app.
has a sufficient charge. The necessary mini‐
A driver profile, refer to page 97, with individual mum charge of the rechargeable battery de‐
settings can be assigned to a digital key. pends on the smartphone.
When using a digital key, always carry a remote ▷ A digital key for the vehicle is installed on the
control with you too, so the vehicle can still be smartphone.
accessed even if your smartphone is not work‐
▷ BMW Digital Key is activated for the vehicle.
ing. It is also useful to carry the remote control
with you if the vehicle has to be handed over to
another person or a Service Center. You can
91
Activate BMW Digital Key The corresponding information is shown on the

The vehicle owner must present proof of authori‐ Control Display.
zation for his vehicle at the service center to be As soon as the vehicle is used with another digi‐
able to use BMW Digital Key. tal key or with a remote control, the removed dig‐
The vehicle owner configures a digital key code ital key can no longer be used.
at the service center to be able to enable addi‐
tional digital keys at a later time. Pairing digital keys in the vehicle
To pair a digital key, a remote control must be lo‐
Purchasing digital keys cated in the vehicle or an active digital key of the
An initial digital key is provided in the BMW Con‐ vehicle owner must be in the smartphone tray.
nected app when the vehicle is purchased. If the digital key was transferred by the vehicle
Additional digital keys can be purchased via the owner, it may not be possible to meet this re‐
BMW ConnectedDrive Store. The purchase of quirement. In this case, it is necessary to enter
digital keys can cause costs. the Digital Key Code and the TAN. The vehicle
can already be unlocked with the transferred dig‐
The period of validity of a digital key is limited. ital key before it is paired.
The expiration date of the validity can be
checked in the BMW Connected app and in the Place the smartphone with the digital key to be
vehicle. paired into the smartphone tray.
If a digital key has expired, the vehicle can only Via iDrive:
be unlocked and locked for a limited period and a 1. "CAR"
limited number of engine starts is possible. The
2. "Settings"
corresponding information is shown on the Con‐
trol Display. 3. "Doors/Access"
4. "BMW Digital Key"
Transferring digital keys 5. "Add new digital key"
The vehicle owner can transfer a digital key for 6. If necessary, enter the Digital Key Code and
his vehicle to another person via the BMW Con‐ the TAN.
nected app.
After the digital key has been paired, its name will
When a digital key is transferred, a transaction be displayed in the list of digital keys.
number TAN will be generated. Another person
can pair the digital key in the vehicle with this Activating/deactivating digital keys
TAN and the Digital Key Code. This makes it in the vehicle
possible to allow another person to use the vehi‐
cle without having to be at the vehicle. A digital key can be deactivated temporarily.
The TAN and the Digital Key Code should only To activate or deactivate a digital key, a remote
be disclosed in person or by phone. control must be located in the vehicle or an ac‐
tive digital key of the vehicle owner must be in
The transferred digital key can be removed in the the smartphone tray.
vehicle or via the BMW Connected app at any
time. Via iDrive:
If the digital key has been removed via the BMW 1. "CAR"
Connected App, the vehicle can still be unlocked 2. "Settings"
and locked for a limited period of time and only a
3. "Doors/Access"
limited number of engine starts will be possible.
92
4. "BMW Digital Key" Unlocking and locking the vehicle

5. Select the desired digital key.
6. "Digital key active"
A deactivated digital key remains in the list of
paired digital keys.
Removing digital keys in the vehicle

To remove a digital key, a remote control must
be located in the vehicle or another active digital
key of the vehicle owner must be in the smart‐
phone tray. To remove all digital keys, a remote Hold the smartphone directly on the outside door
control must be located in the vehicle. handle of the driver's door.
Via iDrive:
Starting the engine
1. "CAR"
Smartphone tray without thermo-cup holder:
2. "Settings"
3. "Doors/Access"
5. If necessary, select the digital key.
6. ▷ "Remove digital key"
The digital key will be removed from the
list of paired digital keys.
▷ "Remove all digital keys"
Smartphone tray with thermo-cup holder:

Resetting BMW Digital Key
To reset BMW Digital Key, an authorized remote
control must be located in the vehicle.
After the reset, the vehicle can no longer be un‐
locked, locked or started with a digital key.
The vehicle owner must present proof of authori‐
zation for his vehicle again at the service center
to be able to use BMW Digital Key again.
Via iDrive:
1. "CAR" 1. Open the cover of the smartphone tray.

2. "Settings" 2. Place smartphone centered into the smart‐
phone tray.
3. "Doors/Access"
3. After the digital key has been detected as au‐
thorized, the engine can be started.
5. "Reset function"
93
Sale of the smartphone/vehicle The tailgate consists of the upper and the lower
When a smartphone with a digital key is sold, all tailgate. The lower tailgate opens downward to
digital keys should be deleted from this smart‐ make loading the cargo area easier.
phone. The following settings, refer to page 104, are
When a vehicle is sold, BMW Digital Key should available for the operation of the tailgate:
be reset in this vehicle. The new vehicle owner ▷ The opening height of the upper tailgate.
should make sure that BMW Digital Key has ▷ With Comfort Access: Whether the remote
been reset. This ensures that the previous vehi‐ control opens only the upper tailgate or the
cle owner no longer has access to the vehicle. upper and lower tailgate at the same time.
▷ With Comfort Access: Whether the button in
Malfunction the driver's door opens only the upper or the
Remote control detection by the vehicle may upper and lower tailgate together.
malfunction under the following circumstances: ▷ Determines if the doors will be unlocked
▷ The battery of the remote control is dis‐ when the tailgate is opened with the remote
charged. Replacing the battery, refer to control.
page 79.
▷ Interference of the radio connection from Safety information
transmission towers or other equipment with
high transmitting power.
WARNING
▷ Shielding of the remote control due to metal
objects.
tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that
Do not transport the remote control together the area of movement of the tailgate is clear
with metal objects. during opening and closing.
▷ Interference of the radio connection from mo‐
bile phones or other electronic devices in di‐
rect proximity to the remote control. WARNING
Do not transport the remote control together The tailgate pivots out when it opens. There is
with electronic devices. a risk of injury or risk of damage to property.
Wet or snowy conditions may disrupt the locking Make sure that the area of movement of the
request recognition function on the door han‐ tailgate is clear during opening and closing.
dles.
In the case of a malfunction, unlock and lock the
vehicle using the buttons of the remote control NOTICE
or using the integrated key, refer to page 85. Foreign objects, such as sand or icing, between
the bumper and tailgate may cause damage
when operating the lower tailgate. There is a
Tailgate risk of damage to property. If necessary, re‐
move foreign objects from the bumper and the
General information lower tailgate before operating the lower tail‐
gate.
94
With Comfort Access: unlock the vehicle or

NOTICE carry the remote control with you and then
Sharp-edged or pointed objects can hit the press the button on the outside of the tail‐
windows and heat conductors while driving. gate.
There is a risk of damage to property. Cover ▷ Press and hold the button on the re‐
the edges and ensure that pointed objects do mote control for approx. 1 second.
With Comfort Access: If necessary, the lower
tailgate will also be opened.
NOTICE From the inside

Manual operation of the tailgate in the wrong
Press the button in the driver's door.
sequence can damage the tailgate. There is a
risk of damage to property. Close the lower tail‐
gate first before closing the upper tailgate man‐ If the vehicle is locked, selector lever position P
ually. must be engaged first.
With Comfort Access: If necessary, the lower tail‐
gate will also be opened.
Upper tailgate
Interruption of the opening procedure
Opening The opening procedure is interrupted in the fol‐
lowing situations:
General information
▷ When the vehicle starts moving.
The tailgate cannot be opened when the vehicle
▷ By pressing the button that is used again.
is in valet parking mode, refer to page 101.
When the trailer socket is in use, the tailgate can‐ Closing
not be opened with the remote control or with
the button in the car's interior. Functional requirement
The upper tailgate will be opened to the config‐ Without Comfort Access: The lower tailgate
ured opening height. must be closed; otherwise, a Check Control
message will be displayed.
From the outside
From the outside
Without Comfort Access:
1. Closing the lower tailgate manually.

2. Press the button on the inside of the upper
tailgate.
With Comfort Access:

▷ Without Comfort Access: unlock the vehicle,
▷ Press the button on the inside of the
then press the button on the outside of the
upper tailgate.
tailgate.
95
The lower tailgate will be closed automatically Lower tailgate

with the upper tailgate.
▷ Press the button on the inside of the Opening
upper tailgate.
The vehicle will be locked after closing the General information
tailgate. The driver's door must be closed for When open, the lower tailgate can support loads
this purpose and the remote control must be of up to 550 lbs/250 kg.
outside of the vehicle in the area of the tail‐
gate. Functional requirement
The lower tailgate will be closed automatically The upper tailgate must be open.
with the upper tailgate.
From the outside
From the inside Without Comfort Access:
Press the button on the lower tailgate
1. Closing the lower tailgate manually. and fold the lower tailgate down.

2. Pull and hold the button in the driver
door. Press the button on the lower tailgate.
The remote control must be located in the
car's interior for this function.
With Comfort Access: from the inside
Depending on the settings, the lower tailgate will
Pull and hold the button in the driver door. be opened automatically with the upper tailgate.
The remote control must be located in the
car's interior for this function. With Comfort Access: terminating the
The lower tailgate will be closed automatically opening procedure
with the upper tailgate. The opening procedure is interrupted in the fol‐
lowing situations:
An acoustic signal sounds before the tailgate is
▷ When the vehicle starts moving.
closed.
▷ By pressing the button on the lower tailgate.
Interruption of the closing procedure Pressing again closes the tailgate.
The closing procedure is interrupted in the fol‐
lowing situations: Closing
▷ If the vehicle starts off with a jerky movement. Functional requirements
▷ By pressing the button that is used again. There is no cargo on the lower tailgate.
From the outside

Closing the lower tailgate manually.
96
Press the button on the lower tailgate. er’s service center or another qualified service
center or repair shop.
With Comfort Access: from the inside Without Comfort Access: Operate the unlocked
The lower tailgate will be closed automatically upper tailgate manually and slowly without jerk‐
with the upper tailgate. ing.
With Comfort Access: Operate the unlocked up‐
With Comfort Access: terminating the per or lower tailgate manually and slowly without
closing procedure jerking. When closing, make sure the lower tail‐
The closing procedure is interrupted in the fol‐ gate is closed first.
lowing situations: To close the tailgate fully, press down lightly
▷ If the vehicle starts off with a jerky movement. only. Closing occurs automatically.
▷ By pressing the button in the lower tailgate.
System limits
Automatic Soft Closing
Without Comfort Access: The upper tailgate is
designed for electric operation via the provided
Safety information
operating points.
With Comfort Access: The upper tailgate and the WARNING
lower tailgate are designed for electric operation Body parts can be jammed while operating the
via the provided operating points. doors. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that
A manual operation of the tailgate can produce the area of movement of the doors is clear dur‐
system states in which an electric operation is no ing opening and closing.
longer possible.
For example, this type of system state applies
when there is a danger of collision between the
Closing
upper and lower tailgate. In this case, an acoustic To close the doors, push lightly.
signal will sound and the upper tailgate must be Closing occurs automatically.
completely opened manually.
Operate the tailgate manually in exceptional
cases only such as in the event of a malfunction, Driver profile
refer to page 97.
Concept
Malfunction Driver profiles can be created to store personal
vehicle settings. If the vehicle is used by multiple
WARNING drivers, each driver can create his personal driver
profile. When a driver profile is selected, the vehi‐
With manual operation of a blocked tailgate, it
cle will automatically apply the stored settings in
can release itself unexpectedly from the block‐
the driver profile.
age. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage
to property. Do not operate the tailgate man‐
ually if it is blocked. Have it checked by a deal‐ General information
Three personal driver profiles can be created.
Each driver profile can be protected with a PIN to
97
prevent other drivers from viewing and modifying Setup assistant

the stored settings.
The setup assistant is offered in new vehicles for
In addition, a guest profile is available that can be a limited period time on the Welcome screen to
selected by any driver. The guest profile is active configure the most important properties of a new
when a personal driver profile has not been se‐ driver profile.
lected.
The driver is guided step by step through the fol‐
Changes to the vehicle settings are automatically lowing functions:
stored in the active driver profile or in the guest
▷ Setting the system language.
profile.
▷ Pairing mobile devices with the vehicle.
The recognition via remote control and a digital
key, refer to page 91, can be assigned to a driver ▷ Non-ConnectedDrive countries: Assigning
profile so that the vehicle will apply the settings profile names.
as soon as the driver unlocks the car. As soon as ▷ ConnectedDrive countries:
the vehicle detects the remote control or the dig‐ Enabling the continuous synchronization be‐
ital key, the corresponding driver profile will be tween the ConnectedDrive account and the
activated. driver profile.
ConnectedDrive countries: The stored settings Stored settings in the ConnectedDrive ac‐
in the driver profile can be synchronized with the count are transferred to the vehicle. If a Con‐
personal BMW ConnectedDrive account. It is nectedDrive account has not been created, it
thereby possible to use these settings in other must be created in the ConnectedDrive por‐
BMW vehicles as well. tal.
▷ Confirm the consent for the transmission of
Functional requirements vehicle related data.
When switching the driver profile, the vehicle ▷ Configure the voice command to start the
must move at a maximum of walking speed. voice command response.
▷ Switch on the gesture control.
Welcome screen
After the Control Display is switched on, the Wel‐ Guest profile
come screen will be displayed.
The guest profile can be activated by any driver.
The following actions can be carried out on the Vehicle settings that are entered when the guest
Welcome screen: profile is active will be stored in the guest profile.
▷ Selecting a driver profile. In the following cases the guest profile is auto‐
▷ Accessing the Settings menu for driver pro‐ matically active:
files. ▷ A driver profile has not been created yet.
▷ Starting the set-up assistant. ▷ No driver profile has been assigned to the re‐
This option is offered in new vehicle for a lim‐ mote control that was used to unlock the ve‐
ited period of time. hicle.
As soon as the engine is started or any button is ▷ No driver profile has been assigned to the
pressed, the Welcome screen will be hidden. digital key that was used to unlock the vehi‐
cle.
▷ It is not clear which driver profile must be ac‐
tivated.
98
The following limitations apply: remote control, the corresponding driver

▷ The guest profile cannot be renamed. profile will be activated.
▷ It is not possible to assign the recognition to If the remote control is not carried with
the guest profile. you or the remote control is not recog‐
nized, the driver profile can only be se‐
▷ PIN protection is not possible.
lected on the Welcome screen when the
▷ ConnectedDrive countries: The synchroniza‐ PIN protection has been set up.
tion with a ConnectedDrive account is not
▷ "with Digital key"
possible.
A digital key is assigned to the driver pro‐
The guest profile is selected on the Welcome
file. As soon as the vehicle recognizes the
screen or via iDrive:
digital key, the corresponding driver pro‐
1. "CAR" file will be activated.
2. "Driver profiles" If the smartphone with the digital key is
3. "Guest" not carried with you or the digital key is
not recognized, the driver profile can only
4. "Log in" be selected on the Welcome screen when
the PIN protection has been set up.
Creating a driver profile 6. "Activate linkage"
A driver profile is created on the Welcome
screen or via iDrive: Setting up PIN protection
1. "CAR" A driver profile without recognition and without
2. "Driver profiles" PIN protection can be activated and changed by
any driver.
A driver profile with recognition cannot be acti‐
4. "Create driver profile"
vated without remote control and without digital
ConnectedDrive countries: A ConnectedDrive key if the PIN protection was not set up.
account must be assigned to a driver profile. An
Non-ConnectedDrive countries: If PIN protection
existing account can be used or a new account
was not set up or the PIN is not known, the driver
must be created.
profile cannot be activated.
Selecting recognition ConnectedDrive countries: If PIN protection was

not set up or the PIN is not known, the driver
The settings for the recognition are entered on profile can be activated with the access data of
the Welcome screen or via iDrive: the corresponding ConnectedDrive account.
1. "CAR" The setup is carried out on the Welcome screen
2. "Driver profiles" or via iDrive:
3. Move the Controller to the right. 1. "CAR"
4. "Driver recognition" 2. "Driver profiles"
5. Select desired setting: 3. "Driver recognition"
▷ "with vehicle key" 4. "using PIN"
A remote control is assigned to the driver
profile. As soon as the vehicle detects the
99
Changing/canceling the nectedDrive account. It is thereby possible to

recognition function use the personal settings in other BMW vehicles
with ConnectedDrive access as well.
If the vehicle and remote control will be handed
over for maintenance, for example, the recogni‐ The synchronization with the ConnectedDrive
tion function should be canceled with the remote account is enabled in the set-up assistant or via
control. The handed over remote control can iDrive:
then no longer be used to access the personal 1. "CAR"
driver profile. If the driver profile was protected
2. "Driver profiles"
with a PIN, undesired access will no longer be
possible. 3. "Settings"
If another remote control or another digital key is 4. "Synchronize driver profile"

assigned to a driver profile, the current assign‐ 5. "Synchronize driver profile"
ment must be canceled first.
Via iDrive: Renaming a driver profile
1. "CAR" Non-ConnectedDrive countries:
2. "Driver profiles" The name that was assigned when the driver
profile was set up can be changed via iDrive:
3. "Driver recognition"
4. "with vehicle key" 1. "CAR"
or 2. "Driver profiles"
"with Digital key" 3. Select driver profile.
5. "Activate linkage" 4. "Settings"

5. Enter a profile name.
Selecting a driver profile 6. Select the symbol.
Depending on the recognition setting, the driver
profile will be selected automatically. Selecting a profile picture
If the guest profile is active, the driver profile will Via iDrive:
be selected on the Welcome screen or via iDrive:
1. "CAR"
1. "CAR" 2. "Driver profiles"
2. "Driver profiles" 3. "Avatar"
3. Select driver profile. 4. Select the desired profile picture.
4. "Log in"
All settings stored in the called-up driver profile Deleting the driver profile
are automatically applied. Via iDrive:
1. "CAR"
Switching the synchronization
2. "Driver profiles"
with the ConnectedDrive
account on/off 3. "Settings"
ConnectedDrive countries: 4. "Remove driver profile"
The stored settings in the personal driver profile 5. Select the desired driver profile.
can additionally be stored in the personal Con‐ 6. "Delete now"
100
ConnectedDrive countries: If the driver profile tings cannot be changed and personal settings
was synchronized with a ConnectedDrive ac‐ cannot be displayed.
count, the stored data in the ConnectedDrive ac‐ Additionally, the following actions are carried out:
count will be retained.
▷ The volume of the audio system is limited.
System limits ▷ The integrated remote control is deactivated.
A clear detection of the desired remote control ▷ DSC cannot be switched off.
may not be possible in the following cases, for ▷ The tailgate can be locked and disconnected
example: from the central locking system.
▷ The driver unlocks the vehicle via Comfort
Access and has multiple remote controls with Functional requirements
him or her. ▷ At least one driver profile has been created.
▷ The driver changes, but the vehicle is not ▷ A driver profile or the guest profile is active.
locked and unlocked. ▷ At least one driver profile has an assigned
▷ When multiple remote controls are located ConnectedDrive account.
outside on the driver's side of the vehicle.
If the remote control was not detected clearly, Accessing the menu for the valet
unlock the vehicle by pressing button for the de‐ parking mode
sired remote control.
ConnectedDrive countries: Via the switch-off screen
A driver profile can only be created and After switching off drive-ready state the switch-
synchronized with the ConnectedDrive account off screen will be displayed. Select the entry for
when cellular reception is available. the valet parking mode on the switch-off screen.
The use of personal settings that are stored in
the ConnectedDrive account in other vehicles is Via the display bar at the upper edge
subject to technical limitations. For example, set‐ of the Control Display
tings may be stored for a system that is not avail‐ 1. Tip the Controller up
able, or available in a non-compatible version, in
2. "Valet parking mode"
other vehicles.
Via the vehicle settings

Valet parking mode Via iDrive:
1. "CAR"
Concept 2. "Settings"
In the valet parking mode, the Control Display is 3. "General settings"
locked and operation via iDrive is no longer pos‐
4. "Valet parking mode"
sible.
For example, this mode can be used when the
vehicle is handed over for valet parking.
General information
In the valet parking mode, it is not possible to
change vehicle settings via iDrive. Personal set‐
101
Activating the valet parking "Lock tailgate as well"

mode The tailgate will be locked and disconnected
from the central locking system.
General information 4. "Activate now"
Before activating the valet parking mode, a PIN This PIN can be used once to deactivate the
must be set up to be able to deactivate the valet valet parking mode for the active guest pro‐
parking mode at a future time. file.
The procedure for entering the PIN varies de‐
pending on the active driver profile. Deactivating valet parking mode
Driver profile with PIN General information

A PIN has been stored for the active driver pro‐ The lock screen of the valet parking mode is dis‐
file. played on the Control Display.
It is not necessary to enter another PIN. The deactivation of the valet parking mode de‐
pends on which driver profile is selected on the
1. Select desired setting:
lock screen.
"Lock tailgate as well"
The tailgate will be locked and disconnected Driver profile with PIN
from the central locking system. Regardless of which driver activated the valet
2. "Activate now" parking mode, a driver can deactivate the valet
parking mode by entering his PIN.
Driver profile without PIN 1. Select driver profile.
A PIN must be assigned to the driver profile.
2. Enter the assigned PIN for the driver profile.
1. "PIN" If you forgot the PIN, the valet parking mode
2. Enter PIN. must be deactivated by entering the assigned
3. Select desired setting: ConnectedDrive access data.
▷ "Lock tailgate as well"

Driver profile without PIN
The tailgate will be locked and discon‐
The valet parking mode was activated by another
nected from the central locking system.
person. To deactivate the valet parking mode, a
▷ "Activate linkage" driver without a PIN has to enter the access data
This PIN will be stored for the active driver for his ConnectedDrive account.
profile.
1. Select driver profile.
4. "Activate now"
2. Enter the ConnectedDrive access data as‐
signed to the driver profile.
Guest profile
The guest profile is the active driver profile. Guest profile
A PIN must be entered. In the guest profile, the valet parking mode can
1. "PIN" only be deactivated if the valet parking mode was
activated in the guest profile.
2. Enter PIN.
3. Select desired setting: 1. Select guest profile.
102
2. Enter the PIN that was specified during acti‐ ▷ "Flash when locking/unlocking"
vation. Unlocking is signaled by two flashes, lock‐
If the PIN has been forgotten, the valet parking ing by one.
mode must be deactivated via a personal driver ▷ With alarm system:
profile.
"Sound when locking/unlocking"
Unlocking is confirmed with two sound
Settings signals, locking is confirmed with one
sound signal.
General information Folding mirrors automatically

Depending on the vehicle equipment and coun‐
Via iDrive:
try version, various settings for opening and clos‐
ing are possible. 1. "CAR"
These settings are stored for the driver profile 2. "Settings"
currently used. 3. "Doors/Access"
4. "Fold mirrors in when locked"
Unlocking and locking
Locking the vehicle folds in the exterior mir‐
rors automatically. Unlocking the vehicle au‐
Doors
tomatically folds out the exterior mirrors.
Via iDrive:
1. "CAR" Automatic unlocking
3. "Key button settings" 1. "CAR"
4. Select the symbol. 2. "Settings"
5. Select desired setting: 3. "Doors/Access"
▷ "Driver's door only" 4. "Unlock at end of trip"
Only the driver's door and the fuel filler After drive-ready state is switched off by
flap are unlocked. Pressing again unlocks pressing the Start/Stop button, the locked ve‐
the entire vehicle. hicle is automatically unlocked.
▷ "All doors"
The entire vehicle is unlocked. Automatic locking
Via iDrive:
Confirmation signals from the 1. "CAR"
vehicle
2. "Settings"
Via iDrive:
3. "Doors/Access"
1. "CAR" 4. Select desired setting:
2. "Settings" ▷ "Lock automatically"
3. "Doors/Access" The vehicle locks automatically after a
4. Deactivate or activate the desired confirma‐ short period of time if no door is opened
tion signals: after unlocking.
103
▷ "Lock after starting to drive" To open the upper and lower tailgate at
The vehicle locks automatically after you the same time, the upper tailgate must be
drive off. closed when the button is pressed.
This setting also applies to the touchless open‐
Tailgate ing of the tailgate.
Opening height of the upper tailgate Tailgate and doors

You can set how far the upper tailgate can be The button of the remote control can be config‐
opened. ured to control which part of the tailgate will be
opened and if the doors will be unlocked at the
When adjusting the opening height, make sure
same time.
the clearance above the tailgate is at least
4 in/10 cm. ▷
Via iDrive:
Via iDrive:
1. "CAR"
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
2. "Settings"
3. "Doors/Access"
3. "Key button settings"
4. "Tailgate"
4. Select the symbol.
5. "Opening height"
6. Monitor the tailgate and set the desired
opening height. ▷ "Upper tailgate"
The upper tailgate is opened.
With Comfort Access: upper or both ▷ "Upper tailgate + door(s)"
tailgates The tailgate is opened and the doors un‐
The button in the car's interior can be set locked.
up to open only the upper tailgate or the ▷ "Both tailgates"
upper and lower tailgate together:
The upper and lower tailgate will be
Via iDrive: opened.
▷ "Both tailgates + door(s)"
1. "CAR"
The upper and lower tailgate will be
2. "Settings"
opened and the doors unlocked.
3. "Key button settings"
4. "Tailgate" Comfort Access
▷ "Upper tailgate" Touchless locking/unlocking
Only the upper tailgate opens. 1. "CAR"
▷ "Both tailgates" 2. "Settings"
The upper and lower tailgate will be 3. "Doors/Access"

opened together. 4. "Comfort Access"
104
▷ "Unlock when approaching"

Alarm system
▷ "Lock when walking away"
Touchless opening of the tailgate

General information
When the vehicle is locked, the vehicle alarm
For touchless unlocking, a setting can be en‐
system reacts to the following changes:
tered to open only the upper tailgate or the up‐
per and lower tailgate together: ▷ Opening a door, the hood, or the tailgate.
Via iDrive: ▷ Movements in the car's interior.
▷ Changes in the vehicle tilt, e. g., during at‐
1. "CAR"
tempts at stealing a wheel or when towing
2. "Settings" the vehicle.
3. "Key button settings" ▷ Disconnected battery voltage.
4. "Tailgate" ▷ Improper use of the socket for OBD Onboard
5. Select desired setting: Diagnosis.
▷ "Upper tailgate" The alarm system signals the following changes
Only the upper tailgate opens. visually and acoustically:
▷ "Both tailgates" ▷ Acoustic alarm:
The upper and lower tailgate will be Depending on local regulations, the acoustic
opened together. alarm may be suppressed.
To open the upper and lower tailgate at ▷ Visual alarm:

the same time, the upper tailgate must be By flashing the exterior lighting.
closed when the button is pressed.
This setting also applies to the opening of the Switching on/off
tailgate in the interior. When you unlock and lock the vehicle, either
with the remote control or with Comfort Access,
Establishing idle state after the alarm system is switched off and on at the
opening the front doors same time.
Via iDrive:
Opening the doors with the alarm
1. "CAR" system switched on
2. "Settings" The alarm system is triggered when a door is
3. "Doors/Access" opened if the door was unlocked using the
4. "Turn off vehicle after opening door" integrated key in the door lock.
Opening the front doors establishes the idle Switching off the alarm, refer to page 107.
state, refer to page 43.
Opening the tailgate with the
alarm system switched on
The tailgate can be opened even when the alarm
system is switched on.
105
After the tailgate is closed, it is locked and moni‐ An alarm has been triggered.
tored again provided the doors are locked. The
hazard warning system flashes once.
Tilt alarm sensor
Panic mode The tilt of the vehicle is monitored.
You can trigger the alarm system if you find your‐ The alarm system responds in situations such as
self in a dangerous situation. attempts to steal a wheel or when the vehicle is
towed.
▷ Press the button on the remote con‐
trol and hold for at least 3 seconds.
Interior motion sensor
▷ Briefly press the button on the remote control
The windows and the glass sunroof must be
closed for the system to function properly.
Avoiding unintentional alarms
Indicator light on the interior
mirror General information
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor
can trigger an alarm, although no unauthorized
action occurred.
Possible situations for an unwanted alarm:
▷ In automatic vehicle washes.
▷ In duplex garages.
▷ During transport on trains carrying vehicles, at
sea or on a trailer.
▷ With animals in the vehicle.
▷ The indicator light flashes briefly every 2 sec‐
onds: ▷ When the vehicle is locked after start of fuel‐
ing.
The alarm system is switched on.
The tilt alarm sensor and the interior motion sen‐
▷ Indicator light flashes for approx. 10 seconds,
sor can be switched off in such situations.
then it flashes briefly every 2 seconds:
Interior motion sensor and tilt alarm sensor Switching off the tilt alarm sensor
are not active, as doors, hood, or tailgate are and interior motion sensor
not correctly closed. Correctly closed access
points are secured. Press the button on the remote control
within 10 seconds as soon as the vehicle is
When the still open access points are closed,
locked.
interior motion sensor and tilt alarm sensor
will be switched on. The indicator light lights up for approx. 2 sec‐
onds and then continues to flash.
▷ The indicator light goes out after unlocking:
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor
The vehicle has not been tampered with.
are switched off until the vehicle is locked again.
▷ The indicator light flashes after unlocking un‐
til drive-ready state is switched on, but no
longer than approx. 5 minutes:
106
Switching off the alarm ▷ The remote control is in the car's interior.
▷ Unlock the vehicle using the remote control,
if needed, through emergency detection of Opening
the remote control, refer to page 80. ▷ Press the switch to the resistance
▷ With Comfort Access: if you are carrying the point.
remote control on your person, grasp the The window opens while the switch is being
driver side or front passenger side door han‐ held.
dle completely. ▷ Press the switch beyond the resist‐
ance point.
Power windows The window opens automatically. Pressing

the switch again stops the motion.
Convenient opening via the remote control, refer
Safety information to page 77.
WARNING Closing
When operating the windows, body parts and ▷ Pull the switch to the resistance
objects can be jammed. There is a risk of injury point.
or risk of damage to property. Make sure that The window closes while the switch is being
the area of movement of the windows is clear held.
▷ Pull the switch beyond the resist‐
ance point.
Overview The window closes automatically if the door
is closed. Pulling again stops the motion.
Convenient closing via the remote control, refer
to page 78.
Closing via Comfort Access, refer to page 87.
Jam protection system
General information
If closing force exceeds a specific threshold as a
Power windows window closes, closing is interrupted.
The window opens slightly.
Safety switch
Safety information
Functional requirements WARNING

The windows can be operated under the follow‐ Accessories on the windows such as antennas
ing conditions. can impact jam protection. There is a risk of in‐
▷ Standby state is established. jury. Do not install accessories in the area of
▷ Drive-ready state is established. movement of the windows.
107
Closing without the jam protection Roller sunblinds, rear side

system
In case of danger from the outside or if ice might
windows
prevent normal closing, proceed as follows:
Safety information
1. Pull the switch past the resistance
point and hold it there. WARNING
The window closes with limited jam protec‐ With closed roller sunblinds and open windows,
tion. If the closing force exceeds a specific the roller sunblinds may be strained while driv‐
threshold, closing is interrupted. ing due to the wind. The roller sunblinds may
be damaged and vehicle occupants may be
2. Pull the switch past the resistance harmed. There is a risk of injury. Do not open
point again within approx. 4 seconds and hold the windows while driving if the roller sunblinds
it there. are closed.
The window closes without jam protection.
Pull out the roller sunblind at the strap and hook
Safety switch it onto the bracket.
Concept
Glass sunroof
With the safety switch, it is possible to block par‐
ticular functions in the rear. This makes sense,
for instance if children or animals are carried in General information
the rear. The glass sunroof and the sun protection are op‐
If an accident of a certain severity occurs, the erated using the same switch.
safety function is switched off automatically.
Safety information
General information
The following functions can be locked by press‐ WARNING
ing the safety switch: Body parts can be jammed when operating the
▷ Seat adjustments in the rear. glass sunroof. There is a risk of injury. Make
▷ Opening and closing of the rear windows us‐ sure that the area of movement of the glass
ing the switches in the rear. sunroof is clear during opening and closing.
Switching on/off
Press the button.
The LED lights up if the safety function
is switched on.
108
Overview Opening/closing the glass

sunroof and sun protection
separately
▷ Press the switch in the desired
direction to the resistance
point and hold it there.
Holding down the switch
opens the sun protection. If
the sun protection is already
fully open, the glass sunroof
Opening/closing the glass sun‐ opens.
roof. The glass sunroof closes
while the switch is being held.
If the glass sunroof is already
closed or in the tilted position,
the sun protection closes.
Functional requirements ▷ Press the switch in the desired direction past
The glass sunroof and the sun protection can be the resistance point.
operated under the following conditions.
The sun protection opens automatically. If the
▷ Standby state is established. sun protection is already fully open, the glass
▷ Drive-ready state is established. sunroof opens automatically.
▷ The remote control is in the car's interior. The glass sunroof closes automatically. If the
glass sunroof is already closed or in the tilted
Lifting/closing glass sunroof position, the sun protection closes automati‐
cally.
Push switch briefly upward.
Pressing the switch upward stops the motion.
▷ The closed glass sunroof tilts
and the sun protection opens
slightly. Opening/closing the glass
▷ The opened glass sunroof sunroof and sun protection
closes until it is in the tilted together
position. The sun protection
Briefly press the switch twice in
does not move.
succession in the desired direc‐
▷ The tilted glass sunroof closes. tion past the resistance point.
The glass sunroof and sun pro‐
tection move together. Pressing
the switch upward stops the motion.
Convenient opening via the remote control, refer

to page 77.
Closing via Comfort Access, refer to page 87.
109
Comfort position
In some models, the wind noises in the car's in‐
terior are lowest when the glass sunroof is not
fully open. In these models, the automatic func‐
tion initially only opens the glass sunroof up to
this comfort position. 1. Close all doors.
Pressing the switch again opens the glass sun‐ 2. Push the switch forward past the resistance
roof fully. point and hold.
The glass sunroof closes without jam protection.
Jam protection system
Initializing after a power
General information interruption
If the closing force exceeds a certain value when
closing the glass sunroof, the closing operation is General information
interrupted once the roof reaches the half-open After a power failure during the opening or clos‐
position, or it is stopped when closing from the ing process, the glass sunroof can only be oper‐
tilted position. ated to a limited extent.
The glass sunroof opens slightly. The system can be initialized under the following
conditions.
Closing from the open position ▷ The vehicle is parked in a horizontal position.
without jam protection
▷ The drive-ready state is established.
If there is an external danger, proceed as follows:
▷ The external temperature is above
41 ℉/5 ℃.
During initialization, the glass sunroof closes
without jam protection.
Make sure that the closing area is clear.
1. Close all doors.
Initializing the system
2. Push the switch forward past the resistance
point and hold. Press the switch up and hold it
The glass sunroof closes with limited jam until the initialization is complete:
protection. If the closing force exceeds a spe‐
cific threshold, closing is interrupted.
3. Push the switch forward again past the resist‐
Initialization begins within 15 seconds.
ance point and hold until the glass sunroof
closes without jam protection. Make sure that ▷ If the glass sunroof is closed, it opens then
the closing area is clear. closes again.
▷ If the glass sunroof is open, it first closes,
Closing from the raised position then opens and closes again.
without jam protection Initialization is complete once the glass sunroof
In the event of danger, proceed as follows: and sun protection have opened then closed
again.
110
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel CONTROLS
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel

options
WARNING
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ Seat adjustments while driving can lead to un‐
cific and optional features offered with the series. expected movements of the seat. Vehicle con‐
It also describes features and functions that are trol could be lost. There is a risk of an accident.
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due Only adjust the seat on the driver's side when
to the selected options or country versions. This the vehicle is stationary.
WARNING
served.
With a backrest inclined too far to the rear, the
efficacy of the safety belt can no longer be en‐
Sitting safely sured. There is a risk of sliding under the safety
belt in an accident. There is a risk of injuries or
An ideal seating position that meets the needs of danger to life. Adjust the seat prior to starting
the occupants can make a vital contribution to the trip. Adjust the backrest so that it is in the
relaxed, fatigue-free driving. most upright position as possible and do not
adjust again while driving.
In the event of an accident, the correct seating
position plays an important role. Follow the infor‐
mation in the following chapters:
WARNING
▷ Seats, refer to page 111.
There is a risk of jamming when moving the
▷ Safety belts, refer to page 117.
seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage
▷ Head restraints, refer to page 119. to property. Make sure that the area of move‐
▷ Airbags, refer to page 176. ment of the seat is clear prior to any adjust‐
ment.
Seats, front
General information
The seat adjustment for the driver's seat is
stored for the driver profile, refer to page 97, cur‐
rently used. When a driver profile is selected, the
stored position is called up automatically.
The current seat position can be stored using
the memory function, refer to page 124.
111
CONTROLS Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel
Overview Seat tilt
1 Backrest width Move switch up or down.

2 Thigh support
3 Forward/backward, height, seat tilt Backrest tilt
4 Upper backrest
5 Backrest tilt, head restraint
6 Lumbar support
Forward/backward
Move switch forward or backward.
Thigh support
Multifunctional seat
Push switch forward or backward.
Height
Press the switch.
Push switch up or down.
112
Sport seat To make it easier to enter and exit the vehicle,

the backrest width temporarily opens fully.
Settings
▷ Press the front section of the
button:
The backrest width de‐
creases.
▷ Press the rear section of the
button:
Pull the lever at the front of the seat and push
The backrest width increases.
the thigh support forward or back.
Upper backrest
Lumbar support
Concept
Concept
The upper backrest supports the back in the
The curvature of the seat backrest can be ad‐
shoulder area. A correct setting leads to a re‐
justed in a way that it supports the lumbar region
laxed seating position and reduces strain on the
of the spine. The lower back and the spine are
shoulder muscles.
supported for upright posture.
General information
Settings
If the driver's door is opened when the drive-
▷ Press the front/rear section of ready state is switched off, the upper backrest
the button: moves into the standard position.
The curvature is increased/
decreased. Settings
▷ Press the upper/lower section
of the button:
The curvature is shifted up/
down.
Backrest width
Concept
Adjusting the backrest width may improve lateral ▷ Press the front section of the button:
support when taking corners.
The upper backrest is inclined forward.
General information ▷ Press the rear section of the button:
You can change the backrest width by adjusting The upper backrest is inclined backward.
the side wings of the backrest.
113
Gentleman function rest tilt. The backrest tilt for the center section is
adjusted together with the left rear seat backrest.
Concept
The front passenger seat can be adjusted with
Safety information
the switches of the driver's seat, for instance to
increase the legroom in the rear. WARNING
There is a risk of jamming when folding down
Overview the center armrest in the rear. There is a risk of
injury. Make sure that the area of movement of
the center armrest is clear during folding down.
WARNING
When folding back the second row of seats,
there is a danger of jamming. There is a risk of
injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure
that the area of movement of the second row of
Gentleman function seats is clear prior to folding down.
Switching on WARNING
Seats in the second row of seats are not locked
1. Press the button. The LED lights up. when they are folded down and they can move.
2. Adjust the front passenger seat on the driv‐ There is a risk of injury and risk of damage to
er's seat. property. Only fold the seats in the second row
If needed, store the memory position, refer to down while loading. When driving without a
page 124, for the front passenger seat. load, fold back and lock the seats in the second
row before driving away.
Switching off
Press and hold the button until the LED Overview
goes out.
The function deactivates itself automatically after
some time.
Rear seats
Second row of seats
General information 1 Resetting to standard position

The seats of the second row of seats can be ad‐ 2 Forward/backward
justed forward and backward including the back‐ 3 Backrest tilt
114
Resetting to standard position Access to the third row of seats
NOTICE
Vehicle parts can be damaged when folding
down the second row of seats with folded
down center part. There is a risk of damage to
property. Before folding down the second row
of seats, fold the center armrest up.
1. Fold middle section of the second seat row

Press the button to reset to standard position. up as necessary.
The process is canceled if the button is pressed 2. Push the switch once forward or backward.
again.
Forward/backward
The seat automatically moves to the respective

end position.
To avoid a collision, the position of the front
Push switch forward or backward. seats may be adjusted automatically.
If the second row of seats is not locked, an
Backrest tilt acoustic signal will sound and a warning symbol
will be displayed in the instrument cluster.
Third row of seats
General information
The third row of seats consists of two divided
seats.
Move switch forward or backward.
115
Fold up the backrest Exiting from the third row of seats
Safety information
WARNING
If a rear seat backrest is not locked, unsecured
cargo can be thrown about the car’s interior;
for instance, in the event of an accident, braking
or an evasive maneuver. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that the rear seat backrest is locked
after folding it back. The second row of seats can be folded down
with the switch, refer to page 115.
1. Fold up and engage the backrest.
Emergency release of rear seat
backrest
General information
The two outer backrests of the second seat row
can be folded down manually, such as in the
event of an electrical fault.
Unlocking from the second seat row

2. Adjust the head restraint correctly as needed.
Fold the backrest down

1. Move the head restraints down, refer to
page 121.
2. Slide the lever forward to unlock the backrest.
Pull the loop and fold the rear seat backrest for‐
ward.
3. Fold the backrest down.
116
Unlocking from the third seat row The upper shoulder strap's anchorage point will
be correct for adult seat occupants of every build
if the seat is correctly adjusted.
Safety information
WARNING
Use of a safety belt to buckle more than one
person will potentially defeat the ability of the
safety belt to serve its protective function.
Pull the loop and fold the rear seat backrest for‐ There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Do
ward. not allow more than one person to wear a sin‐
gle safety belt. Infants and children are not al‐
lowed on an occupant's lap, but must be trans‐
Safety switch for the rear
ported and secured in designated child
Press the button on the driver's door. restraint systems.
This locks various functions so that they cannot

be operated from the rear. Safety switch, refer to WARNING
page 108.
The efficacy of safety gear, including safety
belts, can be limited or lost when safety belts
Safety belts are fastened incorrectly. An incorrectly fastened
safety belt can cause additional injuries, for in‐
stance in the event of an accident or during
Number of safety belts and braking and evasive maneuvers. There is a risk
safety belt buckles of injuries or danger to life. Make sure that all
occupants are wearing safety belts correctly.
The vehicle is fitted with five or seven safety
belts to ensure occupant safety. However, they
can only offer protection when adjusted cor‐
rectly. WARNING
The two outer safety belt buckles of the second With a rear backrest that is not locked, the pro‐
row of seats are intended for the persons sitting tective function of the middle safety belt is not
on the left and right. guaranteed. There is a risk of injuries or danger
The center safety belt buckle of the second row to life. If you are using the middle safety belt,
of seats is intended for the person sitting in the lock the wider rear seat backrest.
middle.
General information WARNING

Always make sure that safety belts are being The efficacy of safety gear, including safety
worn by the occupants before driving off. The belts, may not be fully functional or fail in the
airbags supplement the safety belts as an addi‐ following situations:
tional safety device. The airbags are not a substi‐
tute for safety belts.
117
▷ The safety belts or safety belt buckles are To ease accessibility to the safety belt buckle, an
damaged, soiled, or changed in any other adjustable slider is available on the belt to help
way. position the buckle when not in use.
▷ Belt tensioners or belt retractors were When the safety belt is fastened, the driver's and
modified. passenger's belt straps are automatically tight‐
Safety belts can be imperceptibly damaged in ened once after driving away.
the event of an accident. There is a risk of inju‐
ries or danger to life. Do not modify safety belts, Unbuckling the safety belt
safety belt buckles, belt tensioners, belt retrac‐ 1. Hold the safety belt firmly.
tors or belt anchors and keep them clean. Have
2. Press the red button in the safety belt buckle.
the safety belts checked after an accident at
the dealer’s service center or another qualified 3. Guide the safety belt back into its roll-up
service center or repair shop. mechanism.
Safety belt reminder for driver's

Correct use of safety belts seat and front passenger seat
▷ Wear the safety belt twist-free and tight to
your body over your lap and shoulders. Display in the instrument cluster
▷ Wear the safety belt deep on your hips over The indicator light lights up and a signal
your lap. The safety belt may not press on sounds. Make sure that the safety belts
your stomach. are positioned correctly. The safety belt
▷ Do not rub the safety belt against sharp reminder can also be activated if objects are
edges, or guide it or jam it in across hard or placed on the front passenger seat.
fragile objects.
▷ Avoid thick clothing. Safety belt reminder for rear
▷ Re-tighten the safety belt frequently upward seats
around your upper body.
General information
Buckling the safety belt The safety belt reminder is automatically acti‐
1. Guide the safety belt slowly over shoulder vated each time the engine starts.
and hip to put it on. The safety belt reminder is also activated when a
2. Insert the tongue plate into the safety belt passenger unbuckles a rear seat safety belt dur‐
buckle. The safety belt buckle must engage ing the trip.
audibly.
The indicator light in the instrument cluster illu‐
minates after the engine is started.
118
Symbol Description
WARNING
Green: the safety belt is buckled on
Body parts can be jammed when moving the
the corresponding rear seat.
head restraint. There is a risk of injury. Make
sure that the area of movement is clear when
Red: the safety belt is not buckled on
moving the head restraint.
the corresponding rear seat.
Safety mode WARNING

In critical situations, for instance during an emer‐ Objects on the head restraint reduce the pro‐
gency stop, the front safety belts tighten auto‐ tective effect in the head and neck area. There
matically. is a risk of injury.
If the situation passes without an accident occur‐ ▷ Do not use seat or head restraint covers.
ring, the belt tension relaxes. ▷ Do not hang objects, for instance clothes
If the belt tension does not loosen automatically, hangers, directly on the head restraint.
stop the vehicle and unbuckle the safety belt us‐ ▷ Only use accessories that have been de‐
ing the red button in the safety belt buckle. Fas‐ termined to be safe for attachment to a
ten the safety belt before continuing on your trip. head restraint.
▷ Do not use any accessories, for instance
Front head restraints pillows, while driving.
General information Active head restraint

The current head restraint position can be stored In the event of a rear-end collision with a certain
using the memory function, refer to page 124. severity, the active head restraint automatically
reduces the distance from the head.
Safety information Have the active head restraint checked and if
necessary replaced in the case of damage or if it
was exposed to an accident.
WARNING
A missing protective effect due to removed or Adjusting the height
not correctly adjusted head restraints can
cause injuries in the head and neck area. There
is a risk of injury.
▷ Before driving, install the removed head
restraints on the occupied seats.
▷ Adjust the head restraint so its center sup‐
ports the back of the head at as close to
eye level as possible.
▷ Adjust the distance so that the head re‐
straint is as close as possible to the back Push switch up or down.
of the head. Adjust the distance via the
backrest tilt as needed.
119
Adjusting the distance Rear head restraints

Safety information
WARNING
A missing protective effect due to removed or
not correctly adjusted head restraints can
cause injuries in the head and neck area. There
▷ Back: press the button and push the head re‐ ▷ Before driving, install the removed head
straint toward the rear. restraints on the occupied seats.
▷ Forward: pull the head restraint toward the ▷ Adjust the head restraint so its center sup‐
front. ports the back of the head at as close to
After setting the distance, move the head re‐ eye level as possible.
straint forward or backward slightly, making sure ▷ Adjust the distance so that the head re‐
it engages properly. straint is as close as possible to the back
of the head. Adjust the distance via the
backrest tilt as needed.
Adjusting the side extensions
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when moving the
head restraint. There is a risk of injury. Make
sure that the area of movement is clear when
moving the head restraint.
WARNING
Fold the side extensions on the head restraint
Objects on the head restraint reduce the pro‐
forward for increased lateral support in the rest‐
tective effect in the head and neck area. There
ing position.
▷ Do not use seat or head restraint covers.
Removing ▷ Do not hang objects, for instance clothes
The head restraints cannot be removed. hangers, directly on the head restraint.
▷ Only use accessories that have been de‐
termined to be safe for attachment to a
head restraint.
▷ Do not use any accessories, for instance
pillows, while driving.
120
Folding down the head restraints Cushions for head restraints in

To improve the view to the rear, the outside head the rear
restraints can be folded back. Only fold the head Only use the pillow when the vehicle is switched
restraint back if no one will be sitting in the corre‐ off.
sponding seat.
1. Push the head restraint to a sufficiently high
position.
2. Attach the pillow and place the pillow band
around the back of the head restraint, ar‐
row 1.
▷ To the rear: press the button, arrow 1, and

fold the head restraint backward.
▷ Forward: fold the head restraint toward the
front as far as it will go. Make sure that the
head restraint engages correctly.
3. Close pushbuttons, arrow 2.
Adjusting the height

Exterior mirrors
General information
The mirror on the front passenger side is more
curved than the driver's side mirror.
The mirror setting is stored for the driver profile,
refer to page 97, currently in use. When a driver
profile is selected, the stored position is called up
automatically.
▷ To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and push
The current exterior mirror position can be stored
the head restraint down.
using the memory function, refer to page 124.
▷ To raise: push the head restraint up.
After setting the height, move the head restraint Safety information
up or down slightly, making sure it engages
properly.
WARNING
Objects reflected in the mirror are closer than
Removing they appear. The distance to the traffic behind
The head restraints cannot be removed. could be incorrectly estimated, for instance
while changing lanes. There is a risk of an acci‐
121
dent. Estimate the distance to the traffic behind Press the button.
by looking over your shoulder.
Folding is only possible up to a speed of approx.
15 mph/20 km/h.
Overview
Folding the mirrors in and out is helpful in the fol‐
lowing situations:
▷ In vehicle washes.
▷ On narrow roads.
Mirrors that were folded in are folded out auto‐
matically at a speed of approx. 25 mph/40 km/h.
Automatic heating
Both exterior mirrors are automatically heated as
1 Settings needed and when the drive-ready state is
2 Selecting a mirror, Automatic Curb Monitor switched on.
3 Folding in and out

Automatic dimming feature
The exterior mirror on the driver's side is auto‐
Adjusting electrically matically dimmed. Photocells in the car's interior
Press the button. mirror, refer to page 123, are used to control
this.
The selected mirror moves along with the
button movement.
Automatic Curb Monitor, exterior
mirror
Selecting a mirror
To change over to the other mirror: Concept
Slide the switch. If reverse gear is engaged, the mirror glass on
the front passenger side is tilted downward. This
improves your view of the curb and other low-ly‐
Malfunction ing obstacles when parking, for instance.
In case of an electrical malfunction, adjust the
mirror by pressing the edges of the mirror glass. Activating
Folding in and out 1. Slide the switch to the driver's side

mirror position.
NOTICE 2. Engage selector lever position R.
Depending on the vehicle width, the vehicle When the trailer socket is in use or trailer towing
can be damaged in vehicle washes. There is a is activated, the Automatic Curb Monitor is deac‐
risk of damage to property. Before washing, tivated.
fold in the mirrors by hand or with the button.
122
Deactivating Electric steering wheel

Slide the switch to the passenger's side adjustment
mirror position.
General information
The steering wheel setting is stored for the driver
Interior mirror profile, refer to page 97, currently in use. When a
driver profile is selected, the position is accessed
automatically when the drive-ready state is
General information switched on.
The interior mirror is dimmed automatically. The current steering wheel position can be
Photocells are used for control: stored using the memory function, refer to
▷ In the mirror glass. page 124.
▷ On the back of the mirror.
Settings
Overview
Move the steering wheel to the preferred height

and angle to suit your seating position by press‐
ing the switch.
▷ Keep the photocells clean.
Assistance getting in and out
▷ Do not cover the area between the interior
mirror and the windshield. The steering wheel temporarily moves into the
highest position to make it easier to enter and
exit the vehicle.
Steering wheel
Safety information
WARNING
Steering wheel adjustments while driving can
lead to unexpected steering wheel movements.
Vehicle control could be lost. There is a risk of
an accident. Adjust the steering wheel while
the vehicle is stationary only.
123
Heated steering wheel Safety information
Overview WARNING
Using the memory function while driving can
lead to unexpected seat or steering wheel
movements. Vehicle control could be lost.
There is a risk of an accident. Only retrieve the
memory function when the vehicle is stationary.
WARNING
There is a risk of jamming when moving the
Heated steering wheel seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage
to property. Make sure that the area of move‐
ment of the seat is clear prior to any adjust‐
Switching on/off ment.
Press the button.
A Check Control message is displayed.
Overview
If the trip is resumed within approx. 15 minutes
after an intermediate stop, the heated steering
wheel activates automatically if the function was
switched on at the end of the last trip.
Memory function
Concept
The following settings can be stored and, if nec‐ The memory buttons are located on the front
essary, retrieved using the memory function: doors.
▷ Seat position.
▷ Exterior mirror position. Storing
▷ Steering wheel position. 1. Set the desired position.
▷ Height of the Head-up Display.
2. Press the button. The writing on the
button lights up.
General information
3. Press desired button 1 or 2 while the LED is
Two memory locations with different settings
lit. A signal sounds.
can be set for each driver profile, refer to
page 97.
The following settings are not stored:
Calling up settings
Press selected button 1 or 2.
▷ Backrest width.
The stored position is called up.
▷ Lumbar support.
124
The procedure stops when a switch for setting Switching on

the seat is pressed or one of the memory but‐
tons is pressed again. Press the button once for each intensity
level.
While driving, the seat position adjustment on
the driver's side is interrupted after a short time. The maximum intensity level is reached when
three LEDs are lit.
Massage function Switching off

Press and hold the button until the
Concept LEDs go out.
Depending on the program, the massage func‐
tion ensures relaxed muscles and better blood
circulation and can avoid fatigue. Adjusting the massage program
Via iDrive:
General information 1. "CAR"
Eight different massage programs can be se‐ 2. "Settings"
lected:
3. "Seat comfort"
▷ Pelvis activation.
4. Select desired seat.
▷ Upper body activation.
5. "Seat massage"
▷ Full body activation.
▷ Back massage.
▷ Shoulder massage.
▷ Lumbar massage. Seat and armrest heating
▷ Upper body training.
▷ Full body training. Concept
The system heats seats and armrests as
Overview needed.
General information
Seat heating can also be used without armrest
heating. Deactivate the armrest heating as
needed.
Massage function
125
Overview If the trip is continued within approx. 15 minutes

after a stop, functions are activated automatically
Front with the temperature selected last.
Switching off
LEDs go out.
Seat heating distribution

The heating action in the seat cushion and the
seat backrest can be distributed in different
ways.
Seat and armrest heating
Via iDrive:
1. "CAR"
Rear 2. "Settings"
3. "Climate control"
4. "Seat and armrest heating"
5. Select desired seat.
6. Press the Controller and turn it to set the seat
heating distribution.
Switching armrest heating on/off

Via iDrive:
Seat heating
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
Switching on 3. "Climate control"
4. "Seat and armrest heating"
1. Press the button. 5. Select desired seat.
2. Select the temperature level: 6. "Heat armrests together with seat"
▷ Press the button once for each level.
▷ Turn the controller until the desired level
is reached. Press the Controller. Active seat ventilation
▷ Select the desired level on the touch‐
screen. Concept
Highest level reached when three red LEDs Integrated fans in the seat and armrest areas
light up on the button or three red bars are provide a comfortable seat temperature.
shown on the control display.
When ECO PRO is activated, refer to page 322,
the heater output is reduced.
126
Overview When both systems are active, a push of the but‐

ton reduces the intensity of both functions by
one level each.
The last active function or function that is config‐
ured with higher intensity will be activated di‐
rectly when the system is switched on again.
When both functions with the same intensity
configuration are deactivated, the system will au‐
tomatically activate the seat heating.
Overview
Active seat ventilation
Switching on

2. Select the ventilation level:
▷ Press the button once for each level.
▷ Turn the controller until the desired level
is reached. Press the Controller. Seat climate control
▷ Select the desired level on the touch‐
screen.
Highest level reached when three blue LEDs Switching on
light up on the button or three blue bars are
shown on the control display. 1. Press the button.
2. Select the desired setting via the touch‐
Switching off screen.
Press and hold the button until the One red and one blue LED each will light up.
LEDs go out.
Switching off
Seat climate control LEDs go out.
Concept
The seat climate control combines the functions
of the seat heating and active seat ventilation.
General information
The seat heating and active seat ventilation are
operated with a common button on the climate
control panel.
127
CONTROLS Transporting children safely
Transporting children safely

Vehicle features and Always transport children in the
rear seat
options
General information
cific and optional features offered with the series. Accident research shows that the safest place
It also describes features and functions that are for children is in the rear seat.
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due Transport children younger than 13 years of age
to the selected options or country versions. This or shorter than 5 ft/150 cm only in the rear seat
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ in suitable child restraint systems designed for
tems. When using these functions and systems, the age, weight and size of the child. Children
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ 13 years of age or older must wear a safety belt
served. as soon as a suitable child restraint system can
no longer be used due to their age, weight and
size.
The right place for children
Safety information
Safety information
WARNING
WARNING The safety belt cannot be fastened correctly on
Unattended children or animals can cause the children shorter than 5 ft, 150 cm without suita‐
vehicle to move and endanger themselves and ble additional child restraint systems. The effi‐
traffic, for instance due to the following actions: cacy of safety gear, including safety belts, can
be limited or lost when safety belts are fas‐
tened incorrectly. An incorrectly fastened safety
▷ Releasing the parking brake. belt can cause additional injuries, for instance in
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐ the event of an accident or during braking and
dows. evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of injuries or
▷ Engaging selector lever position N. danger to life. Secure children shorter than 5 ft,
150 cm using suitable child restraint systems.
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐ Children on the front passenger
hicle. Take the remote control with you when seat
General information
Before using a child restraint system on the front
passenger seat, ensure that the front, knee, and
side airbags on the front passenger side are de‐
activated. Automatic deactivation of front-seat
passenger airbags, refer to page 178.
128
Transporting children safely CONTROLS
Safety information sure that the child restraint system fits securely
against the backrest. If possible, adjust the
backrest tilt for all affected backrests and cor‐
WARNING rectly adjust the seats. Make sure that seats
Active front-seat passenger airbags can injure a and backrests are securely engaged or locked.
child in a child restraint system when the air‐ If possible, adjust the height of the head re‐
bags are activated. There is a risk of injury. straints or remove them.
Make sure that the front-seat passenger air‐
bags are deactivated and that the PASSEN‐
GER AIRBAG OFF indicator light lights up. Before mounting
Before mounting child restraint systems, ensure
that the rear seat backrests are locked.
Installing child restraint Move the rear seats into the rearmost position to
facilitate assembly of the child restraint system.
systems
On the front passenger seat
General information
Pay attention to the specifications and the oper‐ Deactivating airbags
ating and safety information of the child restraint
system manufacturer when selecting, installing,
WARNING
and using child restraint systems.
Active front-seat passenger airbags can injure a
child in a child restraint system when the air‐
Safety information
bags are activated. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that the front-seat passenger air‐
WARNING bags are deactivated and that the PASSEN‐
The protective effect of damaged child restraint GER AIRBAG OFF indicator light lights up.
systems or of child restraint systems exposed
to an accident and their fastening systems can After installing a child restraint system in the
be limited or lost. A child can e.g.,not suffi‐ front passenger seat, make sure that the front,
ciently restrained, for instance in the event of knee and side airbags on the front passenger
an accident or braking and evasive maneuvers. side are deactivated.
There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Have Deactivate the front-seat passenger airbags au‐
damaged child restraint systems or of child re‐ tomatically, refer to page 178.
straint systems exposed to an accident and
their fastening systems checked and possibly Seat position and height
replaced by the dealer’s service center or an‐
Before installing a child restraint system, move
other qualified service center or repair shop.
the front passenger seat as far back as it will go
and, if possible, bring it up to medium height.
This seat position and height ensures the best
WARNING possible position for the belt and offers optimal
The stability of the child restraint system is lim‐ protection in the event of an accident.
ited or compromised with incorrect seat adjust‐ If the upper anchor of the safety belt is located in
ment or improper installation of the child seat. front of the belt guide of the child seat, move the
There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Make
129
front passenger seat carefully forward until the

best possible belt guide position is reached.
LATCH child restraint fixing
system
Backrest width
Adjustable backrest width: before installing a General information
child restraint system in the front passenger seat, LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for Children.
open the backrest width completely. Do not
Pay attention to the specifications and the oper‐
change the backrest width again and do not call
ating and safety information of the LATCH child
up a memory position.
restraint fixing system manufacturer when se‐
lecting, installing, and using child restraint sys‐
Child seat security tems.
Mounts for the lower LATCH

anchors
General information
The lower anchors may be used to attach the
CRS to the vehicle seat up to a combined child
and CRS weight of 65 lbs/30 kg when the child is
restrained by the internal harnesses.
The safety belts in the rear and the front passen‐
ger safety belt can be permanently locked to fas‐ Safety information
ten child restraint systems.
WARNING
Locking the safety belt
If the LATCH child restraint fixing systems are
1. Pull out the belt strap completely. not correctly engaged, the protective effect of
2. Secure the child restraint system with the the LATCH child restraint fixing system can be
safety belt. limited. There is a risk of injuries or danger to
3. Allow the belt strap to be pulled in and pull it life. Make sure that the lower anchors are se‐
tight against the child restraint system. The curely engaged and that the LATCH child re‐
safety belt is locked. straint fixing system fits securely against the
backrest.
Unlocking the safety belt
1. Unbuckle the safety belt buckle.
2. Remove the child restraint system.
3. Allow the belt strap to be pulled in com‐
pletely.
130
Transporting children safely CONTROLS
Position Child restraint systems

Symbol Meaning with tether strap
The corresponding symbol
shows the mounts for the lower Safety information
LATCH anchors.
Seats equipped with lower an‐ WARNING
chors are marked with a pair, 2, If the upper retaining strap is incorrectly used
of LATCH symbols. for the child restraint system, the protective ef‐
For vehicles equipped with a fect can be reduced. There is a risk of injury.
middle seat: Make sure that the upper retaining strap is not
It is not recommended to use guided across sharp edges and without twist‐
the inner lower anchors of ing to the upper retaining strap.
standard outer LATCH positions
to fasten a child restraint system
on the middle seat. Use the ve‐ WARNING
hicle safety belt instead for the If the rear backrest is not locked, the protective
middle seat. effect of the child restraint system is limited or
there is none. In particular situations, for in‐
Before installing LATCH child stance braking maneuvers or in case of an acci‐
dent, the rear backrest can fold forward. There
restraint fixing systems
is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Make sure
Pull the safety belt away from the area of the that the rear backrests are locked.
child restraint system.
Assembly of LATCH child NOTICE

restraint fixing systems
The anchors for the upper retaining straps of
1. Install child restraint system, see manufactur‐ child restraint systems are only provided for
er's information. these retaining straps. When other objects are
2. Ensure that both LATCH anchors are prop‐ mounted, the anchors can be damaged. There
erly connected. is a risk of damage to property. Only mount
child restraint systems to the upper retaining
straps.
131
Anchors 4. If there is a retaining strap, run it between the

backrest and the cargo cover.
Symbol Meaning 5. Attach the hook of the retaining strap to the
anchor.
The respective symbol shows
the anchor for the upper retain‐ 6. Tighten the retaining strap by pulling it down.
ing strap. Seats with an upper 7. Lower and lock head restraints as needed.
top tether are marked with this
symbol. It can be found on the
rear seat backrest or the rear Locking the doors and
window shelf.
windows in the rear
Routing the retaining strap General information
In certain situations it may be advisable to secure
the rear doors and windows, for instance when
transporting children.
Doors
1 Direction of travel
2 Head restraint
3 Hook for upper retaining strap
4 Anchor
5 Seat backrest
Push the locking lever on the rear doors up.
6 Upper retaining strap
The door can now be opened from the outside
Attaching the upper retaining only.
strap to the anchor

Safety switch for the rear
1. Bring the seat of the second seat row into the
base position, refer to page 115. Press the button on the driver's door.
2. Raise the head restraint, if needed.
This locks various functions so that they cannot
3. Guide the upper retaining strap between or
be operated from the rear. Safety switch, refer to
along both sides of the supports for the head
page 108.
restraint to the anchor.
For the middle seat, guide it over or along
both sides of the head restraint to the anchor
where applicable.
132
Driving CONTROLS
Driving
Vehicle features and General information
options After each engine start using the Start/Stop but‐
ton, the Auto Start/Stop function is ready. The
function is activated from speeds of approx.
3 mph/5 km/h.
It also describes features and functions that are Depending on the selected driving mode, refer to
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due page 148, the system is automatically activated
to the selected options or country versions. This or deactivated.
tems. When using these functions and systems, Engine stop
served. Functional requirements
Steptronic transmission
Start/Stop button The engine is switched off automatically during a
stop under the following conditions:
Concept ▷ The selector lever is in selector lever position
Pressing the Start/Stop button D.
switches drive-ready state on or ▷ The brake pedal remains pressed while the
off, refer to page 43. vehicle is stationary or the vehicle is held by
Drive-ready state is switched on Automatic Hold.
when you depress the brake ▷ The driver's safety belt is buckled or the driv‐
pedal while pressing the Start/Stop button. er's door is closed.
Pressing the Start/Stop button again switches
drive-ready state back off and standby state, re‐ Manual engine stop
fer to page 43, is switched back on. If the engine was not switched off automatically
when the vehicle stopped, the engine can be
switched off manually:
Auto Start/Stop function ▷ Press the brake pedal forcefully again from
the current pedal position.
Concept ▷ Engage selector lever position P.
The Auto Start/Stop function helps save fuel. If all functional preconditions are fulfilled, the en‐
The system switches off the engine during a gine switches off.
stop, for instance in traffic congestion or at traffic
lights. Drive-ready state remains switched on. Air conditioner when the engine is
The engine starts automatically for driving off. switched off
The air flow from the air conditioner is reduced
when the engine is switched off.
133
CONTROLS Driving
Displays in the instrument cluster ▷ The wheels are at a sharp angle or the steer‐
ing wheel is being turned.
General information ▷ Vehicle battery is heavily discharged.
The display in the tachometer in‐ ▷ At higher elevations.
dicates that the Auto Start/Stop ▷ The hood is unlocked.
function is ready for an Automatic
▷ HDC Hill Descent Control is activated.
engine start.
▷ The parking assistant is activated.
The display indicates that the ▷ Stop-and-go traffic.

conditions for an automatic en‐ ▷ Selector lever position in N or R.
gine stop have not been met. ▷ After driving in reverse.
▷ Use of fuel with high ethanol content.
Total time with switched-off engine Starting the engine

ECO PRO, refer to page 322, Functional requirements
driving mode: depending on the
vehicle equipment, the total time Steptronic transmission
that the engine has been
switched off using the Auto Start/ The engine starts automatically under the follow‐
Stop function is displayed on an automatic en‐ ing preconditions:
gine stop. ▷ By releasing the brake pedal.
The total time is automatically reset every time ▷ When Automatic Hold is activated: press the
the vehicle is refueled. accelerator pedal.
Driving off
After the engine starts, accelerate as usual.
The engine is not switched off automatically in
the following situations:
Safety mode
▷ In case of a steep downhill grade.
After the engine switches off automatically, it will
▷ Brake not engaged strongly enough. not start again automatically if any one of the fol‐
▷ The external temperature is high and auto‐ lowing conditions are met:
matic climate control is running. ▷ The driver's safety belt is unbuckled and the
▷ The car's interior has not yet been heated or driver's door is open.
cooled to the required level. ▷ The hood was unlocked.
▷ Where there is a risk of window condensation Some indicator lights light up for a varied length
when the automatic climate control is of time.
switched on.
The engine can only be started via the Start/Stop
▷ Engine or other parts not at operating tem‐ button.
perature.
▷ Engine cooling is required.
134
Driving CONTROLS
System limits Activating/deactivating the

Even if driving off was not intended, the deacti‐ system manually
vated engine starts up automatically in the fol‐
lowing situations: Concept
▷ Excessive warming of the car's interior when The engine is not automatically switched off.
the air conditioning is switched on. The engine is started during an automatic engine
▷ Excessive cooling of the car's interior when stop.
the heating is switched on.
▷ Where there is a risk of window condensation Using the button
when the automatic climate control is
switched on.
▷ The steering wheel is turned.
▷ Change from selector lever position D to N or
R.
▷ Change from selector lever position P to N,
D, or R.
▷ Vehicle battery is heavily discharged.
▷ Start of an oil level measurement.
Press the button.
Intelligent Auto Start/Stop

function Via selector lever position or Driving
Depending on the vehicle equipment and coun‐ Dynamics Control
try-specific version, the vehicle features a variety The Auto Start/Stop function is also deactivated
of sensors for assessing the traffic situation. The in selector lever position M/S or in SPORT driv‐
Intelligent Auto Start/Stop function uses this in‐ ing mode of the Driving Dynamics Control.
formation to adapt to various traffic situations in a
proactive manner.
Display
For instance, this applies to the following situa‐
▷ LED comes on: auto Start/Stop function is
tions:
deactivated.
▷ If a situation is detected in which the stopping
▷ LED goes out: auto Start/Stop function is ac‐
time is expected to be very short, the engine
tivated.
is not switched off automatically. A message
appears on the Control Display, depending
Switching off the vehicle during an
on the situation.
automatic engine stop
▷ If a situation is detected in which the vehicle
needs to drive off immediately, the engine is General information
started automatically.
During an automatic engine stop, the vehicle can
The function may be restricted if the navigation be switched off permanently, for instance when
data is invalid, outdated or not available, for ex‐ leaving it.
ample.
135
CONTROLS Driving
Steptronic transmission ▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,

1. Press the Start/Stop button. turn the front wheels in the direction of the
curb.
▷ Drive-ready state is switched off.
▷ Standby state is switched on.
▷ Selector lever position P is engaged auto‐ wheel chock.
matically.
WARNING
Automatic deactivation Unattended children or animals can cause the
vehicle to move and endanger themselves and
General information traffic, for instance due to the following actions:
In certain situations, the Auto Start/Stop function ▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
is deactivated automatically for safety reasons, ▷ Releasing the parking brake.
for instance if no driver is detected.
dows.
Malfunction
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
The Auto Start/Stop function no longer switches
off the engine automatically. A Check Control ▷ Using vehicle equipment.
message is displayed. It is possible to continue There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
driving. Have the system checked by a dealer’s leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
service center or another qualified service center hicle. Take the remote control with you when
or repair shop. exiting and lock the vehicle.
Parking brake Overview
Concept
The parking brake is used to prevent the vehicle
from rolling when it is parked.
Safety information
WARNING
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and Parking brake
possibly roll away. There is a risk of an accident.
Before exiting, secure the vehicle against roll‐
ing. Setting
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, follow the following: With a stationary vehicle
▷ Set the parking brake. Pull the switch.
The LED lights up.
136
Driving CONTROLS
The indicator light in the instrument clus‐ Automatic Hold

ter illuminates red. The parking brake is
set. Concept
This system assists the driver by automatically
While driving setting and releasing the brake, such as when
moving in stop-and-go traffic.
General information The vehicle is automatically held in place when it
To use as emergency brake while driving. is stationary.
Pull the switch and hold it. The vehicle brakes On uphill grades the system prevents the vehicle
hard while the switch is being pulled. from rolling backward when driving off.
The indicator light in the instrument clus‐
ter illuminates red, a signal sounds, and General information
the brake lights illuminate. Under the following conditions, the parking brake
A Check Control message is displayed. is automatically engaged:
▷ Drive-ready state is switched off.
The parking brake is engaged when the vehicle
▷ The driver's door is opened while the vehicle
is stationary.
is stationary.
With Emergency Stop Assistant ▷ The moving vehicle is brought to a standstill

using the parking brake.
Pull the switch for the parking brake briefly to ac‐
tivate the emergency stop function, refer to
page 209.
Display
The indicator light changes from green
Releasing to red.
Releasing manually Safety information

1. Switch on drive-ready state.
WARNING
2. Press the switch while stepping on the
brake pedal or selector lever position P is set. An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and
The LED and indicator light go out.
The parking brake is released. ing.
Automatic release
against rolling away, follow the following:
The parking brake is released automatically
when you drive away.
The LED and indicator light go out.
turn the front wheels in the direction of the
curb.
wheel chock.
137
CONTROLS Driving
WARNING 2. Press the button.
Unattended children or animals can cause the The LED lights up.
vehicle to move and endanger themselves and The indicator light lights up green.
traffic, for instance due to the following actions:
Automatic Hold is functional.
After every new vehicle start, the last se‐
▷ Releasing the parking brake. lected setting is active.
dows.
Automatic Hold holding the vehicle
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
Function readiness is established and the driv‐
▷ Using vehicle equipment. er's door is closed.
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not After stepping on the brake pedal, for instance
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐ when stopping at a traffic light, the vehicle is au‐
hicle. Take the remote control with you when tomatically secured against rolling.
The indicator light lights up green.
NOTICE
If the vehicle is stationary, Automatic Hold en‐ Driving off
gages the parking brake and prevents the vehi‐ Step on the accelerator pedal to drive off.
cle from rolling in a vehicle wash. There is a risk The brake is released automatically and the indi‐
of damage to property. Deactivate Automatic cator light is no longer illuminated.
Hold prior to entering the vehicle wash.
Activating the parking brake
automatically
Overview
The parking brake is automatically set if drive-
ready state is switched off while the vehicle is
being held by Automatic Hold or if the vehicle is
exited.
The indicator light changes from green
to red.
The parking brake is not set automatically, if the

drive-ready state is switched off, while the vehi‐
cle is coasting to a halt. Automatic Hold is deacti‐
Automatic Hold vated.
Switching function readiness off

Establishing function readiness of
Press the button.
Automatic Hold
The LED goes out.
1. Switch on drive-ready state.
138
Driving CONTROLS
The indicator light goes out. Using turn signals
Automatic Hold is switched off.

If the vehicle is being held by Automatic Hold,
press additionally on the brake pedal, when
switching off.
Malfunction
In the event of a failure or malfunction of the
parking brake:
Press the lever past the resistance point.
Secure the vehicle against rolling away, for in‐
stance with a wheel chock, after existing the ve‐
hicle. Triple turn signal activation
Lightly tap the lever up or down.
After a power failure The triple turn signal duration can be adjusted.
To reestablish parking brake functionality after a Via iDrive:
power failure:
1. "CAR"
1. Switch on standby state.
2. "Settings"
2. Pull the switch while stepping on the 3. "Exterior lighting"

brake pedal or selector lever position P is set 4. "One-touch turn signal"
and then push. 5. Select the desired setting.
This process may take a few seconds. Any The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
sounds associated with this are normal. rently used.
The indicator light is no longer illumi‐
nated as soon as the parking brake is Signaling briefly
ready for operation again. Press the lever to the resistance point and hold it
there for as long as you want the turn signal to
flash.
Turn signal
High beams,
Turn signal in exterior mirror
When driving and during operation of the turn
headlight flasher
signals or hazard warning system, do not fold in
Push the lever forward or pull it backward.
the exterior mirrors, so that the signal lights on
the exterior mirror are easy to see.
139
CONTROLS Driving
Switching on
▷ High beams on, arrow 1.

The high beams light up when the low beams
Press the lever up until the desired position is
are switched on.
reached.
▷ High beams off/headlight flasher, arrow 2.
▷ Resting position of the wipers, position 0.
▷ Rain sensor, position 1.
Washer/wiper system ▷ Normal wiper speed, position 2.

▷ Fast wiper speed, position 3.
General information When travel is interrupted with the wiper system

switched on: when travel continues, the wipers
Do not use the wipers if the windshield is dry, as resume at their previous speed.
this may damage the wiper blades or cause them
to become worn more quickly.
Switching off and brief wipe
Safety information
WARNING
If the wipers start moving in the folded away
state, body parts can be jammed or damage
may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is a risk
of injury or risk of damage to property. Make
sure that the vehicle is switched off when the
wipers are in the folded away state and the wip‐
Press the lever down.
ers are folded in when switching on.
▷ Switching off: press the lever down until it
reaches its standard position.
NOTICE ▷ Brief wipe: press the lever down from the

standard position.
If the wipers are frozen to the windshield, the
wiper blades can be torn off and the wiper mo‐ The lever automatically returns to its initial
tor can overheat when switching on. There is a position when released.
risk of damage to property. Defrost the wind‐
shield prior to switching the wipers on.
140
Driving CONTROLS
Rain sensor Adjusting the rain sensor sensitivity
Concept
The rain sensor automatically controls the time
between wipes depending on the intensity of the
rainfall.
General information
The sensor is located on the windshield, directly
in front of the interior mirror.
Turn the thumbwheel to adjust the sensitivity of
Safety information the rain sensor.
Upward: high rain sensor sensitivity.
NOTICE Downward: low rains sensor sensitivity.
If the rain sensor is activated, the wipers can
accidentally start moving in vehicle washes. Windshield washer system
There is a risk of damage to property. Deacti‐
vate the rain sensor in vehicle washes. Safety information
Activating WARNING
The washer fluid can freeze onto the window at
low temperatures and obstruct the view. There
is a risk of an accident. Only use the washer
systems, if the washer fluid cannot freeze. Use
washer fluid with antifreeze, if needed.
NOTICE
When the washer fluid reservoir is empty, the
Press the lever up once from its standard posi‐ wash pump cannot work as intended. There is
tion, arrow 1. a risk of damage to property. Do not use the
Wiping is started. washer system when the washer fluid reservoir
is empty.
The LED in the wiper lever is illuminated.
If wipers are frozen to windshield, wiper opera‐
tion is deactivated.
Deactivating
Press the lever back into the standard position.
141
CONTROLS Driving
Cleaning the windshield ▷ In resting position: turn the switch downward,

its idle position when released.
▷ In intermittent mode: turn the switch further,
its interval position when released.
Fold-away position of the wipers
Concept
Pull the lever. The fold-out position enables the wipers to be
The system sprays washer fluid on the wind‐ folded away from the windshield.
shield and activates the wipers briefly.
General information
Important, for instance when changing the wiper
Windshield washer nozzles blades or when folding out under frosty condi‐
The windshield washer nozzles are automatically tions.
heated while standby state is switched on.
Safety information
Rear window wiper
WARNING
Overview
If the wipers start moving in the folded away
state, body parts can be jammed or damage
may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is a risk
of injury or risk of damage to property. Make
sure that the vehicle is switched off when the
wipers are in the folded away state and the wip‐
ers are folded in when switching on.
NOTICE
Switching on If the wipers are frozen to the windshield, the
wiper blades can be torn off and the wiper mo‐
Turn the outer switch upward.
tor can overheat when switching on. There is a
▷ Resting position of the wiper, position 0. risk of damage to property. Defrost the wind‐
▷ Intermittent mode, arrow 1. When reverse shield prior to switching the wipers on.
gear is engaged, the system switches to con‐
tinuous operation.
Folding away the wipers
Clean the rear window 1. Switch on standby state.
Turn the outer switch in the desired direction.
142
Driving CONTROLS
2. Press and hold the wiper level down, until the Safety information
wipers stop in a close to vertical position.
WARNING
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and
ing, for instance with the parking brake.
Selector lever positions

3. Fold the wipers all the way away from the Drive mode D
windshield.
Selector lever position for normal vehicle opera‐
tion. All gears for forward travel are activated au‐
tomatically.
Reverse R
Engage selector lever position R only when the
vehicle is stationary.
Neutral N
The vehicle may be pushed or roll without power,
for instance in vehicle washes, refer to
Folding down the wipers
page 144, in selector lever position N.
After the wipers are folded back down, the wiper
system must be reactivated.
Parking position P
1. Fold the wipers back down onto the wind‐ Selector lever position, for instance for parking
shield. the vehicle. The transmission blocks the drive
2. Switch on standby state and press and hold wheels in selector lever position P.
the wiper lever down again. Engage selector lever position P only when the
3. Wipers return to their resting position and are vehicle is stationary.
ready again for operation.
P is engaged automatically
Selector lever position P is engaged automati‐
Steptronic transmission cally in situations such as the following:
▷ After the drive-ready state is switched off and
Concept selector lever position R, D or M/S is en‐
The Steptronic transmission combines the func‐ gaged.
tions of an automatic transmission with the pos‐ ▷ After the standby state has been switched off
sibility of manual shifting, if needed. when selector lever position N is engaged.
▷ If the driver's safety belt is unbuckled, the
driver's door is opened, and the brake pedal
is not pressed while the vehicle is stationary
143
CONTROLS Driving
and selector lever position D, M/S or R is en‐ selector lever automatically returns to the
gaged. center position when released.
Engaging selector lever

positions
General information
To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you
select a drive mode, maintain pressure on the
brake pedal until you are ready to start.
Only when the drive-ready state is switched on
Engaging selector lever position P
and the brake pedal is depressed is it possible to
change from selector lever position P to another
selector lever position.
The selection lever position P cannot be
changed until all technical requirements are met.
Engaging selector lever position D,

N, R
A selector lever lock prevents the following faulty
operation: Press button P.
▷ Unintentional shifting into selector lever posi‐

tion R. Rolling or pushing the vehicle
▷ Unintentional shifting from selector lever po‐
sition P into another selector lever position. General information
1. Fasten driver's safety belt. In some situations, the vehicle is to roll without
its own power for a short distance, for instance in
2. Press and hold the button to release the se‐
a vehicle wash, or be pushed.
lector lever lock.
Engaging selector lever position N

1. Switch on drive-ready state while pressing on
the brake pedal.
2. If necessary, release the parking brake.
3. If necessary, switch off Automatic Hold, refer
to page 137.
4. Depress the brake pedal.
5. Touch the selector lever lock and engage se‐
3. Push the selector lever in the desired direc‐ lector lever position N.
tion, past a resistance point, if needed. The
6. Switch off drive-ready state.
144
Driving CONTROLS
In this way, standby state remains switched Activating the sport program
on, and a Check Control message is dis‐
played.
The vehicle may roll.
NOTICE
Selector lever position P is automatically en‐
gaged when standby state is switched off.
There is a risk of damage to property. Do not
switch standby state off in vehicle washes.
Press the selector lever to the left out of selector
Irrespective of standby state, the selector lever lever position D.
position P is automatically engaged after approx. The engaged gear is displayed in the instrument
35 minutes. cluster, for instance S1.
If there is a malfunction, you may not be able to The sport program of the transmission is acti‐
change the selector lever position. vated.
Electronically unlock the transmission lock, if
needed, refer to page 147. Ending the Sport program
Push the selector lever to the right.
Kickdown
D is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Kickdown is used to achieve maximum driving
performance.
Manual mode M/S
Step on the accelerator pedal beyond the resist‐
ance point at the full throttle position.
Concept
Manual gear-shifting is possible in manual mode.
Sport program M/S
Activating manual mode
Concept
1. Press the selector lever to the left out of se‐
The shifting points and shifting times in the
lector lever position D, arrow 1.
Sport program are designed for a sportier driving
style. The transmission, for instance shifts up
later and the shifting times are shorter.
2. Push the selector lever forward or pull it

backward, arrows 2.
Manual mode becomes active and the gear is
changed.
145
CONTROLS Driving
The engaged gear is displayed in the instrument Short-term manual mode

cluster, for instance M1. In selector lever position D, actuating a shift pad‐
dle switches into manual mode temporarily.
Shifting After conservative driving in manual mode with‐
▷ To shift down: press the selector lever for‐ out acceleration or shifting via the shift paddles
ward. for a certain amount of time, the transmission
▷ To shift up: pull the selector lever rearwards. switches back to automatic mode.
The transmission continues shifting automati‐ It is possible to switch into automatic mode as
cally in certain situations, for instance when follows:
speed limits are reached. ▷ Pull and hold right shift paddle.
▷ In addition to the briefly pulled right shift pad‐
Steptronic Sport transmission: dle, briefly pull the left shift paddle.
prevent automatic upshifting in M/S
manual mode Continuous manual mode
If driving mode SPORT, refer to page 149, is se‐ In selector lever position S, actuating a shift pad‐
lected, the Steptronic Sport transmission does dle switches into manual mode permanently.
not automatically upshift in M/S manual mode
once the maximum speed is reached. Steptronic Sport transmission
Depending on the BMW M drive configuration, With the appropriate transmission version, the
this function is active independently of the driv‐ lowest possible gear can be selected by simulta‐
ing mode. neously activating kickdown and operating the
In addition, there is no downshifting for kick‐ left shift paddles. This is not possible in short-
down. term manual mode.
Ending the manual mode Shifting

Push the selector lever to the right.
D is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Shift paddles
Concept
The shift paddles on the steering wheel allow
you to shift gears quickly while keeping both
hands on the steering wheel.
▷ To shift up: briefly pull right shift paddle.
General information ▷ To shift down: briefly pull left shift paddle.
▷ The lowest possible gear can be selected by
Shifting pulling and holding the left shift paddle.
The vehicle only shifts at suitable engine and The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in‐
road speeds. strument cluster, followed by the current gear.
146
Driving CONTROLS
Displays in the instrument 5. Release brake, as soon as the starter stops.

cluster 6. Maneuver the vehicle from the danger area
and secure it against moving on its own.
The selector lever position is dis‐
played, for example P. For additional information, see the chapter on
tow-starting and towing, refer to page 384.
Launch Control
Electronic unlocking of the Concept

transmission lock Launch Control enables optimum acceleration
on surfaces with good traction under dry sur‐
General information rounding conditions.
Electronically unlock the transmission lock to
maneuver vehicle from a danger area. General information
Unlocking is possible, if the starter can spin the The use of Launch Control causes premature
engine. component wear since this function represents a
very heavy load for the vehicle.
Before unlocking the transmission lock, set the
parking brake to prevent the vehicle from rolling Do not use Launch Control during the break-in,
away. refer to page 312, period.
Do not steer the steering wheel when driving off
Engaging selector lever position N with Launch Control.
1. Press and hold down brake pedal.
2. Press the Start/Stop button. The starter must
audibly start. Hold the Start/Stop button Launch Control is available when the engine is at
pressed. operating temperature. The engine is at operat‐
ing temperature after an uninterrupted trip of at
3. With your free hand, press the button on the
least 6 miles/10 km.
selector lever, arrow 1, and press the selector
lever into selector lever position N and hold,
Start with launch control
arrow N, until selector lever position N is dis‐
played in the instrument cluster. 1. Switch on drive-ready state.
TRACTION is displayed in the instrument
cluster and the indicator light for DSC OFF
lights up.
3. Engage selector lever position S.
4. With the left foot, forcefully press down on
the brake.
5. Press and hold down the accelerator pedal
beyond the resistance point at the full throttle
4. Release Start/Stop button and selector lever. position, kickdown.
147
CONTROLS Driving
A flag symbol is displayed in the instrument ▷ Cruise control.

cluster.
6. The starting engine speed adjusts. Within Overview
3 seconds, release the brake.
Repeated use during a trip

After Launch Control has been used, the trans‐
mission must cool down for approx. 5 minutes
before Launch Control can be used again.
Launch Control adjusts to the surrounding con‐
ditions, when used again.
After using Launch Control

To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC Dy‐ Displays in the instrument
namic Stability Control again as soon as possible. cluster
The selected driving mode is dis‐
System limits played in the instrument cluster.
An experienced driver may be able to achieve
better acceleration values in DSC OFF mode.
Driving modes
Driving Dynamics Control Button in the vehicle
Concept
The Driving Dynamics Control influences the
driving dynamics properties of the vehicle. The
vehicle can be adjusted depending on the situa‐ Button Driving Configura‐
tion using various driving modes. mode tion
SPORT SPORT INDIVIDUAL

General information
The following systems are affected, for instance: SPORT SPORT
PLUS
▷ Engine characteristics.
▷ Steptronic transmission. COMFORT COMFORT
▷ Adaptive chassis. ECO PRO ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL
▷ Steering.
ADAPTIVE ADAPTIVE
▷ Integral Active Steering.
▷ Adaptive M chassis. When drive-ready state is switched on, the
▷ Adaptive M Chassis Professional. COMFORT driving mode is selected automati‐
cally.
▷ Executive Drive Pro.
▷ 2–axle air suspension.
▷ Display in the instrument cluster.
148
Driving CONTROLS
Driving modes in detail "Reset to SPORT STANDARD".
COMFORT SPORT PLUS
Concept Concept
Balanced tuning between dynamic and efficient Dynamic tuning for maximum agility with an ad‐
driving. justed drive.
Switching on Switching on
Press the button repeatedly until COM‐ Press the button repeatedly until
FORT is displayed in the instrument SPORT PLUS is displayed in the instru‐
cluster. ment cluster.
SPORT ECO PRO
Concept Concept
Dynamic tuning for higher agility with an opti‐ Efficient driving setting.
mized chassis and suspension.
Switching on
Switching on Press the button repeatedly until ECO
Press the button repeatedly until PRO is displayed in the instrument clus‐
SPORT is displayed in the instrument ter.
cluster.
ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL
SPORT INDIVIDUAL
Concept
Concept Individual settings can be adjusted in the ECO
Individual settings can be adjusted in the SPORT PRO INDIVIDUAL driving mode.
INDIVIDUAL driving mode.
Configuration
Configuration Via iDrive:
1. "CAR" 2. "Settings"
2. "Settings" 3. "Driving mode"
3. "Driving mode" 4. "ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL"
4. "SPORT INDIVIDUAL" 5. Select the desired setting.
5. Select the desired setting. The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐ rently used.
rently used. Reset ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL to the standard
Reset SPORT INDIVIDUAL to the standard set‐ settings:
tings: "Reset to ECO PRO STANDARD".
149
CONTROLS Driving
ADAPTIVE
Concept
Comfort-oriented driving mode, whose tuning is
automatically modified to the driving situation
and driving style.
If the navigation system is active, upcoming road
sections are considered.
Switching on
Press the button. ADAPTIVE is dis‐
played in the instrument cluster.
INDIVIDUAL configuration
General information
The individual configuration of the driving mode
is stored for the active driver profile. The last set
configuration is activated directly when the driv‐
ing mode is called up again.
Activating configuration of the

driving mode
Press the button for the desired driving mode
several times.
150
Displays CONTROLS
Displays
Vehicle features and Overview
options
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ 1 Fuel gage 157
served. Range 159
2 Speedometer
Instrument cluster 3 Variable displays 151
Service requirements 159
Concept Navigation display
The instrument cluster is a variable display. 4 Depending on the equipment: Driver Atten‐
When you change to a different program via Driv‐ tion Camera
ing Dynamics Control, the displays in the instru‐ 5 Tachometer 157
ment cluster adapt to the respective driving
Selection lists 162
mode.
Widgets in the instrument cluster 152
General information ECO PRO displays 322
The display change in the instrument cluster can Status, Driving Dynamics Control 148
be deactivated via iDrive. Transmission display 143
Some of the displays in the instrument cluster 6 Engine temperature 158
may differ from the illustrations in this Owner's
7 External temperature 158
Manual.
8 Check Control 153
9 Variable displays 151
Speed Limit Info 160
Time 63
Variable displays
In some areas of the instrument cluster, various
assistance systems, for example the cruise con‐
trol, can be displayed. The displays may vary de‐
151
CONTROLS Displays
pending on the equipment version and country 3. "Displays"

variant. 4. "Driving mode view"
Setting the display mode Additional settings

1. "CAR"
Concept
2. "Settings"
In addition to the driving modes, various display
modes can be set up for the instrument cluster. 3. "Displays"
4. "Instrument panel"
Settings 5. Select the desired setting.
Via iDrive:
1. "CAR"
Widgets in the instrument cluster
2. "Settings" Concept
3. "Displays" Displays for specific functions can be displayed
4. "Instrument panel" in the tachometer in the instrument cluster.
5. "Display mode" The following displays can be selected:
6. Select the desired setting. ▷ Trip data, refer to page 163.
▷ Sport displays, refer to page 164.
Configuring Individual
▷ Current entertainment source, e.g., radio, re‐
1. "CAR" fer to Owner's Manual for Navigation, Enter‐
2. "Settings" tainment and Communication.
3. "Displays" ▷ Efficiency display, refer to page 153.
4. "Instrument panel"
5. "Configure Individual"
Selecting
Driving mode view
Concept
When the driving mode view is deactivated, the
displays in he instrument cluster remain un‐
changed and do not adapt to the respective driv‐
ing mode when the program is changed via Driv‐
ing Dynamics Control. Continue to press the button on the turn signal
lever until the desired widget is selected.
Via iDrive:
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
152
Displays CONTROLS
Display rently driving in an efficient and environmentally-

friendly manner.
Energy recovery
During energy recovery, the kinetic energy of the
vehicle is converted into electric energy during
coasting. The vehicle battery is partially charged
and fuel consumption can be reduced.
ECO PRO bonus range

In the ECO PRO driving mode, the yielded exten‐
Efficiency display sion of the range as a result of fuel-efficient driv‐
ing is displayed as ECO PRO bonus range, refer
to page 322.
Concept
Information about driving style and consumption
can be displayed in form of a bar display as Check Control
widget in the instrument cluster, for examples.
General information Concept

Depending on the activated driving mode, differ‐ The Check Control system monitors functions in
ent information will be displayed: the vehicle and notifies you of malfunctions in
the monitored systems.
Driving Display
mode General information
COMFORT Current consumption. A Check Control message is displayed as a com‐
SPORT Average consumption. bination of indicator or warning lights and SMS
text messages in the instrument cluster and, if
Energy recovery.
applicable, in the Head-up Display.
ECO PRO ECO PRO bonus range. In addition, an acoustic signal may sound and an
Distance traveled in Coasting SMS text message may appear on the Control
mode. Display.
Current consumption.
Information in detail
Average consumption
The average consumption indicates the fuel con‐
sumption when driving a specific route.
Current consumption
The current consumption displays the current
consumption of fuel. Check whether you are cur‐
153
CONTROLS Displays
Hiding Check Control messages Display
Check Control
At least one Check Control message is
displayed or is stored.
SMS text messages

SMS text messages in combination with a sym‐
bol in the instrument cluster explain a Check
Press and hold the button on the turn signal Control message and the meaning of the indica‐
lever. tor/warning lights.
Supplementary SMS text messages

Continuous display
Additional information, such as the reason for an
Some Check Control messages are displayed error or malfunction or the required action, can
continuously and are not cleared until the mal‐ be called up via Check Control.
function is eliminated. If several malfunctions oc‐
With urgent messages the added text will be au‐
cur at once, the messages are displayed consec‐
tomatically displayed on the Control Display.
utively.
Depending on the Check Control message, fur‐
The messages can be hidden for approx. 8 sec‐
ther help can be selected.
onds. After this time, they are displayed again
automatically. Via iDrive:
1. "CAR"
Temporary display
2. "Vehicle status"
Some Check Control messages are hidden auto‐
3. "Check Control"
matically after approx. 20 seconds. The Check
Control messages are stored and can be dis‐ 4. Select the desired text message.
played again later. 5. Select desired setting:
▷ "Call BMW Accident Assistance"
Displaying stored Check Control Contact BMW Group Accident Assis‐
messages tance.
Via iDrive: ▷ "Service request"
1. "CAR" Contact Roadside Assistance.
2. "Vehicle status" ▷ "BMW Roadside Assistance"
3. "Check Control" Contact a dealer’s service center or an‐
4. Select the SMS text message. other qualified service center or repair
shop.
▷ "Owner's Manual"
Display additional information about the
Check Control message in the Integrated
Owner's Manual.
154
Displays CONTROLS
Messages after trip completion Have the vehicle checked immediately by a deal‐
Special messages displayed while driving are er’s service center or another qualified service
displayed again after drive-ready state is center or repair shop.
switched off.
Parking brake
Indicator/warning lights The parking brake is set.
Release the parking brake, refer to
page 137.
Concept
Indicator/warning lights in the instrument cluster
display the status of some functions in the vehi‐ Brake system
cle and indicate when a malfunction is present in Braking system impaired. Continue to
the monitored systems. drive moderately.
Have the vehicle checked immediately
General information by a dealer’s service center or another
The indicator/warning lights can light up in a vari‐ qualified service center or repair shop.
ety of combinations and colors.
Several of the lights are checked for proper func‐ Yellow lights
tioning and light up temporarily when drive-ready
state is switched on.
Anti-lock Braking System ABS
Red lights Braking force boost may not be working.
Avoid abrupt braking. Take the longer
Safety belt reminder braking distance into account.
Have the system immediately checked
Indicator light flashes or is illuminated:
by a dealer’s service center or another
safety belt on the driver or passenger
side is not buckled. The safety belt re‐
minder can also be activated if objects are placed
on the front passenger seat. DSC Dynamic Stability Control
Make sure that the safety belts are positioned The indicator light flashes: DSC controls
correctly. the drive and braking forces. The vehicle
is stabilized. Reduce speed and modify
Safety belt reminder for rear seats your driving style to the driving circumstances.
The indicator light lights up: DSC has malfunc‐
The safety belt is not buckled on the cor‐
tioned.
responding rear seat.
Have the system immediately checked by a deal‐
er’s service center or another qualified service
Airbag system center or repair shop.
Airbag system and belt tensioner are not DSC, refer to page 213.
working.
155
CONTROLS Displays
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is Emissions

deactivated or DTC Dynamic ▷ The warning light lights up:
Traction Control is activated
Emissions are deteriorating. Have the
DSC is deactivated or DTC is activated. vehicle checked as soon as possible.
DSC, refer to page 213, and DTC, refer ▷ The warning light flashes under certain cir‐
to page 215. cumstances:
This indicates that there is excessive misfiring
Flat Tire Monitor FTM in the engine.
The Flat Tire Monitor signals a loss of Reduce the vehicle speed and have the sys‐
tire inflation pressure in a tire. tem checked immediately; otherwise, serious
engine misfiring within a brief period can seri‐
Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. ously damage emission control components,
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneuvers. in particular the catalytic converter.
Flat Tire Monitor, refer to page 355.
Socket for Onboard Diagnosis, refer to
page 375.
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM
The indicator light lights up: the Tire Green lights
Pressure Monitor reports a low tire infla‐
tion pressure or a flat tire. Follow the in‐ Safety belt reminder for rear seats
formation in the Check Control message.
The safety belt is buckled on the corre‐
The indicator light flashes and then continuously sponding rear seat.
lights up: no flat tire or loss of tire inflation pres‐
sure can be detected.
▷ Interference caused by systems or devices Turn signal
with the same radio frequency: after leaving Turn signal switched on.
the area of the interference, the system auto‐ Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator
matically becomes active again. light indicates that a turn signal bulb has
▷ A wheel without TPM wheel electronics is failed.
mounted: have it checked by a dealer’s serv‐ Turn signal, refer to page 139.
ice center or another qualified service center
or repair shop as needed.
▷ Malfunction: have the system checked by a Parking lights
dealer’s service center or another qualified Parking lights are switched on.
service center or repair shop. Parking lights/low beams, refer to
Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to page 348. page 169.
Steering system Low beams

Steering system may not be working. Low beams are switched on.
Have the system checked by a dealer’s Parking lights/low beams, refer to
service center or another qualified serv‐ page 169.
ice center or repair shop.
156
Displays CONTROLS
Lane departure warning General information

The indicator light lights up: the system Vehicle tilt position may cause the display to
is activated. A lane marking was detected vary.
on at least one side of the vehicle and Information on refueling, refer to page 330.
warnings can be issued.
Lane departure warning, refer to page 198. Display
An arrow beside the fuel pump
Front fog lights symbol shows which side of the
vehicle the fuel filler flap is on.
Front fog lights are switched on.
The current range is displayed as
Front fog lights, refer to page 173.
numerical value.
High-beam Assistant
Indicator light In the instrument
High-beam Assistant is switched on. cluster
High beams are switched on and off au‐
The yellow indicator light illuminates,
tomatically depending on the traffic sit‐
once the fuel reserve is reached.
uation.
High-beam Assistant, refer to page 171.
Tachometer
Automatic Hold
Automatic Hold is activated. The vehicle Always avoid engine speeds in the red warning
is automatically held in place when it is field. In this range, the fuel supply is reduced to
stationary. protect the engine.
Automatic Hold, refer to page 137.
Shift point indicator

Blue lights
Concept
High beams
The shift lights indicate the upshift point at which
High beams are switched on. the best possible acceleration can be achieved.
High beams, refer to page 139.
Shift lights are shown when the SPORT or
Fuel gage SPORT PLUS driving program is activated.
Concept Switching on shift lights

1. Select SPORT or SPORT PLUS driving
The current fill level of the fuel tank is displayed.
mode.
Press Driving Dynamics Control.
2. Activate the M/S manual mode of the trans‐
mission.
157
CONTROLS Displays
Display Engine temperature

Display
▷ Cold engine: the pointer is at
the low temperature end.
Drive at moderate engine and
vehicle speeds.
▷ Normal operating tempera‐
ture: the pointer is in the mid‐
dle or in the lower half of the
▷ Current engine speed is displayed in the
temperature display.
tachometer.
▷ Hot engine: the pointer is at the high end of
▷ Arrow 1: successive yellow illuminated fields
the temperature range. In addition, a Check
indicate an increase in the speed.
Control message is displayed.
▷ Arrow 2: successive orange illuminated fields
Check the coolant level, refer to page 371.
indicate the upcoming shift moment.
▷ Arrow 3: the field lights up red. Do not wait
any further to shift. Indicator light In the instrument
When the maximum speed is reached, the entire cluster
display flashes red and the supply of fuel is inter‐ A red indicator light is displayed.
rupted in order to protect the engine.
Standby state and drive-

ready state External temperature
The letters OFF in the tachome‐ General information

ter indicate that drive-ready state If the indicator drops to +37 ℉/+3 ℃ or lower, a
is switched off and standby state signal sounds.
is switched on.
There is an increased risk of ice on roads.
The letters READY in the tach‐
ometer indicate that the Auto
Safety information
Start/Stop function is ready to
start the engine automatically.
WARNING
For further information, see Idle state, standby Even at temperatures above +37 ℉/+3 ℃
state, and drive-ready state, refer to page 43. there can be a risk of icy roads, for instance on
bridges or shady sections of road. There is a
risk of an accident. Modify your driving style to
the weather conditions at low temperatures.
158
Displays CONTROLS
Range General information

After switching on drive-ready state, the instru‐
ment cluster briefly displays available driving dis‐
Concept
tance or time to the next scheduled mainte‐
The range indicates the distance that can still be nance.
covered with the current fuel level.
A service advisor can read out the current serv‐
ice requirements from your remote control.
General information
Some information on service requirements can
The estimated range available with the remaining also be shown on the BMW display key.
fuel is permanently displayed in the instrument
cluster.
Display
With a low remaining range, a Check Control
message is briefly displayed. With a dynamic
Detailed information on service
driving style, for instance taking curves aggres‐
requirements
sively, the engine function is not always ensured.
More information on the type of service required
The Check Control message appears continu‐
may be displayed on the Control Display.
ously below a range of approx. 30 miles/50 km.
Via iDrive:
Safety information 1. "CAR"
2. "Vehicle status"
NOTICE 3. "Service schedule"
With a driving range of less than Required maintenance procedures and le‐
30 miles/50 km the engine may no longer have gally mandated inspections are displayed.
sufficient fuel. Engine functions are not en‐
4. Select an entry to call up detailed information.
sured anymore. There is a risk of damage to
property. Refuel promptly.
Symbols
Sym‐ Description
Display
bols
The current range is displayed as
numerical value next to the fuel No service is currently required.
gage.
The deadline for scheduled mainte‐

nance or a legally mandated inspec‐
tion is approaching.
Service requirements The service deadline has already
passed.
Concept
The function displays the service requirements
Entering appointment dates
and the corresponding maintenance scopes.
Enter the dates for the mandatory vehicle in‐
spections.
159
CONTROLS Displays
Make sure that the vehicle's date and time are Example Description
set correctly.
Efficient gear is set.
Via iDrive:
1. "CAR"
2. "Vehicle status" Shift into efficient gear.
3. "Service schedule"
4. "BMW Service"
5. "Date:"
Speed Limit Info
Automatic Service Request Speed Limit Info

Data regarding the service status or legally man‐
Concept
dated vehicle inspections is automatically trans‐
mitted to your dealer’s service center before your Speed Limit Info shows the currently valid maxi‐
vehicle is due for service. mum permitted speed in the instrument cluster
and the Head-up Display.
You can check when your dealer’s service center
was notified.
General information
Via iDrive:
The camera in the area of the interior mirror de‐
1. "CAR" tects traffic signs at the edge of the road as well
2. "Vehicle status" as variable overhead sign posts.
3. "TeleService Call" Traffic signs with extra symbols are considered

and compared with the vehicle's onboard data.
The traffic sign will then be either displayed or ig‐
Gear shift indicator nored depending on the situation in the instru‐
ment cluster and the Head-up Display.
The system takes into account any information
Concept
that is stored in the navigation system and also
The system recommends the most efficient gear displays speed limits present on routes without
for the current driving situation. signs.
Speed limits for trailer towing will be displayed
General information when the trailer power socket is in use or trailer
Depending on the design and country version, towing was activated via iDrive.
the gear shift indicator may be active in the
manual mode of the Steptronic transmission. Safety information
WARNING
displaying
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
Suggestions to shift gear up or down are dis‐
driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility
played in the instrument cluster.
and traffic situation. There is a risk of an acci‐
On vehicles without a gear shift indicator, the en‐ dent. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions.
gaged gear is displayed.
160
Displays CONTROLS
Watch traffic closely and actively intervene Display

where appropriate.
Speed Limit Info
Overview Current speed limit.
Camera
Speed Limit Info not available.
If the detected speed limit has been exceeded,

the indicator light will flash.
The camera is installed near the interior mirror.
Settings
Keep the windshield in front of the interior mirror
clean and clear. Via iDrive:
1. "CAR"
Displaying Speed Limit Info 2. "Settings"
3. "Driver Assistance"
General information 4. "Driving"
Depending on the vehicle equipment, Speed 5. "Speed Limit Assistant"
Limit Info is displayed permanently in the instru‐
ment cluster or via iDrive.
▷ "Warn when speeding": activating/deacti‐
Display via iDrive vating the flashing of the Speed Limit Info
display in the instrument cluster and
1. "CAR"
Head-up Display when the currently valid
2. "Settings" speed limit is exceeded.
3. "Driver Assistance" ▷ "Excess speed display": the speed limit
4. "Driving" that is detected by the Speed Limit Info is
5. "Speed Limit Assistant" displayed with a marking in the speedom‐
eter in the instrument cluster.
6. "Info on speed limits"
7. "Show current limit" System limits
The system may not be fully functional and may
provide incorrect information in the following sit‐
uations:
▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall.
▷ When signs are fully or partially concealed by
objects, stickers or paint.
161
CONTROLS Displays
▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in front If necessary, the corresponding menu will open
of you. on the Control Display.
▷ When driving toward bright lights or strong
reflections. Display
▷ When the windshield in front of the interior
mirror is fogged over, dirty or covered by a
sticker, etc.
▷ If the camera has overheated and been tem‐
porarily switched off due to excessively high
temperatures.
▷ In the event of incorrect detection by the
camera.
▷ If the speed limits or road data stored in the
navigation system are incorrect. Depending on the equipment version, the list in
the instrument cluster may differ from the illus‐
▷ If the speed limits vary with the time of day tration.
and the day of the week.
▷ In areas not covered by the navigation sys‐
tem. Displaying and using the list
▷ When roads differ from the navigation, such
Button Function
as due to changes in road routing.
▷ In case of electronic traffic signs. Change the entertainment
source.
▷ When passing buses or trucks with traffic
signs applied to them. Pressing the button again will
close the currently displayed
▷ If the traffic signs are non-conforming.
list.
▷ When signs that are valid for a parallel road
are detected. Show list of most recent tele‐
phone calls.
▷ In the presence of country-specific signs and
road configurations. Turn the thumbwheel to select
▷ During calibration of the camera immediately the desired setting.
after vehicle delivery. Press the thumbwheel to con‐
firm the setting.
The currently selected list can
Selection lists be displayed again in the instru‐
ment cluster by turning the
Concept thumbwheel.
Lists can be displayed and, if necessary, used for
certain functions in the instrument cluster or the
Head-up Display.
▷ Entertainment source.
▷ Current audio source.
▷ List of most recent telephone calls.
162
Displays CONTROLS
Trip data widgets in the instrument cluster, refer to

page 152.
The following information is displayed:
Concept
▷ Total number of kilometers.
Values for the trip, e.g. the average consumption,
are displayed. ▷ Configured interval for resetting the trip data.
▷ Distance travelled depending on the config‐
General information ured interval.
The trip data can be displayed on the Control ▷ Average speed.
Display and in the instrument cluster.
The values can be displayed and reset depend‐ Resetting trip data
ing on various intervals, such as after refueling. The intervals in which the values must be reset
can be configured.
Display on the Control Display Via iDrive:
1. "CAR"
Overview
2. "Driving information"
3. "Trip data"
▷ Configured interval for resetting the trip data.
4. "Data since"
▷ Average consumption.
▷ Total time for shut off engine through the
Auto Start/Stop function. ▷ "Start of trip ( )": the values are automati‐
cally reset approx. four hours after the ve‐
▷ Distance traveled in Coasting mode.
hicle has come to a standstill.
▷ Consumption history in form of a chart.
▷ "Refueling ( )": the values are automati‐
cally reset after refueling with a larger
Displays quantity of fuel.
Via iDrive: ▷ "Factory ( )": the values since the time of
1. "CAR" the factory delivery are displayed.
2. "Driving information" ▷ "Individual ( )": the values since the last
manual reset are displayed. The values
3. "Trip data"
can be reset at any time.
Consumption history
Resetting average values
The average consumption is shown in the con‐
sumption history in form of a chart based on the
manually
distance travelled and the driving mode. The following interval can be reset manually at
any time: "Individual ( )".
The value for the average consumption is dis‐
played with a line in the graph.

Information about the route can be displayed as
widget in the tachometer. Selecting and setting
163
CONTROLS Displays
With the button on the turn signal lever: ▷ Power.

1. Continue to press the button on the turn sig‐
nal lever until the widget for the trip data is
Displays
selected. Via iDrive:
1. "CAR"
3. "Sport displays"

The Sport displays can be displayed in form of
two widgets in the instrument cluster, refer to
page 152.
2. Press and hold the button on the turn signal The following widgets can be selected:
lever. ▷ Widget for torque and power.
Via iDrive: ▷ Widget for acceleration power.
1. "CAR"
2. "Driving information" Vehicle status
3. "Trip data"
4. "Data since" General information
5. "Reset individual" The status can be displayed and actions per‐
The values are reset. If necessary, the setting of formed for several systems.
the interval for resetting the values will be
changed: "Individual ( )". Opening the vehicle status
Via iDrive:
Sport displays 1. "CAR"

2. "Vehicle status"
Concept
The Sport displays especially support a sporty
Information at a glance
driving style. ▷ "Flat Tire Monitor": Status of the Flat Tire
Monitor, refer to page 355.
Display on the Control Display ▷ "Tire Pressure Monitor": Status of the
Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to page 348.
Overview ▷ "Engine oil level": Electronic oil meas‐
The following information is displayed: urement, refer to page 368.
▷ Boost pressure. ▷ "Check Control": Check Control mes‐
▷ Engine oil temperature. sages are stored in the background and can
be displayed on the Control Display. Display‐
▷ Acceleration power. ing stored Check Control messages, refer to
▷ Torque. page 154.
164
Displays CONTROLS
▷ "Service schedule": Displaying service ▷ Speed.

requirements, refer to page 159. ▷ Navigation instructions.
▷ "TeleService Call": service request. ▷ Check Control messages.
▷ Selection list in the instrument cluster.
Head-up Display ▷ Driver assistance systems.
▷ Sport displays.
Concept Some of this information is only displayed briefly
This system projects important information into as needed.
the driver's field of vision, for instance the speed.
Selecting the view
The driver can get information without averting
his or her eyes from the road. Various views are available for the Head-up Dis‐
play.
General information Via iDrive:
Read the information for cleaning the Head-up 1. "CAR"
Display, refer to page 391. 2. "Settings"
3. "Displays"
Overview
4. "Head-up display"
5. "Display mode"
rently used.
Process individually
Via iDrive:
1. "CAR"
Switching on/off 2. "Settings"
Via iDrive: 3. "Displays"
1. "CAR" 4. "Head-up display"
2. "Settings" 5. "Configure Individual"
3. "Displays" 6. Select the desired setting.
4. "Head-up display" The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Setting the brightness

Display
The brightness is automatically adjusted to the
ambient brightness.
Overview
The basic setting can be adjusted manually.
The following information is displayed on the
Head-up Display:
165
CONTROLS Displays
Via iDrive: 6. Turn the Controller until the desired setting is

selected.
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Displays" Additional settings
4. "Head-up display" Via iDrive:
5. "Brightness"
1. "CAR"
6. Turn the Controller until the desired bright‐
2. "Settings"
ness is set.
3. "Displays"
When the low beams are switched on, the
brightness of the Head-up Display can be addi‐ 5. Select desired setting:
tionally influenced using the instrument lighting. ▷ "Speed Limit Assistant": access the set‐
tings for the speed assistant.
Adjusting the height ▷ "Display infotainment lists in": set up if the
Via iDrive: selection lists are displayed in the instru‐
ment cluster or the Head-up display.
1. "CAR"
▷ "Sport displays": display tachometer and
2. "Settings"
Shift Lights in the head-up Display.
3. "Displays"
▷ "Off": the Sport displays are not dis‐
4. "Head-up display" played in the Head-up Display.
5. "Height" ▷ "In SPORT mode": the Sport displays
6. Turn the Controller until the desired height is are only displayed in SPORT driving
reached. mode.
7. Press the Controller. ▷ "Always": the Sport displays are con‐
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐ tinuously displayed in the Head-up
rently used. Display.
The height of the Head-up Display can also be ▷ "Reduced height": if not all of the informa‐
stored using the memory function, refer to tion is in the driver's field of vision, the in‐
page 124. formation can be displayed in the lower
section of the Head-up Display.
Setting the rotation
Visibility of the display
The Head-up Display view can be rotated.
The visibility of the displays in the Head-up Dis‐
Via iDrive: play is influenced by the following factors:
1. "CAR" ▷ Seat position.
2. "Settings" ▷ Objects on the cover of the Head-up Display.
3. "Displays" ▷ Sunglasses with certain polarization filters.
4. "Head-up display" ▷ Wet roads.
5. "Rotation" ▷ Unfavorable light conditions.
166
Displays CONTROLS
If the image is distorted, have the basic settings

checked by a dealer’s service center or another
Special windshield
The windshield is part of the system.
The shape of the windshield makes it possible to
display a precise image.
A film in the windshield prevents double images
from being generated.
For this reason, it is strongly suggested to have
the special windshield replaced by a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service center
or repair shop, if necessary.
167
CONTROLS Lights
Lights
Vehicle features and Symbol Function
options Parking lights.

cific and optional features offered with the series. Automatic headlight control.
It also describes features and functions that are Adaptive light functions.
to the selected options or country versions. This Low beams.
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ Instrument lighting.
served.
Right roadside parking light.

Lights and lighting
Left roadside parking light.
Switches in the vehicle
Automatic headlight
control
Concept
The low beams are switched on and off automat‐
ically depending on the ambient brightness, for
The light switch element is located next to the
instance in tunnels, in twilight or if there is pre‐
steering wheel.
cipitation.
Symbol Function
General information
Front fog lights. A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can
cause the lights to be switched on.
Night Vision, refer to page 194. If the low beams are switched on manually, the
automatic headlight control is deactivated.
Lights off. Activating

Daytime running lights. Press the button on the light switch ele‐
ment.
168
Lights CONTROLS
The LED in the button lights up. Switching off

The indicator light in the instrument clus‐ Press the button on the light switch ele‐
ter is illuminated when the low beams are ment or switch on the drive-ready state.
switched on.
After the drive-ready state is switched on, the
automatic headlight control will be activated.
System limits
The automatic headlight control cannot serve as Low beams
a substitute for your personal judgment of light‐
ing conditions. Switching on
For example, the sensors are unable to detect Press the button on the light switch ele‐
fog or hazy weather. In these situations, switch ment.
the light on manually.
The low beams illuminate when drive-ready state
is switched on.
Parking lights, low beams The indicator light in the instrument clus‐
and roadside parking lights ter lights up.
Press the button again to switch on the low

General information beams when the standby state is switched on.
If the driver's door is opened when the drive-
ready state is switched off, the exterior lighting is Switching off
automatically switched off.
Depending on the country variant, the low beams
can be switched off in the low speed range.
Parking lights
Press the button on the light switch ele‐
General information ment.
The parking lights can only be switched on in the
low speed range. Roadside parking lights
When the vehicle is parked, a one-sided roadside
Switching on parking light can be switched on.
Press the button on the light switch ele‐
Button Function
ment.
Right roadside parking light on/off.
The indicator light in the instrument clus‐
ter lights up.
Left roadside parking light on/off.
The vehicle is illuminated on all sides.
Do not use the parking lights for extended peri‐
ods; otherwise, they might drain the battery and
it would then be impossible to switch on drive-
ready state.
169
CONTROLS Lights
Welcome lights Headlight courtesy delay

feature
General information
Depending on the equipment, the exterior light‐ General information
ing of the vehicle can be set individually.
The low beams stay lit for a particular time if the
high beams are switched on after standby state
Activating/deactivating is switched on.
Via iDrive:
1. "CAR" Setting the duration

3. "Exterior lighting" 1. "CAR"

4. Select desired setting: 2. "Settings"
▷ "MGU-416756" 3. "Exterior lighting"
When unlocking the vehicle, individual 4. "Pathway lighting"
light functions are switched on for a lim‐ 5. Select the desired setting.
ited time.
▷ "Door handle lights"
Door handles and the ground in front of
Daytime running lights
the doors are illuminated for a limited
time. General information
▷ "Welcome Light Carpet" The daytime running lights light up when drive-
The area next to the vehicle is illuminated ready state is switched on.
for a limited time.
LED light carpet In some countries, daytime running lights are
mandatory, so it may not be possible to deacti‐
vate the daytime running lights.
Via iDrive:
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Exterior lighting"
4. "Daytime driving lights"
The light source is located in the position indi‐ rently used.
cated.
Keep the light source clean and unobstructed.
170
Lights CONTROLS
Adaptive light functions When driving in reverse, the cornering lights may
be automatically switched on regardless of the
steering angle.
Concept
Adaptive light functions enable dynamic illumina‐
tion of the roadway. Adaptive headlight range
control
General information
The adaptive light functions may consist of one The adaptive headlight range control compen‐
system or multiple systems, depending on the sates for acceleration and braking operations in
equipment version: order not to blind the oncoming traffic and to
achieve optimum illumination of the roadway.
▷ Adaptive Light Control, refer to page 171.
▷ Cornering light, refer to page 171.
High-beam Assistant
Activating
Press the button on the light switch ele‐ Concept
ment.
The high-beam Assistant detects other traffic
The LED in the button lights up. participants early on and automatically switches
the high beams on or off depending on the traffic
The adaptive light functions are active when the
situation.
drive-ready state is switched on.
General information
Adaptive Light Control The high-beam Assistant ensures that the high
beams are switched on, whenever the traffic sit‐
uation allows. In the low speed range, the high
General information beams are not switched on by the system.
Depending on the steering angle and other pa‐
The system responds to light from oncoming
rameters, the light from the headlight follows the
traffic and traffic driving ahead of you, and to am‐
course of the road.
bient lighting, for instance in towns and cities.
To avoid blinding oncoming traffic, the Adaptive
The high beams can be switched on and off
Light Control does not swivel to the opposite
manually at any time.
lane when the vehicle is at a standstill.
Activating
Cornering light
1. Press the button on the light switch
In tight curves, for instance on mountainous element.
roads or when turning, an additional, cornering The LED in the button lights up.
light is switched on that lights up the inside of
the curve when the vehicle is moving below a
certain speed.
The cornering light is automatically switched on
depending on the steering angle.
171
CONTROLS Lights
2. Press and hold the button on the turn signal Sensitivity of the high-beam
lever. Assistant
General information
The sensitivity of the high-beam Assistant can
be adjusted.
Safety information
WARNING
The indicator light in the instrument clus‐ If adjustments have been made or the sensitiv‐
ter is illuminated when the low beams are ity has been modified, oncoming traffic may be
switched on. momentarily blinded. There is a risk of an acci‐
dent. If adjustments have been made and the
The headlights are automatically switched be‐ sensitivity has been modified, make sure that
tween low beams and high beams. oncoming traffic is not momentarily blinded.
Switch off the high beams manually if required.
The blue indicator light in the instrument
cluster lights up when the system
switches on the high beams. Adjusting the sensitivity
Driving interruption with activated High-Beam Pull the turn signal lever for approxi‐
Assistant: the High-Beam Assistant remains acti‐ mately 10 seconds. The system responds more
vated when driving continues. sensitively.
The high-beam Assistant is deactivated when A Check Control message is displayed.
manually switching the high beams on and off,
refer to page 139. Resetting the sensitivity
To reactivate the high-beam Assistant, press the Pull the turn signal lever again for approx. 10 sec‐
button on the turn signal lever. onds. The sensitivity of the high-beam Assistant
is reset to the factory settings.
Deactivating
System limits
The high-beam Assistant cannot serve as a sub‐
stitute for the driver's personal judgment of when
to use the high beams. In situation that require
this, therefore switch off manually.
The system is not fully functional in the following
situations, and driver intervention may be neces‐
sary:
▷ In very unfavorable weather conditions, such
Press and hold the button on the turn signal as fog or heavy precipitation.
lever. ▷ When detecting poorly-lit road users such as
pedestrians, cyclists, horseback riders and
172
Lights CONTROLS
wagons; when driving close to train or ship

traffic; or at animal crossings.
Fog lights
▷ In tight curves, on hilltops or in depressions,
in cross traffic or half-obscured oncoming
Front fog lights
traffic on highways.
Concept
▷ In poorly-lit towns and cities or in the pres‐
ence of highly reflective signs. The front fog lights work alongside the low
beams to illuminate a wider area of the roadway.
▷ When the windshield in front of the interior
mirror is fogged over, dirty or covered with
stickers, etc.
The low beams must be switched on before
switching on the front fog lights.
Laser high beams
Switching on/off
Concept Press the button.
The range of the high beams is increased and
ensures an even better illumination of the road. The green indicator light in the instru‐
ment cluster lights up if the front fog
General information lights are switched on.
When the high beams are switched-on, starting If the automatic headlight control, refer to
with a speed of approx. 37 mph/60 km/h, the la‐ page 168, is activated, the low beams will come
ser high beams in the headlight are automatically on automatically when you switch on the front
switched on in addition to the LED high beams. fog lights.
Depending on the country variant, further infor‐ When the high beams or headlight flasher are
mation can be obtained from the laser label on activated, the front fog lights are not switched
the headlight. on.
Safety information
Instrument lighting
The parking lights or low beams must be
switched on to adjust the brightness.
Settings
Adjust the brightness with the
The label is in the headlight and is visible from thumbwheel.
the outside.
173
CONTROLS Lights
Interior lights Depending on the vehicle equipment, the read‐

ing lights are located next to the interior lights in
the front and rear.
General information
Depending on the equipment version, interior
lights, footwell lights, entry lights, ambient light‐ Ambient light
ing, and speaker lighting are automatically con‐
trolled. General information
Depending on the equipment version, lighting
Overview can be adjusted for some lights in the car's inte‐
rior.
Buttons in the vehicle
Switching on/off
The ambient light is switched on when the vehi‐
cle is unlocked, and switched off when the vehi‐
cle is locked.
If the ambient light was deactivated via iDrive, it
will not be switched on when the vehicle is un‐
locked.
Via iDrive:
Interior lights 1. "CAR"

2. "Settings"
Reading lights 3. "Interior lighting"
4. "Ambient lighting"
The selected setting is stored for the driver pro‐
Switching the interior lights file currently used.
on/off
Press the button. Selecting color scheme
Via iDrive:
To switch off permanently: press the button and
1. "CAR"
hold for approx. 3 seconds.
2. "Settings"
The interior lights in the rear of the vehicle can
be switched on and off independently. The but‐ 3. "Interior lighting"
ton is located in the rear roofliner. 4. "Color"
Switching the reading lights
on/off Setting the brightness
Press the button. Via iDrive:
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
174
Lights CONTROLS
3. "Interior lighting" If the speakers are muted, speaker lighting will be

4. "Brightness" switched off.

Switching on/off
Dynamic light The speaker lighting is switched on when the ve‐
hicle is unlocked, and switched off when the ve‐
Via iDrive:
hicle is locked.
1. "CAR" Via iDrive:
2. "Settings"
1. "CAR"
3. "Interior lighting"
2. "Settings"
4. "Dynamic light"
4. "Bowers & Wilkins"
Individual actions, for example incoming calls or
opened doors, are indicated by light effects.
file currently used.
Dimmed while driving Setting the brightness

Via iDrive:
Via iDrive:
1. "CAR"
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
2. "Settings"
4. "Dimmed for night driving"
4. "Brightness"
Some lights of the interior lighting are dimmed
when the vehicle is driven in the dark.
Panoramic glass sunroof,

lighting
If the panoramic glass sunroof is opened or the
sun protection is closed, the lighting is switched
off.
Bowers & Wilkins Diamond

Surround Sound System
General information
Some speakers in the vehicle are illuminated.
Brightness can be individually set.
175
CONTROLS Safety
Safety
Airbags
1 Front airbag, driver 4 Side airbag In the rear

2 Front airbag, front passenger 5 Side airbag
3 Head airbag 6 Knee airbag
Front airbags Side airbag

Front airbags help protect the driver and the In a lateral impact, the side airbag supports the
front passenger by responding to frontal impacts side of the body in the chest and lap area.
in which safety belts alone would not provide ad‐ Depending on the equipment:
equate protection.
In the event of a side impact, the side airbag in
the back supports the chest and lap area on the
176
Safety CONTROLS
side of the bodies of the occupants in the outer ▷ Make sure that the front passenger is sitting
rear seats. correctly, i.e., keeps his or her feet and legs in
the floor area and does not support them on
Head airbag the dashboard.
In a lateral impact, the head airbag supports the ▷ Make sure that occupants keep their heads
head. away from the side airbag.
▷ There should be no additional persons, ani‐
Ejection Mitigation mals or objects between an airbag and a per‐
The head airbag system is designed as an ejec‐ son.
tion mitigation countermeasure to reduce the ▷ Dashboard and windshield on the front pas‐
likelihood of ejections of vehicle occupants senger side must stay clear - do not attach
through side windows during rollovers or side im‐ adhesive labels or coverings and do not at‐
pact events. tach brackets or cables, for instance for GPS
devices or mobile phones.
Knee airbag ▷ Do not apply adhesive materials to the airbag
The knee airbag supports the legs in a frontal im‐ cover panels, do not cover them or modify
pact. them in any way.
▷ Do not use the cover of the front airbag on
Protective effect the front passenger side as a storage area.
▷ Do not attach slip covers, seat cushions or
General information other objects to the front passenger seat that
Airbags are not triggered in every impact situa‐ are not specifically suited for seats with
tion, for instance in less severe accidents or rear- integrated side airbags.
end collisions. ▷ Do not hang pieces of clothing, such as jack‐
ets, over the backrests.
Information on optimum effect of the ▷ Never modify either the individual compo‐
airbags nents or the wiring in the airbag system. This
also applies to steering wheel covers, the
WARNING dashboard, and the seats.
If the seat position is incorrect or the deploy‐ ▷ Do not remove the airbag system.
ment area of the airbags is impaired, the airbag Even when you follow all instructions very
system cannot provide protection as intended closely, injury from contact with the airbags can‐
and may cause additional injuries due to trig‐ not be fully ruled out in certain situations.
gering. There is a risk of injuries or danger to The ignition and inflation noise may lead to
life. Follow the information on achieving the op‐ short-term and, in most cases, temporary hear‐
timum protective effect of the airbag system. ing impairment in sensitive occupants.
Vehicle modifications for a person with disabili‐
▷ Keep a distance from the airbags.
ties may affect the air bag system; contact BMW
▷ Always grasp the steering wheel on the Customer Relations for further information.
steering wheel rim. Hold your hands at the
Warnings and information on the airbags are also
3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, to keep the
found on the sun visors.
risk of injury to your hands or arms as low as
possible when the airbag is triggered.
177
CONTROLS Safety
Functional readiness of the To maintain the accuracy of this function over

airbag system the long term, calibrate the front seats as soon as
a respective message appears on the Control
Display.
Safety information
Calibrating the front seats
WARNING
Individual components can be hot after trigger‐ WARNING
ing of the airbag system. There is a risk of in‐
jury. Do not touch individual components. There is a risk of jamming when moving the
seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage
ment of the seat is clear prior to any adjust‐
WARNING ment.
Improperly executed work can lead to failure,
malfunction or unintentional triggering of the A corresponding message appears on the Con‐
airbag system. In the case of a malfunction, the trol Display.
airbag system might not trigger as intended de‐
spite the accident severity. There is a risk of in‐ 1. Press the switch and move the respective
juries or danger to life. Have the airbag system seat all the way forward, until it stops.
checked, repaired, dismantled and scrapped by 2. Press the switch forward again. The seat still
a dealer’s service center or another qualified moves forward slightly.
service center or repair shop. 3. Readjust the seat to the desired position.
The calibration procedure is completed when the
message on the Control Display disappears.
If the message continues to be displayed, repeat
When drive-ready state is switched on,
the calibration.
the warning light in the instrument clus‐
ter lights up briefly and thereby indicates If the message does not disappear after a repeat
the function readiness of the entire airbag sys‐ calibration, have the system checked as soon as
tem and the belt tensioners. possible.
Malfunction Automatic deactivation of

▷ Warning light does not come on the front-seat passenger
when drive-ready state is switched
on.
airbags
▷ The warning light lights up continuously.
Concept
Have the system checked.
The system reads if the front passenger seat is
occupied by measuring the human body's resist‐
Strength of the driver's and ance.
front-seat passenger airbag Front, knee, and side airbag on the front pas‐
The explosive power that activates driver's/front- senger's side are activated or deactivated.
seat passenger airbags very much depends on
the positions of the driver's/front passenger seat.
178
Safety CONTROLS
General information Indicator light for the front-seat

Before transporting a child on the front passen‐ passenger airbags
ger seat, refer to the safety information and in‐ The indicator light for the front-seat passenger
structions for children on the front passenger airbag in the roofliner indicates the operating
seat, see Children. state of the front-seat passenger airbag.
The light indicates whether the airbags are either
Safety information activated or deactivated.
After drive-ready state is switched on, the light
WARNING briefly lights up and then indicates whether the
To ensure the front-seat passenger airbag airbags are either activated or deactivated.
function, the system must be able to detect ▷ The indicator light lights up
whether a person is sitting in the front passen‐ when a child is properly
ger seat. The entire seat cushion area must be seated in a child restraint sys‐
used for this purpose. There is a risk of injuries tem or when the seat is
or danger to life. Make sure that the front pas‐ empty. The airbags on the
senger keeps his or her feet in the floor area. front passenger side are not
activated.
▷ The indicator light does not light up when, for
Malfunction of the automatic instance a correctly seated person of suffi‐
deactivation system cient size is detected on the seat. The air‐
When transporting older children and adults, the bags on the front passenger side are acti‐
front-seat passenger airbags may be deactivated vated.
in certain sitting positions. In this case, the indi‐
cator light for the front-seat passenger airbags
lights up. Detected child restraint systems
In this case, change the sitting position so that The system generally detects children seated in
the front-seat passenger airbags are activated a child restraint system, particularly in child re‐
and the indicator light goes out. straint systems required by NHTSA at the point
in time when the vehicle was manufactured. Af‐
If it is not possible to activate the airbags, have
ter installing a child restraint system, make sure
the person sit in the rear.
that the indicator light for the front-seat passen‐
To enable correct recognition of the occupied ger airbags lights up. This indicates that the child
seat cushion. restraint system has been detected and the
▷ Do not attach covers, cushions, ball mats or front-seat passenger airbags are not activated.
other items to the front passenger seat un‐
less they are specifically determined to be
safe for use on the front passenger seat. Intelligent Safety
▷ Do not place any electronic devices on the
front passenger seat if a child restraint sys‐ Concept
tem is to be installed on it. Intelligent Safety enables central operation of the
▷ Do not place objects under the seat that driver assistance system.
could press against the seat from below.
▷ No moisture in or on the seat.
179
CONTROLS Safety
General information
Depending on how the vehicle is equipped, Intel‐ WARNING
ligent Safety consists of one or more systems Due to system limits, individual functions can
that can help prevent an imminent collision. malfunction during tow-starting/towing with the
▷ Approach control warning with light braking Intelligent Safety systems activated. There is a
function, refer to page 181. risk of an accident. Switch all Intelligent Safety
systems off prior to tow-starting/towing.
▷ Evasion assistance, refer to page 185.
▷ Intersection warning with City light braking
function, refer to page 187. Overview
▷ Person warning with City light braking func‐
tion, refer to page 191. Button in the vehicle
▷ Night Vision with pedestrian and animal de‐
tection, refer to page 194.
▷ Lane departure warning, refer to page 198.
▷ Active Blind Spot Detection, refer to
page 201.
▷ Side collision warning, refer to page 205.
Safety information
Intelligent Safety
WARNING
driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility Switching on/off
and traffic situation. There is a risk of an acci‐ Some Intelligent Safety systems are automati‐
dent. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. cally active after every departure. Some Intelli‐
Watch traffic closely and actively intervene gent Safety systems activate according to the
where appropriate. last setting.
Button Status
WARNING Button lights up green: all Intelligent

Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a sub‐ Safety systems are switched on.
stitute for the driver’s personal judgment. Due Button lights up orange: some Intelli‐
to its limits, the system might not output warn‐ gent Safety systems are switched off
ings or reactions or these might be output late, or currently unavailable.
incorrectly, or without justification. There is a
risk of an accident. Adjust driving style to traffic Button does not light up: all Intelligent
conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively in‐ Safety systems are switched off.
tervene where appropriate.
Press the button:
The menu for the intelligent safety sys‐
tem is displayed.
180
Safety CONTROLS
If all Intelligent Safety systems were switched off, The system issues a two-phase warning of a
all systems are now switched on. possible risk of collision with vehicles at speeds
"Configure INDIVIDUAL": depending on the above approx. 3 mph/5 km/h. Time of warnings
equipment version, the Intelligent Safety sys‐ may vary with the current driving situation.
tems can be individually configured. The individ‐ With the vehicle approaching another vehicle in‐
ual settings are activated and stored for the tentionally, the approach control warning and
driver profile currently used. As soon as a setting braking are delayed in order to avoid false sys‐
is changed on the menu, all settings of the menu tem reactions.
are activated. Depending on the vehicle equipment, the Driver
Attention Camera in the instrument cluster cap‐
Press the button repeatedly. The follow‐ tures the driver's gaze behavior. Additionally, the
ing settings are switched between: system checks for visual impairments. Gaze be‐
"ALL ON": all Intelligent Safety systems are haviour and visibility also affect the timing of the
switched on. Basic settings are activated for the warnings.
sub-functions, for instance setting for warning
time. Safety information
"INDIVIDUAL": the Intelligent Safety systems are
switched on according to the individual settings.
WARNING
Some Intelligent Safety systems cannot be indi‐
vidually switched off.
Press and hold this button: and traffic situation. There is a risk of an acci‐
dent. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions.
All Intelligent Safety systems are Watch traffic closely and actively intervene
switched off. where appropriate.
Approach control warning WARNING

with light braking function Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a sub‐
stitute for the driver’s personal judgment. Due
Concept to its limits, the system might not output warn‐
ings or reactions or these might be output late,
The system can help prevent accidents. If an ac‐ incorrectly, or without justification. There is a
cident cannot be prevented, the system will help risk of an accident. Adjust driving style to traffic
reduce the impact speed. conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively in‐
The system sounds a warning before an immi‐ tervene where appropriate.
nent collision and activates brakes independ‐
ently, if needed.
WARNING
General information
Due to system limits, individual functions can
Depending on the equipment version, the sys‐ malfunction during tow-starting/towing with the
tem is controlled by the following sensors: Intelligent Safety systems activated. There is a
▷ Camera in the area of the interior mirror. risk of an accident. Switch all Intelligent Safety
▷ Radar sensor in the front bumper. systems off prior to tow-starting/towing.
181
CONTROLS Safety
Overview Always keep radar sensor clean and unob‐

structed.
Button in the vehicle
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
The system is automatically active after every
driving off.

Press the button.
Intelligent Safety
tem is displayed.
If all Intelligent Safety systems were switched off,
Camera all systems are now switched on.
"Configure INDIVIDUAL": depending on the
equipment version, the Intelligent Safety sys‐
tems can be individually configured. The individ‐
ual settings are activated and stored for the
driver profile currently used. As soon as a setting
is changed on the menu, all settings of the menu
are activated.
Press the button repeatedly.

The following settings are switched be‐
tween:
"ALL ON": all Intelligent Safety systems are
clean and clear.
switched on. Basic settings are activated for the
subfunctions.
With radar sensor "INDIVIDUAL": the Intelligent Safety systems are
Press and hold this button.

All Intelligent Safety systems are
switched off.
The radar sensor is located in the lower area of

the front bumper.
182
Safety CONTROLS
Button Status Prewarning

This warning is provided, for instance when there
Button lights up green: all Intelligent
is impending danger of a collision or the distance
Safety systems are switched on.
to the vehicle ahead is too small.
Button lights up orange: some Intelli‐ If a prewarning is provided, respond by braking
gent Safety systems are switched off as warranted.
or currently unavailable.
Button does not light up: all Intelligent Acute warning with braking function
Safety systems are switched off. Acute warning is displayed in case of the immi‐
nent danger of a collision when the vehicle ap‐
Setting the warning time proaches another object at a high differential
speed.
Via iDrive:
If an acute warning is issued, intervene in the sit‐
1. "CAR" uation yourself. Depending on the driving situa‐
2. "Settings" tion, the acute warning may be accompanied by
a brief activation of the braking system.
With the warning time setting "Late" the brief ac‐
4. "Safety and warnings"
tivation of the braking system is omitted.
5. "Front collision warning"
If necessary, the system provides additional as‐
6. Select desired setting: sistance, such as with an automatic braking inter‐
▷ "Early" vention, in a possible risk of collision.
▷ "Medium" Acute warnings can also be triggered without
▷ "Late": only acute warnings are displayed. previous forewarning.
The selected time is stored for the driver profile
currently used.
Braking intervention
The warning prompts the driver to react. During
Warning with braking function a warning, the maximum required braking force is
used when the brake is actuated. Prerequisite is
sufficiently quick and hard stepping on the brake
Display
pedal.
A warning symbol appears in the instrument
The system can additionally assist possibly with
cluster and in the Head-up Display, where availa‐
automatic braking intervention if there is a risk of
ble, if a collision with a detected vehicle is immi‐
a collision.
nent.
When the vehicle is traveling at a low speed, the
Symbol Measure vehicle may come to a complete stop.
Symbol lights up red: prewarning. City brake function: the braking intervention oc‐
Brake and increase distance. curs to up to approx. 50 mph/80 km/h.
With radar sensor: the braking intervention oc‐
Symbol flashes red and an acoustic curs to up to approx. 155 mph/250 km/h.
signal sounds: acute warning.
At speeds above approx. 130 mph/210 km/h, the
Brake and make an evasive maneu‐ braking intervention occurs as a brief braking
ver, if necessary. pressure. No automatic delay occurs.
183
CONTROLS Safety
The braking intervention occurs only if vehicle ▷ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of you,
stability has not been restricted, for instance by or sharply decelerating vehicles.
deactivating the DSC Dynamic Stability Control. ▷ Vehicles with an unusual rear appearance.
The driver may cancel the braking intervention ▷ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you.
by stepping on the accelerator pedal or by ac‐
tively moving the steering wheel. Upper speed limit
Object detection can be restricted. Follow the If the vehicle speed exceeds approx.
limitations of the detection range and functional 155 mph/250 km/h, the system is deactivated
limitations. temporarily. When the vehicle slows down to be‐
low this speed, the system is reactivated.
System limits
Safety information The system may not be fully functional in the fol‐
lowing situations:
WARNING ▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall.
The system can react not at all, too late, incor‐ ▷ In tight curves.
rectly, or without justification due to the system
▷ If the driving stability control systems are lim‐
limits. There is a risk of accidents or risk of
ited or deactivated, for instance DSC OFF.
damage to property. Follow the information re‐
garding the system limits and actively intervene ▷ If the field of view of the camera or the wind‐
if needed. shield is dirty or covered in the area of the in‐
terior mirror.
Detection range porarily switched off due to excessively high
temperatures.
▷ Depending on the equipment: if the radar
sensors are dirty or covered.
▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the engine
via the Start/Stop button.
▷ During calibration of the camera immediately
after vehicle delivery.
▷ If there are constant blinding effects because
of oncoming light, for instance from the sun
The system's detection potential is limited.
low in the sky.
Only objects that are detected by the system are
taken into account. Warning sensitivity
Thus, a system reaction might not come or The more sensitive the warning settings are, for
might come late. example the warning time, the more warnings are
displayed. Therefore, there may also be an ex‐
The following situations may not be detected, for
cess of premature or unjustified warnings and re‐
instance:
actions.
▷ Slow moving vehicles when you approach
them at high speed.
184
Safety CONTROLS
Evasion assistance
Concept
The system supports the driver in making eva‐
sive maneuvers in certain situations, such as
when obstacles or persons suddenly appear.
General information
The system issues a warning and intervenes to Front center bumper.
support the driver if a lateral evasive maneuver is
possible. Sensors monitor and detect the clear‐
ance around the vehicle. If the system identifies
space alongside the vehicle, it supports an eva‐
sive maneuver begun by the driver by safely pro‐
viding targeted steering support.
Safety information
WARNING Front side bumper.

Watch traffic closely and actively intervene
where appropriate.
WARNING
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a sub‐
stitute for the driver’s personal judgment. Due Rear bumper.
to its limits, the system might not output warn‐ Always keep the bumper in the area of the radar
ings or reactions or these might be output late, sensors clean and unobstructed.
risk of an accident. Adjust driving style to traffic
conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively in‐
Overview
Radar sensors
The radar sensors are located in the bumpers.
185
CONTROLS Safety
Camera Symbol Measure
Symbol lights up red: prewarning.

Brake and increase distance.
Symbol flashes red and an acoustic

signal sounds: acute warning for ob‐
stacles.
Brake and make an evasive maneu‐
ver, if necessary.
The camera is installed near the interior mirror. Symbol flashes red and an acoustic
signal sounds: acute warning for pe‐
destrians.
clean and clear.
Brake and make an evasive maneu‐
ver, if necessary.
▷ Pedestrian warning with braking function, re‐ Acute warning with evasion support
fer to page 191, is switched on.
Acute warning is displayed in case of the immi‐
▷ Approach control warning with light braking nent danger of a collision when the vehicle ap‐
function, refer to page 181, is switched on. proaches another object at a high differential
▷ Sensors detect sufficient clearance around speed.
the vehicle. If an acute warning is issued, intervene in the sit‐
uation yourself. If there is a risk of collision, the
Switching on/off driver's evasive maneuvers are supported by the
The system is automatically active after every system.
driving off. Acute warnings can also be triggered without
previous forewarning.
Warning with evasion support
System limits
A warning symbol appears in the instrument Safety information
cluster and in the Head-up Display if a collision
with a detected vehicle is imminent. WARNING
The system can react not at all, too late, incor‐
rectly, or without justification due to the system
limits. There is a risk of accidents or risk of
garding the system limits and actively intervene
if needed.
186
Safety CONTROLS
Detection range ▷ During calibration of the camera immediately

low in the sky.
Intersection warning with

City light braking function
The system's detection potential is limited. Concept
Only objects that are detected by the system are The system can help prevent accidents with
taken into account. cross traffic at intersections and junctions. If an
accident cannot be prevented, the system will
Thus, a system reaction might not come or
help reduce the impact speed.
might come late.
The system sounds a warning in the city speed
E.g., the following situations may not be de‐
range before an imminent collision and activates
tected:
brakes independently, if needed.
▷ Slow moving vehicles when you approach
them at high speed.
General information
▷ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of you,
The system is controlled by the following sen‐
or sharply decelerating vehicles.
sors:
▷ Vehicles with an unusual rear appearance.
▷ Camera in the area of the interior mirror.
▷ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you.
▷ Radar sensors on the side in the front
bumper.
▷ Radar sensor in the center in the front
The system may not be fully functional in the fol‐ bumper
lowing situations:
At intersections and junctions, a warning is is‐
▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall. sued when a danger of collision with crossing
▷ In tight curves. traffic is detected.
▷ If the driving stability control systems are lim‐ The system issues a two-phase warning of a
ited or deactivated, for instance DSC OFF. possible risk of collision with vehicles at speeds
▷ If the field of view of the camera or the wind‐ above approx. 6 mph/10 km/h. Time of warnings
shield is dirty or covered in the area of the in‐ may vary with the current driving situation.
terior mirror. The driver’s gaze behavior is captured by the
▷ If the camera has overheated and been tem‐ Driver Attention Camera in the instrument clus‐
porarily switched off due to excessively high ter. Additionally, the system checks for visual im‐
temperatures. pairments. Gaze behaviour and visibility also af‐
fect the timing of the warnings.
▷ Depending on the equipment: if the radar
187
CONTROLS Safety
Detection range Overview

Vehicles that cross your direction of travel can be
detected by the system as soon as these vehi‐ Button in the vehicle
cles enter into the detection range of the system.
Safety information
WARNING
Watch traffic closely and actively intervene Intelligent Safety
where appropriate.
Camera
WARNING
to its limits, the system might not output warn‐
WARNING clean and clear.
malfunction during tow-starting/towing with the Radar sensors
Intelligent Safety systems activated. There is a
The radar sensors are located in the front
risk of an accident. Switch all Intelligent Safety
bumper.
Front side bumper.
188
Safety CONTROLS

switched off.
Button Status
Button lights up green: all Intelligent

Button lights up orange: some Intelli‐

Front center bumper. gent Safety systems are switched off
Keep the radar sensors clean and unobstructed. or currently unavailable.
Button does not light up: all Intelligent

Switching on/off Safety systems are switched off.
Switching on automatically Setting the warning time

The system is automatically active after every Via iDrive:
driving off.
1. "CAR"
Switching on/off manually 2. "Settings"
Press the button. 3. "Driver Assistance"
The menu for the intelligent safety sys‐ 4. "Safety and warnings"
tem is displayed. 5. "Front collision warning"
If all Intelligent Safety systems were switched off, 6. Select desired setting:
all systems are now switched on. ▷ "Early"
"Configure INDIVIDUAL": depending on the ▷ "Medium"
▷ "Late": only acute warnings are displayed.
ual settings are activated and stored for the The selected time is stored for the driver profile
driver profile currently used. As soon as a setting currently used.
are activated. Warning with braking function
Press the button repeatedly. Display

The following settings are switched be‐ A warning symbol appears in the instrument
tween: cluster and in the Head-up Display, where availa‐
"ALL ON": all Intelligent Safety systems are ble, if a collision with a detected vehicle is immi‐
switched on. Basic settings are activated for the nent.
subfunctions.
189
CONTROLS Safety
Sym‐ Measure Braking intervention

bol The warning prompts the driver to react.
Danger of collision with vehicle The system can assist with automatic braking in‐
crossing from the right. tervention if there is a risk of a collision.
The braking intervention can bring the vehicle to
Danger of collision with vehicle a complete stop.
crossing from the left. The braking intervention occurs only if vehicle
stability has not been restricted, for instance by
Danger of collision with vehicle for deactivating the DSC Dynamic Stability Control.
which the direction of travel cannot
be determined. The driver may cancel the braking intervention
Prewarning: tively moving the steering wheel.
Symbol lights up red: prewarning for Object detection can be restricted. Follow the
vehicles that cross your direction of limitations of the detection range and functional
travel. limitations.
Intervene yourself, for instance by
braking. System limits
Acute warning:
Safety information
Symbol flashes red and an acoustic
signal sounds: acute warning when
vehicles cross your direction of WARNING
travel. The system can react not at all, too late, incor‐
Brake and make an evasive maneu‐ rectly, or without justification due to the system
ver, if necessary. limits. There is a risk of accidents or risk of
Prewarning if needed.
For example, a prewarning is displayed when a
danger of collision with a crossing vehicle is de‐
tected. Upper speed limit
If a prewarning is provided, respond by braking The system responds to crossing vehicles when
as warranted. your own speed is below approx.
50 mph/80 km/h.
Acute warning with braking function
An acute warning is displayed in the event of an
immediate danger of collision with a crossing ve‐
hicle.
If an acute warning is issued, intervene in the sit‐
uation yourself. If necessary, the system provides
assistance, such as with an automatic braking in‐
tervention, in a possible risk of collision.
Acute warnings can also be triggered without
previous forewarning.
190
Safety CONTROLS
Detection range ▷ If there are constant blinding effects because

low in the sky.
Warning sensitivity
The more sensitive the warning settings are, for
example the warning time, the more warnings are
displayed. Therefore, there may also be an ex‐
cess of premature or unjustified warnings and re‐
actions.
The system's detection potential is limited.

Thus, a system reaction might not come or Person warning with City
might come late.
light braking function
The following situations may not be detected, for
instance: Concept
▷ Crossing vehicles when they are hidden by The system can help prevent accidents involving
buildings, for instance. pedestrians and cyclists. If an accident cannot be
▷ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of you, prevented, the system will help reduce the im‐
or sharply decelerating vehicles. pact speed.
▷ Crossing bicycles. The system sounds a warning in the city speed
▷ Vehicles with an unusual side appearance. range before an imminent collision and activates
brakes independently, if needed.
The system may not be fully functional in the fol‐
General information
lowing situations: The system issues a warning of a possible risk of
collision with pedestrians and cyclists at speeds
above approx. 3 mph/5 km/h.
▷ In tight curves.
The system reacts to pedestrians and cyclists
▷ If the driving stability control systems are lim‐ who are within the detection range of the sys‐
ited or deactivated, for instance DSC OFF. tem.
▷ If the field of view of the camera or the wind‐ Depending on the equipment version, the sys‐
shield is dirty or covered in the area of the in‐ tem is controlled by the following sensors:
terior mirror.
▷ Camera in the area of the interior mirror.
▷ Radar sensor in the front bumper.
porarily switched off due to excessively high
temperatures.
▷ If the radar sensors are dirty or covered.
191
CONTROLS Safety
Detection range
WARNING
malfunction during tow-starting/towing with the
Overview
The detection area in front of the vehicle is div‐
ided into two areas:
▷ Central area, arrow 1, directly in front of the
vehicle.
▷ Expanded area, arrow 2, to the right and left
of the central area.
A collision is imminent if pedestrians are located
within the central area. A warning is issued about
pedestrians who are located within the extended
area only if they are moving in the direction of the
central area.
Intelligent Safety
Safety information
Camera
WARNING
where appropriate.
WARNING The camera is installed near the interior mirror.
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a sub‐ Keep the windshield in front of the interior mirror
stitute for the driver’s personal judgment. Due clean and clear.
192
Safety CONTROLS
With radar sensor "INDIVIDUAL": the Intelligent Safety systems are


switched off.
Button Status
The radar sensor is located in the lower area of Button lights up green: all Intelligent
the front bumper. Safety systems are switched on.
Always keep radar sensor clean and unob‐
structed.
gent Safety systems are switched off
Switching on/off Button does not light up: all Intelligent
Safety systems are switched off.
Warning with braking function
driving off.
Display
If a collision with a pedestrian or a cyclist is immi‐
Press the button. nent, a warning symbol appears on the instru‐
The menu for the intelligent safety sys‐ ment cluster and in the Head-up Display.
tem is displayed.
The red symbol is displayed and a signal
If all Intelligent Safety systems were switched off, sounds.
all systems are now switched on.
"Configure INDIVIDUAL": depending on the Intervene immediately by braking or make an
equipment version, the Intelligent Safety sys‐ evasive maneuver.
ual settings are activated and stored for the Braking intervention
driver profile currently used. As soon as a setting The warning prompts the driver to react. During
is changed on the menu, all settings of the menu a warning, the maximum braking force is used
are activated. when the brake is actuated. Prerequisite for the
brake booster is sufficiently quick and hard step‐
Press the button repeatedly. ping on the brake pedal.
The following settings are switched be‐ If there is a risk of collision, the system may also
tween: assist with braking.
"ALL ON": all Intelligent Safety systems are When the vehicle is traveling at a low speed, the
switched on. Basic settings are activated for the vehicle may come to a complete stop.
subfunctions.
193
CONTROLS Safety
The braking intervention occurs only if vehicle Functional limitations

stability has not been restricted, for instance by The system may not be fully functional or may
deactivating the DSC Dynamic Stability Control. not be available in the following situations:
The driver may cancel the braking intervention ▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall.
tively moving the steering wheel. ▷ In tight curves.
Object detection can be restricted. Follow the ▷ If the driving stability control systems are de‐
limitations of the detection range and functional activated, for instance DSC OFF.
limitations. ▷ If the field of view of the camera or the wind‐
shield is dirty or covered in the area of the in‐
System limits terior mirror.
Safety information porarily switched off due to excessively high
temperatures.
WARNING ▷ Depending on the equipment: if the radar

rectly, or without justification due to the system ▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the engine
limits. There is a risk of accidents or risk of via the Start/Stop button.
damage to property. Follow the information re‐ ▷ During calibration of the camera immediately
garding the system limits and actively intervene after vehicle delivery.
if needed. ▷ If there are constant blinding effects because
low in the sky.
Upper speed limit
▷ When it is dark outside.
The system responds to pedestrians and cyclists
when the speed of the vehicle is below approx.
50 mph/80 km/h. Night Vision with
Detection range pedestrian and animal
The system's detection potential is limited. detection
Thus, a warning might not be issued or be is‐
sued late. Concept
The following situations may not be detected, for Night Vision with pedestrian and animal detec‐
instance: tion is a night vision system.
▷ Partially covered pedestrians. An infrared camera scans the area in front of the
▷ Pedestrians that are not detected as such be‐ vehicle and issues a warning if it detects pedes‐
cause of the viewing angle or contour. trians and animals on the street. The system de‐
tects warm objects that are similar in shape to
▷ Pedestrians outside of the detection range.
human beings or animals. If necessary, the ther‐
▷ Pedestrians having a body size less than mal image can be displayed on the Control Dis‐
32 in/80 cm. play.
194
Safety CONTROLS
General information In addition, the system also detects animals

above a certain minimum size, for instance deer.
Thermal image Display on the Control Display with thermal im‐
age activated:
▷ People detected by the system: in light yel‐
low.
▷ Animals detected by the system: in dark yel‐
low.
Range of object detection, with good ambient

conditions:
▷ Pedestrian detection: up to approx.
The image shows the heat radiated by objects in 330 ft/100 m.
the field of view of the camera. ▷ Detection of large animals: up to approx.
Warm objects have a light appearance and cold 490 ft/150 m.
objects a dark appearance. ▷ Detection of medium animals: up to approx.
The ability to detect an object depends on the 230 ft/70 m.
temperature difference between the object and Environmental influences can limit the availability
the background and on the level of heat radiation of object detection.
emitted by the object. Objects that are similar in If the vehicle systems detect that the vehicle is
temperature to the environment or that radiate located in a residential area, the animal detection
very little heat are difficult to detect. is temporarily switched off.
For safety reasons, when driving at speeds
above approx. 3 mph/5 km/h and in low ambient Safety information
light, the image is only displayed when the low
beams are switched on. WARNING
A still image is displayed at regular intervals for a The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
fraction of a second. driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility
Pedestrian and animal detection dent. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions.
where appropriate.
WARNING
Object detection and warning only functions in incorrectly, or without justification. There is a
darkness. risk of an accident. Adjust driving style to traffic
Objects whose form is similar to people with suf‐
ficient heat radiation are detected.
195
CONTROLS Safety
conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively in‐ When the vehicle lighting is switched on, the
tervene where appropriate. camera objective is cleaned at regular intervals
when the windshield washer system, refer to
page 141, is activated.
Overview
Switching on
When it is dark outside, the system is automati‐
cally active after every driving off.
Switching on the thermal image

The thermal image from the Night Vision camera
can be displayed on the Control Display in addi‐
tion to the warning function. This function has no
effect on object detection.
Intelligent Safety Press the button.
The image from the camera is displayed on the

Control Display.
Adjusting the thermal image

Brightness and contrast can be adjusted, when
the thermal image is switched on.
Via iDrive:
1. Select brightness or contrast:

Thermal image ▷ "Brightness".
▷ "Contrast".
2. Set the desired value.
Camera
Warning function
Display
Symbol Meaning
Person warning.
Animal warning.
The camera is automatically heated when the ex‐
ternal temperatures are low.
196
Safety CONTROLS
Symbol Meaning Prewarning

Prewarning for persons is displayed when a per‐
Symbol lights up red. Prewarning.
son is detected in the central area immediately in
Symbol flashes red and a sig‐ Acute warning. front of the vehicle as well as on the left or right
nal sounds. side in the extended area.
Prewarning for animals is displayed when an ani‐
The displayed symbol may vary and shows the mal is detected in the front of the vehicle.
side of the road on which the person or animal If a prewarning is issued, intervene by braking or
was detected. making an evasive maneuver.
Warning of people or animals in Acute warning

danger Acute warning is displayed if a person or an ani‐
If a collision with a person or an animal detected mal is detected in direct proximity in front of the
in this way is imminent, a warning symbol ap‐ vehicle.
pears on the instrument cluster and in the Head-
If an acute warning is issued, brake or make an
up Display.
evasive maneuver immediately.
Although both the shape and the heat radiation
are analyzed, false warnings cannot be ruled out. Display in the Head-up Display
The warning is displayed simultaneously in the
Warning area in front of the vehicle Head-up Display and on the instrument cluster.
System limits
Basic limits
lowing situations:
▷ On steep hills, in steep depressions or in tight
curves.
The warning area for the person warning con‐ ▷ If the camera is soiled or damaged.
sists of two parts: ▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall.
▷ Central area, arrow 1, directly in front of the ▷ At very high external temperatures.
vehicle.
▷ Expanded area, arrow 2, to the right and left Limits of pedestrian and animal
of the central area. detection
With animal warnings, no distinction is made be‐ In some situations, it may occur that pedestrians
tween the central or expanded area. are detected as animals or animals as pedes‐
The entire area moves along with the vehicle in trians.
the direction of the steering angle and changes Small animals are not detected by the object de‐
with the vehicle speed. As the vehicle speed in‐ tection function, even if they are clearly visible in
creases, the area becomes, for instance longer the image.
and wider. Limited detection, for instance in the following
circumstances:
197
CONTROLS Safety
▷ People or animals who are fully or partially propriate. Do not jerk the steering wheel in re‐
covered, especially when their heads are cov‐ sponse to a warning.
ered.
▷ People who are not in an upright position, for
instance lying down. WARNING
▷ Cyclists on unconventional bicycles (e.g., re‐ Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a sub‐
cumbent bicycles). stitute for the driver’s personal judgment. Due
▷ After physical damage to the system, for in‐ to its limits, the system might not output warn‐
stance after an accident. ings or reactions or these might be output late,
Lane departure warning conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively in‐
Concept
The lane departure warning alerts when the vehi‐ Functional requirements
cle is about to run off the road or exit the lane. The camera must detect the lane markings for
the lane departure warning to be active.
General information
This camera-based system warns starting at a Overview
minimum speed.
The minimum speed is country-specific and is Button in the vehicle
displayed in the menu for the Intelligent Safety
systems.
Warnings are issued by means of a steering
wheel vibration. The severity of the steering
wheel vibration can be adjusted.
The system does not provide a warning if the
turn signal is set before leaving the lane.
If in the speed range up to 130 mph/210 km/h a
lane marking is crossed, the system intervenes
with a brief active steering intervention in addi‐ Intelligent Safety
tion to vibrating. The system thus helps keep the
vehicle in the lane.
Safety information
WARNING
driver’s personal judgment in assessing road
and traffic safety. There is a risk of an accident.
Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch
traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐
198
Safety CONTROLS
Camera "INDIVIDUAL": the Intelligent Safety systems are


switched off.
Button Status
The camera is installed near the interior mirror. Button lights up green: all Intelligent
Keep the windshield in front of the interior mirror Safety systems are switched on.
clean and clear.
gent Safety systems are switched off
Switching on/off or currently unavailable.

Switching on automatically Safety systems are switched off.
The lane departure warning activates automati‐
cally after departure if the function was switched Setting the warning time
on at the end of the last trip.
Via iDrive:
Switching on/off manually 1. "CAR"
Press the button. 2. "Settings"
The menu for the intelligent safety sys‐ 3. "Driver Assistance"
tem is displayed. 4. "Safety and warnings"
If all Intelligent Safety systems were switched off, 5. "Lane Departure Warning"
▷ "Early": the system promptly issues a
warning whenever a hazardous situation is
detected.
driver profile currently used. As soon as a setting ▷ "Medium": the system meets the standar‐
is changed on the menu, all settings of the menu dized safety requirements.
are activated. ▷ "Reduced": some warnings are sup‐
pressed depending on the situation,
Press the button repeatedly. for instance during passing without a turn
The following settings are switched be‐ signal or when purposely driving over lane
tween: markings in curves.
"ALL ON": all Intelligent Safety systems are ▷ "Off": no warnings are issued.
switched on. Basic settings are activated for the The selected setting is stored for the driver pro‐
subfunctions. file currently used.
199
CONTROLS Safety
Setting the force of the steering cordance with the steering wheel vibration set‐
wheel vibration ting.
Via iDrive: If the turn signal is switched on before a lane
change, a warning is not issued.
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings" Steering intervention
3. "Driver Assistance" If in the speed range up to 130 mph/210 km/h a
4. "Feedback on the steering wheel" lane marking is crossed, the system intervenes
with a brief active steering intervention in addi‐
tion to vibrating. The steering intervention helps
The setting is applied to all Intelligent Safety sys‐ keep the vehicle in the lane. The steering inter‐
tems and stored for the driver profile currently vention can be noticed on the steering wheel
used. and can be manually overridden at any time. Dur‐
ing an active steering intervention, the display in
Switching steering intervention the instrument cluster will blink.
on/off
The steering intervention can be switched on Warning signal
and off separately for Active Blind Spot Detec‐ In the event of multiple active steering interven‐
tion and lane departure warning. tions by the system within 3 minutes without the
Via iDrive: driver's intervention at the steering wheel, an
acoustic warning will sound. A short warning sig‐
1. "CAR" nal will sound at the second steering interven‐
2. "Settings" tion. Beginning with the third steering interven‐
3. "Driver Assistance" tion, an continuous warning will sound.
4. "Safety and warnings" In addition, a Check Control message is dis‐
played.
5. "Lane Departure Warning"
The warning signal and Check-Control message
6. "Steering intervention"
are an encouragement to pay closer attention to
The selected setting is stored for the driver pro‐ the lane.
With trailer towing
Display in the instrument cluster If the trailer power socket is in use or trailer tow‐
The system illuminates green: at lane ing is activated, for instance during operation
marking was detected on at least one with trailer or bicycle rack, no steering interven‐
side of the vehicle and warnings can be tion takes place.
issued.
End of warning
Warning function The warning is canceled in the following situa‐
tions:
If you leave the lane ▷ Automatically after approx. 3 seconds.
If you leave the lane and if a lane marking has ▷ When returning to your own lane.
been detected, the steering wheel vibrates in ac‐ ▷ When braking hard.
▷ When using the turn signal.
200
Safety CONTROLS
▷ If DSC Dynamic Stability Control intervenes. A Check Control message may be displayed
when the system is not fully functional.
System limits
Safety information Active Blind Spot

Detection
WARNING
The system can react not at all, too late, incor‐ Concept
rectly, or without justification due to the system Active Blind Spot Detection detects vehicles in
limits. There is a risk of accidents or risk of the blind spot or vehicles approaching from be‐
damage to property. Follow the information re‐ hind in the adjacent lane. A warning is issued in
garding the system limits and actively intervene various gradations in these situations.
if needed.
General information
lowing situations:
▷ In the event of missing, worn, poorly visible,
merging, diverging, or multiple lane markings
such as in construction areas.
▷ When lane markings are covered in snow, ice,
dirt or water. Two radar sensors in the rear bumper monitor
▷ In tight curves or on narrow lanes. the area behind and next to the vehicle when
traveling faster than a minimum speed.
▷ When lane markings are covered by objects.
The minimum speed is shown in the menu for
▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in front
the Intelligent Safety systems.
of you.
The system indicates whether there are vehicles
in the blind spot, arrow 1, or approaching from
behind in the adjacent lane, arrow 2.
low in the sky.
The light in the exterior mirror lights up dimmed.
▷ If the field of view of the camera or the wind‐
shield is dirty or covered in the area of the in‐ Before you change lanes after setting the turn
terior mirror. signal, the system issues a warning in the situa‐
▷ If the camera has overheated and been tem‐ tions described above.
porarily switched off due to excessively high The light in the exterior mirror flashes and the
temperatures. steering wheel vibrates.
▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the engine Vehicles with side collision warning: at speeds of
via the Start/Stop button. up to 130 mph/210 km/h, the system can inter‐
▷ During calibration of the camera immediately vene with a brief active steering intervention and
after vehicle delivery. help guide the vehicle back into the lane. The
steering intervention occurs when a minimum
201
CONTROLS Safety
speed is reached. This minimum speed is dis‐ Radar sensors

played on the Control Display in the menu for the
steering intervention, refer to page 203.
Safety information
WARNING
dent. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. The radar sensors are located in the rear
Watch traffic closely and actively intervene bumper.
where appropriate. Always keep the bumper in the area of the radar
sensors clean and unobstructed.
WARNING
Switching on/off
stitute for the driver’s personal judgment. Due Switching on automatically
The Active Blind Spot Detection is automatically
activated after departure if the function was
switched on at the end of the last trip.
tervene where appropriate. Switching on/off manually
Press the button.
Overview tem is displayed.
are activated.

Intelligent Safety The following settings are switched be‐
tween:
subfunctions.
202
Safety CONTROLS
"INDIVIDUAL": the Intelligent Safety systems are The setting is applied to all Intelligent Safety sys‐
switched on according to the individual settings. tems and stored for the driver profile currently
Some Intelligent Safety systems cannot be indi‐ used.
Vehicles with side collision warning:
Press and hold this button. switching steering intervention
All Intelligent Safety systems are on/off
switched off. The steering intervention can be switched on
and off separately for Active Blind Spot Detec‐
Button Status tion and lane departure warning.
Button lights up green: all Intelligent Via iDrive:
Safety systems are switched on. 1. "CAR"
Button lights up orange: some Intelli‐ 2. "Settings"
gent Safety systems are switched off 3. "Driver Assistance"
Button does not light up: all Intelligent 5. "Blind spot collision warning"
6. "Steering intervention"
Setting the warning time
rently used.
Via iDrive:
1. "CAR" Warning function
2. "Settings"
Light in the exterior mirror
5. "Blind spot collision warning"
"Off": with this setting, no warning is output.
rently used.
Setting the force of the steering

wheel vibration
Prewarning
Via iDrive:
The dimmed light in the exterior mirror indicates
1. "CAR" when there are vehicles in the blind spot or ap‐
2. "Settings" proaching from behind.
Acute warning
4. "Feedback on the steering wheel"
If the turn signal is switched on while a vehicle is
5. Select the desired setting. in the critical zone, the steering wheel vibrates
203
CONTROLS Safety
briefly and the light in the exterior mirror flashes Functional limitations
brightly. The system may not be fully functional in the fol‐
The warning stops when the other vehicle has lowing situations:
left the critical area or after deactivation of the ▷ When a vehicle is approaching at a speed
turn signal. much faster than your own.
Vehicles with side collision warning
▷ In tight curves or on narrow lanes.
If there is no response to the vibration of the
steering wheel at speeds of up to ▷ If the bumper is dirty, iced up, or covered,
130 mph/210 km/h and the lane marking is for instance by stickers.
crossed, the system intervenes with a brief active ▷ If cargo protrudes.
steering intervention. The steering intervention For vehicles with side collision warning, the
helps return the vehicle into the lane. The steer‐ steering intervention can be limited, for instance
ing intervention can be noticed on the steering in the following situation:
wheel and can be manually overridden at any
time. ▷ In the event of missing, worn, poorly visible,
Flashing of the light
A flashing of the light during vehicle unlocking
dirt or water.
serves as system self-test.
▷ When lane markings are not white.
System limits ▷ When lane markings are covered by objects.
Safety information of you.
WARNING of oncoming light, for instance from the sun
low in the sky.
rectly, or without justification due to the system ▷ If the field of view of the camera or the wind‐
limits. There is a risk of accidents or risk of shield is dirty or covered in the area of the in‐
damage to property. Follow the information re‐ terior mirror.
garding the system limits and actively intervene ▷ If the camera has overheated and been tem‐
if needed. porarily switched off due to excessively high
temperatures.
Upper speed limit
If the vehicle speed exceeds approx.
155 mph/250 km/h, the system is deactivated
temporarily.
A Check Control message is displayed when the
If the vehicle speed falls below approx.
system is not fully functional.
155 mph/250 km/h, the system once again re‐
sponds according to the setting. If the trailer power socket is in use or trailer tow‐
ing is activated, for instance during operation
with trailer or bicycle rack, the system cannot be
204
Safety CONTROLS
switched on. A Check Control message is dis‐ Safety information

played.
Displaying warnings WARNING
Depending on the selected warning settings, for The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
instance warning time, more warnings can be driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility
displayed. However, there may also be an excess and traffic situation. There is a risk of an acci‐
of premature warnings of critical situations. dent. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions.
where appropriate.
Side collision warning
WARNING
Concept
The system helps to avoid imminent side colli‐
sions.
General information incorrectly, or without justification. There is a
The camera must detect the lane markings for
the side collision warning with steering interven‐
tion to be active.
Four radar sensors in the bumpers monitor the
space next to the vehicle from a minimum speed Overview
of up to approx. 130 mph/210 km/h.
The minimum speed is country-specific and is Button in the vehicle
displayed in the menu for the Intelligent Safety
systems.
The front camera determines the lane marking
positions.
If, for instance another vehicle is detected next to
the vehicle and if there is a risk of collision with
this vehicle, the system helps avoid the collision.
For this purpose, the system issues a warning
with a flashing LED in the exterior mirror, a vibrat‐
ing steering wheel. If necessary, the system will Intelligent Safety
carry out an active steering intervention.
205
CONTROLS Safety
Radar sensors Switching on/off

The radar sensors are located in the bumpers.
The side collision warning activates automatically
after departure if the function was switched on at
the end of the last trip.

Press the button.
tem is displayed.
Front bumper.
are activated.

Rear bumper.
The following settings are switched be‐
Always keep the bumper in the area of the radar tween:
Camera subfunctions.

switched off.

clean and clear.
206
Safety CONTROLS
Button Status If necessary, an active steering intervention then

takes place to prevent collisions and maintain the
Button lights up green: all Intelligent vehicle within its own lane.
The steering intervention can be noticed on the
Button lights up orange: some Intelli‐ steering wheel and can be manually overridden
gent Safety systems are switched off at any time.
or currently unavailable. A Check Control message is displayed during
steering intervention.
System limits
Setting the force of the steering
Safety information
wheel vibration
Via iDrive:
WARNING
1. "CAR" The system can react not at all, too late, incor‐
2. "Settings" rectly, or without justification due to the system
3. "Driver Assistance" limits. There is a risk of accidents or risk of
4. "Feedback on the steering wheel"
5. Select the desired setting. if needed.
The setting is applied to all Intelligent Safety sys‐
tems and stored for the driver profile currently
used. Functional limitations
Warning function lowing situations:
▷ When a vehicle is approaching at a speed
Light in the exterior mirror much faster than your own.
▷ If the bumper is dirty, iced up, or covered,
for instance by stickers.
▷ If cargo protrudes.
▷ In the event of missing, worn, poorly visible,
Acute warning dirt or water.
If there is a risk of collision, the light in the exte‐ ▷ When lane markings are covered by objects.
rior mirror flashes and the steering wheel vi‐
brates.
of you.
207
CONTROLS Safety
▷ If there are constant blinding effects because ▷ Active Protection, refer to page 210: if a colli‐
of oncoming light, for instance from the sun sion seems to be unavoidable, PreCrash
low in the sky. functions are triggered.
▷ If the field of view of the camera or the wind‐
shield is dirty or covered in the area of the in‐ Safety information
terior mirror.
porarily switched off due to excessively high WARNING
temperatures. The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the engine driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility
via the Start/Stop button. and traffic situation. There is a risk of an acci‐
▷ During calibration of the camera immediately Watch traffic closely and actively intervene
after vehicle delivery. where appropriate.
A Check Control message is displayed when the
system is not fully functional.
If the trailer power socket is in use or trailer tow‐ WARNING
with trailer or bicycle rack, the system cannot be
switched on. A Check Control message is dis‐
played.
Rear collision prevention conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively in‐
Concept
The system reacts to vehicles approaching from
behind. Overview
General information Radar sensors
The radar sensors are located in the rear

Two radar sensors in the rear bumper monitor
bumper.
the area behind the vehicle.
Always keep the bumper in the area of the radar
If a vehicle approaches from the rear at a certain
speed, the system responds as follows:
208
Safety CONTROLS
Switching on/off Overview

driving off.
The system is deactivated in the following situa‐
tions:
▷ When driving in reverse.
▷ If the trailer power socket is in use or trailer
towing is activated, for instance during opera‐
tion with trailer or bicycle rack.
System limits Parking brake

lowing situations:
▷ When a vehicle is approaching at a speed
▷ The function can be activated from speeds of
much faster than your own.
approx. 6 mph/10 km/h.
▷ When the approaching vehicle approaches
▷ Lane changes are carried out at speeds of
slowly.
approx. 43 mph/70 km/h to
▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall. 62 mph/100 km/h.
▷ If the bumper is dirty, iced up, or covered, Activating the emergency stop
for instance by stickers. function
▷ If cargo protrudes. Pull the switch for the parking brake briefly
to activate the emergency stop function.
Emergency Stop Assistant ▷ After the switch is released, an automatic

lane change may be initiated where required.
▷ The system will take control of the vehicle for
Concept a maximum of 2 minutes.
If the driver is no longer fit to drive, the system
▷ The hazard warning system is switched on.
helps to safely bring the vehicle to a standstill.
▷ An Emergency Request is triggered.
General information
On freeways or roads similar to freeways, the Canceling the emergency stop
system steers the vehicle to the shoulder or function
breakdown lane on the side of the road. On other The driver can cancel the emergency stop func‐
roads or under high traffic conditions, the vehicle tion by actively taking control of the vehicle
is brought to a standstill on the actual road. throughout the entire process.
The emergency stop function is not triggered For instance, the emergency stop function will
automatically. The emergency stop function can be canceled in the following situations:
only be triggered manually by the occupants.
▷ When steering.
▷ When using the turn signal.
209
CONTROLS Safety
▷ During acceleration. ▷ Emergency stop.

▷ When switching off the hazard warning sys‐ ▷ Severe understeering.
tem. ▷ Severe oversteering.
▷ When canceling the Emergency Request. Certain functions of several systems can - within
▷ When switching the selector lever position at the system limits - lead to Active Protection trig‐
standstill. gering:
▷ When the driver's foot remains on the accel‐ ▷ Approach control warning with braking func‐
erator pedal after the function has been trig‐ tion: automatic brake intervention.
gered. ▷ Approach control warning with braking func‐
▷ When the switch of the parking brake is tion: brake booster.
pressed. ▷ Night Vision with pedestrian and animal de‐
tection: brake booster.
At standstill ▷ Rear collision prevention: detection of immi‐
As soon as the vehicle is stationary, the system nent rear collisions.
will carry out the following settings:
▷ Selector lever position P is engaged. Safety information
▷ Parking brake is locked.
▷ Interior lights are switched on. WARNING
▷ Central locking system is unlocked. The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
driver’s personal judgment. Due to the system
System limits limits, critical situation could not be detected
reliably or in time. There is a risk of an accident.
Use the system only in the event of a driver fail‐
ure.
traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐
The system cannot replace the driving perform‐ propriate.
ance of a driver who is fit to drive.
Function
Active Protection When the safety belt is fastened, the driver's and
passenger's belt straps are automatically tight‐
Concept ened once after driving away.
Active Protection prepares occupants and the In accident-critical situations, the following indi‐
vehicle for a possible accident in critical driving or vidual functions become active as needed:
collision situations. ▷ Automatic pretensioning of the front safety
belts.
General information ▷ Automatic window closing up to a narrow
Active Protection consists of various PreCrash gap.
functions, which can vary depending on the
▷ Automatic closing of the panoramic glass
equipment.
sunroof, including sun protection.
The system is used to detect certain critical driv‐
▷ For vehicles equipped with comfort seats in
ing situations that might lead to an accident. This
the front: automatic positioning of the back‐
includes the following critical driving situations:
rest for the front passenger seat.
210
Safety CONTROLS
After a critical driving situation without an acci‐

dent, the front safety belts are loosened again.
Alertness assistant
If the belt tension does not loosen automatically,
stop the vehicle and unbuckle the safety belt us‐
General information
ing the red button in the buckle. Fasten the The system can detect decreasing alertness or
safety belt before continuing on your trip. fatigue of the driver during long, monotonous
All other systems can be restored to the desired trips, for instance on highways. In this situation, it
setting. is recommended that the driver takes a break.
Safety information
PostCrash – iBrake
WARNING
Concept The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
In the event of an accident, the system can bring driver’s personal judgment in assessing one's
the vehicle to a halt automatically without inter‐ physical state. An increasing lack of alertness or
vention by the driver in certain situations. This fatigue may not be detected or not be detected
can reduce the risk of a further collision and the in time. There is a risk of an accident. Make
consequences thereof. sure that the driver is rested and alert. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions.
At standstill
After coming to a halt, the brake is released auto‐
Function
matically.
The system is switched on each time drive-ready
state is switched on.
Harder vehicle braking
After travel has begun, the system monitors cer‐
It can be necessary to bring the vehicle in certain
tain aspects of the driver's behavior, so that de‐
situations to a halt quicker.
creasing alertness or fatigue can be detected.
To do this, for a short time the braking pressure
This procedure takes the following criteria into
applied when stepping on the brake pedal must
account:
be higher than the braking pressure achieved by
the automatic braking function. This interrupts ▷ Personal driving style, for instance steering
automatic braking. behavior.
▷ Driving conditions, for instance length of trip.
Interrupting automatic braking ▷ Depending on the equipment: attention of
It can be necessary to interrupt automatic brak‐ the driver through the Driver Attention Cam‐
ing in certain situations, for instance for an eva‐ era.
sive maneuver. Starting at approx. 43 mph/70 km/h, the system
Interrupt automatic braking: is active and can also display a recommendation
to take a break.
▷ By pressing the brake pedal.
▷ By pressing the accelerator pedal.
211
CONTROLS Safety
Break recommendation ▷ When the vehicle speed is mainly below

about 43 mph/70 km/h.
Settings ▷ With a sporty driving style, such as during
The alertness assistant is active automatically rapid acceleration or when cornering fast.
with each switching on of drive-ready state and ▷ In active driving situations, such as when
can thus display a break recommendation. changing lanes frequently.
The break recommendation can also be ▷ When the road surface is poor.
switched on or off and adjusted via iDrive. ▷ In the event of strong side winds.
Via iDrive: The system is reset approx. 45 minutes after
1. "CAR" parking the vehicle, for instance in the case of a
break during longer trips on highways.
2. "Settings"
4. "Fatigue and Focus Alert"
▷ "Standard": the break recommendation is
made with a defined value.
▷ "Sensitive": the break recommendation is
issued earlier.
▷ "Off": no break recommendation is made.
Display
If the driver becomes less alert or fatigued, a
message is displayed in the Control Display with
the recommendation to take a break.
During the display, the following settings can be
selected:
▷ "Do not ask again"
▷ "Places to stop"
▷ "Remind me later"
The break recommendation is repeated after
20 minutes.
After a break, another recommendation to take a
break cannot be displayed until after approxi‐
mately 45 minutes.
System limits
The function may be limited in the following sit‐
uations, for instance and will either output an in‐
correct warning or no warning at all:
▷ When the clock is set incorrectly.
212
Driving stability control systems CONTROLS
Driving stability control systems

Vehicle features and Adaptive brake assistant
options In combination with Active Cruise Control, this
system ensures that the brakes respond even
more rapidly when braking in critical situations.
Drive-off assistant
tems. When using these functions and systems, Concept
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ This system supports driving off on uphill grades.
served.
Driving off
Anti-lock Braking System 1. Hold the vehicle in place with the foot brake.
ABS 2. Release the foot brake and drive off without

delay.
ABS prevents locking of the wheels during brak‐ After the foot brake is released, the vehicle is
ing. held in place for approx. 2 seconds.
The vehicle maintains its steering power even Depending on the vehicle loading or when a
during full brake applications, thus increasing ac‐ trailer is used, the vehicle may roll back slightly.
tive safety.
ABS is operational every time you start the en‐
gine.
DSC Dynamic Stability
Control
Brake assistant Concept
When you apply the brakes rapidly, the system Within the physical limits, the system helps to
automatically produces the greatest possible keep the vehicle on a steady course by reducing
braking force boost. It reduces the braking dis‐ engine speed and by braking the individual
tance to a minimum during emergency stop. wheels.
This system utilizes all of the capabilities pro‐
vided by the Antilock Brake System ABS. General information
Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal DSC detects the following unstable driving con‐
for the duration of the emergency stop. ditions, for instance:
▷ Fishtailing, which can lead to oversteering.
▷ Loss of traction of the front wheels, which
can lead to understeering.
213
CONTROLS Driving stability control systems
Safety information Deactivating/activating DSC
WARNING
General information
When DSC is deactivated, driving stability is re‐
duced during acceleration and when driving in
driver’s personal judgment in assessing the
curves.
traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐
tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC again
situations. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust as soon as possible.
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic
closely and actively intervene where appropri‐ Deactivating DSC
ate. Hold the button down until DSC OFF is
displayed in the instrument cluster and
the DSC OFF indicator light is illuminated.
WARNING
When driving with a roof load, for instance with Activating DSC
roof-mounted luggage rack, the vehicle's cen‐
ter of gravity is higher, which increases the risk Press the button.
of the vehicle tipping in critical driving situa‐ DSC OFF and the DSC OFF indicator
tions. There is a risk of accidents or risk of light go out.
damage to property. Do not deactivate DSC
Dynamic Stability Control when driving with
roof load. Display
In the instrument cluster

Overview When DSC is deactivated, DSC OFF is displayed
in the instrument cluster.
Indicator/warning lights
The indicator light lights up: DSC is de‐
activated.
The indicator light flashes: DSC controls

the drive and braking forces.
The indicator light lights up: DSC has
malfunctioned.
DSC OFF
214
DTC Dynamic Traction Activating/deactivating DTC

Control Activating DTC
Press the button.
Concept
TRACTION is displayed in the instru‐
DTC is a version of the DSC Dynamic Stability ment cluster and the indicator light for DSC OFF
Control where forward momentum is optimized. lights up.
The system ensures maximum headway on spe‐
cial road conditions or loose road surfaces, for in‐
stance unplowed snowy roads, but with some‐ Deactivating DTC
what limited driving stability. Press the button again.
TRACTION and the DSC OFF indicator
General information light go out.
When DTC is activated, the vehicle has maxi‐
mum traction. Driving stability is limited during
acceleration and when driving in curves.
Display
You may find it useful to briefly activate DTC in
If DTC is activated, TRACTION is displayed in
▷ When driving in slush or on uncleared, snow- the instrument cluster.
covered roads.
▷ When driving off from deep snow or loose Indicator/warning lights
ground.
The indicator light lights up: DTC is acti‐
▷ When driving with snow chains. vated.
Overview
Automatic program change
Button in the vehicle In certain situations, the DSC is activated auto‐
matically:
▷ If Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go func‐
tion ACC is activated.
▷ On a braking intervention by the Intelligent
Safety systems.
▷ The vehicle has a flat tire.
xDrive
DSC OFF
Concept
xDrive is the all-wheel-drive system of the vehi‐
cle. The interaction of xDrive and other suspen‐
sion control systems, such as DSC Dynamic Sta‐
bility Control, further optimizes traction and
215
driving dynamics. xDrive variably distributes the Display in the Head-up Display
driving forces to the front and rear axles as de‐
Some of the information can also be displayed in
manded by the driving situation and road surface.
the Head-up Display.
The Driving Dynamics Control is used to change
the all-wheel distribution from traction oriented
to sport oriented. M sport differential
With the xOffroad package, the all-wheel-drive
system is additionally adjusted for the respective The active M differential provides for continu‐
xOffroad mode. ously variable locking of the rear axle differential
Because of the needs-based use of the all- depending on the driving situation. This prevents
wheel-drive system, Efficient4x4 yields a reduc‐ spinning of a single rear wheel and thereby pro‐
tion in consumption. vides optimal traction in any driving situation.
The driver is responsible adapting his or her driv‐
Display on the Control Display ing style to the situation.
Display xView display

Automatic Differential
Via iDrive:
Brake
1. "CAR"
2. "Driving information" The system controls the driving force by auto‐
3. "xOFFROAD" matic braking intervention on individual wheels.
The function corresponds to a differential lock:
the system detects if a wheel begins to spin, be‐
▷ With a navigation system: compass display cause of loose road surface, for instance and au‐
for the driving direction. tomatically brakes it.
▷ With navigation system: height indication for The driving force is diverted to the wheel with
the current position. better traction.
▷ With navigation system: destination flag in As a result, the engine force is transferred more
compass direction to the destination. efficiently to the wheels during accelerations.
▷ Pitch attitude with degree indication and per‐
centage.
▷ Transverse gradient with degree indication. HDC Hill Descent Control
▷ Graphic display for the steering angle.
▷ Level setting for the 2–axle air suspension.
Concept
Hill Descent Control, HDC, is a downhill control
With the xOffroad package, the following addi‐
feature that controls the vehicle speed on steep
tional information can be displayed:
downhill grades, for instance when driving on un‐
▷ With Surround View: depending on the paved roads.
speed, terrain-specific camera perspectives.
When the system is active, the vehicle moves at
▷ xOffroad mode currently active. the speed set by the driver, without the driver
▷ Distribution of drive torque to the wheels. having to depress the brake pedal.
While HTC is controlling the speed, the system
automatically distributes the braking force to the
216
individual wheels. This improves vehicle drivabil‐ Display in the instrument cluster
ity and stability. If necessary, the Antilock Brake
System prevents the wheels from locking. A symbol and the selected de‐
sired speed are displayed.
General information ▷ Green display: HDC is active,
the system is reducing the ve‐
Hill Descent Control can be activated at speeds
hicle speed.
below approx. 25 mph/40 km/h.
▷ Gray display: HDC is on standby.
Speeds can be set between approx.
2 mph/3 km/h and approx. 20 mph/30 km/h.
When the vehicle is moving downhill, the system Display in the Head-up Display
reduces the speed to the set value, within the The HDC status can also be displayed in the
physical limits. Head-up Display.
Overview Increasing or decreasing vehicle

speed
Using the cruise control rocker
switch
The desired speed can be changed using the
cruise control rocker switch on the steering
wheel.
HDC
Activating HDC
Press the button. The LED on the button
lights up. ▷ Press the rocker switch up: the speed in‐
Speeds between approx. 2 mph/3 km/h and ap‐ creases gradually.
prox. 20 mph/30 km/h are adopted as the de‐ ▷ Press the rocker switch up and hold: the
sired speed. speed increases while the rocker switch is
Emergency braking function, Active PDC: the pressed.
emergency braking function, refer to page 239, ▷ Press the rocker switch down: the speed de‐
is deactivated. creases gradually.
▷ Press the rocker switch down and hold: the
speed decreases while the rocker switch is
pressed.
217
Using the brake pedal Tuning

While HDC is controlling the speed, the set de‐ The system offers several different tunings.
sired speed can be reduced by depressing the
brake pedal. Driving mode Integral Active Steering
COMFORT comfortable, for optimal

Deactivating HDC ECO PRO travel comfort
Press the button again. The LED goes out.
SPORT dynamic, for greater agility
HDC is automatically deactivated above
approx. 25 mph/40 km/h. The different tunings are assigned to the differ‐
ent driving modes of the Driving Dynamics Con‐
Malfunction trol, refer to page 148.
If a malfunction occurs, a message is displayed in
the instrument cluster. Using snow chains
In order to guarantee free running of the wheels
when operating with snow chains, rear axle
Integral Active Steering steering of the integral active steering must be
switched off when snow chains are mounted.
Concept Set operation with snow chains, refer to
page 348.
The Integral Active Steering increases the ma‐
neuverability and makes a more direct steering
response possible. Malfunction
In the event of a malfunction, the steering wheel
General information must be turned further, while the vehicle re‐
sponds more sensitively to steering wheel move‐
Integral Active Steering is a combination of Ac‐
ments in the higher speed range.
tive Steering and rear axle steering.
The stability-enhancing intervention may be de‐
The variable steering ratio amplifies the steering
activated.
angle when maneuvering, thus making the steer‐
ing more direct. The rear axle steering acts to in‐ Proceed cautiously and drive defensively.
crease maneuverability at low speeds by turning Have the system checked by a dealer’s service
the rear wheels slightly in the opposite direction center or another qualified service center or re‐
to the front wheels. pair shop.
At higher speeds, the rear wheels are turned in
the same direction as the front wheels. This re‐
sults in, for instance better directional stability
and a more harmonious change of direction.
In critical driving situations, the Integral Active
Steering can stabilize the vehicle through pur‐
poseful steering of the rear wheels before the
driver intervenes, for instance in case of over‐
steering.
218
Driver assistance systems CONTROLS
Driver assistance systems

Vehicle features and Operation
options Switching on
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ Press the button on the steering wheel.
It also describes features and functions that are The current speed is accepted as the speed
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due limit.
to the selected options or country versions. This If the system is switched on while the vehicle is
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ stationary or driving at low speeds,
tems. When using these functions and systems, 20 mph/30 km/h is set as the speed limit.
The marking in the speedometer is set to the re‐
served.
spective speed.
When the speed limit is switched on, DSC Dy‐
Manual Speed Limiter namic Stability Control is switched on as well, if
needed, and switches to COMFORT driving
mode if applicable.
Concept
The system can be used to set a speed limit, for Switching off
instance to prevent the vehicle from exceeding
speed limits. Press the button on the steering wheel.
General information The system switches off automatically in the fol‐

lowing situations, for example:
The system can limit the speed, starting at a
value of 20 mph/30 km/h. The vehicle can be ▷ When the engine is switched off.
driven at any speed below the set speed limit. ▷ When cruise control is switched on.
▷ Several programs can be activated via the
Overview Driving Dynamics Control.
The displays go out.
Buttons on the steering wheel
Interrupting
Button Function
If the reverse gear is engaged or idle, the system
System on/off, refer to page 219. is interrupted.
Store current speed.
Rocker switch:
Changing the speed limit, refer to
page 220.
219
CONTROLS Driver assistance systems
Changing the speed limit Warning when the speed limit is

exceeded
Visual warning
If the speed limit is exceeded: the indica‐
tor light in the instrument cluster flashes
while the vehicle speed is greater than
the set speed limit.
Acoustic warning
Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly
until the desired speed limit is set. ▷ If the speed limit is exceeded unintentionally,
a signal sounds.
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed to the
resistance point, the speed limit increases or ▷ If the speed limit is reduced to below the ve‐
decreases by 1 mph/1 km/h. hicle speed while driving, the signal sounds
after some time.
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed past
the resistance point, the desired speed ▷ If the speed limit is intentionally exceeded by
changes by a maximum of 5 mph/10 km/h. stepping on the accelerator pedal all the way
down, there is no signal.
If the set speed limit is reached or unintentionally
exceeded, such as when driving downhill, the ve‐
hicle is not actively braked. Displays in the instrument
If the speed limit is set during a trip to a value be‐
cluster
low the current speed, the vehicle coasts until it
drops to the set speed limit. Display in the speedometer
The current speed can also be stored by press‐ ▷ Green marking: system is ac‐
ing a button: tive.
Press the button on the steering wheel. ▷ Grey marking: system is inter‐
rupted.
▷ No marking: system is
Exceeding the speed limit switched off.
If the vehicle speed exceeds the set speed limit,
a warning is issued. Indicator light
The speed limit can be exceeded intentionally. ▷ The indicator light lights up: the sys‐
There is no warning in this case. tem is switched on.
Press the accelerator pedal all the way down to ▷ The indicator light flashes: the set
intentionally exceed the set speed limit. speed limit has been exceeded.
When the vehicle speed drops below the set ▷ Gray indicator light: the system has been in‐
speed limit, the limit is automatically reactivated. terrupted.
220
Cruise control
WARNING
The desired speed can be incorrectly adjusted
Concept or called up by mistake. There is a risk of an ac‐
Using this system, a desired speed can be ad‐ cident. Adjust the desired speed to the traffic
justed using the buttons on the steering wheel. conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively in‐
The system maintains the desired speed. The tervene where appropriate.
system accelerates and brakes automatically as
needed.
Overview
General information
Depending on the vehicle setting, the cruise Buttons on the steering wheel
control characteristic can change in certain
ranges. For instance, the acceleration in ECO Button Function
PRO driving mode is more gentle.
Cruise control on/off, refer to
page 221.
Safety information
Continue cruise control with the last
setting, refer to page 222.
WARNING
Pause cruise control, refer to
page 222.
traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐ Store current speed.
tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic
situations. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust
Rocker switch:
closely and actively intervene where appropri‐ Set speed, refer to page 222.
ate.
Switching cruise control on/off
WARNING Switching on
The use of the system can lead to an increased Press the button on the steering wheel.
risk of accidents in the following situations,
for instance: The indicator lights in the instrument cluster light
▷ On winding roads. up and the mark in the speedometer is set to the
▷ In heavy traffic. current speed.
▷ On slippery roads, in fog, snow, or wet Cruise control is active. The current speed is
conditions, or on a loose road surface. maintained and stored as desired speed.
There is a risk of accidents or risk of damage to DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if
property. Only use the system if driving at con‐ necessary.
stant speed is possible.
Switching off
Press the button on the steering wheel.
221
The displays go out. The stored desired speed is The speed can also be stored by pressing a but‐
deleted. ton.
Press the button.
Pausing cruise control
Interrupting manually Changing the speed

When active, press the button.
Interrupting automatically
The system is automatically interrupted in the
following situations, for example:
▷ When the driver applies the brakes.
▷ When selector lever position D is disengaged.
▷ Dynamic Traction Control DTC is activated or
Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated.
until the desired speed is set.
▷ If DSC Dynamic Stability Control intervenes.
If active, the displayed speed is stored and the
▷ When SPORT PLUS is activated with Driving vehicle reaches the stored speed when the road
Dynamics Control. is clear.
Setting the speed resistance point, the desired speed increases
or decreases by 1 mph/1 km/h.
Maintaining and storing the speed
the resistance point, the desired speed
changes by a maximum of 5 mph/10 km/h.
The maximum speed that can be set de‐
pends on the vehicle.
▷ Pressing the rocker switch to the resistance
point and holding it accelerates or deceler‐
ates the vehicle without requiring pressure on
the accelerator pedal.
After the rocker switch is released, the vehi‐
Press the rocker switch up or down once while
cle maintains its final speed. Pressing the
the system is interrupted.
switch beyond the resistance point causes
When the system is switched on, the current the vehicle to accelerate more rapidly.
speed is maintained and stored as the desired
speed. Continuing cruise control
The stored speed is displayed, refer to An interrupted cruise control can be continued
page 223, on the speedometer. by calling up the stored speed.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if Make sure that the difference between current
necessary. speed and stored speed is not too large before
222
calling up the stored speed. Otherwise, uninten‐ In ECO PRO driving mode, the vehicle may ex‐
tional braking or accelerating may occur. ceed or drop below the set desired speed in
some situations, for instance on downhill or uphill
Press the button with the system inter‐
grades.
rupted.
Cruise control is continued with the stored val‐

ues. Active Cruise Control with
In the following cases, the stored speed value is Stop & Go function ACC
deleted and cannot be called up again:
▷ When the system is switched off. Concept
▷ When drive-ready state is switched off. Using this system, a desired speed and a dis‐
tance to a vehicle ahead can be adjusted using
Displays in the instrument the buttons on the steering wheel.
cluster The system maintains the desired speed on
clear roads. For this purpose, the vehicle acceler‐
Display in the speedometer ates or brakes automatically.
▷ Green marking: system is ac‐ If a vehicle is driving ahead of you, the system
tive, the marking indicates the adjusts the speed of your vehicle so that the set
desired speed. distance to the vehicle ahead is maintained. The
speed is adjusted as far as the given situation al‐
▷ Grey marking: system is inter‐
lows.
rupted, the marking indicates
the stored speed.
General information
▷ No marking: system is switched off.
A radar sensor is located in the front bumper and
a camera on the interior mirror to detect vehicles
Indicator light driving ahead of you.
▷ Indicator light green: system is active. Depending on the vehicle setting, the cruise
▷ Gray indicator light: the system has control characteristic can change in certain
been interrupted. ranges. For instance, the acceleration in ECO
PRO driving mode is more gentle.
▷ No indicator light: system is switched off.
The distance can be adjusted in several steps.
For safety reasons, it depends on the respective
Displays in the Head-up Display speed.
Some system information can also be displayed If the vehicle ahead of you brakes to a halt, and
in the Head-up Display. then proceeds to drive again within a brief period,
The symbol is displayed when the set the system is able to detect this within the given
desired speed is reached. system limits.
System limits
The desired speed is also maintained downhill.
The speed may not be maintained on uphill
grades if the engine power is insufficient.
223
Safety information ▷ When fast approaching a slowly moving

vehicle.
▷ Vehicle suddenly swerving into own lane.
WARNING
▷ When fast approaching standing vehicles.
driver’s personal judgment in assessing the There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.
traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐ Watch traffic closely and actively intervene
tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic where appropriate.
closely and actively intervene where appropri‐ Overview
ate.
Buttons on the steering wheel
Button Function
WARNING
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and With steering and lane control assis‐
possibly roll away. There is a risk of an accident. tant:
Before exiting, secure the vehicle against roll‐ Cruise control on/off, refer to
ing. page 225.
With steering and lane control assis‐
against rolling away, follow the following:
tant:
Select function.
turn the front wheels in the direction of the Without steering and lane control as‐
curb. sistant:
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, Cruise control on/off, refer to
also secure the vehicle, for instance with a page 225.
wheel chock. Store current speed.
WARNING With steering and lane control assis‐

tant:
The desired speed can be incorrectly adjusted
or called up by mistake. There is a risk of an ac‐ Pause cruise control, refer to
cident. Adjust the desired speed to the traffic page 226.
conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively in‐ Continue cruise control with the last
tervene where appropriate. setting, refer to page 227.
Without steering and lane control as‐

sistant:
WARNING
Continue cruise control with the last
Risk of accident due to too high speed differen‐ setting, refer to page 227.
ces to other vehicles, for instance in the follow‐
ing situations:
224
Button Function Area of application

The system is best used on well-constructed
Without steering and lane control as‐
roads.
sistant:
The minimum speed that can be set is
Pause cruise control, refer to
20 mph/30 km/h.
page 226.
With steering and lane control assistant: the max‐
Increase distance, refer to page 227. imum speed setting is 115 mph/180 km/h.
Switch distance control on/off. Without steering and lane control assistant: the
Reduce distance, refer to page 227. maximum speed setting is 100 mph/160 km/h.
Switch distance control on/off. The system can also be activated when station‐
ary.
Rocker switch:
Set speed, refer to page 226. Switching on/off and interrupting
cruise control
Radar sensor
With steering and lane control
assistant: Assisted Driving
General information
This button is used to switch the config‐
ured function on and off.
The button can be used to set the pri‐

mary used function.
The radar sensor is located in the front bumper.
Always keep radar sensor clean and unob‐ Set function
structed.
1. When the system is active, press the
button repeatedly until the desired function is
Camera selected in the function bar. The function bar
for Assisted Driving is displayed at the bot‐
tom of the instrument cluster.
▷ Cruise control with distance con‐

trol.
▷ Cruise control with distance con‐

trol and steering and lane control assis‐
The camera is installed near the interior mirror. tant.
Keep the windshield in front of the interior mirror The selected function is shown in green.
clean and clear. The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
225
Switching on Interrupting automatically

With steering and lane control assistant: The system is automatically interrupted in the
following situations:
1. Press the button on the steering ▷ When the driver applies the brakes.
wheel. ▷ When selector lever position D is disengaged.
▷ Dynamic Traction Control DTC is activated or
2. If necessary, set the cruise control.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated.
Without steering and lane control assistant:
▷ If DSC Dynamic Stability Control intervenes.
Press the button on the steering wheel. ▷ If the safety belt is unbuckled and the driver's
door is opened while the vehicle is standing
The indicator lights in the instrument cluster light still.
up and the mark in the speedometer is set to the ▷ If the system has not detected objects for an
current speed. extended period, for instance on a road with
Cruise control is active. The current speed is very little traffic without curb or shoulder
maintained and stored as desired speed. markings.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if ▷ If the detection range of the radar is impaired,
necessary. for instance by dirt or heavy fog.
▷ After a longer stationary period when the ve‐
Switching off hicle has been braked to a stop by the sys‐
To switch off the system while standing, step on tem.
brake pedal at the same time.
Press the following button on the steering wheel Setting the speed
again:
Maintaining and storing the speed
Without steering and lane control assis‐
tant.
With steering and lane control assistant.
The displays go out. The stored desired speed is

deleted.
Interrupting manually
When active, press the following button on the
steering wheel: Press the rocker switch up or down once while
the system is interrupted. The system will be ac‐
Without steering and lane control assis‐
tivated.
tant.
The current speed is maintained and stored as
With steering and lane control assistant. desired speed.
The stored speed is displayed on the speedom‐
If interrupting the system while stationary, press eter.
on the brake pedal at the same time.
226
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if and maintain the prescribed safety distance,
necessary. possibly by braking.
The speed can also be stored by pressing a but‐
ton.
Reduce distance
Press the button.
Press the button repeatedly until the
desired distance is set.
Changing the speed Instrument cluster will display selected distance,
refer to page 228.
Increase distance
desired distance is set.
Instrument cluster will display selected distance,

refer to page 228.
Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly Continuing cruise control

until the desired speed is set. An interrupted cruise control can be continued
by calling up the stored speed.
If active, the displayed speed is stored and the
vehicle reaches the stored speed when the road Make sure that the difference between current
is clear. speed and stored speed is not too large before
calling up the stored speed. Otherwise, uninten‐
tional braking or accelerating may occur.
resistance point, the desired speed increases
or decreases by 1 mph/1 km/h. Press the following button on the steering wheel
with the system interrupted:
the resistance point, the desired speed Without steering and lane control assis‐
changes by a maximum of 5 mph/10 km/h. tant.
Hold the rocker switch in position to repeat the
With steering and lane control assistant.
action.
Cruise control is continued with the stored val‐

Adjusting distance
ues.
Safety information In the following cases, the stored speed value is
deleted and cannot be called up again:
▷ When the system is switched off.
WARNING
▷ When drive-ready state is switched off.
driver’s personal judgment. Due to the system
limits, braking can be late. There is a risk of ac‐
cidents or risk of damage to property. Be aware
to the traffic situation at all times. Adjust the
distance to the traffic and weather conditions
227
Displays in the instrument Symbol Description

cluster System interrupted.
Display in the speedometer

▷ Green marking: system is ac‐
tive, the marking indicates the
desired speed. No distance control display, as
▷ Grey marking: system is inter‐ the accelerator pedal is being
rupted, the marking indicates pressed.
the stored speed.
▷ No marking: system is switched off.
Detected vehicle
Distance to vehicle ahead of you
Selected distance to the vehicle ahead of you is Symbol Description
shown.
Green symbol:
Symbol Description
A vehicle has been detected
Distance 1 ahead of you. The system main‐
tains the set distance to the ve‐
hicle in front.
As soon as the detected vehicle drives off, the

Distance 2 vehicle symbol in the distance indicator will move
away.
To accelerate, activate ACC, for instance by
briefly stepping on the accelerator pedal or
pressing the rocker switch.
Distance 3
Distance 4
This value is set automatically
after the system is switched on.
228
Indicator/warning lights ▷ Speed greater than approx. 40 mph/70 km/h.
Symbol Description System limits

Indicator light green: system is
active.
Detection range
No indicator light: system is
switched off.
Vehicle symbol flashes:

The conditions are not adequate
for the system to work.
The system was deactivated but
applies the brakes until you ac‐
tively resume control by press‐
ing on the brake pedal or accel‐ The detection capacity of the system and the
erator pedal. automatic braking capacity are limited.
The vehicle symbol and dis‐ Two-wheeled vehicles for instance might not be
tance bars flash red and an detected.
acoustic signal sounds:
Brake and make an evasive ma‐ Deceleration
neuver, if necessary. The system does not decelerate in the following
situations:
Displays in the Head-up Display ▷ For pedestrians or similarly slow-moving road
users.
Desired speed ▷ For red traffic lights.
Some system information can also be displayed ▷ For cross traffic.
in the Head-up Display.
▷ For oncoming traffic.
The symbol is displayed when the set
desired speed is reached. Swerving vehicles
Distance information
The symbol is displayed when the dis‐
tance from the vehicle traveling ahead is
too short.
The distance information is active in the follow‐

ing situations:
▷ Active Cruise Control switched off.
A vehicle driving in front of you is not detected
▷ Display in the Head-up Display selected, refer
until it is completely within the same lane as your
to page 165.
vehicle.
▷ Distance too short.
229
If a vehicle driving ahead of you suddenly releasing the accelerator pedal the system is re‐
swerves into your lane, the system may not be activated and controls speed independently.
able to automatically restore the selected dis‐
tance. It may not be possible to restore the se‐
lected distance in certain situations, including if
Driving off
you are driving significantly faster than vehicles In some situations, the vehicle cannot drive off
driving ahead of you, for instance when rapidly automatically; for example:
approaching a truck. When a vehicle driving ▷ On steep uphill grades.
ahead of you is reliably detected, the system re‐ ▷ From bumps in the road.
quests that the driver intervene by braking and
carrying out evasive maneuvers, if needed. ▷ With a heavy trailer.
In these cases, step on the accelerator pedal.
Cornering Weather
The following restrictions can occur under unfav‐
orable weather or light conditions:
▷ Poorer vehicle recognition.
▷ Short-term interruptions for vehicles that are
already recognized.
Examples of unfavorable weather or light condi‐
tions:
▷ Wet conditions.
If the desired speed is too high for a curve, the ▷ Snowfall.
speed is reduced slightly, although curves can‐
▷ Slush.
not be anticipated in advance. Therefore, drive
into a curve at an appropriate speed. ▷ Fog.
The system has a limited detection range. Situa‐ ▷ Glare.
tions can arise in tight curves where a vehicle Drive attentively, and react to the current traffic
driving ahead will not be detected or will be de‐ situation. If necessary, intervene actively, for in‐
tected very late. stance by braking, steering or evading.
Engine power
The desired speed is also maintained downhill.
The speed may not be maintained on uphill
grades if the engine power is insufficient.
In ECO PRO driving mode, the vehicle may in‐
tentionally exceed or drop below the set desired
speed in some situations, for instance on down‐
hill or uphill grades.
When you approach a curve the system may

briefly report vehicles in the next lane due to the
bend of the curve. If the system decelerates you
may compensate it by briefly accelerating. After
230
Malfunction Sensors on the steering wheel detect whether

the steering wheel is being touched.
Radar sensor
The system cannot be activated if the radar sen‐ Safety information
sor is not aligned correctly. This may be caused
by damage incurred, for instance during parking. WARNING
A Check Control message is displayed if the sys‐ The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
tem fails. driver’s personal judgment in assessing the
Have the system checked by a dealer’s service traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐
center or another qualified service center or re‐ tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic
pair shop. situations. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust
The system may be impaired when the detection driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic
range of the radar sensor is partially covered closely and actively intervene where appropri‐
such as by the license plate holder. ate.
Camera
Overview
The function for detecting and responding when
approaching stationary vehicles may be limited in Buttons on the steering wheel
▷ During calibration of the camera immediately Button Function
Steering and lane control assistant
▷ If the camera is malfunctioning or dirty. A
incl. Traffic Jam Assist on/off, refer to
Check Control message is displayed.
page 232.
Switch function on, refer to

Steering and lane control page 232.
assistant
Radar sensors
Concept The radar sensors are located in the bumpers.
The system assists the driver in keeping the ve‐

hicle within the lane. For this purpose, the sys‐
tem executes supporting steering movements,
for instance when driving in a curve.
General information
The system determines the position of the lane
markings and the vehicle driving ahead using five
radar sensors and a camera.
Front center bumper.
Depending on the speed, the system orients it‐
self according to the lane markings or vehicles in
front.
231
▷ Above approx. 43 mph, 70 km/h: lane mark‐

ing is detected.
▷ Below approx. 43 mph, 70 km/h: lane marking
or a vehicle driving ahead is detected.
▷ Hands on the steering wheel rim.
▷ Wide curves.
▷ Drive in the center of the lane.
▷ Turn signal switched off.
Front side bumper. ▷ The sensor system calibration process is
complete.
▷ Cruise control with distance control is active.
▷ Safety belt on the driver's side fastened.
Additionally, the following systems must be ac‐
tive:
▷ Approach control warning.
▷ Person warning.
▷ Side collision warning.
Rear bumper.
Always keep the bumper in the area of the radar Switching on/off
Assisted Driving
Camera General information

This button is used to switch the config‐
ured function on and off.
The button can be used to set the pri‐

mary used function.
Set function
1. When the system is active, press the

The camera is installed near the interior mirror. button repeatedly until the desired function is
Keep the windshield in front of the interior mirror selected in the function bar. The function bar
clean and clear. for Assisted Driving is displayed at the bot‐
▷ Speed below 130 mph/210 km/h. ▷ Cruise control with distance con‐
trol.
▷ Sufficient lane width.
232
▷ When you manipulate steering.

▷ Cruise control with distance con‐ ▷ When you leave your own lane.
trol and steering and lane control assis‐ ▷ When the turn signal is switched on.
tant.
▷ When the lane is too narrow.
The selected function is shown in green.
▷ If for a particular time no lane marking is de‐
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐ tected and there is no vehicle driving in front.
rently used.
▷ If Active Cruise Control is interrupted.
▷ If the safety belt on the driver's side is unfas‐
Switching on
tened.
1. Press the button on the steering Steering wheel symbol lights up gray.
wheel. The system is on standby and does not
manipulate steering.
2. Adjust the steering and lane control
assistant if necessary. System activates automatically as soon as all
function conditions are fulfilled, refer to
Steering wheel symbol lights up gray.
page 232.
The system is on standby and does not
manipulate steering.
Displays in the instrument
System activates automatically as soon as all cluster
function conditions are fulfilled, refer to
page 232. Symbol Description
Steering wheel symbol lights up green. Gray steering wheel symbol:

The system is active. The system is on standby.
With the system switched on, the person warn‐ Green steering wheel symbol:
ing with City braking function and the side colli‐ The system is activated.
sion warning are active.
Yellow steering wheel symbol
Switching off and a signal sounds, if applica‐
ble:
Press the button on the steering wheel.
System interruption is imminent.
The indicator goes out. Green steering wheel symbol
The system does not perform supportive steer‐ and lane marking symbol:
ing wheel movements. The system supports the driver
in keeping the vehicle within the
Interrupting automatically lane.
The system is automatically interrupted in the
following situations, for example:
▷ At a speed above 130 mph/210 km/h.
▷ When the steering wheel is released.
▷ When the driver applies the brakes.
233
Symbol Description ▷ Red: system will be deactivated.
Yellow steering wheel symbol: The steering wheel displays can be configured if
required.
The hands are not grasping the
steering wheel. The system is Via iDrive:
still active.
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
Red steering wheel symbol and
a signal sounds: 3. "Driver Assistance"
The hands are not grasping the 4. "Driving"
steering wheel. System interrup‐ 5. "Steering Assistant"
tion is imminent.
6. Make the desired setting.
The system reduces the speed
to a standstill if applicable. Displays in the Head-up Display
It is possible that the system will All system information can also be displayed in
not execute any supporting the Head-up Display.
steering movements.
Lane change assistant
Indicator Description
light Concept
Cruise control with distance The system additionally supports the driver when
control and steering and lane changing lanes on multilane roads.
control assistant:
active. ▷ The functional requirements of the steering
and lane control assistant are fulfilled, refer to
No indicator light: system is
page 232.
switched off.
▷ Depending on country specifications: driving
on a road without pedestrians or cyclists and
Displays on the steering wheel with physical barriers to oncoming traffic,
such as crash barriers.
▷ Lane markings have been detected.
▷ Maximum speed approx. 110 mph, 180 km/h.
▷ The minimum speed is country-specific.
Switching the function on/off

The lane change assistant can be switched on/
off.
The two LED lights above the buttons illuminate Via iDrive:
analogue to the displays in the instrument clus‐
1. "CAR"
ter:
2. "Settings"
▷ Yellow: system interruption is imminent.
234
3. "Driver Assistance" Displays in the instrument cluster

4. "Driving"
Symbol Description
5. "Steering Assistant"
6. "Automatic Lane Change" Green steering wheel symbol.
Green line for lane marking on
Changing lanes the appropriate side.
1. Ensure that the traffic situation permits Green arrow symbol for lane-
changing lanes. changing.
2. Press the turn indicator lever, refer to The system carries out a lane
page 139, in the required direction to the change.
pressure point for signaling briefly and hold it
there. Green steering wheel symbol.
Steering support in the required direction can Green line for lane marking on
be detected a short time later. the appropriate side.
No arrow symbol for lane-
changing on the display.
The system detected the lane
change request. Lane change
not currently possible.
Depending on country specifica‐

tions:
Green steering wheel symbol.
Green line for lane marking on
After the lane change, the system helps keep the
the appropriate side.
vehicle in the new lane.
Gray arrow symbol for lane-
Canceling a lane change changing.
If the turn signal lever is released too soon, the Lane change not possible; func‐
system helps the driver keep to the original lane. tional requirements not met.
Assisted Driving Plus
Concept
Assisted Driving Plus supports the driver with ve‐
hicle control in traffic jam situations.
235
Safety information The indicator light in the instrument cluster is

shown in green.
WARNING The system begins to assist the driver with vehi‐

cle control.
traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐ Displays in the instrument cluster
situations. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust Indicator Description
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic light
closely and actively intervene where appropri‐
ate.
active.
Functional requirements Displays on the steering wheel

▷ The functional requirements of the steering
and lane control assistant are fulfilled, refer to
page 232.
▷ The steering and lane control assistant is ac‐
tive.
▷ The function is only available on certain street
types, e.g. freeways.
▷ Sufficient lane width.
▷ Lane markings and a vehicle driving ahead
are detected. The two LED lights above the buttons illuminate
▷ Speed less than approx. 40 mph/60 km/h. analogue to the displays in the instrument clus‐
ter:
▷ The Driver Attention Camera in the instru‐
ment cluster detects that the driver is paying ▷ Green: the system is active.
attention to the traffic. ▷ Red: system will be deactivated.
Switching on System limits

As soon as all functional requirements
are met, Assisted Driving Plus will be dis‐ General information
played as an additional symbol in the The system cannot be activated or meaningfully
function bar. The toolbar is displayed at the bot‐ used in certain situations.
Select Assistant Driving Plus with the

Safety information
button on the steering wheel.
The symbol for Assisted Driving Plus is shown in WARNING
green. The system can react not at all, too late, incor‐
Two green LED lights, refer to page 236, are il‐ rectly, or without justification due to the system
luminated on the steering wheel. limits. There is a risk of accidents or risk of
236
garding the system limits and actively intervene The Driver Attention Camera may not be fully
if needed. functional in the following situations:
▷ When the Driver Attention Camera is covered
by the steering wheel rim.
Hands on the steering wheel
▷ When the driver is wearing infrared imperme‐
The sensors cannot detect hand-steering wheel
able sunglasses.
contact in the following situations:
▷ Driving with gloves.
▷ Protective covers on the steering wheel. PDC Park Distance Control
Narrow lanes Concept
When driving within narrow lanes, the system PDC is a support when parking. Objects that you
cannot be activated or effectively used, for in‐ are approaching slowly in front of or behind the
stance in the following situations: vehicle are indicated by signal tones and a dis‐
▷ In construction areas. play on the Control Display.
▷ In rescue lanes. Depending on the equipment version: Obstacles
▷ Within city limits. at the side of the vehicle that are detected by the
side ultrasonic sensors may also be reported by
the side protection, refer to page 240, function.
Weather
The following restrictions can occur under unfav‐
General information
orable weather or light conditions:
The ultrasound sensors for distance measure‐
▷ Poorer recognition of vehicles and lane mark‐
ments are located in the bumpers and possibly
ings.
on the sides of the vehicle.
▷ Short-term interruptions for vehicles that are
The maneuvering range, depending on the ob‐
already recognized.
stacle and environmental conditions, is approx.
Examples of unfavorable weather or light condi‐ 6 ft/2 m.
tions:
An acoustic warning sounds in case of an im‐
▷ Wet conditions. pending collision at a distance to the object of
▷ Snowfall. approx. 27 in/70 cm.
▷ Slush. For objects behind the vehicle, the acoustic
▷ Fog. warning is already issued at a distance to the ob‐
ject of approx. 5 ft/1.50 m.
▷ Glare.
Drive attentively, and react to the current traffic Safety information
situation. If necessary, intervene actively, for in‐
stance by braking, steering or evading.
WARNING
Driver Attention Camera The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
Always monitor the traffic conditions. driver’s personal judgment in assessing the
The Driver Attention Camera detects whether or
not the driver is paying attention to the traffic
conditions.
237
closely and actively intervene where appropri‐ Switching on/off

ate.
The system switches on automatically in the fol‐
WARNING lowing situations:
Due to high speeds when PDC Park Distance ▷ If selector lever position R is engaged when
Control is activated, the warning can be de‐ the engine is running.
layed due to physical circumstances. There is a
▷ Depending on the equipment version: while
risk of injury or risk of damage to property.
approaching detected obstacles if the speed
Avoid approaching an object too fast. Avoid
is slower than approx. 2.5 mph/4 km/h. The
driving off fast while PDC Park Distance Control
activation distance depends on the situation
is not yet active.
in question.
You may switch automatic activation on and off
Overview when obstacles are detected.
Via iDrive:
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
4. "Parking and Maneuvering"
5. Where applicable: "Automatic PDC
activation"
6. "Automatic PDC activation"
rently used.
Park assistance button
Depending on equipment, an additional camera
view is also switched on.
Ultrasound sensors
Automatic deactivation during
Ultrasound sensors of the PDC, forward travel
for instance in the bumpers. The system switches off when a certain driving
distance or speed is exceeded.
Switch the system back on, if needed.
Functional requirements Switching on/off manually

Ensure full functionality: Press park assistance button.
▷ Do not cover sensors, for instance with stick‐
ers, bicycle racks. ▷ On: the LED lights up.
▷ Keep the sensors clean and unobstructed. ▷ Off: the LED goes out.
238
The rearview camera image is displayed if the re‐ Visual warning

verse gear is engaged when pressing the park
assistance button.
WARNING
Signal tones
General information
When approaching an object, an intermittent
sound indicates the position of the object. E.g., if The approach of the vehicle to an object is
an object is detected to the left rear of the vehi‐ shown on the Control Display. Objects that are
cle, a signal tone sounds from the left rear farther away are already displayed on the Control
speaker. Display before a signal sounds.
The shorter the distance to the object, the
shorter the intervals. The display appears as soon as PDC is activated.
If the distance to a detected object is less than The range of the sensors is represented in the
approx. 10 inches/25 cm, a continuous tone is colors green, yellow and red when obstacles are
sounded. detected.
If there are objects in front of and behind the ve‐ Pathway lines are faded in for better estimation
hicle at the same time, with a distance smaller of the required space.
than approx. 10 in/25 cm, an alternating constant When the image of the rearview camera is dis‐
tone will sound. played, the switch can be made to PDC or to a
The intermittent tone and constant tone are different view with obstacle markings as needed:
switched off if the selector lever position P is en‐ 1. Press the Controller to the left, if needed.
gaged.
2. E. g. "Park. sensors only"
The intermittent tone is switched off after a short
time when the vehicle is stationary. Crossing traffic warning, refer to page 259: de‐
pending on the equipment, it is warned in the
Volume PDC display against vehicles approaching in the
front or rear from the side.
The PDC signal tone volume can be adjusted.
Via iDrive: Depending on the equipment
1. "CAR" version: emergency brake
2. "Settings" function, Active PDC
Concept
The emergency braking function of PDC initiates
5. "Volume PDC signal" an emergency braking in case of acute risk of
6. Set the desired value. collision.
rently used. General information
This function may not be available. Contact your
239
qualified service center as to whether this addi‐ System limits

tional function is currently in your vehicle or when The system cannot be used in the following sit‐
it can be installed in your vehicle in the future. uations, for example:
Due to system limits, a collision cannot be pre‐ ▷ When Hill Descent Control, refer to page 216,
vented under all circumstances. is active, the emergency braking function is
The function is available from walking speed deactivated.
while backing up or rolling backward. ▷ When driving with a trailer.
A press of the accelerator pedal interrupts the If required, deactivate the system via iDrive
braking intervention. where applicable.
After emergency braking to a stop, further creep‐
ing toward an obstacle is possible. To creep to‐ Depending on the equipment
ward the obstacle, lightly press the accelerator
version: side protection
pedal and release it again.
If the accelerator pedal is heavily depressed, the Concept
vehicle drives off as usual. Manual braking is pos‐
The system warns of obstacles on the side of
sible at any time.
the vehicle.
The system uses the ultrasound sensors of PDC
and parking assistant. General information
This function may not be available. Contact your
Safety information
qualified service center as to whether this addi‐
WARNING tional function is currently in your vehicle or when
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the it can be installed in your vehicle in the future.
driver’s personal judgment in assessing the The system uses the ultrasound sensors of PDC
traffic situation. There is a risk of an accident. and parking assistant.
traffic and vehicle surroundings closely and ac‐ Display
tively intervene where appropriate.
Activating/deactivating the system

Via iDrive:
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
To protect the sides of the vehicle, obstacle
5. If necessary, "Active PDC with braking markings are displayed on the vehicle at the
interv." sides.
6. "Active PDC with braking interv." ▷ Color markings: warning against detected ob‐
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐ stacles.
rently used.
240
▷ Gray markings, hatched area: no obstacles Limits of ultrasonic measurement

were detected. Ultrasonic measurements might not function in
▷ No markings, black area: the area next to the the following situations:
vehicle was not yet captured. ▷ For small children and animals.
▷ For persons with certain clothing, for instance
Limits of side protection coats.
The system only displays stationary obstacles ▷ With external interference of the ultrasound,
that were previously detected by sensors while for instance from passing vehicles or loud
passing them. machines.
The system does not detect whether an obstacle ▷ When sensors are dirty, iced over, damaged
moves later on. If the vehicle is stationary, the or out of position.
markings are shown in black after a certain time. ▷ Under certain weather conditions such as
The area next to the vehicle must be newly cap‐ high relative humidity, wet conditions, snow‐
tured. fall, extreme heat, or strong wind.
Side protection is not available, if the trailer ▷ With tow bars and trailer couplings of other
power socket is in use or trailer towing is acti‐ vehicles.
vated.
▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects.
System limits ▷ With moving objects.
▷ With elevated, protruding objects such as
Safety information ledges.
▷ With objects with corners, edges, and
WARNING smooth surfaces.
The system can react not at all, too late, incor‐ ▷ With objects with a fine surface structure
rectly, or without justification due to the system such as fences.
limits. There is a risk of accidents or risk of ▷ For objects with porous surfaces.
damage to property. Follow the information re‐ ▷ With small and low objects, for instance
garding the system limits and actively intervene boxes.
if needed.
▷ With obstacles and persons at the edge of
the lane.
Trailer towing ▷ With soft obstacles or obstacles covered in
foam material.
With a trailer, a trailer power socket in use or
when trailer towing is activated, the two rear PDC ▷ With plants and bushes.
functions will be switched off. ▷ Low objects already displayed, for instance
White symbol is displayed. curbs, can move into the blind area of the
sensors before or after a continuous tone
Depending on the vehicle equipment,
sounds.
the range of the sensors is shown as a
shaded area on the Control Display. ▷ Cargo that extends beyond the perimeter of
the vehicle is not taken into account by the
system.
241
False warnings behind the vehicle is shown on the Control Dis‐

The system may issue a warning under the fol‐ play.
lowing conditions even though there is no obsta‐
cle within the detection range: Safety information
▷ In heavy rain.
▷ When sensors are very dirty or covered with WARNING
ice. The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
▷ When sensors are covered in snow. driver’s personal judgment in assessing the
traffic situation. There is a risk of an accident.
▷ On rough road surfaces.
▷ On uneven surfaces, such as speed bumps. traffic and vehicle surroundings closely and ac‐
▷ In large buildings with right angles and tively intervene where appropriate.
smooth walls, for instance in underground ga‐
rages.
▷ In automatic vehicle washes. Overview
▷ Due to heavy exhaust.
Depending on the vehicle
▷ When the trailer hitch cover is not on straight. equipment: button in the vehicle
▷ Due to other ultrasound sources, for instance
sweeping machines, high pressure steam
cleaners or neon lights.
To prevent false alarms, switch off automatic
PDC activation on obstacle detection, refer to
page 238, for instance in automatic vehicle
washes.
Malfunction
A Check Control message is displayed. Park assistance button
White symbol is displayed, and the range
of the sensors is dimmed on the Control
Display. Camera
PDC has failed. Have the system checked by a
dealer’s service center or another qualified serv‐
Without Surround View:

rearview camera
Concept The camera lens is located in the handle of the
The rearview camera provides assistance in tailgate.
parking and maneuvering backwards. The area
242
The image quality may be impaired by dirt. If Assistance functions

necessary, clean the camera lens.
General information
Switching on/off More than one assistance function can be active
at the same time.
Switching on automatically The assistance functions can be manually acti‐
The system is switched on automatically if selec‐ vated.
tor lever position R is engaged when the engine 1. Move the Controller to the right, if needed.
is running.
2. With corresponding equipment:
"Camera image"
forward travel 3. ▷ "Parking aid lines".
The system switches off when a certain driving Pathway lines and turning radius lines are
distance or speed is exceeded. displayed, refer to page 243.
Switch the system back on, if needed. ▷ "Obstacle mark.".

Depending on the vehicle equipment, the
Depending on the vehicle obstacles detected by PDC Park Distance
equipment: switching on/off Control are displayed, refer to page 244,
manually by markings.
1. Move the Controller to the left, if needed.
Press park assistance button.
2. "Trailer hitch".
▷ On: the LED lights up. A zoomed image of the trailer hitch is dis‐
played, refer to page 244.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
The parking assistance functions are shown on
Parking aid lines
Pathway lines
Switching the view via iDrive
If the rearview camera view is not displayed,
change the view via iDrive:
1. If necessary, tilt the controller to the side.

2. "Rear view camera"
The rearview camera image is displayed.
▷ The rearview camera is switched on. Pathway lines help you to estimate the space re‐
▷ The tailgate is fully closed. quired when parking and maneuvering on level
▷ Keep the recording range of the camera roads.
clear. Protruding cargo or carrier systems and Pathway lines depend on the steering angle and
trailers that are not connected to a trailer are continuously adjusted to the steering wheel
power socket can restrict the visibility range movements.
of the camera.
243
Turning radius lines The colored thresholds of the obstacle markings

match the markings of the PDC Park Distance
Control.
Zoom on trailer hitch

To make it easier to attach a trailer, you can
zoom in on the view of the trailer hitch.
Turning radius lines can only be superimposed

on the camera image together with pathway
lines.
Turning radius lines show the course of the
smallest possible turning radius on a level road.
Only one turning radius line is displayed after the
steering wheel is turned past a certain angle. Two static circle segments show the distance
between the trailer and the trailer hitch.
Parking using pathway and turning radius A docking line dependent on the steering angle
lines helps with aiming for the trailer with the trailer
1. Position the vehicle so that the red turning ra‐ hitch.
dius line leads to within the limits of the park‐ When zooming in, remember that the view may
ing space. no longer show certain obstacles.
2. Turn the steering wheel to the point where
the green pathway line covers the corre‐
Setting brightness and contrast
sponding turning radius line.
via iDrive
Obstacle marking With the rearview camera switched on:
1. Move the Controller to the right, if needed.

2. "Camera image"
3. ▷ "Brightness"
▷ "Contrast"
4. Set the desired value.
System limits
Depending on the vehicle equipment, obstacles Deactivated camera

behind the vehicle are detected by the PDC Park If the camera is deactivated, for instance if the
Distance Control sensors. tailgate is open, the camera image is displayed
Obstacle markings can be faded into the image hatched in gray.
of the rearview camera.
244
Detection of objects and driveways, depending on the currently

Very low obstacles as well as high, protruding engaged gear.
objects such as ledges may not be detected by Depending on the view, the environment around
the system. the vehicle or a part of it is depicted.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, some as‐
sistance functions also consider data from the Safety information
PDC Park Distance Control.
Follow the notes in the PDC Park Distance Con‐ WARNING
trol chapter. The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
The objects displayed on the Control Display driver’s personal judgment in assessing the
may be closer than they appear. Do not estimate traffic situation. There is a risk of an accident.
the distance from the objects on the display. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch
traffic and vehicle surroundings closely and ac‐
tively intervene where appropriate.
Surround View with
Parking Assistant Plus Overview
Concept Buttons in the vehicle
The system provides assistance in parking and
maneuvering. The area around the vehicle is
shown on the Control Display.
General information
Several cameras capture the area from different
selectable perspectives. In addition, assistance
functions, for instance guidelines, can be faded
into the display.
The following camera perspectives can be dis‐ Park assistance button
played:
▷ Automatic camera perspective, refer to
Panorama View
page 246: the system shows the camera
perspective suitable for the respective driving
situation.
▷ Rearview camera, refer to page 246: for rep‐
resenting the areas behind the vehicle.
▷ Right-hand and left-hand side view, refer to
page 249: for representing the areas on the
sides of the vehicle.
▷ Camera perspective movable via iDrive. Avail‐
able camera, refer to page 246.
▷ Panorama View, refer to page 250: to
present cross traffic, for instance at junctions
245
Cameras The camera perspective suitable for the respec‐

tive driving situation is displayed.

▷ On: the LED lights up.

▷ Off: the LED goes out.
The rearview camera cannot be switched off if
the reverse gear is engaged.
Front camera
forward travel
The system switches off when a certain driving
distance or speed is exceeded.
Switch the system back on, if needed.
Camera perspective
Overview
Rearview camera
1 Function bar, left

One camera is located at the bottom of each ex‐ 2 Camera image
terior mirror housing. 3 Side view
The image quality may be impaired by dirt on the 4 Automatic camera perspective
camera lenses. If required, clean the camera 5 Movable unobstructed camera perspective
lenses. 6 Function bar, right
7 Rearview camera
Switching on/off
8 Selection window
The system is switched on automatically, refer to Selection window
page 238, if selector lever position R is engaged The individual camera perspectives can be se‐
when the engine is running. lected in the selection window via iDrive.
246
Side view With xOffroad package: when an xOffroad driving

The side view can be selected for the right or left mode is activated, terrain-specific views will be
vehicle side. displayed.
This view helps when positioning the vehicle at

Rearview camera
the curb or with other obstacles on the side by
displaying the side surroundings. This view shows the picture of the rearview cam‐
era.
The side view looks from rear to front and in case
of danger, focuses automatically on possible ob‐
stacles.
Function bars
Function bar on the right

Automatic camera perspective
Assistance functions, refer to page 247, can be
The automatic camera perspective shows a
activated via the right function bar and settings
steering-dependent view in the respective driv‐
can be entered. Move the Controller to the right,
ing direction.
if needed.
This perspective adapts to the respective driving
▷ "Autom. Parking", refer to page 252.
situation.
▷ "Back-up Assistant", refer to page 257.
As soon as obstacles are detected, the view
changes to a fixed display of the area in front or ▷ "Camera image"
at the rear behind the bumper or, if necessary, ▷ "Brightness", refer to page 251.
changes to a side view. ▷ "Contrast", refer to page 251.
When reverse gear is engaged, the automatic ▷ "Parking aid lines", refer to page 248.
camera perspective is closed and the system
▷ "Obstacle mark.", refer to page 248.
uses a fixed perspective of the rearview camera.
If necessary, manually select the automatic cam‐ ▷ "Settings": apply settings, for instance to
era perspective when reverse gear is engaged. use the activation points for Panorama View.
The automatic camera perspective will be re‐
tained for the current parking maneuver. Function bar on the left
The left function bar can be used for the direct
Movable unobstructed camera selection of various views. Move the Controller to
perspective the left, if needed.
With selection of the movable camera perspec‐ ▷ Automatic camera perspective, refer to
tive, a circle appears on the Control Display. page 247.
By turning the Controller or via touch function, ▷ "Free camera", refer to page 247.
specified perspectives on the circle can be se‐ ▷ "Car wash", refer to page 249.
lected.
▷ "Trailer hitch", refer to page 249.
The current perspective is marked with a camera
symbol. Assistance functions
With BMW Gesture Control: the movable camera
perspective can be moved around the circle us‐ General information
ing BMW Gesture Control, refer to page 57.
More than one assistance function can be active
To leave the function, move the Controller side‐ at the same time.
ways and select another camera function.
247
The following assistance functions can be man‐ Turning radius lines

ually activated:
▷ "Parking aid lines".
▷ "Obstacle mark.".
▷ "Trailer hitch".
▷ "Car wash".
The following assistance functions are automati‐
cally displayed:
▷ Side protection, refer to page 249.
▷ Door opening angle, refer to page 249. Turning radius lines can only be superimposed
on the camera image together with pathway
Parking aid lines lines.
Turning radius lines show the course of the
Pathway lines smallest possible turning radius on a level road.
Only one turning radius line is displayed after the
steering wheel is turned past a certain angle.
Parking using pathway and turning radius

lines
1. Position the vehicle so that the red turning ra‐
dius line leads to within the limits of the park‐
ing space.
2. Turn the steering wheel to the point where
Pathway lines help you to estimate the space re‐
the green pathway line covers the corre‐
quired when parking and maneuvering on level
sponding turning radius line.
roads.
Pathway lines depend on the steering angle and Obstacle marking
are continuously adjusted to the steering wheel
movements.
Obstacles behind the vehicle are detected by the

PDC Park Distance Control sensors.
Obstacle markings can be shown in the camera
image.
248
The colored thresholds of the obstacle markings Side protection

match the markings of the PDC Park Distance
Control. Concept
The system warns of obstacles on the side of
Vehicle wash view the vehicle.
Display
The vehicle wash view assists when entering a

vehicle wash by displaying the floor and the vehi‐
cle's own track. To protect the sides of the vehicle, obstacle
markings are displayed on the vehicle at the
sides.
Zoom on trailer hitch
▷ No markings: no obstacles were detected.
To make it easier to attach a trailer, you can
▷ Color markings: warning against detected ob‐
zoom in on the view of the trailer hitch.
stacles.
Limits of side protection

The system only displays stationary obstacles
that were previously detected by sensors while
passing them.
The system does not detect whether an obstacle
moves later on. For this reason, at standstill, the
markings are not shown anymore in the display
Two static circle segments show the distance after a certain time. The area next to the vehicle
between the trailer and the trailer hitch. must be newly captured.
A docking line dependent on the steering angle

helps with aiming for the trailer with the trailer
Door opening angle
hitch.
Concept
Show the trailer hitch via iDrive, refer to
If obstacle marking is activated, the system indi‐
page 247.
cates fixed obstacles that obstruct the opening
When zooming in, remember that the view may angles of the doors.
no longer show certain obstacles.
The system does not provide a warning of ap‐
proaching traffic.
249
atively late from the driver's seat. The cameras in

the front and rear capture the sideways traffic
area to improve the view.
Yellow lines in the screen display mark the front
and rear end of the vehicle.
The camera image shows different levels of dis‐
tortion in some areas and is thus not suitable for
distance estimations.
The maximum opening angle of the doors is dis‐ Display on the Control Display
played in selector lever position P.
Press the button when the engine is run‐
As soon as the vehicle begins moving, the open‐ ning.
ing angles are replaced by parking aid lines.
Depending on the driving direction, the image of
Limits of the display the respective camera is displayed:
The vehicle surroundings are displayed with dis‐ ▷ "front": front camera image.
torted image for technical reasons. ▷ "rear": rear camera image.
Even if the symbols for the door opening angles Depending on the vehicle equipment, the cross‐
do not cross other objects on the Control Dis‐ ing traffic warning, refer to page 259, can addi‐
play, the following needs to be noted when park‐ tionally warn against oncoming vehicles using ra‐
ing next to other objects: dar sensors.
Because of the perspective, higher, protruding
objects may be closer than they appear on the With navigation system: activation
Control Display. points
Panorama View Concept

Positions where Panorama View should switch
Concept on automatically can be stored as activation
points provided that a GPS signal is received.
General information
Up to ten activation points can be stored.
Activation points can be used when driving for‐
ward for the front camera.
Storing activation points

1. Drive to the position at which the system is to
The system provides an early look at cross traffic be switched on, and stop.
at blind driveways and intersections.
General information 3. Move the Controller to the right.
Road users concealed by obstacles to the left 4. "Add activation point".
and right of the vehicle can only be detected rel‐
250
The current position is displayed. Via iDrive:

5. "Activation point". 1. Move the Controller to the right, if needed.
Activation points are, if possible, stored with 2. "Camera image"
town/city and street address, or else with the
3. ▷ "Brightness"
GPS coordinates.
▷ "Contrast"
Using activation points 4. Set the desired value.
The use of activation points can be switched on
and off. Functional limitations
The system can be used only to a limited extent
1. Press the button. in the following situations:
2. Move the Controller to the right. ▷ In poor light.
3. "Settings" ▷ In case of soiled cameras.
4. "Panorama View, GPS-based" ▷ With a door open.
5. "Panorama View is displayed automatically ▷ With the tailgate open.
when set activation points are reached." ▷ With exterior mirrors folded in.
Gray hatched areas with symbol, for instance
Displaying activation points
open door, in the camera image mark areas that
are currently not displayed.
2. Move the Controller to the right. System limits
3. "Manage points"
A list of all activation points is displayed. Non-visible areas
Because of the camera angle, the areas under
Renaming or deleting activation points the vehicle cannot be viewed by the cameras.
1. Press the button. Detection of objects

2. Move the Controller to the right. Very low obstacles as well as high, protruding
3. "Manage points" objects such as ledges may not be detected by
A list of all activation points is displayed. the system.
4. Select an activation point as needed. Some assistance functions also consider data
from the PDC Park Distance Control.
5. ▷ "Rename"
Follow, refer to page 237, the notes in the PDC
▷ "Delete activation point"
Park Distance Control chapter.
▷ "Delete all activation points"
The objects displayed on the Control Display
may be closer than they appear. Do not estimate
Setting brightness and contrast the distance from the objects on the display.
Brightness and contrast can be adjusted with
Surround View or Panorama View switched on. Malfunction
A camera malfunction is displayed on the Control
Display.
251
A yellow symbol is displayed and the re‐ ▷ When the vehicle moves faster than walking
cording range of the malfunctioning cam‐ speed.
era is displayed in black on the Control ▷ It may not be possible to use the function in
Display. every country.
▷ For reasons of data protection, the function
Remote 3D View can only be used three times within two
hours.
Concept
With the proper equipment, the BMW Con‐
nected App and the camera images from Sur‐
Parking Assistant
round View can be used to display the vehicle
surroundings on a mobile device such as a Concept
smartphone.
The function displays a momentary view of the
situation.
▷ Data transmission must be activated, refer to
page 67.
▷ BMW Connected App must be installed on
the mobile device.
The system supports the driver in the following
Switching the function on/off situations:
Via iDrive: ▷ When parking parallel to the road, parallel
parking.
1. "CAR"
▷ Depending on the equipment version: when
2. "Settings" reverse parking diagonally to the road, diago‐
3. "General settings" nal parking. The system orients itself with the
4. Switch the function on and off in the settings middle of the parking space during diagonal
for data protection. parking.
▷ Depending on the equipment version: when
Functional limitations driving out of parallel parking spaces, refer to
The system may not be fully functional or may page 256.
not be available in the following situations: ▷ Depending on the equipment version: when
▷ In poor light. exiting tight parking or street situations in re‐
verse, see Reversing Assistant, refer to
▷ In case of soiled cameras. page 257.
▷ With a door or the tailgate open. Dark fields in
the display indicate areas that are not re‐ General information
corded by the system.
The functions parking diagonally to the road,
▷ With exterior mirrors folded in. driving out of parallel parking spaces and driving
▷ When other camera functions are being per‐ Driver assistance systems out in reverse may not
formed in the vehicle. be available. Contact your authorized dealer’s
252

as to whether this additional function is currently WARNING
in your vehicle or when it can be installed in your If the trailer hitch is used, the parking assistant
vehicle in the future. can cause damage due to covered sensors.
There is a risk of accidents or risk of damage to
Handling property. The parking assistant should not be
Parking assistant handling is divided into three used during trailer towing or if the trailer hitch is
steps: used, for instance bicycle rack.
▷ Switching on and activating.
▷ Parking space search.
NOTICE
▷ Parking.
The parking assistant can steer the vehicle over
System status and instructions on required ac‐
or onto curbs. There is a risk of damage to
tions are displayed on the Control Display.
property. Watch traffic closely and actively in‐
Ultrasound sensors measure parking spaces on tervene where appropriate.
both sides of the vehicle.
The safety information of the PDC Park Distance
Steptronic transmission Control, refer to page 237, applies in addition.
The parking assistant calculates the best possi‐
ble parking line and takes control of the following Overview
functions during the parking procedure:
▷ Steering. Button in the vehicle
▷ Accelerating and braking.
▷ Changing the gears.
Parking is automatic.
Safety information
WARNING
driver’s personal judgment in assessing the Park assistance button
closely and actively intervene where appropri‐
ate.
253
Ultrasound sensors Depending on the equipment version: diagonal

parking:
▷ Minimum width of the gap: own vehicle's
width plus approx. 2.3 ft/0.7 m.
▷ Minimum depth: your vehicle's length.
The depth of diagonal parking spaces must
be estimated by the driver. Due to technical
limitations, the system is only able to approxi‐
mate the depth of diagonal parking spaces.
With the four side ultrasound sensors, arrows, For parking

and the ultrasound sensors of PDC Park Dis‐ ▷ Doors and tailgate are closed.
tance Control in the bumpers, the parking
▷ Driver's safety belt is fastened.
spaces are measured and the distances to ob‐
stacles determined.
Switching on and activating
Functional requirements Switching on with the button
Ultrasound sensors
The LED lights up.
Ensure full functionality:
▷ Do not cover sensors, for instance with stick‐ The current status of the parking space search is
ers. indicated on the Control Display.
▷ Keep the sensors clean and unobstructed. Parking assistant is activated automatically.
For measuring parking spaces Switching on with reverse gear

▷ Maximum speed while driving forward approx. Shift into reverse.
22 mph/35 km/h. The current status of the parking space search is
▷ Maximum distance to row of parked vehicles: indicated on the Control Display.
5 ft/1.5 m. To activate: "Autom. Parking"
Suitable parking space Switching on via iDrive

General information: Display of the rearview camera or PDC view
▷ Gap behind an object that has a min. length must be active.
of 1.7 ft/0.5 m.
▷ Gap between two objects with a minimum
2. Activating the parking assistant on the Con‐
length of approx. 1.7 ft/0.5 m.
trol Display: "Autom. Parking"
Parallel parking to the road:
▷ Min. length of gap between two objects: your
vehicle's length plus approx. 2.6 ft/0.8 m.
▷ Minimum depth: approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.
254
Display on the Control Display ▷ The parking procedure is ac‐

tive. Steering control has been
System activated/deactivated taken over by system.
Sym‐ Meaning
bol ▷ Parking space search is always active when‐
ever the vehicle is moving forward slow and
Gray: the system is not available. straight, even if the system is deactivated.
White: the system is available but not When the system is deactivated, the displays
activated. on the Control Display are shown in gray.
The system is activated.
Parking using the parking
Parking space search is active. assistant
Parking space search and system Parking

status 1. Switching on and activating the parking assis‐
tant.
Engage the reverse gear and activate the
system or press the parking assistance but‐
ton, refer to page 254, in the Control Display.
Parking assistant is activated.
2. Drive by the row of parked vehicles at a
speed of up to approx. 22 mph/35 km/h and
at a distance of maximum 5 ft/1.5 m.
The status of the parking space search and
▷ Symbol P on the vehicle image: the parking
possible parking spaces are displayed on the
assistant is activated and the parking space
Control Display, refer to page 255.
search is active.
3. Confirm the suggested parking space for the
▷ Control Display shows suitable parking
parking process: select the parking space on
spaces at the edge of the road next to the ve‐
hicle symbol. When Park Assistant is active,
suitable parking spaces are highlighted and The system takes over the steering.
an acoustic signal sounds. Switch signal tone 4. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis‐
on/off, refer to page 256. play.
▷ If a diagonal or parallel parking space is clearly At the end of the parking procedure, the P
detected, the system automatically adjusts selector lever position is set.
the suitable parking method. In the case of The end of the parking procedure is indicated
parking spaces suitable for parallel and diago‐ on the Control Display.
nal parking, a selection menu is displayed. In
5. Adjust the parking position yourself, if
this case, the desired parking method must
needed.
be selected manually.
255
Interrupting manually Switching off

The parking assistant can be interrupted at any The system can be switched off manually:
time:
▷ Press park assistance button.
▷ "Autom. Parking" Select the symbol on Switching signal tone for

the Control Display. suitable parking spaces on/off
Via iDrive:
Interrupting automatically
The system is interrupted automatically in the 1. "CAR"
following situations: 2. "Settings"
▷ If the driver grasps the steering wheel or 3. "Driver Assistance"
takes over steering. 4. "Parking and Maneuvering"
▷ Possibly on snow-covered or slippery road 5. "Automatic Parking"
surfaces.
6. "Alert if parking space detected"
▷ When there are obstacles that are hard to
overcome, such as curbs. The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
▷ When there are obstacles that suddenly ap‐
pear.
Depending on the equipment
▷ If the PDC Park Distance Control displays
version: driving out of a parking
clearances that are too small.
space using the parking
▷ If a maximum number of parking attempts or
the time taken for parking is exceeded.
assistant
▷ When switching to another function on the Concept
Control Display.
The system makes driving out of parallel parking
▷ If the tailgate is open. spaces easier.
▷ If doors are open.
▷ When setting the parking brake. General information
▷ During acceleration. This function may not be available. Contact your
▷ When the brake pedal remains pressed for an authorized dealer’s service center or another
extended period while the vehicle is station‐ qualified service center as to whether this addi‐
ary. tional function is currently in your vehicle or when
it can be installed in your vehicle in the future.
▷ When unfastening the driver's safety belt.
A Check Control message is displayed. Steptronic transmission
The parking assistant calculates an optimal line
Resuming for pulling out of a parking space and takes con‐
An interrupted parking procedure can be contin‐ trol of the following functions during the maneu‐
ued, if needed. ver:
Reactivate the parking assistant, refer to ▷ Steering.
page 254, and follow the instructions on the ▷ Accelerating and braking.
Control Display.
256
▷ Changing the gears. stored route can be driven back with automated
The vehicle maneuvers automatically until the steering.
vehicle reaches a position in which the driver can
drive out of the parking space without further General information
steering movements. This function may not be available. Contact your
Functional requirement qualified service center as to whether this addi‐
▷ The vehicle has been parked using the park‐ tional function is currently in your vehicle or when
ing assistant. it can be installed in your vehicle in the future.
▷ An obstacle has been detected in front of the The system takes control of the steering when
vehicle. driving back along the stored route.
▷ The parking space is at least 2.6 ft/0.8 m lon‐ The driver controls driving the vehicle via accel‐
ger than your vehicle. erator pedal and brake.
Driving out of parking spaces Functional requirement

1. Switch on drive-ready state. ▷ Drive forward without interruption to store the
route.
2. Steptronic transmission:
▷ A maximum of 165 ft/50 meters will be
Press the park assistance button or shift into
stored.
reverse gear when the vehicle is stationary to
switch on the parking assistant. ▷ To store the route, do not exceed a driving
speed of 22 mph/36 km/h.
▷ The return route must be at least
4. Activating the parking assistant on the Con‐
12 in./30 cm wider than your vehicle.
trol Display: "Autom. Parking"
5. Steptronic transmission: Driving back with automated
The system takes control of the maneuver. A steering
message will be displayed at the end of the 1. Press the park assistance button or shift into
maneuver. reverse gear when the vehicle is stationary
6. Make sure that the traffic situation permits and the drive-ready state is switched on.
driving out of the parking space and drive off 2. Move the Controller to the right.
as usual.
3. "Back-up Assistant"
The parking assistant is switched off auto‐
matically. The system takes over the steering.
The possible route is shown on the Control
Depending on the equipment Display.
version: Reversing Assistant 4. Take your hands off the steering wheel and
carefully drive off with the accelerator pedal
Concept and the brake.
The system supports the driver when driving in When driving in reverse, observe the vehicle's
reverse, for instance when driving out of tight surroundings and pay attention to the infor‐
parking or street situations. mation from the PDC. Brake, if necessary.
The vehicle stores the driving movements of the

last route before the vehicle is switched off. This
257
5. Follow the instructions on the Control Display garding the system limits and actively intervene
where required. if needed.
6. Stop no later than when normal traffic is
reached and take control of the vehicle, such
as by shifting to a forward gear.
No parking assistance
The parking assistant does not offer assistance
At the end of the stored route, a signal will
in the following situations:
sound an a request will be displayed, also
with the instruction to take control of the ve‐ ▷ In tight curves.
hicle. ▷ When towing a trailer.
▷ For diagonal parking spaces.
Terminating the system
The system automatically cancels in situations Functional limitations
such as the following:
▷ If the driver grasps the steering wheel or lowing situations:
takes over steering.
▷ On bumpy road surfaces such as gravel
▷ When engaging a forward gear. roads.
▷ After a few minutes when the vehicle is sta‐ ▷ On slippery ground.
tionary.
▷ On steep uphill or downhill grades.
▷ If the vehicle leaves the stored lane during re‐
▷ With accumulations of leaves/snow in the
versing; for example, at the maximum steer‐
parking space.
ing angle.
▷ With a mounted emergency wheel.
Limits of the reverse driving ▷ In case of changes to an already-measured
assistant parking space.
▷ When you reach normal road traffic or if you ▷ With ditches or edges, for instance an edge
suddenly encounter an obstacle, stop imme‐ of a port.
diately and take over control of the vehicle.
▷ The maximum speed for driving in reverse is
Limits of ultrasonic measurement
limited to approximately 6 mph/9 km/h. Ultrasonic measurements might not function in
If the maximum speed is exceeded, a warning
is issued and the function may be canceled. ▷ For small children and animals.
▷ For persons with certain clothing, for instance
System limits coats.
▷ With external interference of the ultrasound,
Safety information for instance from passing vehicles or loud
machines.
WARNING ▷ When sensors are dirty, iced over, damaged
or out of position.
rectly, or without justification due to the system ▷ Under certain weather conditions such as
limits. There is a risk of accidents or risk of high relative humidity, wet conditions, snow‐
damage to property. Follow the information re‐ fall, extreme heat, or strong wind.
258
▷ With tow bars and trailer couplings of other detected sooner by the system than is possible
vehicles. from the driver's seat.
▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects.
▷ With moving objects. General information
▷ With elevated, protruding objects such as
ledges.
▷ With objects with corners, edges, and
smooth surfaces.
▷ With objects with a fine surface structure
such as fences.
▷ For objects with porous surfaces.
▷ With small and low objects, for instance
boxes. Two radar sensors in the rear bumper monitor
▷ With obstacles and persons at the edge of the area behind the vehicle.
the lane. The system indicates approaching traffic.
▷ With soft obstacles or obstacles covered in
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the traffic
foam material.
area in front of the vehicle is monitored as well.
▷ With plants and bushes. Two additional radar sensors are located in the
▷ Low objects already displayed, for instance front bumpers.
curbs, can move into the blind area of the
sensors before or after a continuous tone Safety information
sounds.
▷ Cargo that extends beyond the perimeter of
WARNING
the vehicle is not taken into account by the
system. The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
Parking spaces that are not suitable may be de‐
tected or suitable parking spaces may not be de‐
tected at all.
where appropriate.
Malfunction
The parking assistant failed. Have the system
checked by a dealer’s service center or another
Crossing traffic warning

Concept
At blind driveways or when driving out of diago‐
nal parking spaces, approaching cross traffic is
259
Overview Switching on/off
Button in the vehicle Activating/deactivating the system
1. Press park assistance button.

3. "Settings"
4. "Cross traffic warning"
Or via iDrive:
1. "CAR"
Park assistance button 2. "Settings"
Radar sensors 4. "Parking and Maneuvering"

If the system was activated on the Control Dis‐
play, it is automatically switched on as soon as
PDC Park Distance Control or Panorama View is
active and a gear is engaged.
If reverse gear is engaged, the rear system is
The radar sensors are located in the rear switched on.
bumper. Depending on the vehicle equipment, the front
system is switched on when a forward gear is
engaged.
Switching off automatically

The system is automatically switched off in the
following situations:
▷ When the speed exceeds walking speed.
▷ When a certain driving distance is exceeded.
▷ With an active parking operation of the park‐
Depending on the vehicle equipment, two addi‐ ing assistant.
tional radar sensors are located in the front
bumpers.
Always keep the bumper in the area of the radar

260
WARNING Display in the camera view
General information
The respective display is called up on the Con‐
trol Display. A signal tone may sound and the
light in the exterior mirror may flash.
Light in the exterior mirror
The respective boundary area, arrow 1, in the

camera view flashes red, if vehicles are detected
by the sensors.
Yellow lines, arrow 2, mark the bumper of your
own vehicle.
Acoustic warning
The light in the exterior mirror flashes if vehicles
In addition to the optical indicator, a warning sig‐
are detected by the rear sensors and your own
nal sounds if your own vehicle moves into the re‐
vehicle is moving backwards.
spective direction.
Display in the PDC Park Distance System limits

Control view The system may not be fully functional in the fol‐
lowing situations:
▷ If the speed of the approaching vehicle is very
high.
▷ In tight curves.
▷ If the bumper is dirty, iced up, or covered,
for instance by stickers.
▷ If cargo protrudes.
In the PDC Park Distance Control view, the re‐ ▷ If crossing objects move at a very slow speed.
spective boundary area flashes red, if vehicles
▷ If other objects are in the capture range of the
are detected by the sensors.
sensors, that hide cross traffic.
If the trailer power socket is in use or trailer tow‐
with trailer or bicycle rack, crossing traffic warn‐
ing is not available for the area behind the vehi‐
cle.
261
CONTROLS Driving comfort
Driving comfort
Vehicle features and ▷ Sport level:
Lowest driving level for driving at higher
options speeds.
▷ Normal level:
cific and optional features offered with the series. Standard level for normal roads and speeds.
It also describes features and functions that are ▷ High level 1:
Slightly elevated vehicle level for easy terrain
at reduced speed.
tems. When using these functions and systems, If necessary, the vehicle will be lowered at
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ higher speeds.
served. ▷ High level 2:
Highest driving level for terrains with major
uneven surfaces in the lowest speed range.
2-axle air suspension If necessary, the vehicle will be lowered at
higher speeds.
Concept Level adjustment takes place when all doors are
Air suspension ensures best possible driving closed.
comfort under all load conditions. Due to a varia‐
ble adjustment of the front and rear axles, the Safety information
damping is adjusted to the vehicle state.
General information WARNING
Regardless of the load, the vehicle will be main‐ Adjusting the vehicle height may result in trap‐
tained at the configured vehicle level. ped body parts or damaged vehicle parts.
There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to
Depending on the driving situation, the vehicle property. When adjusting the vehicle height,
level can be set to five levels. make sure that the areas of movement around
▷ Entry level: the vehicle and at the wheel housing are free.
Lowest vehicle level setting.
The entry level can be set when the vehicle is
stationary with the following features:
▷ With the rocker switch in the center con‐
sole.
▷ With the BMW display key.
▷ With the button in the lower section of the
tailgate.
The vehicle will adjust according to the se‐
lected driving mode at drive-off.
262
Driving comfort CONTROLS
Overview ▷ LED on the rocker switch flashes fast: the se‐

lected level is not possible at this time.
Rocker switch in the vehicle
Automatic
While driving
In the SPORT driving mode, refer to page 148,
SPORT+ driving mode or at higher speeds, the
vehicle lowers itself automatically.
When a set vehicle level is exited due to the
speed, the vehicle level will be adjusted accord‐
ing to the selected driving mode.
Setting the level In the event of a flat tire

When a loss of the tire inflation pressure is de‐
With the rocker switch in the center tected on a wheel, the wheel load will be reduced
console automatically to increase the possible range of
travel. In this situation, only the normal level is
available.
With the BMW display key
Concept
The vehicle level can be adjusted with the BMW
display key when the vehicle is stationary, for in‐
stance for easier loading or as an entry aid.
Setting the level

Up
1. Apply parking brake and switch drive-ready
Push the rocker switch forward.
state off using the Start/Stop button.
In the low speed range, the vehicle is raised to
2. Closing the doors.
next higher level when the rocker switch is
pressed. 3. If necessary, switch on the display on the
BMW display key and cancel the display
Down block, refer to page 81.
Pull the rocker switch backward. 4. On the BMW display key, change to the fol‐
lowing menu: "Entry level".
The vehicle will lower by one level.
5. "Height control"
Display 6. ▷ "Lower" tap the button. The vehicle low‐
▷ LED on the rocker switch lights up: display of ers itself to the entry level.
the current level. ▷ "Raise" tap the button. The vehicle will
▷ LED on the rocker switch is flashing: adjust‐ raise itself from the entry level according
ment procedure active. The vehicle raises or to the selected driving mode.
lowers itself.
263
Terminating the adjustment procedure Wheel change

An adjustment procedure that was started on the Before a wheel change, deactivate the system:
BMW display key can be terminated with the
Press the rocker switch forward or pull it back‐
BMW display key.
ward for approx. 7 seconds. After the rocker
"Cancel": tap the button. The vehicle raises or switch is released, the LED indicator on the
lowers itself back to the starting level. rocker switch will go out.
Activating the system: press the rocker switch
With the button in the lower tailgate forward or pull it backward for approx. 7 seconds.
After the rocker switch is released, the LED indi‐
cator will reactivate.
Malfunction
A Check Control message is displayed. The sys‐
tem is impaired. Vehicle handling may be altered
and driving comfort may be noticeably reduced.
Visit the nearest dealer’s service center or an‐
When the tailgate is opened, the vehicle can be
lowered to the entry level and raised again by Long periods when vehicle is
pressing the button. The flashing of the LED in parked
the button indicates the level change.
During long periods when the vehicle is parked, it
During the raising procedure, the vehicle raises can lower itself. This is not a malfunction.
itself from the entry level to the level that was se‐
lected last or the normal level. If drive-ready state is switched on with the doors
closed, the vehicle is raised to the normal level
automatically.
Terminating the adjustment procedure
Depending on the state of the vehicle, raising to
An adjustment procedure that was started with normal level may take several minutes.
the button in the lower tailgate can be terminated
with this button.
Press the button again. The vehicle raises or xOffroad package
lowers itself back to the starting level.
Concept
System limits The xOffroad package supports the driver when
With several manual level changes one after an‐ driving away from unpaved roads or with reduced
other, the system will temporarily switch itself off, traction. The system offers four different xOff‐
if necessary. The rejection of another level road driving modes for selection.
change is indicated by a fast flashing LED on the
The xOffroad driving modes can be selected
rocker switch.
based on the ground conditions.
When the trailer power socket is in use or when
When an xOffroad mode is switched on, individ‐
trailer towing is activated, only the normal level is
ual systems in the vehicle are set to the best
available.
possible traction and vehicle stability.
264
With the 2-axle air suspension, refer to page 262, switched on. The LED on the button lights up.
the vehicle level is set for the corresponding The driving mode is displayed in the instrument
xOffroad driving mode. cluster.
The effective speed range is displayed in the
xOffroad driving modes and levels speedometer with a line below the scale.
xOffroad driving mode Level Setting the xOffroad driving

"xGRAVEL" High level 1 mode
"xSAND" High level 1
"xROCKS" High level 2
"xSNOW" Normal level
General information
The system optimizes the driving behavior and
the traction on unpaved surfaces within the
physical limits. Push the rocker switch forward or pull it back re‐
This is operated with the button and rocker peatedly until the desired xOffroad driving mode
switch in the center console. is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Observe the information in the chapter Driving
tips, driving on bad roads, refer to page 312.
xOffroad driving modes in detail
Overview All driving modes
When the xOffroad driving modes are switched
Button and rocker switch in the
on, the following vehicle settings will be applied:
center console
▷ Auto Start/Stop function is switched off.
▷ Transmission and accelerator pedal: the shift‐
ing behavior and response to the accelerator
pedal are adjusted.
▷ The all-wheel-drive system is set to the best
possible traction.
▷ Display on the Control Display: the power dis‐
tribution on the wheels can also be displayed
in the xOffroad display.
1 Switch the xOffroad driving mode on/off. With the proper equipment, additional terrain-
2 Set the xOffroad driving mode. specific camera perspectives can be se‐
lected.
Switching on "xGRAVEL"
Press button 1 or rocker switch 2 forward or pull This driving mode is active every time the xOff‐
back. The xOffroad driving mode "xGRAVEL" is road modes are switched on.
265
Setting for: "Optimized vehicle setting for easy ▷ Accelerator pedal: the characteristic of the
terrain." accelerator pedal is optimized for gentle driv‐
When switching on, the following additional vehi‐ ing behavior.
cle settings are carried out, for example:
▷ Anti-lock system: the response behavior is Manual switching off
adjusted. Press button 1. The LED on the button goes out.
▷ DSC: the response behavior is adjusted. The last driving mode that was set through the
Driving Dynamics Control will be activated.
▷ 2–axle air suspension: high level 1 is set.
Display on the Control Display
"xSAND"
Setting for: "Optimized vehicle setting for heavy Display xView display
terrain with loose surface. For maximum traction,
Via iDrive:
deactivate DSC."
When switching on, the following additional vehi‐ 1. "CAR"
cle settings are carried out, for example: 2. "Driving information"
▷ Anti-lock system: the response behavior is 3. "xOFFROAD"
adjusted. The following information is displayed:
▷ DSC: the response behavior is adjusted. ▷ With a navigation system: compass display
▷ 2–axle air suspension: high level 1 is set. for the driving direction.
▷ With navigation system: height indication for
"xROCKS" the current position.
Setting for: "Optimized vehicle setting for heavy ▷ With navigation system: destination flag in
terrain with strong irregularities. For maximum compass direction to the destination.
traction, deactivate DSC."
▷ Pitch attitude with degree indication and per‐
When switching on, the following additional vehi‐ centage.
▷ Transverse gradient with degree indication.
▷ Anti-lock system: the response behavior is
▷ Graphic display for the steering angle.
adjusted.
▷ Level setting for the 2–axle air suspension.
▷ DSC: the response behavior is adjusted.
With the xOffroad package, the following addi‐
▷ 2–axle air suspension: high level 2 is set.
tional information can be displayed:
"xSNOW" ▷ With Surround View: depending on the

speed, terrain-specific camera perspectives.
Setting for: "Optimized vehicle setting for
assured handling on slippery road." ▷ xOffroad mode currently active.
When switching on, the following additional vehi‐ ▷ Distribution of drive torque to the wheels.
▷ 2–axle air suspension: normal level is set. System limits
▷ Steptronic transmission: the shift behavior is The xOffroad properties may be reduced at
set to gentle gear changes. The vehicle higher speeds where required.
drives off in second gear.
266
Adaptive chassis Tuning

The system offers several different tunings.
Concept The tunings are assigned to the different driving
modes of the Driving Dynamics Control, refer to
This system reduces undesirable vehicle motion
page 148.
when using a dynamic driving style or traveling
on uneven road surfaces. Driving mode Tuning
COMFORT Comfortable
General information
ECO PRO
This enhances the driving dynamics and driving
comfort depending on the road surface condition SPORT Firm
and driving style. SPORT PLUS
Tuning
The system offers several different damping set‐ Adaptive M chassis
tings.
The damping settings are assigned to the differ‐ Concept
The Adaptive M chassis is a controllable sport
trol, refer to page 148.
chassis/suspension. This system reduces unde‐
Driving mode Damper tuning sirable vehicle motion when using a dynamic
driving style or traveling on uneven road surfa‐
COMFORT Balanced out
ces.
ECO PRO
This enhances the driving dynamics and driving
SPORT Firm comfort depending on the road surface condition
SPORT PLUS and driving style.
General information
Active roll stabilization The system offers several different damping set‐
tings.
Concept The damping settings are assigned to the differ‐

The system reduces the lateral tilt of the vehicle trol, refer to page 148.
that occurs during rapid driving in curves or dur‐
ing quick evasive maneuvers. Depending on the equipment version, the rear
axle lock differential will be adjusted for the re‐
spective traction conditions as needed.
General information
The lateral tilt of the vehicle is balanced out by Driving mode Damper tuning
permanent adjustment on the front and rear SPORT Firm
axles. The vehicle is thus always stabilized.
SPORT PLUS Sporty and tight
Agility and driving comfort are increased under all
driving conditions. COMFORT/ECO PRO Balanced out
267
Adaptive M Chassis The resulting braking power is simultaneously

largely compensated by an engine intervention.
Professional
Concept
The Adaptive M Suspension Professional is an
actively controlled sport chassis/suspension. The
system increases driving comfort and minimizes
the lateral tilt when driving around curves.
The Adaptive M Suspension Professional en‐
compasses the following systems:
▷ Sport suspension.
▷ Adaptive chassis.
▷ Active roll stabilization.
▷ Integral Active Steering.
General information
For active control, this system uses the available
information, for instance from the navigation sys‐
tem or the driving style analysis.
This information influences the control of the fol‐
lowing systems, especially in ADAPTIVE driving
mode, refer to page 150:
▷ Adaptive chassis, refer to page 267.
▷ Active roll stabilization, refer to page 267.
▷ Integral Active Steering, refer to page 218
This further increases the agility and comfort of
the vehicle.
The function may be restricted if the navigation
data is invalid, outdated or not available, for ex‐
ample.
Depending on the equipment, the rear axle lock
differential will be adjusted for the traction condi‐
tions as needed.
Performance Control
Performance Control enhances the agility of the
vehicle.
To increase maneuverability, wheels are braked
individually when a sporty driving style is used.
268
Climate control CONTROLS
Climate control
Vehicle features and Automatic climate control
options
Overview
cific and optional features offered with the series. Buttons in the vehicle
served.
Interior air quality

The air quality in the vehicle is improved by the Climate control functions
following components:
Button Function
▷ Emission tested car's interior.
▷ Microfilter. Temperature, refer to page 270.
▷ Air conditioning system to control the tem‐
perature, air flow and recirculated-air mode. Climate control operation, refer
to page 271.
Depending on the equipment specification:
▷ Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter. Maximum cooling, refer to
page 271.
▷ Ionization.
▷ Fragrancing. AUTO program, refer to
page 271.
▷ Automatic recirculated-air control AUC.
▷ Parked-car ventilation. Recirculated-air mode, refer to
page 272.
Air flow, manual, refer to

page 273.
Air distribution, manual, refer to

page 273.
Defrost and defog the wind‐

shield, refer to page 274.
Rear window defroster, refer to

page 274.
269
CONTROLS Climate control
Button Function Press and hold the button on the

driver's side bottom until the control
Active seat ventilation, refer to panel switches off.
page 126.
▷ On the front passenger side:
Seat and armrest heating, refer Press and hold the button on the
to page 125. front passenger side bottom.
Open the Climate menu, refer to
page 270. Temperature
For the following settings, for in‐
stance: upper body temperature
Concept
adjustment, parked-car ventila‐ The automatic climate control achieves the set
tion. temperature as quickly as possible, if needed, by
using the maximum cooling or heating capacity,
and then keeps it constant.
Opening the Climate menu
Push the button up. Settings
Press the upper or lower button side to
The Climate menu is displayed. set the desired temperature.
For example, the following climate control func‐
tions can be accessed via the Climate menu: Via iDrive:
▷ Fragrance. 1. "CAR"
▷ Heating/ventilation. 2. "Settings"
▷ Air quality. 3. "Climate control"
▷ Seats/surfaces. 4. "Heating/ventilation"
▷ Parked-car ventilation/heating 5. "Driver" or "Front passenger"
Individual settings can be entered for some of 6. "Temperature:"
the climate functions, e.g., switching on/off, in‐ 7. Set the desired temperature.
tensity.
Do not rapidly switch between different tempera‐
ture settings. Otherwise, the automatic climate
Switching on/off control will not have sufficient time to adjust the
set temperature.
Switching on
Press any button except for the following: Temperature of the ventilation
▷ Menu.
▷ Rear window defroster. General information
▷ Lower air flow button side. The temperature of the ventilation in the upper
body area can be adjusted.
▷ Seat heating.
The temperature is individually adjusted, e.g.
▷ Seat ventilation.
colder toward blue, warmer toward red.
Switching off
▷ Complete system:
270
The air flow of the ventilation in the upper body Depending on the weather, the windshield and
range heats or cools noticeably, depending on side windows may fog up briefly when drive-
the adjusted temperature. ready state is switched on.
This does not change the set interior tempera‐ The air conditioning is switched on automatically
ture for the driver and front passenger. with the AUTO program.
When using the automatic climate control, con‐
Settings densation water develops and collects under‐
Via iDrive: neath the vehicle.
1. "CAR"
Maximum cooling
2. "Settings"
3. "Climate control" Concept
4. "Heating/ventilation" The system is set to the lowest temperature, op‐
5. "Driver" or "Front passenger" timum air flow and recirculated-air mode with the
drive-ready state switched on.
6. "Temperature adjustment"
7. Set the desired temperature: General information
▷ Toward blue: colder. The function is available with external tempera‐
▷ Toward red: warmer. tures above approx. 32 ℉/0 ℃ and with the
drive-ready state switched on.
Air conditioning
Switching on/off
Concept Press the button.
The air in the car's interior will be cooled and de‐ The LED is illuminated with the system
humidified and, depending on the temperature switched on.
setting, warmed again.
The car's interior can only be cooled with the Air flows out of the vents to the upper body re‐
drive-ready state switched on. gion. The vents need to be open for this.
The air flow can be adjusted with the air flow ac‐
Switching on/off tive.
Push the button down.
AUTO program
Via iDrive:
Concept
1. "CAR" The AUTO program cools, ventilates or heats
2. "Settings" the car's interior automatically.
3. "Climate control" The air distribution and temperature are control‐
4. "Heating/ventilation" led automatically depending on the temperature
in the car's interior and the desired temperature
5. "A/C"
setting including the selected intensity of the air
Air conditioning is switched on with the engine flow.
running.
271
Switching on/off The air flow and air distribution are controlled au‐
tomatically depending on the selected intensity.
Press the button.
The selected intensity is shown on the climate
The LED is illuminated with the AUTO
control display.
program switched on.
Via iDrive: Automatic recirculated-air

1. "CAR"
control AUC
2. "Settings" Concept
3. "Climate control" The automatic recirculated-air control AUC rec‐
4. "Heating/ventilation" ognizes odors or pollutants in the outside air.
5. "Driver" or "Front passenger" The outside air supply is shut off and the interior
air is recirculated.
6. "Automatic"
Depending on the selected temperature, the in‐ General information
tensity of the AUTO program, and outside influ‐
ences, the air is directed to the windshield, side If the system is activated, a sensor detects pollu‐
windows, upper body, and into the floor area. tants in the outside air and controls the shut-off
automatically.
The air conditioning, refer to page 271, is
switched on automatically with the AUTO pro‐ If the system is deactivated, outside air continu‐
gram. ously flows into the car's interior.
At the same time, a condensation sensor con‐ With constant recirculated-air mode, the air qual‐
trols the program so as to prevent window con‐ ity in the car's interior deteriorates and the fog‐
densation as much as possible. ging of the windows increases.
The AUTO program is switched off automati‐

Switching on/off
cally, when manual air distribution is set.
Via iDrive:
Intensity 1. "CAR"
With the AUTO program switched on, the inten‐ 2. "Settings"
sity can be set. This changes the automatic con‐
trol for the air flow and air distribution.
4. "Air quality"
Press the lower or upper side of the
5. "Automatic"
button: decrease or increase intensity.
If there is window condensation, switch off recir‐
Via iDrive: culated-air mode or defog the windows, refer to
page 274.
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
Recirculated-air mode
4. "Heating/ventilation" Concept
5. "Driver" or "Front passenger" You may react to unpleasant odors or pollutants
6. "Level" in the immediate environment by temporarily
suspending the supply of outside air. The system
7. Set the desired intensity.
then recirculates the air flow within the vehicle.
272
Operation The selected air flow is shown on the climate

control display.
Press the button repeatedly to select an
operating mode. The air flow may be reduced automatically to
save battery power.
The LED is illuminated when the recirculated-air
mode is switched on. The supply of outside air is
permanently shut off. Controlling the air distribution
manually
Via iDrive:
1. "CAR" Concept
2. "Settings" The air distribution for climate control can be ad‐
justed manually.
4. "Air quality" Operation
5. Select desired setting: Press the button repeatedly to select a
▷ "Fresh air" program:
▷ "Air recirculation"
▷ Windows, upper body region, and floor area.
▷ "Auto-recirculate"
▷ Upper body region and floor area.
To prevent window fogging, recirculated-air
▷ Floor area.
mode switches off automatically after a certain
amount of time, depending on the environmental ▷ Windows and floor area.
conditions. ▷ Windows.
With constant recirculated-air mode, the air qual‐ ▷ Windows and upper body.
ity in the car's interior deteriorates and the fog‐ ▷ Upper body region.
ging of the windows increases.
The selected air distribution is shown on the cli‐
If there is window condensation, switch off recir‐ mate control display.
culated-air mode or defog the windows, refer to
page 274. If there is window condensation, defog the win‐
dows, refer to page 274.
Controlling the air flow manually
SYNC program
Concept
Concept
The air flow for climate control can be adjusted
manually. Depending on the equipment, the following set‐
tings of the driver's side can be transferred to the
front-passenger side and the rear:
General information
▷ Temperature.
To manually adjust air flow switch off AUTO pro‐
gram first. ▷ Air flow.
▷ Air distribution.
Operation ▷ AUTO program.
button: decrease or increase air flow.
273
Switching on/off Microfilter/activated-charcoal

Via iDrive: filter
1. "CAR" The microfilter removes dust and pollen from the
incoming air.
2. "Settings"
The activated-charcoal filter also removes gas‐
eous pollutants from the outside air that enters
4. "Synchronize" the vehicle.
The program is switched off automatically if the Have this combined filter changed during vehicle
settings on the front passenger side or in the maintenance, refer to page 374.
rear are changed.
Defrost windshield and remove Ventilation

condensation
Concept
Concept The air flow directions can be individually ad‐
Ice and condensation are quickly removed from justed.
the windshield and the front side windows.
Adjusting the ventilation
Switching on/off
Press the button. General information
The LED is illuminated with the system The air flow directions can be adjusted for direct
switched on. or indirect ventilation.
Point the side vents towards the side windows, Direct ventilation
as needed. The air flow can be adjusted man‐
The air flow is directed towards the passengers.
ually with the system switched on.
The air flow heats or cools noticeably, depending
If there is window condensation, press on the adjusted temperature.
the button on the driver's side or switch
on air conditioning to utilize the condensation Indirect ventilation
sensor. Make sure that air can flow to the wind‐
The air flow is not directed towards the passen‐
shield.
gers. The car's interior is warmed or cooled indi‐
rectly, depending on the set temperature.
Rear window defroster
Press the button. The LED lights up.
The function is available with the engine
running.
The rear window defroster switches off automat‐
ically after a certain period of time.
274
Front ventilation Ventilation in the rear, on the

side
▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction, ar‐

row 1. ▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction, ar‐
▷ Thumbwheel for variable opening and closing row 1.
of the vents, arrow 2. ▷ Thumbwheel for variable opening and closing
of the vents, arrow 2.
Ventilation in rear, center
Heating and ventilation, third row
of seats
The air in the area of the third row of seats can
be heated or circulated. The vents are located in
the storage area between the seats and in the
floor area of the third row of seats.
▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction, ar‐

row 1.
▷ Thumbwheel for variable opening and closing
of the vents, arrow 2.
▷ Thumbwheel for varying the temperature, ar‐
row 3.
Toward blue: colder. ▷ Button for switching on the fan, arrow 1. The
LED lights up.
Toward red: warmer.
▷ Thumbwheel for the activation of the heat
and distribution of the air, arrow 2.
Turn toward the front: activate the heater and
distribute the air in the floor area.
Turn toward the rear: distribute the air in the
storage area between the seats.
The heater is not ready for operation without

switching on the fan. After the heater is switched
275
off, the fan can be used to circulate the interior Switching on/off
air, for instance at high temperatures. To do this,
switch on the fan, arrow 1, and turn the thumb‐ Via iDrive
wheel toward the rear, arrow 2.
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
Rear automatic climate 3. "Climate control"
control 4. "Heating/ventilation"
5. "Second row of seats"
Overview 6. "Activate heating/cooling"
The rear automatic climate control is not ready
Buttons in the vehicle for operation if the automatic climate control is
switched off or if the function for defrosting the
windows and removing condensation is active.
Using the button: switching on

Press any button except for the following:
▷ Lower air flow button side.
▷ Seat heating.
Using the button: switching off

Climate control functions Press and hold the bottom of the but‐
ton.
Button Function
Temperature, refer to page 276 Temperature
Maximum cooling, refer to Concept

page 277. The automatic climate control achieves the set
temperature as quickly as possible, if needed, by
AUTO program, refer to
using the maximum cooling or heating capacity,
page 277.
and then keeps it constant.
Air flow, manual, refer to
page 277. Settings
Air distribution, manual, refer to Press the upper or lower button side to
page 278. set the desired temperature.
Seat heating, refer to page 126. Via iDrive:

1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
4. "Heating/ventilation"
276
5. "Second row of seats" Via iDrive:

6. "Temperature left:" or "Temperature right:" 1. "CAR"
7. Set the desired temperature. 2. "Settings"
The selected temperature is shown on the cli‐ 3. "Climate control"
mate control display.
Do not rapidly switch between different tempera‐
ture settings. Otherwise, the automatic climate
control will not have sufficient time to adjust the 6. "Automatic"
set temperature. Depending on the selected temperature, the
AUTO intensity, and outside influences, the air is
Maximum cooling directed to the upper body and into the floor
area.
Concept
The system is set to the lowest temperature, op‐ Intensity
timum air flow and recirculated-air mode with the With the AUTO program activated, the automatic
drive-ready state switched on. intensity control can be changed:
General information button: decrease or increase intensity.
The function is available with external tempera‐
tures above approx. 32 ℉/0 ℃ and with the Via iDrive:
drive-ready state switched on. 1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
Switching on/off
Press the button.
The LED is illuminated with the system
switched on.
6. "Level"
Air flows out of the vents to the upper body re‐ 7. Set the desired intensity.
gion. The vents need to be open for this.
The air flow and air distribution are controlled au‐
tomatically depending on the selected intensity.
AUTO program
The selected intensity is shown on the climate
Concept control display.
Air flow, air distribution and temperature are con‐

trolled automatically.
Controlling the air flow manually
Concept
Switching on/off
The air flow for climate control can be adjusted
Press the button. manually.
The LED is illuminated with the AUTO
program switched on. General information
To manually adjust air flow switch off AUTO pro‐
gram first.
277
Operation Functional requirements

Press the lower or upper side of the ▷ The vehicle is in idle state or standby state
button: decrease or increase air flow. and not in drive-ready state.
▷ Battery is sufficiently charged.
The selected air flow is shown on the climate
control display. If parked-car ventilation is switched on, the
vehicle battery will be discharged. Thus, limit
the maximum activation time to save the ve‐
Controlling the air distribution
hicle battery. The system will be available
manually again after the engine is started or after a
short trip.
Concept
▷ Make sure that the vehicle's date and time
The air distribution for climate control can be ad‐ are set correctly.
justed manually.
▷ Open the vents to allow air to flow out.
Operation
Opening the Climate menu
button to select a program: Push the button up.
▷ Upper body region. The Climate comfort menu is displayed.

▷ Upper body region and floor area. Individual settings can be entered for some of
▷ Floor area. the climate control functions.
Switching on/off directly

Parked-car ventilation
General information
Concept There are different ways to switch the system on
The car's interior can be cooled or heated before or off.
driving off with the parked-car ventilation. De‐ The system switches off automatically after a
pending on set temperature and ambient tem‐ certain period of time. The system continues to
perature, the car's interior is ventilated or possi‐ run for some time after being switched off.
bly heated using the residual engine heat.
Using the button
General information When the vehicle is in standby state, the parked-
The system can be switched on and off directly car ventilation can be switched on or off via the
or via a preset departure time. automatic climate control buttons.
The system can also be used via the BMW Con‐ Press any button except:
nected App. ▷ Rear window defroster.
The activation time is determined based on the ▷ Lower air flow button side.
external temperature. The system promptly
▷ Seat heating.
switches on before the selected departure time.
▷ Seat ventilation.
▷ Menu.
278
The system switches off after leaving and lock‐ ▷ One-time departure time: the time can be
ing the vehicle. set.
The system is switched on once.
Via iDrive ▷ Departure time with weekday: time and day
1. "CAR" of the week can be set.
2. "Settings" On the desired weekdays, the system will be
3. "Climate control" switched on promptly before the set depar‐
4. "Pre-ventilation" or "Pre-heating/ventilation" ture time.
5. "Activate now" The departure time is preselected in two steps:

▷ Set departure times.
Via BMW display key ▷ Activate departure times.
Switching on Setting the departure time

1. Switch on the display of the BMW display
key. Via iDrive
2. "Precondit. setting" 1. "CAR"
3. Tap the symbol or the symbol. 2. "Settings"
4. "Activate now" 3. "Climate control"
5. "Start" 4. "Pre-ventilation" or "Pre-heating/ventilation"
5. "Departure schedule"
Switching off
6. Select the desired departure time.
7. Set the departure time.
key.
8. Select day of the week, if needed.
2. "Precondit. setting"
3. Tap the symbol or the symbol. Via BMW display key
4. "Stop" 1. Switch on the display of the BMW display
key.
Display 2. "Precondit. setting"
3. Tap the symbol or the symbol.
Symbol Description
Symbol on the climate con‐
trol display.
Flashing: the parked-car
ventilation is switched on. 7. "OK"
Activating the departure time

Departure time
Concept
If a departure time is to influence the switching
Different departure times can be adjusted to en‐ on of parked-car ventilation, the respective de‐
sure a comfortable interior temperature in the ve‐ parture time must be activated first.
hicle at the time of departure.
279
Via iDrive Safety information

1. "CAR"
2. "Settings" DANGER
3. "Climate control" If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventilation is in‐
4. "Pre-ventilation" or "Pre-heating/ventilation" sufficient, harmful exhaust gases can pollute
5. "Preconditioning for departure" the area in and around the vehicle or enter into
6. Activate the desired departure time. tants which are colorless and odorless. In en‐
closed areas or areas with insufficient ventila‐
Via BMW display key tion, exhaust gases can also accumulate
1. Switch on the display of the BMW display outside of the vehicle. There is danger to life.
key. Keep the exhaust pipe free and ensure suffi‐
2. "Precondit. setting" cient ventilation. Do not switch on stationary cli‐
mate control in enclosed areas or areas with in‐
3. Tap the symbol or the symbol.
sufficient ventilation, e.g. in enclosed garages.
4. Tap on symbol.
5. Activate the desired departure time.
WARNING
Display
When stationary climate control is in operation,
, Symbol on the climate control display high temperatures can occur underneath the
signals an activated departure time. body, for instance caused by the exhaust gas
system. If combustible materials, such as
leaves or grass, come in contact with hot parts
Stationary climate control of the exhaust gas system, these materials can
through Remote Engine ignite. There is a risk of fire. Make sure that no
combustible materials can come in contact with
Start hot vehicle parts during stationary climate con‐
trol operation, e.g. leaves, grass, gas, gasoline,
Concept oil or other combustible objects.
Stationary climate control cools or heats the car's
interior prior to departure to a comfortable tem‐
perature. The system automatically cools, vents,
and heats depending on the interior, external, ▷ The vehicle is in idle state or standby state
and set temperature. Snow and ice may be re‐ and not in drive-ready state.
moved more easily. ▷ Battery is sufficiently charged.
The system starts the engine automatically and ▷ For reasons of safety, the system can only be
allows it to run for a limited period of time. switched on twice consecutively. The system
will be available again as soon as the drive-
ready state is activated and deactivated
again.
▷ The fuel tank capacity is sufficient.
▷ Hood is closed.
280
▷ Make sure that the vehicle's date and time ▷ Via remote control.
are set correctly. ▷ Via BMW display key.
▷ Open the vents to allow air to flow out. The system switches off automatically after ap‐
prox. 15 minutes.
Enabling the automatic engine For reasons of safety, the system can only be
start function switched on twice consecutively. The system will
The automatic engine start must be enabled be‐ be available again as soon as the drive-ready
fore using the system. state is activated and deactivated again.
Otherwise, the engine cannot switch on auto‐
matically to climatize the car's interior. Via iDrive
2. "Settings"
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
4. "Preconditioning/ventilation"
5. "Activate now"
4. "Preconditioning/ventilation"
5. If necessary, "Remote Engine Start" Via remote control
6. "Starting engine for clim. control" The system can be switched on and off using
7. Confirm the disclaimer. the remote control.
Press the button on the remote control
Confirmation signals from the three times within 1 second.
vehicle After operating the remote control, it will take ap‐
The activation of the system is confirmed by proximately 3 seconds until the engine is
flashing twice. switched on.
The parking lights are switched on as long as the
To switch off the system, press the button again
system is switched on.
three times.
Opening the Climate menu Via BMW display key

Push the button up. Switching on:
The Climate comfort menu is displayed.
key.
Individual settings can be entered for some of
the climate control functions.
3. Tap on symbol.
Switching on/off directly 4. "Activate now"
5. "Start"
General information Switching off:
There are different ways to switch the system on
or off: 1. Switch on the display of the BMW display
key.
▷ Via iDrive.
281
3. Tap on symbol. Observe the information about the intended use

4. "Stop" of the vehicle, refer to page 10.
Display Setting the departure time
Symbol Description Via iDrive

1. "CAR"
Symbol on the BMW display
key for automatic climate 2. "Settings"
control. 3. "Climate control"
The symbol flashes while 4. "Preconditioning/ventilation"
Remote Engine Start is run‐ 5. Select the desired departure time.
ning.
Climatization for the requested
departure time Via BMW display key
General information key.
Scheduled departure times can be set up in the 2. "Precondit. setting"
system to ensure a comfortable interior tempera‐
3. Tap on symbol.
ture in the vehicle at the time of departure.
▷ One-time departure time: the time of the
scheduled departure can be set. 5. Set the departure time.
The system is switched on once. 6. Select day of the week, if needed.
▷ Departure time with weekday: time and day 7. "OK"
of the week of the scheduled departure can
be set. Activating the departure time
On the desired weekdays, the system will be
switched on 10 minutes before the set de‐ Functional requirement
parture time. If a requested departure time is to influence the
The departure time is preselected in two steps: switching on of the system, the respective de‐
parture time must be activated first.
▷ Set departure times.
▷ Activate departure times. Via iDrive
The climate control function will start approxi‐ 1. "CAR"
mately 10 minutes before the set departure time 2. "Settings"
and continue for 5 more minutes after the depar‐
ture time. 3. "Climate control"
For reasons of safety, the system can only be 4. "Preconditioning/ventilation"

switched on twice consecutively. The system will 5. Activate the desired departure time.
be available again as soon as the drive-ready , The symbol on the automatic climate
state is activated and deactivated again. control signals an activated departure time
282
Via BMW display key Safety information

key.
WARNING
Refilled genuine BMW fragrance cartridges can
3. Tap on symbol. cause the emission of harmful substances, mal‐
4. Activating the desired departure time: functions, and damage to the system. There is
Tap on symbol. a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Do
not refill genuine fragrance cartridges. When a
The symbol on the automatic climate cartridge is empty, replace it with a new fra‐
control signals an activated departure time. grance cartridge.
Ambient air package Opening the Climate menu

Push the button up.
Concept
The Ambient Air Package can be used to clean The Climate comfort menu is displayed.
and scent the interior air with high-quality fra‐
Individual settings can be entered for some of
grances.
the climate control functions.
Ionization is used to clean the air from sus‐
pended particles. Together with the selected fra‐
Ionization
grance, ionization contributes to well-being and
relaxation while driving.
Concept
General information Ionization cleans the car's interior air of sus‐
pended particles.
Two different fragrances can be selected in the
vehicle. A variety of other fragrances is possible
Switching on/off
by replacing the fragrance cartridges.
Via iDrive:
The following criteria can influence the percep‐
tion of scents in the car's interior: 1. "CAR"
▷ Automatic climate control settings. 2. "Settings"
▷ Temperature and air humidity. 3. "Climate control"
▷ Time of day and season. 4. "Air quality"
▷ Physical condition of the vehicle occupants, 5. "Ionization"
for instance fatigue. The climate control display indicates that ioniza‐
BMW recommends the use of genuine BMW tion is switched on.
fragrance cartridges.
The genuine BMW fragrance cartridges are not Fragrancing
suitable for refilling. When a cartridge is empty,
replace it with a new fragrance cartridge. General information
Fragrancing is done at intervals in order to avoid
a habituation effect.
283
Two fragrance cartridges in the vehicle allow Fragrancing is switched on or off.

switching between the fragrances. 6. "Level"
The fragrance cartridges are located in the glove 7. Select the desired setting.
compartment.
Highest intensity at Level 3.
To ensure a pleasant fragrance inside of the ve‐
hicle when starting the trip, fragrancing can occur Display
prior to the trip. The system is automatically
switched on with the parked-car ventilation if fra‐ The illustrations on the Control Display show the
grancing was switched on at the end of the last actual filling level of the fragrance cartridges.
trip. Via iDrive:
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
▷ Fragrance cartridges are sufficiently filled.
▷ Interior temperature between 41 ℉/+5 ℃
and 104 ℉/+40 ℃. 4. "Fragrance"
▷ Open the vents to allow the fragrance to flow The fill level of the fragrance cartridges is dis‐
out. played.
When an empty fragrance cartridge is indicated,
Selecting the fragrance the cartridge still contains a fluid carrying the fra‐
grance. However, it is not sufficient for fragranc‐
The car's interior is fragranced depending on the
ing.
selected fragrance.
When a fragrance cartridge requires replace‐
Two different fragrances can be selected in the
ment, a Check Control message is displayed
vehicle.
once
Via iDrive:
1. "CAR" Inserting fragrance cartridges
2. "Settings" The fragrance cartridges are located in the glove
compartment.
4. "Fragrance" 1. Open the glove compartment, refer to
page 296.
5. Select the desired fragrance.
2. Press on the bottom of the cartridge holder.
rently used. The cartridge holder slides down.
Switching fragrancing on/off,

adjusting intensity
Via iDrive:
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
4. "Fragrance"
5. "Fragrance"
284
3. Remove the cover of the fragrance cartridge. 6. Insert the fragrance cartridge without pres‐
Hold the cover on the top to slide it from the sure into the cartridge holder. The cartridge
fragrance cartridge. snaps lightly into place.
4. Insert the removed cover on the back side of 7. Push the cartridge holder up, until it engages.
the fragrance cartridge. Make sure that no objects press against the
cartridge holder from below, otherwise the
function of the ambient air package could be
impacted.
8. Close the glove compartment.
Removing the fragrance cartridge

The fragrance cartridges are located in the glove
compartment.
5. Position fragrance cartridge such that the 1. Open the glove compartment, refer to
chip faces away from the cartridge holder. page 296.
2. Press on the bottom of the cartridge holder.
The cartridge holder slides down.
3. Pull desired fragrance cartridge from the

holder.
Fragrance cartridge, arrow 1: first fragrance
indicated on the Control Display.
285
Fragrance cartridge, arrow 2: second fra‐ Using the voice activation

grance indicated on the Control Display. system
Most climate control functions can be used via
voice in the car's interior, e.g.:
▷ Activation of the air conditioner: ›Activate
climate control‹.
▷ Deactivation of the automatic recirculated-air
function: ›Deactivate ... air recirculation‹.
▷ Configuration of a specific tempera‐
ture: ›Temperature [...] at ...‹.
4. Pull desired fragrance cartridge from the
holder.
Recycling
Empty fragrance cartridges can be taken
to a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop for
recycling.
Using climate control

functions via voice
General information
▷ Instructions for the voice activation system,
refer to page 54.
▷ With voice operation, you can change be‐
tween voice operation, iDrive and buttons.
▷ To have the available voice commands read
out loud: ›Voice commands‹ or ›Help‹.
286
Interior equipment CONTROLS
Interior equipment
options
WARNING
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ The operation of remote-controlled systems
cific and optional features offered with the series. with the integrated universal remote control,
It also describes features and functions that are such as the garage door, may result in pinched
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due body parts. There is a risk of injury or risk of
to the selected options or country versions. This damage to property. Make sure that the area of
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ movement of the respective system is clear
tems. When using these functions and systems, during programming and operation. Also follow
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ the safety information of the hand-held trans‐
served. mitter.
Integrated Universal Compatibility

Remote Control If this symbol is printed on the packaging
or in the owner's manual of the system to
be controlled, the system is generally
Concept
compatible with the integrated Universal Remote
The integrated Universal Remote Control in the Control.
interior mirror can operate up to 3 functions of
Additional questions are answered by:
remote-controlled systems, such as garage door
drives, barriers or lighting systems. ▷ A dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
General information ▷ www.homelink.com on the Internet.
The Integrated Universal Remote Control repla‐
HomeLink is a registered trademark of Gentex
ces up to 3 different hand-held transmitters. To
Corporation.
operate the remote control, the buttons on the
interior mirror must be programmed with the de‐
sired functions. The hand-held transmitter for the
particular system is required in order to program
the remote control.
Before selling the vehicle, delete the stored func‐
tions for the sake of security.
If possible, do not install the antenna of the re‐
mote-controlled system, e.g. the garage gate
drive, near metal objects to ensure the best pos‐
sible operation.
287
CONTROLS Interior equipment
Control elements on the interior Canada: if programming with the hand-held

mirror transmitter was interrupted, hold down the in‐
terior mirror button and repeatedly press and
release the hand-held transmitter button for
2 seconds.
6. ▷ The LED lights up green: programming
completed.
Release the button.
▷ The LED flashes fast: programming is not
complete.
Press the button on the interior mirror for
▷ Buttons, arrow 1. 2 seconds and release. Perform this pro‐
▷ LED, arrow 2. cedure three times to complete the pro‐
gramming procedure.
▷ The hand-held transmitter, arrow 3, is re‐
quired for programming. If the integrated universal remote control
remains nonoperational, continue with the
special features for change code wireless
Programming systems.
▷ LED does not flash green after 60 sec‐
General information onds: programming not completed.
The battery of the hand-held transmitter must be Repeat steps 3 to 6.
fully charged at the time of programming to en‐
To program other functions on other buttons, re‐
sure an optimal range of the integrated universal
peat steps 3 to 5.
remote control.
1. Switch on standby state. Special feature of the rolling code
2. Initial setup: wireless system
Press and hold the two outer buttons on the If you are unable to operate the remote-control‐
interior mirror simultaneously for approxi‐ led system after repeated programming, please
mately 10 seconds until the LED flashes check if the system to be controlled features a
green rapidly. This erases all programming of rolling code radio system.
the buttons on the interior mirror. Refer to the owner's manual for the system.
3. Press the interior mirror button to be pro‐ For systems with a rolling code radio system, the
grammed. The LED on the interior mirror will integrated Universal Remote Control and the
slowly begin flashing orange. system also have to be synchronized.
4. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the system Please read the owner's manual to find out how
to be used approx. 1 to 12 in/2.5 to 30 cm to synchronize the system.
away from the buttons on the interior mirror. Synchronizing is easier with the aid of a second
The required distance depends on the hand- person.
held transmitter.
5. Press and hold the button of the desired
function on the hand-held transmitter.
288
Synchronizing the universal remote control with ▷ The LED flashes fast: the hand-held
the system: transmitter was detected but program‐
ming is not complete.
1. Park the vehicle within range of the remote-
controlled system. Press the button on the interior mirror for
2 seconds and release. Perform this pro‐
2. Program the relevant button on the interior
cedure three times to complete the pro‐
mirror as described.
gramming procedure.
3. Locate and press the synchronizing button
If the universal remote control remains
on the system being programmed, e.g. at the
nonoperational, continue with the special
garage gate. You have approx. 30 seconds
features for change code wireless sys‐
for the next step.
tems.
4. Hold down the programmed button on the in‐
▷ LED does not flash green after 60 sec‐
terior mirror for approximately 3 seconds and
onds: programming not completed.
then release it. If necessary, repeat this step
up to three times in order to finish synchroni‐ Repeat steps 3 to 6.
zation. Once synchronization is complete, the If the programming procedure is not completed,
programmed function will be carried out. the previous programming will remain un‐
changed.
Reprogramming individual
buttons Operation
1. Switch on standby state.
2. Press and hold the interior mirror button to be WARNING
programmed. The operation of remote-controlled systems
3. As soon as the LED on the interior mirror with the integrated universal remote control,
flashes orange after approx. 20 seconds, re‐ such as the garage door, may result in pinched
lease the button. body parts. There is a risk of injury or risk of
damage to property. Make sure that the area of
4. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the system
movement of the respective system is clear
to be used approx. 1 to 12 in/2.5 to 30 cm
during programming and operation. Also follow
away from the buttons on the interior mirror.
the safety information of the hand-held trans‐
The required distance depends on the hand-
mitter.
held transmitter.
5. Press and hold the button of the desired The system, such as the garage door, can be op‐
function on the hand-held transmitter. erated using the button on the interior mirror
Canada: if programming with the hand-held while the drive-ready or standby state is
transmitter was interrupted, hold down the in‐ switched on. To do this, hold down the button
terior mirror button and repeatedly press and within receiving range of the system until the
release the hand-held transmitter button for function is activated. The interior mirror LED
2 seconds. stays lit while the wireless signal is being trans‐
6. The LED can light up in different ways. mitted.
▷ The LED lights up green: the program‐
ming procedure is completed. Deleting stored functions
Release the button. All stored functions will be deleted. The func‐
tions cannot be deleted individually.
289
Press and hold the two outer buttons on the in‐

terior mirror simultaneously for approximately
Ashtray
10 seconds until the LED on the interior mirror
flashes green rapidly. Front center console
Opening
Sun visor 1. Press onto the cover.
Glare shield
Fold the sun visor down or up.
Glare shield from the side
Folding out
1. Fold the sun visor down.
2. Unhook it from the holder and swing it to the
2. The ashtray is located in a cup holder. Fold
side.
the ashtray cover upward.
3. Move it back to the desired position.
Folding up
Proceed in the reverse order to close the sun vi‐
sor.
Vanity mirror
A vanity mirror is located in the sun visor behind
a cover. When the cover is opened, the mirror
lighting switches on.
Emptying
1. Pull the ashtray with the closed cover out of
the cup holder.
290
2. Turn the lid counterclockwise to open it. Front center console
3. Empty the container. Press onto the cover.

Always empty the ashtray with the container
open to prevent contamination of the lid.
Cigarette lighter
Safety information
WARNING
Contact with the hot heating element or the hot A cigarette lighter is located between the cup
socket of the cigarette lighter can cause burns. holders in one of the marked positions.
Flammable materials can ignite if the cigarette
lighter falls down or is held against the respec‐
tive objects. There is a risk of fire and injuries.
Rear center console
Take hold of the cigarette lighter by its handle.
Make sure that children do not use the ciga‐
rette lighter and burn themselves.
NOTICE
If metal objects fall into the socket, they can
cause a short circuit. There is a risk of damage
to property. Replace the cigarette lighter or
socket cover again after using the socket. The cigarette lighter is located in the socket.
Operation
Push in the cigarette lighter.
The cigarette lighter can be re‐
moved as soon as it pops back
out.
291
Sockets Front center console
Concept
The lighter socket can be used as a socket for
electrical equipment when standby and drive-
ready state are switched on.
General information
The total load of all sockets must not exceed
140 watts at 12 volts.
Press onto the cover.
Do not damage the socket by using non-com‐
patible connectors.
Safety information
WARNING
Devices and cables in the unfolding area of the
airbags, such as portable navigation devices,
can hinder the unfolding of the airbag or be
thrown around in the car's interior during un‐
A socket is located between the cup holders in
folding. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that
one of the marked positions.
devices and cables are not in the airbag's area
of unfolding. Pull off the cover.
Rear center console

NOTICE
Battery chargers for the vehicle battery can
work with high voltages and currents, which
means that the 12 volt on-board network can
be overloaded or damaged. There is a risk of
damage to property. Only connect battery
chargers for the vehicle battery to the starting
aid terminals in the engine compartment.
A socket is located in the center console.

NOTICE
Pull off the cover.
If metal objects fall into the socket, they can
cause a short circuit. There is a risk of damage
to property. Replace the cigarette lighter or
socket cover again after using the socket.
292
In the cargo area In the center console
NOTICE
Objects in the storage compartment, e.g., large
USB connectors, may block or damage the
cover when it is being opened or closed. There
is a risk of damage to property. Make sure that
the area of movement of the cover is clear
while opening and closing it.
A socket is located on the right side in the cargo

area. Unfold the cover.
USB interface
General information
Follow the information regarding the connection
of mobile devices to the USB interface in the
Press onto the cover.
section on USB connections, refer to page 71.
In the center armrest
A USB interface is located in the center console.
A USB interface is located in the center armrest.

Properties:
▷ USB port Type C.
▷ For charging mobile devices and for data
transfer.
▷ Charge current: max. 3 A.
If the vehicle is equipped with thermo-cup hold‐

ers, a USB interface is located in the center con‐
sole.
293
Properties: Installing special accessories

▷ USB port Type A. 1. Slide the cover to the side.
▷ For charging mobile devices and for data
transfer.
▷ Charge current: max. 1.5 A.
BMW Travel & Comfort

System
General information
2. Install the special accessories, refer to Instal‐
USB interfaces and fixtures for attaching special lation Instructions.
accessories, for instance coat hangers, are lo‐
cated on the backrests of the front seats.
Features of the USB interfaces:
▷ USB port Type C.
▷ For charging of mobile devices.
▷ Charge current: max. 3 A.
Further information is available from a dealer’s
or repair shop.
Overview
The fixtures are located behind the marked cov‐

ers.
294
Storage compartments CONTROLS
Storage compartments
options
WARNING
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ Loose objects or devices with a cable connec‐
cific and optional features offered with the series. tion to the vehicle, for instance mobile phones,
It also describes features and functions that are can be thrown into the car's interior while driv‐
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due ing, for instance in the event of an accident or
to the selected options or country versions. This during braking and evasive maneuvers. There is
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ a risk of injury. Secure loose objects or devices
tems. When using these functions and systems, with a cable connection to the vehicle in the
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ car's interior.
served.
NOTICE
Anti-slip pads such as anti-slip mats can dam‐
age the dashboard. There is a risk of damage to
General information property. Do not use anti-slip pads.
The following storage compartments are availa‐
ble in the car's interior:
▷ Glove compartment on the front passenger
side, refer to page 295.
Front passenger side glove
▷ Glove compartment on the driver's side, refer compartment
to page 296.
▷ Compartments in the doors, refer to Safety information
page 296.
▷ Storage compartment in the center console, WARNING
refer to page 297. Folded open, the glove compartment protrudes
▷ Center armrest, refer to page 297. in the car's interior. Objects in the glove com‐
▷ Storage compartment in the rear center con‐ partment can be thrown into the car's interior
sole, refer to page 297. while driving, for instance in the event of an ac‐
cident or during braking and evasive maneu‐
▷ Pockets on the backrests of the front seats.
vers. There is a risk of injury. Always close the
▷ Storage compartment in the center armrest glove compartment immediately after using it.
in the rear seat, refer to page 297.
295
CONTROLS Storage compartments
Opening Opening
Pull the handle. Pull the handle.

The light in the glove compartment switches on.
Closing
Closing Fold cover closed.
Fold cover closed.
Locking Compartments in the doors

The glove compartment can be locked with an
integrated key. This prevents access to the glove General information
compartment. There are storage compartments in the doors.
After the glove compartment is locked, the re‐
mote control can be handed over without the Safety information
integrated key, for instance when the vehicle is
parked by valet parking.
WARNING
Breakable objects, such as glass bottles or
Driver's side glove glasses, can break in the event of an accident
or a braking or evasive maneuver. Broken glass
compartment can be scattered in the car's interior. There is a
risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Do
Safety information not use any breakable objects while driving.
Only stow breakable objects in closed storage
compartments.
WARNING
Folded open, the glove compartment protrudes
in the car's interior. Objects in the glove com‐
partment can be thrown into the car's interior
while driving, for instance in the event of an ac‐
cident or during braking and evasive maneu‐
vers. There is a risk of injury. Always close the
glove compartment immediately after using it.
296
Storage compartment in Opening

the center console
Opening
Press the button.
Closing
Press onto the cover. Press cover down until it engages.
Closing Rear center armrest

Pull the cover on the handle bar back.
General information
Storage compartment in A storage compartment is located in the center
armrest between the seats.
the rear center console
Folding down
The back of the center console contains one or
two storage compartments.
Center armrest, front

General information
A storage compartment is located in the center
armrest between the seats.
Fold the center armrest forward.
297
Opening Opening
Press the button, arrow 1, and fold the cover up, Press onto the cover.
arrow 2.
Closing
Press cover down until it engages.
Front cup holder

Safety information
Two cup holders are located in the center con‐
sole.
WARNING
Unsuitable containers in the cup holder may
damage the cup holders or thrown into the Closing
car's interior, such as in the event of an acci‐ Pull the cover on the handle bar back.
dent, braking or evasive maneuver. Spilled liq‐
uids can distract from the traffic conditions and Maintaining the drink
lead to an accident. Hot drinks can damage the
temperature
cup holder or lead to scalding. There is a risk of
injury or risk of damage to property. Do not
General information
force objects into the cup holder. Use light-
weight, unbreakable, and sealable containers. When equipped with thermo-cup holder, drinks
Do not transport hot beverages. can be kept cool or warm.
Safety information
WARNING
Contact with the hot metal insert of the
thermo-cup holder can cause burn injuries.
There is a risk of injury. Do not touch the metal
insert when the thermo-cup holder is switched
on.
298
weight, unbreakable, and sealable containers.

NOTICE Do not transport hot beverages.
When the thermo-cup holder is switched on
and the cover is closed, the thermo-cup holder
can overheat. There is a risk of damage to NOTICE
property. Switch the thermo-cup holder off be‐ With an open cup holder, the center armrest
fore closing the cover. cannot be folded back up. There is a risk of
damage to property. Press back the covers be‐
fore the center armrest is folded up.
NOTICE
Temperature sensitive items may be damaged
by the hot metal insert of the thermo-cup
Second row of seats
holder. There is a risk of damage to property.
Use suitable containers only. General information
The cup holder can be adjusted for three differ‐
ent container sizes.
Switching on
Press the button for keeping cool or Opening
warm once each.
▷ Blue LED lights up: keep drinks cool.

▷ Red LED lights up: keep drinks warm.
Switching off
LEDs go out.
Fold the center armrest forward.

Rear cup holder Press the button and fold out the cup holder
fully.
Safety information
Reducing the size
WARNING To make it smaller, the cup holder can be folded
in in 2 steps.
Unsuitable containers in the cup holder may
damage the cup holders or thrown into the
Enlarging
car's interior, such as in the event of an acci‐
dent, braking or evasive maneuver. Spilled liq‐ To make a smaller cup holder bigger, first fold it
uids can distract from the traffic conditions and in completely. Then fold the cup holder out again
lead to an accident. Hot drinks can damage the fully.
cup holder or lead to scalding. There is a risk of
injury or risk of damage to property. Do not Closing
force objects into the cup holder. Use light- Fold in the cup holder fully, until it engages.
299
Third row of seats
Overview
The cup holders are located between the seats

of the third row of seats.
Clothes hooks
Safety information
WARNING
Clothing articles on the clothes hooks can ob‐
struct the view while driving. There is a risk of
an accident. When suspending clothing articles
from the clothes hooks, ensure that they will
not obstruct the driver's view.
WARNING
Improper use of the clothes hooks can lead to a
risk of objects flying about during braking and
evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of injury and
risk of damage to property. Only hang light‐
weight objects, for instance clothing articles,
from the clothes hooks.
General information
The clothes hooks are located in the grab han‐
dles in the rear.
300
Cargo area CONTROLS
Cargo area
Vehicle features and
WARNING
options Improperly stowed objects can shift and be
thrown into the car's interior, for instance in the
event of an accident or during braking and eva‐
sive maneuvers. Vehicle occupants can be hit
and injured. There is a risk of injury. Stow and
secure objects and cargo properly.
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ NOTICE
served. Fluids in the cargo area can cause damage.
There is a risk of damage to property. Make
sure that no fluids leak in the cargo area.
Loading
Safety information Steps for Determining Correct
Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight
WARNING
of occupants and cargo should never exceed
High gross weight can overheat the tires, dam‐ XXX kg or XXX lbs” on your vehicle’s placard.
age them internally and cause a sudden drop in
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver
tire inflation pressure. Driving characteristics
and passengers that will be riding in your ve‐
may be negatively impacted, reducing lane sta‐
hicle.
bility, lengthening the braking distances and
changing the steering response. There is a risk 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
of an accident. Pay attention to the permitted and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs
load capacity of the tires and never exceed the 4. The resulting figure equals the available
permitted gross weight. amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the “XXX” amount equals
1,400 lbs and there will be five 150 lbs pas‐
WARNING sengers in your vehicle, the amount of availa‐
ble cargo and luggage load capacity is
Loose objects or devices with a cable connec‐
650 lbs (1,400–750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs)
tion to the vehicle, for instance mobile phones,
can be thrown into the car's interior while driv‐ 5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
ing, for instance in the event of an accident or and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That
during braking and evasive maneuvers. There is weight may not safely exceed the available
a risk of injury. Secure loose objects or devices cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in
with a cable connection to the vehicle in the Step 4.
car's interior. 6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load
from your trailer will be transferred to your ve‐
301
CONTROLS Cargo area
hicle. Consult this manual to determine how

this reduces the available cargo and luggage
Lashing eyes in the cargo
load capacity of your vehicle. area
Load General information
Attach load securing aids, such as lashing straps,
tensioning straps, draw straps or cargo nets, to
the lashing eyes in the cargo area.
Lashing eyes
The maximum load is the sum of the weight of

the occupants and the cargo.
The greater the weight of the occupants, the
less cargo that can be transported.
Stowing and securing cargo There are four lashing eyes in the cargo area for
securing cargo.
▷ Cover sharp edges and corners on the cargo.
The front lashing eyes are located under covers.
▷ Heavy cargo: stow as far forward as possible,
directly behind and at the bottom of the rear
passenger seat backrests.
▷ Very heavy cargo: stow as far forward as pos‐
Anti-slip rails
sible, directly behind and at the bottom of the
rear passenger seat backrests. When the rear Concept
seat is not occupied, secure each of the outer
safety belts in the opposite buckle.
▷ If necessary, fold down the rear backrests to
stow large cargo.
▷ Do not stack cargo above the top edge of the
backrests.
▷ Use the cargo area partition net to protect oc‐
cupants. Make sure that objects cannot pen‐
etrate the cargo area partition net.
▷ Smaller and lighter cargo: secure with ratchet The system prevents slipping of the cargo in the
straps or with a cargo net or draw straps. cargo area.
▷ Larger and heavy cargo: secure with cargo
straps. General information
Observe information and notes on loading, refer
to page 301.
302
Cargo area CONTROLS
The system will be activated automatically when

one of the following conditions is met:
Net
▷ Tailgate is closed. Smaller objects can be stowed in the net on the
▷ Inclination of the vehicle by more than ap‐ left or right side.
proximately 13 %.
Left side storage

Multi-function hook compartment
General information General information
A multi-function hook is located on the left and
A storage compartment is located on the left
right side in the cargo area.
side in the cargo area.
Safety information Opening
WARNING
Improper use of the multi-function hooks can
lead to a risk of objects flying about during
braking and evasive maneuvers, for example.
There is a risk of injury and risk of damage to
property. Only hang lightweight objects,
such as shopping bags, from the multi-function
hooks. Only transport heavy luggage in the
cargo area if it has been appropriately secured.
Press the button, arrow 1, and open the cover,
arrow 2.
Folding down
under the cargo floor panel
General information
There are storage compartments beneath the
cargo floor panel.
Press on the multi-function hook and turn until it

engages.
303
CONTROLS Cargo area
Opening Safety information
WARNING
Danger of jamming with folding down the back‐
rests. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage
ment of the rear backrest and the of the head
restraint is clear prior to folding down.
Fold up the cargo floor panel. WARNING

If a rear seat backrest is not locked, unsecured
Closing cargo can be thrown about the car’s interior;
Push the cargo floor panel downward. for instance, in the event of an accident, braking
or an evasive maneuver. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that the rear seat backrest is locked
Cargo net, FlexNet after folding it back.
To secure the cargo, refer to page 301, the flexi‐

ble cargo net can also be used. WARNING
The stability of the child restraint system is lim‐
ited or compromised with incorrect seat adjust‐
Enlarging the cargo area ment or improper installation of the child seat.
There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Make
Concept sure that the child restraint system fits securely
against the backrest. If possible, adjust the
The cargo area can be enlarged by folding down
backrest tilt for all affected backrests and cor‐
the rear seat backrest.
rectly adjust the seats. Make sure that seats
and backrests are securely engaged or locked.
General information If possible, adjust the height of the head re‐
The rear seat backrest of the second seat row is straints or remove them.
divided at a ratio of 40–20–40. The side rear seat
backrests and the center section can be folded
down separately.
WARNING
The rear seat backrests can be folded down from
Once the rear seat backrest has been folded
the rear or from the cargo area.
down, the locking bracket protrudes into the
Depending on the equipment version, the rear car's interior. There is a risk of damage to prop‐
seat backrests can be folded down either man‐ erty. When the rear seat backrest is folded
ually or electrically. down, pay attention to the protruding locking
bracket and keep this area unobstructed.
304
Cargo area CONTROLS
Folding back the backrest

NOTICE Return the rear seat backrest to the upright seat‐
Vehicle parts can be damaged when folding ing position and engage it. The red marking be‐
down the rear backrest. There is a risk of dam‐ hind the lever disappears completely.
age to property. Make sure that the area of
movement of the rear backrest including head Electric reclining of the backrest
restraint is clear when folding down.
From the rear
Manual reclining of the backrest
From the rear
Pull the switch. The rear seat backrest folds for‐

ward.
Pull the lever and fold the rear seat backrest for‐ From the cargo area
ward.
From the cargo area
Press the switch in the cargo area.

▷ Upper switch: the left and center rear seat
backrests fold forward.
Pull the lever inside the cargo area. ▷ Lower switch: the right rear seat backrest
folds forward.
▷ Left lever: the left and center rear seat back‐
rests fold forward.
▷ Right lever: the right rear seat backrest folds Folding back the backrest
forward. Pull the corresponding switch. The rear seat
backrest sets itself upright.
305
CONTROLS Cargo area
Fold down the center section Closing
Fold down the center armrest and pull on the Pull out the cargo cover, arrow 1, and hook both
strap. sides into the brackets, arrow 2.
Removing
Cargo cover The cover can be removed to load bulky lug‐
gage.
Safety information
WARNING
can be thrown into the car's interior while driv‐
ing, for instance in the event of an accident or
during braking and evasive maneuvers. There is
a risk of injury. Secure loose objects or devices
with a cable connection to the vehicle in the Press the release button, arrow 1, and pull the
car's interior. cargo cover out toward the rear, arrow 2.
Installing
WARNING
Slide the cover forward horizontally into the two
A cargo cover that snaps back quickly can jam side brackets. Make sure that the cover audibly
body parts or cause damage. There is a risk of engages on both sides.
injury or risk of damage to property. Do not let
the cargo cover snap back into place.
Stowing
General information
NOTICE
The cargo cover can be stowed in the storage
A cargo cover hooked in incorrectly can cause compartment under the cargo floor panel.
damage. There is a risk of damage to property.
Hook the cargo cover on both sides.
306
Cargo area CONTROLS
Without third seat row Electric cargo cover

1. Open the left side storage compartment, re‐
fer to page 303.
General information
2. Fold up the cargo floor panel.
The electric cargo cover opens and closes auto‐
3. Turn the cargo cover forward with the handle. matically with the tailgate. The cargo cover can
4. Stow the cargo cover on the left and lower it be lowered below the cargo floor panel to stow
on the right side. bulky items or luggage.
Items in the range of movement are detected.
The cargo cover stops automatically to prevent
damage.
Safety information
WARNING
5. Push the cargo floor down and close the stor‐
can be thrown into the car's interior while driv‐
age compartment on the left side.
ing, for instance in the event of an accident or
during braking and evasive maneuvers. There is
With third seat row a risk of injury. Secure loose objects or devices
1. Open the left side storage compartment, re‐ with a cable connection to the vehicle in the
fer to page 303. car's interior.
3. Stow the cargo cover on the left and lower it
on the right side. WARNING
Pinching of body parts may occur during opera‐
tion of the electric cargo cover. Items in the
range of movement may damage the cargo
cover. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage
ment of the electric cargo cover is clear during
opening and closing. In addition, make sure that
the area of movement of the cover in the cargo
floor is clear during lowering.
4. Push the cargo floor down and close the stor‐

age compartment on the left side.
NOTICE
Items on the storage shelf may damage it.
deposit any objects on the cargo cover.
307
CONTROLS Cargo area
Opening and closing the cargo

NOTICE cover
The manual operation of the electric cargo
cover by hand may damage the cover. There is Opening
a risk of damage to property. Use the buttons in When the tailgate is opened, the cargo cover is
the cargo area for operation. opened up to the automatic position.
To open the cargo cover completely up to the
Overview base position:
Press the button.
Closing
Press the button.
The cargo cover will be closed up to the auto‐

matic position.
When the tailgate is closed, the cargo cover will
be closed completely.
The cargo cover will not be closed automatically
The buttons of the cargo cover are located in the
when it is in the base position while the tailgate is
cargo area.
closing.
Opening/closing the cargo cover between
automatic and base position. Lowering the cargo cover
The cargo cover can be lowered to stow bulky
Lowering/raising the cargo cover. luggage.
Press the button.
Positions of the cargo cover
The cargo cover is lowered below the cargo floor
panel.
Raising the cargo cover

Press the button.
The cargo cover is raised to the base position.

Or:
Press the button.
▷ Automatic position, arrow 1.
▷ Base position, arrow 2. The cargo cover is raised to the base position
and closes up to the automatic position.
308
Cargo area CONTROLS
If the closing force exceeds a certain value when
closing the cargo cover, for example due to items
in the range of motion, the cover will disengage
from the mounting. The cargo cover stops in the
guide rail.
To restore the functionality, close the cargo

cover by hand, arrow 1, until it engages in the
mounting, arrow 2.
Excessive or insufficient ambient temperatures

may lead to the deactivation of the power cargo
cover. When the temperature is within normal
range again, such as by switching on the air con‐
ditioner, the function will be restored.
Initializing
General information
The function will be deactivated when the sys‐
tem can no longer detect the position of the
cargo cover. An initialization is required.
Initializing the system

Press and hold the button until the initiali‐
zation is finished.
The cargo cover moves to the respective end

position. The initialization is finished when a sig‐
nal sounds.
If the button is released prematurely, the cargo
cover will stop. The initialization is terminated.
Press and hold the button to restart the initializa‐
tion.
309
310
DRIVING TIPS
Things to remember when driving ........................................................ 312
Trailer towing ........................................................................................... 317
Saving fuel ................................................................................................ 321
311
DRIVING TIPS Things to remember when driving
Things to remember when driving

Vehicle features and Engine, transmission, and axle
drive
options
Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km
cific and optional features offered with the series. Do not exceed the maximum engine and road
It also describes features and functions that are speed:
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due ▷ For gasoline engine 4,500 rpm and
to the selected options or country versions. This 100 mph/160 km/h.
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ Avoid full load or kickdown under all circumstan‐
tems. When using these functions and systems, ces.
served.
From 1,200 miles/2,000 km
The engine and vehicle speed can gradually be
Breaking-in period increased.
Tires
General information
Tire traction is not optimal due to manufacturing
Moving parts need to begin working together
circumstances when tires are brand-new; they
smoothly.
achieve their full traction potential after a break-in
The following instructions will help you to ach‐ time.
ieve a long vehicle life and good efficiency.
Drive conservatively for the first
During break-in, do not use the Launch Control, 200 miles/300 km.
refer to page 147.
Brake system
Safety information Brake discs and brake pads only reach their full
effectiveness after approx. 300 miles/500 km.
WARNING Drive moderately during this break-in period.
Due to new parts and components, safety and
driver assistance systems can react with a de‐ Following part replacement
lay. There is a risk of an accident. After instal‐ Observe the break-in procedures again, if com‐
ling new parts or with a new vehicle, drive con‐ ponents mentioned above are replaced.
servatively and intervene early if necessary.
Observe the break-in procedures of the re‐
spective parts and components. Driving on poor roads
Concept
Because of its greater ground clearance, the ve‐
hicle can be driven on a variety of road types and
qualities.
312
Things to remember when driving DRIVING TIPS
All-wheel drive can help improve forward mo‐

mentum.
General driving notes
Safety information Closing the tailgate
Safety information
NOTICE
Objects in unpaved areas, for instance stones
WARNING
or branches, can damage the vehicle. There is
a risk of damage to property. Do not drive on An open tailgate protrudes from the vehicle and
unpaved terrain. can endanger occupants and other traffic par‐
ticipants or damage the vehicle in the event of
an accident, braking or evasive maneuvers. In
When driving on poor roads addition, exhaust fumes may enter the car's in‐
terior. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage
For your own safety, for the safety of passengers
to property. Do not drive with the tailgate open.
and of the vehicle, heed the following points:
▷ Familiarize yourself with the vehicle before
driving. Driving with the tailgate open
▷ Do not take risks when driving. If driving with the tailgate open cannot be
▷ Adjust the speed to the road surface condi‐ avoided:
tions. The steeper and more uneven the road ▷ Close all windows and the glass sunroof.
surface, the slower the speed should be.
▷ Greatly increase the air flow from the vents.
▷ When driving on steep uphill or downhill
▷ Drive moderately.
grades: add engine oil and coolant up to near
the MAX mark.
Hot exhaust gas system
▷ On steep downhill grades, use Hill Descent
Control HDC.
WARNING
▷ Avoid that the chassis bottom coming in con‐
tact with the ground. During driving operation, high temperatures can
occur underneath the vehicle body, for instance
The ground clearance is no more than 7.8 in‐
caused by the exhaust gas system. If combusti‐
ches/20 cm and can vary according to the ve‐
ble materials, such as leaves or grass, come in
hicle's load.
contact with hot parts of the exhaust gas sys‐
▷ When wheels continue to spin, depress the tem, these materials can ignite. There is a risk
accelerator so that driving stability control of injury or risk of damage to property. Do not
systems can distribute the driving force to the remove the heat shields installed and never ap‐
wheels. Activate DTC Dynamic Traction Con‐ ply undercoating to them. Make sure that no
trol if available. combustible materials can come in contact with
hot vehicle parts in driving operation, idle or
After a trip on poor roads during parking. Do not touch the hot exhaust
After a trip on poor roads, check wheels and tires gas system.
for damage to maintain driving safety. Clear
heavy soiling from the body.
313
Mobile communication devices mum indicated water level and the maximum
in the vehicle speed for driving through water.
WARNING Braking safely

Vehicle electronics and mobile phones can in‐
fluence one another. There is radiation due to General information
the transmission operations of mobile phones. The vehicle is equipped with the Antilock Brake
There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to System ABS as a standard feature.
property. If possible, in the car's interior use
Perform an emergency stop in situations that re‐
only mobile phones with direct connections to
quire such.
an exterior antenna in order to exclude mutual
interference and deflect the radiation from the Steering is still responsive. You can still avoid any
car's interior. obstacles with a minimum of steering effort.
Pulsation of the brake pedal and sounds from the
hydraulic circuits indicate that the Antilock Brake
Hydroplaning System ABS is in its active mode.
On wet or slushy roads, a wedge of water can In certain braking situations, the perforated brake
form between the tires and road surface. discs can emit functional noises. However, func‐
This phenomenon is referred to as hydroplaning. tional noises have no effect on the performance
It is characterized by a partial or complete loss of and operational reliability of the brake.
contact between the tires and the road surface,
ultimately undermining your ability to steer and Objects in the area around the
brake the vehicle. pedals
Driving through water WARNING

Objects in the driver's floor area can limit the
General information pedal distance or block a depressed pedal.
When driving through water, follow the following: There is a risk of an accident. Stow objects in
▷ Drive through calm water only. the vehicle such that they are secured and can‐
▷ Drive through water only if it is not deeper not enter into the driver's floor area. Use floor
than maximum 19.6 inches/50 cm. mats that are suitable for the vehicle and can
be safely attached to the floor. Do not use
▷ Drive through water no faster than walking loose floor mats and do not layer several floor
speed, up to 3 mph/5 km/h. mats. Make sure that there is sufficient clear‐
ance for the pedals. Ensure that the floor mats
Safety information are securely fastened again after they were re‐
moved, for instance for cleaning.
NOTICE
When driving too quickly through too deep wa‐ Driving in wet conditions
ter, water can enter into the engine compart‐
When roads are wet, salted, or in heavy rain, gen‐
ment, the electrical system or the transmission.
tly press the brake pedal every few miles.
There is a risk of damage to property. When
driving through water, do not exceed the maxi‐ Ensure that this action does not endanger other
traffic.
314
Things to remember when driving DRIVING TIPS
The heat generated during braking dries brake ▷ Infrequent use of the brakes.
discs and brake pads and protects them against ▷ Aggressive, acidic, or alkaline cleaning
corrosion. agents.
In this way braking efficiency will be available Corrosion buildup on the brake discs will cause a
when you need it. pulsating effect on the brakes in their response -
generally this cannot be corrected.
Hills
Condensation water under the
General information
parked vehicle
Drive long or steep downhill gradients in the gear
When using the automatic climate control, con‐
that requires least braking effort. Otherwise, the
densation water develops and collects under‐
brakes may overheat and reduce brake effi‐
neath the vehicle.
ciency.
You can increase the engine's braking effect by
shifting down, going all the way to first gear, if Roof-mounted luggage
needed.
rack
Safety information
General information
WARNING Installation only possible with roof rack.
Light but consistent brake pressure can lead to Roof racks are available as special accessories.
high temperatures, brakes wearing out and
possibly even brake failure. There is a risk of an Mounting
accident. Avoid placing excessive stress on the Follow the installation instructions of the roof
brake system. rack.
Be sure that adequate clearance is maintained
for tilting and opening the glass sunroof.
WARNING
In idle state or with the engine switched off, Loading
safety-relevant functions, for instance engine
Because roof-mounted luggage racks raise the
braking effect, braking force boost and steering
vehicle's center of gravity when loaded, they
assistance, are restricted or not available at all.
have a major effect on vehicle handling and
There is a risk of an accident. Do not drive in
steering response.
idle state or with the engine switched off.
Therefore, note the following when loading and
driving:
Brake disc corrosion ▷ Do not exceed the approved roof/axle loads
Corrosion on the brake discs and contamination and the approved gross vehicle weight.
on the brake pads are increased by the following ▷ Be sure that adequate clearance is main‐
circumstances: tained for tilting and opening the glass sun‐
▷ Low mileage. roof.
▷ Extended periods when the vehicle is not ▷ Distribute the roof load uniformly.
used at all.
315
▷ The roof load should not extend past the

loading area.
▷ Always place the heaviest pieces on the bot‐
tom.
▷ Secure the roof luggage firmly, for instance
using ratchet straps.
▷ Do not let objects project into the opening
path of the tailgate.
▷ Drive cautiously and avoid sudden accelera‐
tion and braking maneuvers. Take corners
gently.
Driving on racetracks
Higher mechanical and thermal loads during
racetrack operation lead to increased wear. This
wear is not covered by the warranty. The vehicle
is not designed for use in motor sports competi‐
tion.
316
Trailer towing DRIVING TIPS
Trailer towing
Vehicle features and Loading
options Distribute cargo as evenly as possible on the
cargo area.
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ Stow the load as low and close to the trailer axle
cific and optional features offered with the series. as possible. A low center of gravity in the trailer
It also describes features and functions that are increases the driving safety of the entire vehicle-
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due trailer combination.
to the selected options or country versions. This Do not exceed the approved gross vehicle
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ weight of the trailer and the permissible trailer
tems. When using these functions and systems, load of the vehicle. The smaller value applies in
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ each case.
served.
Tire inflation pressure
General information Note the tire inflation pressure of the vehicle and
trailer.
The permissible trailer loads, axle loads, drawbar For the vehicle, the tire inflation pressure for
node weights, and the permissible gross vehicle higher loads applies.
weight are specified in the technical data. Information regarding the tire inflation pressure,
The vehicle is equipped with an enhanced sus‐ refer to page 332.
pension system on the rear axle and, depending For the trailer, the specifications of the manufac‐
on the vehicle type, with a more powerful cooling turer apply.
system.
When the trailer power socket is in use, the vehi‐ Flat Tire Monitor FTM
cle will be raised or lowered to the normal level After correcting the tire inflation pressure or
automatically. The adjustment to the normal level hitching/unhitching a trailer, initialize the Flat Tire
can occur when the trailer power socket is plug‐ Monitor, refer to page 355.
ged in or when driving off.
Before driving After correcting the tire inflation pressure or
hitching/unhitching a trailer, reset the Tire Pres‐
sure Monitor, refer to page 348.
Drawbar nose weight
The maximum load of the tractor is lowered by Exterior mirrors
the weight of the trailer hitch and the drawbar
Exterior mirrors, which allow the driver to see
nose weight. The drawbar nose weight increases
both rear corners of the trailer, are available as
the vehicle weight. Do not exceed the approved
special accessories from a dealer’s service cen‐
gross vehicle weight of the towing vehicle.
ter or another qualified service center or repair
shop.
317
DRIVING TIPS Trailer towing
Power consumption Adapt your speed when driving with a trailer.

Immediately brake in the case of swinging. Ap‐
General information ply necessary steering corrections as carefully
as possible.
Before starting to drive, check the function of the
trailer tail lights.
Keep the activation times of the electronic sys‐
WARNING
tems/power consumers short when towing a
camper to save the vehicle battery power. The tire inflation pressure must be adjusted to
the increased axle load in trailer towing. Driving
Trailer tail lights with too low tire inflation pressure can damage
the tires. There is a risk of accidents or risk of
▷ Turn signals/brake lights: 54 watts per side.
damage to property. Do not exceed a speed
▷ Rear lights: 100 watts in total. of 60 mph / 100 km/h. Increase the tire inflation
▷ Backup light: 54 watts in total. pressure of the towing vehicle by 0.2 bar. Note
the maximum possible tire inflation pressure in‐
dicated on the tire.
Towing a trailer
Uphill grades
General information
If the trailer socket is in use, some driver assis‐ General information
tance systems are unavailable, or available to a
In the interest of safety and to avoid hindering
limited extent. A Check Control message is dis‐
the smooth flow of traffic, the towing of trailers is
played where applicable.
permissible on uphill grades up to 12 %.
When driving with a trailer or load carrier and the
If higher trailer loads are approved at a later point
trailer socket not in use, some driver assistance
in time, the gradient limit is 8 %.
systems may have functional limitations or may
malfunction.
Starting on uphill grades
To prevent malfunctions, activate trailer towing,
The parking brake is Automatically released
refer to page 319.
when the accelerator pedal is activated.
When the trailer socket is in use or trailer towing
In order to prevent rolling back during starting,
is activated, some driver assistance systems are
use the parking brake.
unavailable, or available to a limited extent. A
Check Control message is displayed where ap‐
plicable. 1. Pull and release switch before starting
off.
Safety information The parking brake is set.
2. Accelerated enough to start off.
WARNING
Depending on the design and loading of trail‐ Hills
ers, they may begin swinging at speeds ex‐ A vehicle-trailer combination has the tendency to
ceeding approx. 50 mph/80 km/h. There is a swing more readily on hills.
risk of accidents or risk of damage to property. Manually shift down to the next lower gear be‐
fore driving on a hill and drive downhill slowly.
318
Trailer towing DRIVING TIPS
Trailer stabilization control Activating

Via iDrive:
Concept 1. "CAR"
This system supports the driver in stopping the 2. "Settings"
swinging of a trailer. 3. "General settings"
The trailer stabilization control detects swinging 4. "Trailer mode"
and automatically brakes the vehicle quickly to
leave the critical speed range and stabilize the 5. Activate trailer towing.
vehicle-trailer combination.
General information
Mount for trailer hitch
If the trailer power socket is in use but a trailer
has not been hitched, the system can become General information
active in certain driving situations, such as when
using a bicycle rack with lighting.
The system is functional at speeds beginning at
approx. 40 mph/65 km/h while a trailer is being
towed and the trailer power socket is in use.
System limits
The mount for the trailer hitch is located on the
The system cannot intervene or not intervene in
rear of the vehicle.
time in the following situations, for instance:
Information on suitable trailer hitches is found on
▷ If a trailer jackknifes suddenly, for instance on
the underside of the mount, see arrow.
slippery roads or loose surfaces.
Follow the Maintenance Instructions, refer to
▷ If a trailer with a high center of gravity tilts, be‐
page 390.
fore swinging is detected.
▷ If DSC Dynamic Stability Control is deacti‐
vated or has malfunctioned. Safety information
WARNING
Activating trailer towing
During driving operation, high temperatures can
occur underneath the vehicle body, for instance
Concept caused by the exhaust gas system. Contact
When driving with a trailer or load carrier and the with the hot components can cause burns.
trailer socket not in use, some driver assistance There is a risk of injury. Do not touch hot com‐
systems may have functional limitations or may ponents. Do not perform work in the vicinity of
malfunction. To prevent malfunctions, activate hot components until after they have cooled
trailer towing. down.
319
DRIVING TIPS Trailer towing
Removing the cover Ensure that the trailer safety chain can move
freely and is not dragging on the ground.
Brake Controller
The vehicle manufacturer recommends that you
have a Brake Controller installed by a dealer’s
or repair shop.
Information on installing a Brake Controller can
Pull the cover out of the back of the mount, and be obtained from a dealer’s service center or an‐
stow it in the vehicle. other qualified service center or repair shop.
Trailer connector
The socket is located to the left of the mount for

the trailer hitch.
Fittings for trailer safety chain
There are two fittings on the mount for the trailer

hitch for securing the trailer safety chain.
Secure the trailer safety chain to the fittings for

increased safety when driving with a trailer.
320
Saving fuel DRIVING TIPS
Saving fuel
Vehicle features and Close the windows and glass
sunroof
options
Driving with the glass sunroof and windows open
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ results in increased air resistance and raises fuel
cific and optional features offered with the series. consumption.
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due Tires
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ General information
tems. When using these functions and systems, Tires can affect consumption in various ways, for
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ instance tire size may influence consumption.
served.
Check the tire inflation pressure
regularly
Reducing fuel consumption
Check and, if needed, correct the tire inflation
pressure at least twice a month and before start‐
General information ing on a long trip.
The vehicle contains advanced technologies for Low tire inflation pressure increases rolling re‐
the reduction of consumption and emission val‐ sistance and thus raises fuel consumption and
ues. tire wear.
Fuel consumption depends on a number of dif‐
ferent factors. Drive away without delay
Carrying out certain measures, such as a moder‐ Do not wait for the engine to warm-up while the
ate driving style and regular maintenance, can in‐ vehicle remains stationary. Start driving right
fluence fuel consumption and the environmental away, but at moderate engine speeds.
impact.
This is the quickest way of warming the cold en‐
gine up to operating temperature.
Remove unnecessary cargo
Additional weight increases fuel consumption. Look well ahead when driving
Driving smoothly and proactively reduces fuel
Remove attached parts following consumption.
use Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking.
Remove auxiliary mirrors, roof-mounted or rear By maintaining a suitable distance to the vehicle
luggage racks which are no longer required fol‐ driving ahead of you.
lowing use.
Attached parts on the vehicle impair the aerody‐ Avoid high engine speeds
namics and increase the fuel consumption.
Driving at low engine speeds lowers fuel con‐
sumption and reduces wear.
321
DRIVING TIPS Saving fuel
If necessary, observe the vehicle's gear shift indi‐ Have maintenance carried out
cator, refer to page 160.
Have the vehicle maintained regularly to achieve
optimal vehicle efficiency and service life. BMW
Use coasting conditions recommends that maintenance work be per‐
When approaching a red light, take your foot off formed by a BMW dealer’s service center.
the accelerator and let the vehicle coast to a halt. For information on the BMW Maintenance Sys‐
For going downhill take your foot off the acceler‐ tem, refer to page 374.
ator and let the vehicle roll.
The flow of fuel is interrupted while coasting.
ECO PRO
Switch off the engine during
longer stops Concept
ECO PRO supports a driving style that saves on
Switching off the engine consumption. For this purpose, the engine con‐
Switch off the engine during longer stops, for in‐ trol and comfort features, for instance the climate
stance at traffic lights, railroad crossings or in control output, are adjusted.
traffic congestion. Under certain conditions the engine is automati‐
cally decoupled from the transmission in the D
Auto Start/Stop function selector lever position. The vehicle continues
The Auto Start/Stop function of the vehicle auto‐ traveling with the engine idling to reduce con‐
matically switches off the engine during a stop. sumption. The D selector lever position remains
engaged.
If the engine is switched off and then restarted
rather than leaving the engine running con‐ In addition, context-sensitive information, ECO
stantly, fuel consumption and emissions are re‐ PRO tips, are displayed to assist with an efficient
duced. Savings can begin within a few seconds driving style.
of switching off the engine. The achieved extended range is displayed in the
In addition, fuel consumption is also determined instrument cluster as bonus range.
by other factors, such as driving style, road con‐
ditions, maintenance or environmental factors. General information
The system includes the following
Switch off any functions that are EfficientDynamics functions and
not currently needed EfficientDynamics displays:
Functions such as seat heating and the rear win‐ ▷ ECO PRO bonus range, refer to page 324.
dow defroster require a lot of energy and in‐ ▷ ECO PRO climate control, refer to page 323.
crease fuel consumption, especially in city and ▷ Coasting driving condition, refer to page 325.
stop-and-go traffic.
▷ Driving style analysis, refer to page 326.
Switch off these functions if they are not needed.
The ECO PRO driving mode supports the en‐
ergy conserving use of comfort features. These
functions are automatically deactivated partially
or completely.
322
Overview ▷ "ECO PRO climate control"

▷ "ECO PRO light and sight"
▷ "Damping"
▷ "Steering"
▷ "Reset to ECO PRO STANDARD"
Settings are stored for the driver profile currently
used.
ECO PRO limit

▷ Activate the ECO PRO limit:
Button
"ECO PRO speed"
An ECO PRO tip is displayed if the speed of
Activating ECO PRO the set ECO PRO limit is exceeded.
Press the button. ECO PRO is displayed ▷ Adjust the ECO PRO limit speed:
in the instrument cluster. "Notification at:"
Select the desired speed.
Configuring ECO PRO
INDIVIDUAL Coasting
Efficiency can be optimized by disengaging the
Via the Driving Dynamics Control engine and coasting with the engine idling.
1. Activate ECO PRO.
ECO PRO seat climate control
2. "ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL"
The output of seat heating and, where applica‐
ble, seat ventilation is reduced when ECO PRO
Via iDrive
is activated.
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings" ECO PRO climate control
3. "Driving mode" Climate control is set to be efficient.
4. "ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL" That is, it is possible to deviate slightly from the
5. Select the desired setting. set temperature or to heat or cool the car's inte‐
rior more slowly, to economize on consumption.
rently used. The mirror heating is made available when exter‐
nal temperatures are very cold.
Activating/deactivating ECO PRO
functions ECO PRO light and sight
The following ECO PRO functions can be acti‐ The output of exterior mirror heating and rear
vated/deactivated: window defroster is reduced.
▷ "ECO PRO speed"

Dampening
▷ "Coasting"
The following settings can be selected:
▷ "ECO PRO seat climate control"
323
▷ "COMFORT" Consumption display

▷ "SPORT"
Steering
The following settings can be selected:
▷ "COMFORT"
▷ "SPORT"
Resetting the settings

Reset ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL to the standard A pointer in the consumption display informs
settings: about the current driving style:
"Reset to ECO PRO STANDARD" ▷ The current consumption in relation to the
average consumption is displayed.
Display in the instrument cluster ▷ Pointer in the area of arrow 1: display of the
energy recovered by coasting or when brak‐
General information ing.
When ECO PRO driving mode is activated, the ▷ Pointer in the area of arrow 2: display when
display switches to a special configuration. accelerating.
If the acceleration is inefficient, the area between
ECO PRO bonus range
the average consumption and the current con‐
A modified driving style helps you sumption is colored red.
extend your driving range. In addition, the following information is displayed,
The range extension can be dis‐ depending on the situation:
played as the bonus range in the ▷ Depending on the equipment: the total dis‐
instrument cluster. tance driven while coasting, refer to
The efficiency display includes the bonus range, page 325.
refer to page 153. ▷ The total time that the engine has been
If the bonus range appears in gray, the current switched off, refer to page 134, during auto‐
driving style is inefficient. matic engine stops.
The display turns blue as soon as all conditions ▷ A gear shift indicator, refer to page 160, rec‐
for efficient driving are met. ommending the use of a more efficient gear.
The intervals for resetting the bonus range de‐

pend on the settings of the trip data, refer to
Indications on the Control
page 163. Display
General information
Information about the current effectiveness of
the ECO PRO functions can be displayed as en‐
ergy flow.
324
Displaying energy flow information ▷ Brake pedal not depressed or only slightly
Via iDrive: depressed.
▷ The selector lever is in selector lever position
1. "CAR" D.
2. "Driving information" ▷ Engine and transmission are at operating
3. "Energy flow" temperature.
The following functions are displayed: ▷ Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go function,
▷ Auto Start/Stop function. ACC, not activated.
▷ Energy recovery.
Operation via shift paddles
▷ Coasting.
Concept
Coasting The coasting driving condition can be influenced
with the shift paddles.
Concept Activating/deactivating coasting via

Under certain conditions the engine is automati‐ shift paddles
cally decoupled from the transmission in the D
1. Shift to the highest gear by pulling the right
selector lever position. The vehicle continues
shift paddle.
traveling with the engine idling to reduce con‐
sumption. Selector lever position D remains en‐ 2. To activate coasting mode, actuate the right
gaged. shift paddle again.
This driving condition is referred to as coasting. To deactivate, actuate the left shift paddle.
As soon as you step on the brake or accelerator
pedal, the engine is automatically coupled again. Display
General information Display in the instrument cluster

Coasting is a component of the ECO PRO driv‐ The coasting distance traveled is indicated
ing mode. in coasting mode.
Coasting is automatically activated when ECO

Indications on the Control Display
PRO mode is called via the Driving Dynamics
Control. The coasting mode is displayed under energy
flow while driving.
A proactive driving style helps the driver to use
the function often and supports the efficient ef‐ The distance traveled coasting mode is dis‐
fect of coasting. played in the trip data.
The function is available in the speed range from
approx. 16 mph/25 km/h to 100 mph/160 km/h.
The function is active if the following conditions
are met:
▷ Accelerator pedal not depressed.
325
General information
The current trip is assessed.
To assist with an efficient driving style, ECO
PRO tips are displayed during driving.
The range of the vehicle can be extended by ad‐
justing your driving style.
This gain in range is displayed as a bonus range
in the instrument cluster and on the Control Dis‐
Color code blue: coasting mode. play.
Displaying energy flow information Functional requirement

Via iDrive: This function is available in ECO PRO mode.
1. "CAR" Calling up ECO PRO driving style

2. "Driving information" analysis
3. "Energy flow" Via iDrive:
1. "CAR"
System limits
The function is not available under one of the fol‐
lowing conditions. 3. "Driving style analysis"
▷ DSC OFF or TRACTION activated.
Display on the Control Display
▷ Driving in the dynamic limit range and on
steep uphill or downhill grades. The display of the ECO PRO driving style analy‐
sis displays the efficiency of the driving style.
▷ Battery charge status temporarily too low or
vehicle electrical system drawing excessive The more efficient the driving style, the more
current. bars are displayed in color and the faster the bo‐
nus range increases.
▷ Trailer towing.
In contrast, a reduced number of bars will be dis‐
▷ Hill Descent Control, HDC, activated.
played with an inefficient driving style.
Driving style analysis

Concept
The function helps develop an especially effi‐
cient driving style and to conserve fuel.
For this purpose, the driving style is analyzed.
The assessment is done in various categories
and is displayed on the Control Display.
This display will help you adjust your driving style
and save some fuel.
326
327
328
MOBILITY
Refueling ................................................................................................... 330
Wheels and tires ...................................................................................... 332
Engine compartment .............................................................................. 364
Operating materials ................................................................................. 367
Maintenance ............................................................................................. 374
Replacing components .......................................................................... 376
Breakdown assistance ........................................................................... 380
Care ........................................................................................................... 387
329
MOBILITY Refueling
Refueling
options
NOTICE
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ With a driving range of less than
cific and optional features offered with the series. 30 miles/50 km the engine may no longer have
It also describes features and functions that are sufficient fuel. Engine functions are not en‐
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due sured anymore. There is a risk of damage to
to the selected options or country versions. This property. Refuel promptly.
NOTICE
served.
Fuels are toxic and aggressive. Overfilling of the
fuel tank can damage the fuel system. Painted
Follow the following when surfaces may be damaged by contact with fuel.
Escaping fuel can harm the environment. There
refueling is a risk of damage to property. Avoid overfilling.
General information
Follow the fuel recommendation, refer to Fuel cap
page 367, prior to refueling.
When refueling, insert the filler nozzle completely
Opening
into the filler pipe. Lifting up the fuel pump nozzle
during refueling causes: 1. Briefly press the rear edge of the fuel filler
flap.
▷ Premature switching off.
▷ Reduced return of the fuel vapors.
The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks
off the first time.
Make sure that the fuel cap is closed properly af‐
ter refueling, otherwise the emissions warning
light may light up.
Follow safety regulations posted at the gas sta‐
tion.
330
Refueling MOBILITY
2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise. Have fuel filler flap unlocked by a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop.
3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket attached to

the fuel filler flap.
Closing
WARNING
The retaining strap of the fuel cap can be jam‐
med and crushed during closing. The cap can‐
not be correctly closed. Fuel or fuel vapors can
escape. There is a risk of injury or risk of dam‐
age to property. Pay attention that the retaining
strap is not jammed or crushed when closing
the cap.
1. Fit the cap and turn it clockwise until you

clearly hear a click.
2. Close the fuel filler flap.
Manually unlocking fuel filler flap

It may be necessary in certain situations to un‐
lock the fuel filler flap manually, e.g. with an elec‐
trical fault.
331
MOBILITY Wheels and tires
Wheels and tires

Vehicle features and Tire inflation pressure
specifications
options
In the tire inflation pressure table
cific and optional features offered with the series. The tire inflation pressure table, refer to
It also describes features and functions that are page 334, contains all tire inflation pressure
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due specifications for the specified tire sizes at the
to the selected options or country versions. This ambient temperature. The tire inflation pressure
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ values apply to tire sizes approved by the manu‐
tems. When using these functions and systems, facturer of the vehicle for the vehicle type.
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ To identify the correct tire inflation pressure,
served. please note the following:
▷ Tire sizes of your vehicle.
Tire inflation pressure ▷ Maximum permitted driving speed.
On the Control Display

General information
The current tire inflation pressure values and the
The tire characteristics and tire inflation pressure intended tire inflation pressure values for the
influence the following: mounted tires can be displayed on the Control
▷ The service life of the tires. Display.
▷ Road safety. To ensure that they are displayed correctly, the
▷ Driving comfort. tire sizes must be stored in the system and must
have been set, refer to page 348, for the
▷ Fuel consumption.
mounted tires.
The current tire inflation pressure value is lo‐
Safety information
cated on each tire.
The intended tire inflation pressure value is lo‐
WARNING cated in the lower area of the Control Display.
A tire with too little or no tire inflation pressure
may heat up significantly and sustain damage. Checking the tire inflation
This will have a negative impact on aspects of pressure
handling, such as steering and braking re‐
sponse. There is a risk of an accident. Regularly
General information
check the tire inflation pressure, and correct it
as needed, for instance twice a month and be‐ Tires heat up while driving. The tire inflation
fore a long trip. pressure increases with the tire temperature.
Tires have a natural, consistent loss of tire infla‐
tion pressure.
The displays of inflation devices may under-read
by up to 0.1 bar/2 psi.
332
Wheels and tires MOBILITY
Checking using tire inflation After correcting the tire inflation

pressure specifications in the tire pressure
inflation pressure table With runflat tires:
The tire inflation pressure specifications in the Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor.
tire inflation pressure table only relate to cold
With Tire Pressure Monitor TPM:
tires or tires at the same temperature as the am‐
bient temperature. With tires that cannot be found in the tire pres‐
sure values on the Control Display, reset the Tire
Only check the tire inflation pressure levels when
Pressure Monitor TPM.
the tires are cold, i.e.:
▷ Driving range of max. 1.25 miles/2 km has not Tire inflation pressures up to
been exceeded.
100 mph/160 km/h
▷ If the vehicle has not moved again for at least
For speeds of up to 100 mph/160 km/h and for
2 hours after a trip.
optimum driving comfort, note the pressure val‐
Check the tire inflation pressure of the emer‐ ues in the tire inflation pressure table, refer to
gency wheel in the cargo area regularly, and cor‐ page 334, and adjust as necessary.
rect it as needed.
1. Determine, refer to page 332, the intended

tire inflation pressure levels for the mounted
tires.
2. Check the tire inflation pressure in all four
tires, using a pressure gage, for example.
3. Correct the tire inflation pressure if the cur‐
rent tire inflation pressure value deviates from
the specified value.
4. Check whether all valve caps are screwed These pressure values can also be found on the
onto the tire valves. tire inflation pressure label on the driver's door
pillar.
Checking using the tire inflation Do not exceed a speed of 100 mph/160 km/h.
pressure specifications on the
Control Display
Via iDrive:
1. "CAR"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Tire Pressure Monitor"
4. Check whether the current tire inflation pres‐
sure levels deviate from the intended tire
pressure value.
5. Correct the tire inflation pressure if the cur‐
rent tire inflation pressure value deviates from
the intended value.
333
Tire inflation pressure values up X5 xDrive40i with three rows of

to 100 mph/160 km/h seats
X5 xDrive40i with two rows of seats Tire size Pressure specifica‐

tions in bar/PSI
Tire size Pressure specifications Specifications in
in bar/PSI bar/PSI with cold
Specifications in tires
bar/PSI with cold
tires
265/50 R 19 110 2.3 / 33 2.8 / 41
H M+S XL A/S
265/50 R 19 110 2.3 / 33 2.8 / 41 RSC
H M+S XL A/S 275/45 R 20 110
RSC H M+S XL A/S
275/45 R 20 110 RSC
H M+S XL A/S 255/55 R 18 109
RSC W XL Std
255/55 R 18 109 265/50 R 19 110
W XL Std H M+S XL RSC
265/50 R 19 110 275/45 R 20 110
H M+S XL RSC V M+S XL RSC
275/45 R 20 110 Front: 275/45 R 20 2.3 / 33 -
V M+S XL RSC 110 Y XL RSC
Front: 275/45 R 2.3 / 33 - Rear: 305/40 R 20 - 2.7 / 39
20 110 Y XL RSC 112 Y XL RSC
Rear: 305/40 R - 2.7 / 39 Front: 275/40 R 21 2.4 / 35 -
Front: 275/40 R 2.4 / 35 - Rear: 315/35 R 21 - 2.9 / 42
Rear: 315/35 R - 2.9 / 42
21 111 Y XL RSC
Front: 275/35 R 2.6 / 38 -

22 104 Y XL Std
Rear: 315/30 R - 3.1 / 45

22 107 Y XL Std
Emergency Speed up to a max. of

wheel: 50 mph / 80 km/h
T 155/80 R 19 4.2 / 60
114 M
334
X5 xDrive50i Tire inflation pressures at max.

speeds above 100 mph/160 km/h
Tire size Pressure specifications
in bar/PSI
WARNING
Specifications in
In order to drive at maximum speeds in excess
bar/PSI with cold
of 100 mph/160 km/h, please observe, and, if
tires
necessary, adjust tire pressures for speeds ex‐
ceeding 100 mph/160 km/h from the relevant
265/50 R 19 110 2.3 / 33 2.8 / 41 table on the following pages. Otherwise, tire
H M+S XL A/S damage and accidents could occur.
RSC
For speeds over 100 mph/160 km/h and for opti‐
275/45 R 20 110
mum driving comfort, note the pressure values in
H M+S XL A/S
the tire inflation pressure table, refer to
RSC
page 335, and adjust as necessary.
255/55 R 18 109
W XL Std Tire inflation pressure values
265/50 R 19 110 over 100 mph/160 km/h
H M+S XL RSC
275/45 R 20 110 X5 xDrive40i with two rows of seats
V M+S XL RSC Without Sport Package
Front: 275/45 R 2.3 / 33 - Tire size Pressure specifications
20 110 Y XL RSC in bar/PSI
Rear: 305/40 R - 2.7 / 39 Specifications in
20 112 Y XL RSC bar/PSI with cold
Front: 275/40 R 2.4 / 35 - tires
21 107 Y XL RSC
Rear: 315/35 R - 2.9 / 42 265/50 R 19 110 2.5 / 36 3.0 / 44

21 111 Y XL RSC H M+S XL A/S
RSC
Front: 275/35 R 2.6 / 38 -
22 104 Y XL Std 275/45 R 20 110
H M+S XL A/S
Rear: 315/30 R - 3.1 / 45 RSC
22 107 Y XL Std
255/55 R 18 109
Emergency Speed up to a max. of W XL Std
wheel: 50 mph / 80 km/h 265/50 R 19 110
T 155/80 R 19 4.2 / 60 H M+S XL RSC
114 M 275/45 R 20 110
V M+S XL RSC
Front: 275/45 R 2.3 / 33 -

20 110 Y XL RSC
335
Tire size Pressure specifications Tire size Pressure specifications

in bar/PSI in bar/PSI
Rear: 305/40 R - 2.7 / 39 Front: 275/40 R 2.8 / 41 -

20 112 Y XL RSC 21 107 Y XL
RSC
Front: 275/40 R 2.4 / 35 -
21 107 Y XL RSC Rear: 315/35 R - 3.1 / 45
21 111 Y XL
Rear: 315/35 R - 2.9 / 42
RSC
21 111 Y XL RSC
Front: 275/35 R 2.8 / 41 -
Front: 275/35 R 2.6 / 38 -
22 104 Y XL Std
22 104 Y XL Std
Rear: 315/30 R - 3.3 / 48
Rear: 315/30 R - 3.1 / 45
22 107 Y XL Std
22 107 Y XL Std
T 155/80 R 19 4.2 / 60
T 155/80 R 19 4.2 / 60
114 M
114 M
With Sport Package

X5 xDrive40i with three rows of
seats
Tire size Pressure specifications
Without Sport Package
in bar/PSI
Tire size Pressure specifica‐
Specifications in tions in bar/PSI
bar/PSI with cold
tires Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold
tires
265/50 R 19 2.5 / 36 3.0 / 44
110 H M+S XL
RSC 265/50 R 19 110 2.5 / 36 3.0 / 44
H M+S XL A/S
275/45 R 20 2.8 / 41 3.3 / 48 RSC
110 V M+S XL
RSC 275/45 R 20 110
H M+S XL A/S
255/55 R 18 2.9 / 42 3.4 / 49 RSC
109 W XL Std 255/55 R 18 109
Front: 275/45 R 2.8 / 41 - W XL Std
20 110 Y XL 265/50 R 19 110
RSC H M+S XL RSC
Rear: 305/40 R - 3.1 / 45 275/45 R 20 110
20 112 Y XL V M+S XL RSC
RSC
336
Tire size Pressure specifica‐ X5 xDrive50i

tions in bar/PSI Without Sport Package
Front: 275/45 R 20 2.3 / 33 - Tire size Pressure specifications
110 Y XL RSC in bar/PSI
Rear: 305/40 R 20 - 2.7 / 39 Specifications in
112 Y XL RSC bar/PSI with cold
tires
Front: 275/40 R 21 2.4 / 35 -
107 Y XL RSC
Rear: 315/35 R 21 - 2.9 / 42 265/50 R 19 110 2.5 / 36 3.0 / 44

111 Y XL RSC H M+S XL A/S
RSC
With Sport Package 275/45 R 20 110
H M+S XL A/S
Tire size Pressure specifications RSC
in bar/PSI
255/55 R 18 109
Specifications in W XL Std
bar/PSI with cold 265/50 R 19 110
tires H M+S XL RSC
275/45 R 20 110
265/50 R 19 2.7 / 39 3.2 / 46 V M+S XL RSC
110 H M+S XL Front: 275/45 R 2.3 / 33 -
RSC 20 110 Y XL RSC
275/45 R 20 2.9 / 42 3.4 / 49 Rear: 305/40 R - 2.7 / 39
110 V M+S XL 20 112 Y XL RSC
RSC
Front: 275/40 R 2.4 / 35 -
Front: 275/45 R 2.9 / 42 - 21 107 Y XL RSC
20 110 Y XL
RSC Rear: 315/35 R - 2.9 / 42
21 111 Y XL RSC
Rear: 305/40 R - 3.4 / 49
20 112 Y XL Front: 275/35 R 2.6 / 38 -
RSC 22 104 Y XL Std
Front: 275/40 R 2.9 / 42 - Rear: 315/30 R - 3.1 / 45

21 107 Y XL 22 107 Y XL Std
RSC Emergency Speed up to a max. of
Rear: 315/35 R - 3.4 / 49 wheel: 50 mph / 80 km/h
21 111 Y XL T 155/80 R 19 4.2 / 60
RSC 114 M
With Sport Package
337
Tire size Pressure specifications 45: aspect ratio in %

in bar/PSI R: radial tire code
Specifications in 18: rim diameter in inches

bar/PSI with 96: load rating, not for ZR tires
cold tires Y: speed rating, before the R on ZR tires
265/50 R 19 2.5 / 36 3.0 / 44 Maximum tire load

110 H M+S XL Maximum tire load is the maximum permissible
RSC weight for which the tire is approved.
Locate the maximum tire load on the tire sidewall
275/45 R 20 2.8 / 41 3.3 / 48
and the Gross Axle Weight Rating – GAWR – on
110 V M+S XL
the certification label on the driver door B-pillar.
RSC
Divide the tire load by 1.1. It must be greater
Front: 275/45 R 2.8 / 41 - than one-half of the vehicle’s Gross Axle Weight
20 110 Y XL Rating – GAWR. Note, front vs. rear GAWR and
RSC tire loads, respectively.
Rear: 305/40 R - 3.1 / 45
20 112 Y XL Speed letter
RSC Q = up to 100 mph/160 km/h
Front: 275/40 R 2.8 / 41 - R = up to 106 mph/170 km/h

21 107 Y XL S = up to 112 mph/180 km/h
RSC T = up to 118 mph/190 km/h
Rear: 315/35 R - 3.1 / 45 H = up to 131 mph/210 km/h
21 111 Y XL V = up to 150 mph/240 km/h
RSC
W = up to 167 mph/270 km/h
Front: 275/35 R 3.0 / 44 - Y = up to 186 mph/300 km/h
22 104 Y XL Std
Rear: 315/30 R - 3.4 / 49 Tire Identification Number

22 107 Y XL Std DOT code: DOT xxxx xxx 3818
Emergency Speed up to a max. of xxxx: manufacturer code for the tire brand
wheel: 50 mph / 80 km/h xxx: tire size and tire design
T 155/80 R 19 4.2 / 60 3818: tire age
114 M Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of the
U.S. Department of Transportation.
Tire identification marks Tire age
Tire size Recommendation

245/45 R 18 96 Y Regardless of the tire tread, replace tires at least
every 6 years.
245: nominal width in mm
338
Manufacture date ces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may

You can find the manufacture date of the tire on have poor traction performance.
the tire's sidewall. The traction grade assigned to this tire is based
on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and
Designation Manufacture date does not include acceleration, cornering, hydro‐
DOT … 3818 38th week, 2018 planing, or peak traction characteristics.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Temperature

The temperature grades are A, the highest, B,
Quality grades can be found where applicable on
and C, representing the tire's resistance to the
the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat
maximum section width.
when tested under controlled conditions on a
E.g.: Treadwear 200; Traction AA; Temperature specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained
A high temperature can cause the material of the
tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and exces‐
DOT Quality Grades sive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.
Treadwear The grade C corresponds to a level of perform‐
ance which all passenger vehicle tires must meet
Traction AA A B C
under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
Temperature A B C No. 109. Grades Band A represent higher levels
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Fed‐ of performance on the laboratory test wheel than
eral Safety Requirements in addition to these the minimum required by law.
grades.
WARNING
Treadwear
The temperature grade for this tire is estab‐
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating lished for a tire that is properly inflated and not
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or
under controlled conditions on a specified gov‐ excessive loading, either separately or in com‐
ernment test course. E.g., a tire graded 150 bination, can cause heat buildup and possible
would wear one and one-half, 1 g, times as well tire failure.
on the government course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires depends upon
the actual conditions of their use, however, and RSC – Run-flat tires
may depart significantly from the norm due to
Run-flat tires, refer to page 342, are labeled with
variations in driving habits, service practices and
a circular symbol containing the letters RSC
differences in road characteristics and climate.
marked on the sidewall.
Traction
M+S
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
Winter and all-season tires with better cold
AA, A, B, and C.
weather performance than summer tires.
Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop
on wet pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test surfa‐
339
Tire tread pecially if your vehicle is equipped with low-pro‐

file tires.
Indications of tire damage or other vehicle mal‐
Summer tires functions:
Do not drive with a tire tread of less than ▷ Unusual vibrations.
0.12 in/3 mm, otherwise there is an increased
risk of hydroplaning. ▷ Unusual tire or running noises.
▷ Unusual handling such as a strong tendency
Winter tires to pull to the left or right.
Do not drive with a tire tread of less than Damage can be caused by the following situa‐
0.16 in/4 mm, as such tires are less suitable for tions, for instance:
winter operation. ▷ Driving over curbs.
▷ Road damage.
Minimum tread depth ▷ Tire inflation pressure too low.
▷ Vehicle overloading.
▷ Incorrect tire storage.
Safety information
WARNING
Damaged tires can lose tire inflation pressure,
which can lead to loss of vehicle control. There
Wear indicators are distributed around the tire's is a risk of an accident. If tire damage is sus‐
circumference and have the legally required min‐ pected while driving, immediately reduce speed
imum height of 0.063 inches/1.6 mm. and stop. Have wheels and tires checked. For
this purpose, drive carefully to the nearest deal‐
The positions of the wear indicators are marked er’s service center or another qualified service
on the tire sidewall with TWI, Tread Wear Indica‐ center or repair shop. Have vehicle towed or
tor. transported as needed. Do not repair damaged
tires, but have them replaced.
Tire damage
WARNING
General information
Tires can become damaged by driving over ob‐
Inspect your tires regularly for damage, foreign stacles, e.g., curbs or road damage, at high
objects lodged in the tread, and tread wear. speed. Larger wheels have a smaller tire cross-
Driving over rough or damaged road surfaces, as section. The smaller the tire cross-section, the
well as debris, curbs and other obstacles can higher the risk of tire damage. There is a dan‐
cause serious damage to wheels, tires and sus‐ ger of accidents and property damage. If possi‐
pension parts. This is more likely to occur with ble, drive around obstacles, or drive over them
low-profile tires, which provide less cushioning slowly and carefully.
between the wheel and the road. Be careful to
avoid road hazards and reduce your speed, es‐
340
Changing wheels and tires maintain good handling and vehicle response,
use only tires with a single tread configuration
from a single manufacturer. The manufacturer
Mounting and wheel balancing of the vehicle recommends that you use
Have mounting and wheel balancing carried out wheels and tires that have been recommended
by a dealer’s service center or another qualified by the vehicle manufacturer for your vehicle
service center or repair shop. type. Following tire damage, have the original
wheel/tire combination remounted on the vehi‐
Wheel and tire combination cle as soon as possible.
General information
You can ask the dealer’s service center or an‐ WARNING
other qualified service center or repair shop Unsuitable wheel studs, such as single-section
about the correct wheel/tire combination and wheel studs, may loosen or come off. The
wheel rim versions for the vehicle. wheel may come loose during driving. There is
a risk of an accident. Use only two-section
Safety information wheel studs that have been categorized as suit‐
able for the respective wheel type by the man‐
ufacturer of the vehicle.
WARNING
Wheels and tires which are not suitable for your
vehicle can damage parts of the vehicle, for in‐ Recommended tire brands
stance due to contact with the body due to tol‐
erances despite the same official size rating.
There is a risk of an accident. The manufac‐
turer of your vehicle strongly suggests that you
use wheels and tires that have been recom‐
mended by the vehicle manufacturer for your
vehicle type.
WARNING
For each tire size, the manufacturer of the vehi‐
Mounted steel wheels can cause technical cle recommends certain tire brands. The tire
problems, for instance independent loosening brands can be identified by a star on the tire
of the lug bolts, damage to the brake discs. sidewall.
There is a risk of an accident. Do not mount
steel wheels.
New tires
Tire traction is not optimal due to manufacturing
WARNING circumstances when tires are brand-new; they
achieve their full traction potential after a break-in
Incorrect wheel/tire combinations will have a
time.
negative impact on the vehicle's handling and
on the function of a variety of systems, such as Drive conservatively for the first
the Anti-lock Brake System or Dynamic Stabil‐ 200 miles/300 km.
ity Control. There is a risk of an accident. To
341
Retreaded tires tween the axles to achieve even wear. Further in‐
formation is available from a dealer’s service cen‐
ter or another qualified service center or repair
WARNING shop. After rotating, check the tire pressure and
Retreaded tires can have different tire casing correct, if needed.
structures. With advanced age the service life Rotating the tires is not permissible on vehicles
can be limited. There is a risk of an accident. with different tire sizes or rim sizes on the front
The manufacturer of your vehicle does not rec‐ and rear axles.
ommend the use of retreaded tires.
Storing tires
The manufacturer of your vehicle does not rec‐
ommend the use of retreaded tires.
Tire inflation pressure
Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pres‐
Winter tires
sure indicated on the side wall of the tire.
General information
Storage
Winter tires are recommended for operating on
Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry and dark
winter roads.
place.
Although so-called all-season M+S tires provide
Always protect tires against all contact with oil,
better winter traction than summer tires, they
grease, and solvents.
usually do not provide the same level of perform‐
ance as winter tires. Do not leave tires in plastic bags.
Remove dirt from wheels or tires.
Maximum speed of winter tires
If the maximum speed of the vehicle is higher
than the permissible speed for the winter tires, Run-flat tires
then attach a label showing the permissible maxi‐
mum speed in the field of view. The label is avail‐ Concept
able from a dealer’s service center or another
Run-flat tires permit continued driving under re‐
stricted conditions even in the event of a com‐
With winter tires mounted, observe and do not plete loss of tire inflation pressure.
exceed the permissible maximum speed.
General information
Changing runflat tires The wheels consist of tires that are self-support‐
For your own safety, use only runflat tires. No ing, to a limited degree, and possibly special
spare tire is available in the case of a flat tire. Fur‐ rims.
ther information is available from a dealer’s serv‐
The support of the sidewall allows the tire to re‐
ice center or another qualified service center or
main drivable to a restricted degree in the event
repair shop.
of a tire inflation pressure loss.
Follow the instructions for continued driving with
Rotating wheels between axles
a flat tire.
Different wear patterns can occur on the front
and rear axles depending on individual driving
conditions. The tires can be rotated in pairs be‐
342
Safety information ▷ Secure the vehicle against rolling away by

setting the parking brake.
▷ Turn the steering wheel until the front wheels
WARNING
are in the straight-ahead position and engage
Your vehicle handles differently with a run-flat the steering wheel lock.
with no or low inflation pressure; for instance,
▷ Have all vehicle occupants get out of the ve‐
your lane stability when braking is reduced,
hicle and ensure that they remain outside the
braking distances are longer and the self-steer‐
immediate area in a safe place, such as be‐
ing properties will change. There is a risk of an
hind a guardrail.
accident. Drive moderately and do not exceed a
speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. ▷ If necessary, set up a warning triangle at an
appropriate distance.
WARNING
Mobility System
Heavy trailers can start swinging when continu‐
ing to drive with a flat tire. There is a risk of ac‐
cidents or risk of damage to property. Do not Concept
exceed a speed of 35 mph/60 km/h when driv‐ With the Mobility System, minor tire damage can
ing with a trailer and a flat tire. Immediately be sealed temporarily to enable continued travel.
brake in the case of swinging. Apply necessary To accomplish this, sealant is pumped into the
steering corrections as carefully as possible. tires, which seals the damage from the inside.
General information
Label ▷ Follow the instructions on using the Mobility
System found on the compressor and sealant
container.
▷ Use of the Mobility System may be ineffec‐
tive if the tire puncture measures approx.
1/8 inches/4 mm or more.
▷ Contact a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop if the
tire cannot be made drivable.
▷ If possible, do not remove foreign bodies that
The tires are marked on the tire sidewall with
have penetrated the tire. Only remove foreign
RSC Run-flat System Component.
objects if they are visibly protruding from the
tire.
▷ Pull the speed limit sticker off the sealant
Repairing a flat tire container and apply it to the steering wheel.
▷ The use of a sealant can damage the TPM
Safety measures wheel electronics. In this case, have the elec‐
▷ Park the vehicle as far away as possible from tronics checked and replaced at the next op‐
passing traffic and on solid ground. portunity.
▷ Switch on the hazard warning system. ▷ The compressor can be used to check the
tire inflation pressure.
343
Overview 3 Tire pressure gage

4 Reduce tire inflation pressure button
Storage
5 On/off switch
6 Compressor
7 Connector/cable for socket
8 Connection hose
Safety measures
▷ Park the vehicle as far away as possible from
passing traffic and on solid ground.
The Mobility System is in the left storage com‐ ▷ Switch on the hazard warning system.
partment of the cargo area. ▷ Secure the vehicle against rolling away by
setting the parking brake.
Sealant container ▷ Turn the steering wheel until the front wheels
are in the straight-ahead position and engage
the steering wheel lock.
▷ Have all vehicle occupants get out of the ve‐
hicle and ensure that they remain outside the
immediate area in a safe place, such as be‐
hind a guardrail.
▷ If necessary, set up a warning triangle at an
appropriate distance.
▷ Sealant container, arrow 1.

Filling the tire with sealant
▷ Filling hose, arrow 2.
Safety information
Observe use-by date on the sealant container.
DANGER
Compressor If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventilation is in‐
sufficient, harmful exhaust gases can enter into
tants which are colorless and odorless. In en‐
closed areas, exhaust gases can also accumu‐
late outside of the vehicle. There is danger to
life. Keep the exhaust pipe free and ensure suf‐
ficient ventilation.
1 Sealant container unlocking

2 Sealant container holder
344
4. Screw the filling hose of the sealant container

NOTICE onto the tire valve of the nonworking wheel.
The compressor can overheat during extended
operation. There is a risk of damage to prop‐
erty. Do not run the compressor for more than
10 minutes.
Filling
1. Shake the sealant container.
5. With the compressor switched off, insert the

plug into the power socket inside the vehicle.
2. Pull filling hose completely out of the cover of

the sealant container. Do not kink the hose.
6. With standby state switched on or the engine

running, switch on the compressor.
3. Slide the sealant container into the holder on

the compressor housing, ensuring that it en‐
gages audibly.
Let the compressor run for max. 10 minutes to fill
the tire with sealant and achieve a tire inflation
pressure of approx. 2.0 bar.
While the tire is being filled with sealant, the tire
inflation pressure may sporadically reach approx.
5 bar. Do not switch off the compressor at this
point.
345
Checking and adjusting the tire 4. Insert the connector into the power socket in‐
inflation pressure side the vehicle.
Checking
1. Switch off the compressor.
2. Read the tire inflation pressure on the tire
pressure gage.
To continue the trip, a tire inflation pressure of at
least 2 bar must be reached.
Removing and stowing the sealant

5. With standby state switched on or the engine
container running, switch on the compressor.
1. Unscrew the filling hose of the sealant con‐ If a tire inflation pressure of at least 2 bar can‐
tainer from the tire valve. not be reached, contact your dealer’s service
2. Press the red unlocking device. center or another qualified service center or
3. Remove the sealant container from the com‐ repair shop.
pressor. If a tire inflation pressure of at least 2 bar is
4. Wrap and store the sealant container in suita‐ reached, see Minimum tire inflation pressure
ble material to avoid dirtying the cargo area. is reached.
6. Unscrew the connection hose of the com‐
Minimum tire inflation pressure is pressor from the tire valve.
not reached 7. Pull the connector out of the power socket
1. Pull the connector out of the power socket inside the vehicle.
inside the vehicle. 8. Stow the Mobility System in the vehicle.
2. Drive 33 ft/10 m forward and back to distrib‐
ute the sealant in the tire. Minimum tire inflation pressure is
3. Screw the connection hose of the compres‐ reached
sor directly onto the tire valve stem. 1. Unscrew the connection hose of the com‐
pressor from the tire valve.
2. Pull the connector out of the power socket
inside the vehicle.
3. Stow the Mobility System in the vehicle.
4. Immediately drive approx. 5 miles/10 km to
ensure that the sealant is evenly distributed in
the tire.
Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
If possible, do not drive at speeds less than
12 mph/20 km/h.
346
Adjustment Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM, refer to

1. Stop at a suitable location. page 348.
2. Screw the connection hose of the compres‐ Replace the nonworking tire and the sealant con‐
sor directly onto the tire valve stem. tainer of the Mobility System promptly.
Snow chains
Safety information
WARNING
With the mounting of snow chains on unsuita‐
ble tires, the snow chains can come into con‐
3. Insert the connector into the power socket in‐ tact with vehicle parts. There is a risk of acci‐
side the vehicle. dents or risk of damage to property. Only
mount snow chains on tires that are designated
by their manufacturer as suitable for the use of
snow chains.
WARNING
Insufficiently tight snow chains may damage
tires and vehicle components. There is a risk of
accidents or risk of damage to property. Make
4. Correct the tire inflation pressure to at least sure that the snow chains are always suffi‐
2.0 bar. ciently tight. Re-tighten as needed according to
the snow chain manufacturer's instructions.
▷ Increase tire inflation pressure: with
standby state switched on or the engine
running, switch on the compressor.
Fine-link snow chains
▷ Reduce tire inflation pressure: press the
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
button on the compressor.
use of fine-link snow chains. Certain types of
5. Unscrew the connection hose of the com‐ fine-link snow chains have been tested by the
pressor from the tire valve. manufacturer of the vehicle and recommended
6. Pull the connector out of the power socket as road-safe and suitable.
inside the vehicle. Information regarding suitable snow chains is
7. Stow the Mobility System in the vehicle. available from a dealer’s service center or an‐
Continuing the trip
Do not exceed the maximum permissible speed Use
of 50 mph/80 km/h. Use only in pairs on the rear wheels, equipped
Reinitialize the run-flat tires, refer to page 355. with the tires of the following size:
▷ 255/55 R18.
347
▷ 265/50 R19. Via iDrive:

▷ 275/45 R20. 1. "CAR"
Follow the snow chain manufacturer's instruc‐ 2. "Settings"
tions.
Do not initialize the run-flat tires after mounting
4. "Tire chains"
snow chains, as doing so may result in incorrect
readings. 5. "Snow chains installed"
Do not reset the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM af‐ Starting with the permissible maximum speed
ter mounting snow chains, as doing so may re‐ with snow chains of 30 mph/50 km/h the rear
sult in incorrect readings. axle steering will be switched on again automati‐
cally.
When driving with snow chains, briefly activate
Dynamic Traction Control DTC to optimize the
forward momentum.
Maximum speed with snow
chains Concept
Do not exceed a speed of 30 mph/50 km/h when The system monitors tire inflation pressure in the
using snow chains. four mounted tires. The system warns you if
there is a loss of pressure in one or more tires.
Rear axle steering during

General information
operation with snow chains
Sensors in the tire valves measure the tire infla‐
tion pressure and tire temperature.
General information
In order to guarantee free running of the wheels Using the tire settings in iDrive, the system can
when operating with snow chains, rear axle automatically display the specified target pres‐
steering of the integral active steering must be sures and compare them with the actual tire in‐
switched off when snow chains are mounted. flation pressures.
If tires are being used that are not specified on
Safety information the tire inflation pressure details on the vehicle,
refer to page 332, such as tires with special ap‐
proval, the system needs to be actively reset.
WARNING The system will then take over the actual tire in‐
When rear axle steering is switched on and flation pressures as the target pressures.
snow chains are mounted, there can be contact When operating the system, also note the addi‐
between snow chains and the chassis. There is tional information found in the Tire inflation pres‐
a risk of accidents or risk of damage to prop‐ sure, refer to page 332, chapter.
erty. With mounted snow chains, switch off the
rear axle steering.
Switching off rear axle steering

The rear axle steering is switched off by specify‐
ing that snow chains are installed.
348
Safety information placement, the settings of the tire sets used last
can be selected.
WARNING Opening the menu

The display of the target pressures is not a Via iDrive:
substitute for the tire inflation pressure details
on the vehicle. Incorrect entries in the tire set‐ 1. "CAR"
tings can lead to incorrect target tire inflation 2. "Vehicle status"
pressure values. In this case, it cannot be guar‐
anteed that the notification of a loss of tire infla‐
tion pressure will be reliable. There is a risk of
injury and risk of damage to property. Ensure
Changing settings
that the tire sizes of the mounted tires are dis‐ Via iDrive:
played correctly and match the details on the 1. "Tire settings"
tires and on the vehicle.
2. Selecting tires:
▷ "Summer tires"
Functional requirements ▷ "Winter/all-year"
The following conditions must be met for the 3. "Current:"
system; otherwise, reliable flagging of a loss of
4. Select the tire type that is mounted on the
tire inflation pressure is not assured:
rear axle:
▷ Every time a tire or wheel is changed, the
▷ Tire size, e.g., 245/45 R18 96 Y.
correct details on the mounted tires must be
entered in the tire settings, refer to ▷ For tires with special approval: "Other tire"
page 349. 5. Select the maximum road speed that will be
▷ For tires with special approval: used with the tires.
▷ After a tire or wheel replacement, a reset 6. "Save tire settings"
was performed with the correct tire infla‐ The measurement of the current tire inflation
tion pressure. pressure is started. The measurement progress
▷ After the tire inflation pressure was ad‐ is displayed.
justed to a new value, a reset was per‐
formed. Status display
▷ Wheels with TPM wheel electronics.
Current status
Tire settings The system status can be displayed on the Con‐
trol Display, e.g., whether or not the system is ac‐
General information tive.
The tire sizes of the mounted tires can be gath‐ Via iDrive:
ered from the tire inflation pressure details on the 1. "CAR"
vehicle, refer to page 332, or directly on the tires.
2. "Vehicle status"
The tire details do not need to be re-entered
when the tire inflation pressure is corrected.
The current status is displayed.
For summer and winter tires, the tire details en‐
tered last are stored. After a tire or wheel re‐
349
Current tire inflation pressure All wheels green

The current tire inflation pressure is displayed for ▷ The system is active and bases warnings on
each tire. the displayed target pressures.
The current tire inflation pressures may change ▷ For tires with special approval: the system is
during driving operation or depending on the ex‐ active and bases warnings on the tire inflation
ternal temperature. pressures stored during the last reset.
Current tire temperature One to four yellow wheels

Depending on the model, the current tire tem‐ A flat tire or major drop in the tire inflation pres‐
peratures are displayed. sure has occurred in the indicated tires.
The current tire temperatures may change while
driving or due to the external temperature. Gray wheels
It may not be possible to identify tire inflation
Target pressure pressure losses.
The target pressure for the tires on the front and Possible causes:
rear axles is displayed. ▷ Malfunction.
The target pressures are values stored in the ve‐ ▷ During tire inflation pressure measurement,
hicle. after confirmation of the tire settings.
The specified target pressures take the influence ▷ For tires with special approval: the system is
of driving operation and external temperature on being reset.
the tire temperature into account. The appropri‐
ate target pressure is always displayed, inde‐
For tires with special approval:
pendent of the weather situation, tire tempera‐
tures and driving times. perform a reset
The displayed target pressure may change and Via iDrive:
may differ from the tire inflation pressure details 1. "CAR"
on the door pillar of the driver's door. The tire in‐
2. "Vehicle status"
flation pressure can thus be corrected to the
value of the displayed target pressures. 3. "Tire Pressure Monitor"
The target pressure is immediately adjusted if 4. Switch on drive-ready state and do not drive
the vehicle load is changed in the tire settings. off.
5. Reset tire inflation pressure: "Perform reset".
Tire conditions 6. Drive away.
The wheels are displayed in gray and the follow‐
General information ing is displayed "Resetting Tire Pressure
Tire and system status are indicated by the color Monitor…".
of the wheels and a SMS text message on the After driving faster than 19 mph/30 km/h for a
Control Display. short period, the set tire inflation pressures are
Any existing messages are not deleted if the dis‐ accepted as the target tire inflation pressures.
played target pressure is not reached after the The reset is completed automatically while driv‐
tire inflation pressure is corrected. ing.
After a successfully completed reset, the wheels
on the Control Display are shown in green and
350
the following is displayed: "Tire Pressure Monitor If the tire inflation pressure is too
active. See label for recommended pressure.". low
You may interrupt this trip at any time. When you
continue the reset resumes automatically. Message
A yellow warning light is illuminated in
Messages: for tires without the instrument cluster.
special approval
In addition, a symbol with a Check Control mes‐
General information sage appears on the Control Display.
A low tire inflation pressure may cause the DSC Symbol Possible cause
Dynamic Stability Control to be switched on.
There is a tire inflation pressure loss.
Safety information
WARNING Measure
A damaged regular tire with low or missing tire 1. Reduce the vehicle speed. Do not exceed a
inflation pressure impacts handling, such as speed of 80 mph/130 km/h.
steering and braking response. Run-flat tires 2. At the next opportunity, for instance at a gas
can maintain limited stability. There is a risk of station, check the tire inflation pressure in all
an accident. Do not continue driving if the vehi‐ four tires and correct if necessary.
cle is equipped with normal tires. Follow the in‐
formation on run-flat tires and continued driving If there is a significant loss of tire
with these tires. inflation pressure
Message
If a tire inflation pressure check is
required
the instrument cluster.
Message
In addition, a symbol with the affected tire ap‐
A symbol with a Check Control message ap‐ pears in a Check Control message on the Con‐
pears on the Control Display. trol Display.
Symbol Possible cause Symbol Possible cause
Inflation was not carried out accord‐ There is a flat tire or a major loss in
ing to specifications, e.g., when the tire inflation pressure.
tire has not been sufficiently inflated
or in the case of a natural steady tire
pressure loss. Measure
1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.
Measure Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
vers.
Check the tire pressure and correct as needed.
2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with nor‐
mal tires or run-flat tires.
351
Run-flat tires, refer to page 342, are labeled Sym‐ Possible cause
with a circular symbol containing the letters bol
RSC marked on the tire's sidewall.
Inflation was not carried out accord‐
Messages: for tires with special ing to specifications, e.g., the tire has
not been sufficiently inflated.
approval
The system has detected a wheel
General information change, but no reset was done.
A low tire inflation pressure may cause the DSC The tire inflation pressure has fallen
Dynamic Stability Control to be switched on. below the level of the last reset.
No reset was performed for the sys‐
Safety information tem. The system issues a warning
based on the tire inflation pressures
stored during the last reset.
WARNING
A damaged regular tire with low or missing tire Measure
inflation pressure impacts handling, such as
1. Check the tire pressure and correct as
steering and braking response. Run-flat tires
needed.
can maintain limited stability. There is a risk of
an accident. Do not continue driving if the vehi‐ 2. Perform a system reset.
formation on run-flat tires and continued driving If the tire inflation pressure is too
with these tires. low
Message
If a tire inflation pressure check is
required
Message In addition, a symbol with a Check Control mes‐
A symbol with a Check Control message ap‐ sage appears on the Control Display.
pears on the Control Display.
Symbol Possible cause
There is a tire inflation pressure loss.

tem. The system issues a warning
Measure
1. Reduce the vehicle speed. Do not exceed a
2. At the next opportunity, for instance at a gas
station, check the tire inflation pressure in all
four tires and correct if necessary.
352
3. Reset the system. If tire damage cannot be found, contact a

dealer’s service center or another qualified
If there is a significant loss of tire service center or repair shop.
inflation pressure 2. Repair the flat tire, e.g., with a flat tire kit or by
changing the wheel.
Message Use of sealant, for instance from the flat tire kit,
A yellow warning light is illuminated in may damage the TPM wheel electronics. Have
the instrument cluster. the electronics replaced at the next opportunity.
In addition, a symbol with the affected tire ap‐ Run-flat tires

pears in a Check Control message on the Con‐
trol Display. Safety information
Symbol Possible cause
WARNING
There is a flat tire or a major loss in
tire inflation pressure. Your vehicle handles differently with a run-flat
tem. The system issues a warning
Measure
1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐ WARNING
vers.
Heavy trailers can start swinging when continu‐
2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with nor‐ ing to drive with a flat tire. There is a risk of ac‐
mal tires or run-flat tires. cidents or risk of damage to property. Do not
Run-flat tires, refer to page 342, are labeled exceed a speed of 35 mph/60 km/h when driv‐
with a circular symbol containing the letters ing with a trailer and a flat tire. Immediately
RSC marked on the tire's sidewall. brake in the case of swinging. Apply necessary
steering corrections as carefully as possible.
Actions in the event of a flat tire
Maximum speed
Normal tires
You may continue driving with a damaged tire at
1. Identify the damaged tire.
speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.
Check the tire inflation pressure in all four
tires, for instance using the tire pressure gage Continued driving with a flat tire
of a flat tire kit.
Follow the following when continuing to drive
For tires with special approval: if the tire infla‐ with a damaged tire:
tion pressure in all four tires is correct, the
TPM may not have been reset. In this case, 1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
perform the reset. vers.
2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
353
3. Check the tire inflation pressure in all four System limits

tires at the next opportunity.
For tires with special approval: if the tire infla‐ Temperature
tion pressure in all four tires is correct, the The tire inflation pressure depends on the tire's
Tire Pressure Monitor may not have been re‐ temperature.
set. In this case, perform the reset.
Driving or exposure to the sun will increase the
tire's temperature, thus increasing the tire infla‐
Possible driving range with a
tion pressure.
depressurized tire
The tire inflation pressure is reduced when the
The distance for which it may be possible to
tire temperature falls again.
drive safely varies depending on how the vehicle
is loaded and used, e.g., speed, road conditions, These circumstances may cause a warning
external temperature. The driving range may be when temperatures fall very sharply.
less but may also be more if an economical driv‐ Following a temperature-related warning, the tar‐
ing style is used. get pressures are displayed on the Control Dis‐
If the vehicle is loaded with an average weight play again after a short distance.
and used under favorable conditions, the dis‐
tance for which it may be safe to drive may be up Sudden tire pressure loss
to 50 miles/80 km. The system cannot indicate sudden serious tire
damage caused by external circumstances.
Vehicle handling with damaged tires
Vehicles driven with a damaged tire will handle Failure to perform a reset
differently, potentially leading to conditions such Tires with special approval: the system will not
as the following: function correctly if a reset was not performed,
▷ Greater likelihood of swerving off course. for example a flat tire may be indicated although
▷ Longer braking distances. the tire inflation pressures are correct.
▷ Changed self-steering properties.
Malfunction
Modify your driving style. Avoid abrupt steering
maneuvers or driving over obstacles, for instance
Message
curbs or potholes.
The yellow warning light flashes and is
Final tire failure then illuminated continuously. A Check
Vibrations or loud noises while driving can indi‐ Control message is displayed. It may not
cate the final failure of a tire. be possible to identify tire pressure losses.
Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of the

tire could come loose and cause an accident. Measure
Do not continue driving. Contact a dealer’s serv‐ ▷ A wheel without TPM wheel electronics, such
ice center or another qualified service center or as an emergency wheel, is mounted: have
repair shop. the wheels checked, if needed.
▷ Malfunction: have the system checked.
▷ Interference caused by systems or devices
with the same radio frequency: after leaving
354
the area of the interference, the system auto‐ tect or signal low tire pressure as intended.
matically becomes active again. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of
▷ For tires with special approval: the system reasons, including the installation of replacement
was unable to complete the reset. Perform a or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that
system reset again. prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Al‐
ways check the TPMS malfunction telltale after
Declaration according to NHTSA/ replacing one or more tires or wheels on your ve‐
hicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate
FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure
tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to
Monitoring System function properly.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided) should
be checked monthly when cold and inflated to
the inflation pressure recommended by the vehi‐ FTM Flat Tire Monitor
cle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire in‐
flation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of
a different size than the size indicated on the ve‐
Concept
hicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you The system detects tire inflation pressure loss
should determine the proper tire inflation pres‐ on the basis of rotation speed differences be‐
sure for those tires.) As an added safety feature, tween the individual wheels while driving.
your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pres‐ In the event of a tire inflation pressure loss, the
sure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates diameter and therefore the rotational speed of
a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of the corresponding wheel changes. The differ‐
your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accord‐ ence will be detected and reported as a flat tire.
ingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illumi‐
The system does not measure the actual infla‐
nates, you should stop and check your tires as
tion pressure in the tires.
soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper
pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated
tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to
tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel effi‐ The following conditions must be met for the
ciency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehi‐ system; otherwise, reliable flagging of a loss of
cle's handling and stopping ability. Please note tire inflation pressure is not assured:
that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire ▷ After a tire or wheel replacement, an initializa‐
maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility tion was performed with the correct tire infla‐
to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under- tion pressure.
inflation has not reached the level to trigger illu‐
▷ After the tire pressure was adjusted to a new
mination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
value, an initialization was performed.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the
system is not operating properly. The TPMS
Status display
malfunction indicator is combined with the low The current status of the flat tire monitor can be
tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a displayed, for instance whether the RPA is active.
malfunction, the telltale will flash for approxi‐ Via iDrive:
mately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon 1. "CAR"
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the mal‐ 2. "Vehicle status"
function exists. When the malfunction indicator is 3. "Flat Tire Monitor"
illuminated, the system may not be able to de‐
355
The status is displayed. Safety information
Initialization required WARNING

An initialization must be performed in the follow‐
A damaged regular tire with low or missing tire
ing situations:
inflation pressure impacts handling, such as
▷ After the tire inflation pressure has been ad‐ steering and braking response. Run-flat tires
justed. can maintain limited stability. There is a risk of
▷ After a tire or wheel replacement. an accident. Do not continue driving if the vehi‐
Performing initialization formation on run-flat tires and continued driving
with these tires.
When initializing, the set tire inflation pressures
serve as reference values in order to detect a flat
tire. Initialization is started by confirming the tire Indication of a flat tire
inflation pressures.
Do not initialize the system when driving with
snow chains.
Via iDrive: In addition, a symbol with a Check Control mes‐
sage appears on the Control Display.
1. "CAR"
2. "Vehicle status" Symbol Possible cause
3. "Flat Tire Monitor" There is a flat tire or a major loss in
4. Switch on drive-ready state and do not drive tire inflation pressure.
off.
5. Start the initialization with: "Perform reset" Measure
6. Drive away. 1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.
The initialization is completed while driving, Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
which can be interrupted at any time. vers.
The initialization automatically continues when 2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with nor‐
driving resumes. mal tires or run-flat tires.
Run-flat tires, refer to page 342, are labeled
Messages with a circular symbol containing the letters
RSC marked on the tire's sidewall.
General information
When a flat tire is indicated, DSC Dynamic Sta‐ Actions in the event of a flat tire
bility Control is switched on, if needed.
Normal tires
1. Identify the damaged tire.
To do this, check the tire inflation pressure in
all four tires, for instance using the tire pres‐
sure gage of a flat tire kit.
356
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is Continued driving with a flat tire
correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not have Follow the following when continuing to drive
been initialized. In this case, initialize the sys‐ with a damaged tire:
tem.
1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
If identification of flat tire damage is not pos‐
vers.
sible, please contact a dealer’s service center
or another qualified service center or repair 2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
shop. 3. Check the tire inflation pressure in all four
2. Repair the flat tire, e.g., with a flat tire kit or by tires at the next opportunity.
changing the wheel. If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is
correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not have
Run-flat tires been initialized. In this case, initialize the sys‐
tem.
Safety information
Possible driving range with a
depressurized tire
WARNING
The distance for which it may be possible to
Your vehicle handles differently with a run-flat
drive safely varies depending on how the vehicle
is loaded and used, e.g., speed, road conditions,
external temperature. The driving range may be
less but may also be more if an economical driv‐
ing style is used.
speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. If the vehicle is loaded with an average weight
and used under favorable conditions, the dis‐
tance for which it may be safe to drive may be up
to 50 miles/80 km.
WARNING
Heavy trailers can start swinging when continu‐ Vehicle handling with damaged tires
ing to drive with a flat tire. There is a risk of ac‐
Vehicles driven with a damaged tire will handle
cidents or risk of damage to property. Do not
differently, potentially leading to conditions such
exceed a speed of 35 mph/60 km/h when driv‐
as the following:
ing with a trailer and a flat tire. Immediately
brake in the case of swinging. Apply necessary ▷ Greater likelihood of swerving off course.
steering corrections as carefully as possible. ▷ Longer braking distances.
▷ Changed self-steering properties.
Maximum speed Modify your driving style. Avoid abrupt steering

maneuvers or driving over obstacles, for instance
You may continue driving with a damaged tire at
curbs or potholes.
speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.
Final tire failure
Vibrations or loud noises while driving can indi‐
cate the final failure of a tire.
Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of the
tire could come loose and cause an accident.
357
Do not continue driving. Contact a dealer’s serv‐ life. If the vehicle is raised, do not lie under the
ice center or another qualified service center or vehicle and do not start the engine.
repair shop.
System limits DANGER

The system could be delayed or malfunction in Supports such as wooden blocks under the ve‐
the following situations: hicle jack reduce the capacity of the vehicle
▷ A natural, even tire inflation pressure loss in jack to bear weight. They have the potential to
all four tires will not be recognized. Therefore, exert too much strain on the vehicle jack, caus‐
check the tire inflation pressure regularly. ing it to tip over and the vehicle to fall. There is
a risk of injuries or danger to life. Do not place
▷ Sudden serious tire damage caused by exter‐
supports under the vehicle jack.
nal circumstances cannot be recognized in
advance.
▷ When the system has not been initialized.
WARNING
▷ When driving on a snowy or slippery road sur‐
face. The jack, issued by the vehicle manufacturer, is
provided in order to perform a wheel change in
▷ Sporty driving style: spinning traction wheels,
the event of a breakdown. The jack is not de‐
high lateral acceleration (drifting).
signed for frequent use; for example, changing
▷ When driving with snow chains. from summer to winter tires. Using the jack fre‐
quently may cause it to become jammed or
damaged. There is a risk of injury and risk of
Changing wheels/tires damage to property. Only use the jack to attach
an emergency or spare wheel in the event of a
General information breakdown.
When using run-flat tires or a flat tire kit, a wheel

does not always need to be changed immedi‐
ately when there is a loss of tire inflation pressure WARNING
due to a flat tire. On soft, uneven or slippery ground, for example
If needed, the tools for changing wheels are snow, ice, tiles, etc., the vehicle jack can slip
available as accessories from a dealer’s service away. There is a risk of injury. If possible,
center or another qualified service center or re‐ change the wheel on a flat, solid, and slip-re‐
pair shop. sistant surface.
Safety information
WARNING
DANGER The vehicle jack is optimized for lifting the vehi‐

cle and for the jacking points on the vehicle
The vehicle jack is only provided for short-term only. There is a risk of injury. Do not lift any
lifting of the vehicle for wheel changes. Even if other vehicle or cargo using the vehicle jack.
all safety measures are observed, there is a risk
of the raised vehicle falling, if the vehicle jack
tips over. There is a risk of injuries or danger to
358
On a slight downhill gradient

WARNING
If the vehicle jack is not inserted into the jacking
point provided for this purpose, the vehicle may
be damaged or the vehicle jack may slip when
it is being cranked up. There is a risk of injury or
risk of damage to property. When cranking up
the vehicle jack, ensure that it is inserted in the
jacking point next to the wheel housing.
If you need to change a wheel on a slight down‐

WARNING hill grade, place chocks and other suitable ob‐
A vehicle that is raised on a vehicle jack may fall jects, for instance a rock, under the wheels of
off of the jack if lateral forces are exerted on it. both the front and rear axles against the rolling
There is a risk of injury and risk of damage to direction.
property. While the vehicle is raised, do not ex‐
ert lateral forces on the vehicle or pull abruptly
on the vehicle. Have a stuck wheel removed by
Lug bolt lock
a dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop. Concept
The wheel lug bolts have a special coding. The
lug bolts can only be released with the adapter
Securing the vehicle against which matches the coding.
rolling
Overview
General information The adapter of the lug bolt lock is in the onboard
The vehicle manufacturer recommends to addi‐ vehicle tool kit or in a storage compartment close
tionally secure the vehicle against rolling away to the onboard vehicle tool kit.
when changing a wheel.
On a level surface
▷ Lug bolt, arrow 1.

▷ Adapter, arrow 2.
Place wheel chocks or other suitable objects in

front and behind the wheel that is diagonal to the
Unscrewing
wheel to be changed. 1. Attach the adapter to the lug bolt.
2. Unscrew the lug bolt.
359
3. Remove the adapter after unscrewing the lug Jacking points for the vehicle
bolt. jack
Screwing on
1. Attach the adapter to the lug bolt. If neces‐
sary, turn the adapter until it fits on the lug
bolt.
2. Screw on the lug bolt. The tightening torque
is 140 Nm.
3. Remove the adapter and stow it after screw‐
ing on the lug bolt.
The jacking points for the vehicle jack are lo‐
Preparing the vehicle cated at the indicated positions.
▷ Park the vehicle on solid and non-slip ground
at a safe distance from traffic.
▷ Switch on the hazard warning system.
▷ Engage a gear or move the selector lever to
position P.
▷ As soon as permitted by the traffic flow, have
all vehicle occupants get out of the vehicle
and ensure that they remain outside the im‐
mediate area in a safe place, such as behind a
guardrail.
▷ Depending on the vehicle equipment, get
wheel change tools and, if necessary, the
emergency wheel from the vehicle.
▷ If necessary, set up a warning triangle or port‐
able hazard warning light at an appropriate
distance.
▷ Secure the vehicle additionally against rolling.
▷ Loosen the lug bolts a half turn.
▷ Deactivate the air suspension level adjust‐
ment, refer to page 262.
360
Jacking up the vehicle 3. Extend the vehicle jack by turning the vehicle
jack crank or lever clockwise.
WARNING
Hands and fingers can be jammed when using
the vehicle jack. There is a risk of injury. Com‐
ply with the described hand position and do not
change this position while using the vehicle
jack.
1. Hold the vehicle jack with one hand, arrow 1,

and grasp the vehicle jack crank or lever with
your other hand, arrow 2. 4. Take your hand away from the vehicle jack as
soon as the vehicle jack is under load and
continue turning the vehicle jack crank or
lever with one hand.
5. Make sure that the vehicle jack foot stands
vertically and at a right angle beneath the
jacking point.
2. Insert the vehicle jack into the rectangular re‐

cess of the jacking point closest to the wheel
to be changed.
6. Make sure that the vehicle jack foot stands

vertically and perpendicularly beneath the
jacking point after extending the vehicle jack.
7. Crank the vehicle up, until the vehicle jack is

with the entire surface on the ground and the
relevant wheel is maximum 1.2 inches/3 cm
above ground.
361
Mounting a wheel 5. Check to make sure the lug bolts are tight
with a calibrated torque wrench.
6. Have the damaged tire replaced at the near‐
WARNING
est dealer’s service center or another quali‐
Unsuitable wheel studs, such as single-section fied service center or repair shop.
wheel studs, may loosen or come off. The
wheel may come loose during driving. There is
a risk of an accident. Use only two-section Emergency wheel
wheel studs that have been categorized as suit‐
able for the respective wheel type by the man‐
ufacturer of the vehicle. Concept
In the event of a flat tire, the emergency wheel
Mount one emergency wheel only, as required. can be used in place of the wheel with the defec‐
tive tire. The emergency wheel is only intended
1. Unscrew the lug bolts. for temporary use until the defective tire/wheel
2. Remove the wheel. has been replaced.
3. Put the new wheel or emergency wheel on
and screw in at least two lug bolts in a cross‐ General information
wise pattern until hand-tight. Mount one emergency wheel only.
If non-original light-alloy wheels of the vehicle Also check the tire inflation pressure of the
manufacturer are mounted, the accompany‐ emergency wheel in the cargo area regularly, and
ing lug bolts may have to be used as well. correct it as needed.
4. Hand-tighten the remaining lug bolts and
tighten all lug bolts well in a crosswise pat‐ Safety information
tern.
5. Turn the vehicle jack crank counterclockwise
WARNING
to retract the vehicle jack and lower the vehi‐
cle. The emergency wheel has particular dimen‐
sions. When driving with an emergency wheel,
6. Remove the vehicle jack and stow it securely.
changed driving properties may occur, for in‐
stance reduced lane stability when braking, lon‐
After the wheel change ger braking distance, and changed self-steering
1. Tighten the lug bolts crosswise. The tighten‐ properties in the limit area. There is a risk of an
ing torque is 101 lbs ft/140 Nm. accident. Drive moderately and do not exceed a
2. Stow the nonworking wheel in the cargo area, speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
if necessary.
The nonworking wheel cannot be stored un‐
der the cargo floor panel because of its size.
3. Check tire inflation pressure at the next op‐
portunity and correct as needed.
4. Reinitialize the run-flat tires.
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM.
362
Overview Inserting the emergency wheel
1. Depending on the vehicle equipment:

press the button. The electric cargo cover
travels up.
3. Open the lower tailgate.
4. Place the emergency wheel in the storage
well.
5. Position the retaining plate.
The emergency wheel and the wheel change
6. Screw on and tighten the butterfly screw.
tools are located in the cargo area under the
cargo floor panel. 7. Insert the tool holder.
8. Depending on the vehicle equipment: insert
the crossmember and screw it tight with the
Removing the emergency wheel
wingnuts.
1. Depending on the vehicle equipment: 9. Push the cargo floor panel downward.
press the button. The electric cargo cover
travels up.
3. Depending on the equipment version: re‐
move the crossmember. For this purpose, re‐
move the wingnuts on both sides of the
crossmember.
4. Remove the tool holder from the emergency
wheel.
5. Unscrew the butterfly screw, arrow 1.
6. Remove retaining plate, arrow 2.

7. If necessary, open the lower tailgate.
8. Remove the emergency wheel from the stor‐
age well.
363
MOBILITY Engine compartment
Engine compartment
Overview
1 Filler neck for washer fluid 5 Gasoline engine only: coolant reservoir, auxili‐
2 Jump-starting, negative battery terminal ary cooling
3 Jump-starting, positive battery terminal 6 Oil filler neck
4 Coolant reservoir, engine 7 Vehicle identification number
364
Engine compartment MOBILITY
Hood
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when opening and
Safety information closing the hood. There is a risk of injury. Make
sure that the area of movement of the hood is
WARNING clear during opening and closing.
Improperly executed work in the engine com‐
partment can damage vehicle components and
impair vehicle functions. There is a risk of per‐ NOTICE
sonal and property damage. The manufacturer Folded-away wipers can be jammed when the
of your vehicle recommends that, in the effort hood is opened. There is a risk of damage to
to avoid such risks, work in the engine com‐ property. Make sure that the wipers with the
partment be performed by a dealer’s service wiper blades mounted are folded down onto
center or another qualified service center or re‐ the windshield before opening the hood.
pair shop.
NOTICE
WARNING
When the hood is closed, it must engage on
The engine compartment accommodates mov‐ both sides. Pressing again can damage the
ing components. Certain components in the hood. There is a risk of damage to property.
engine compartment can also move with the Open the hood again and then close it energet‐
vehicle switched off, for instance the radiator ically. Avoid pressing again.
fan. There is a risk of injury. Do not reach into
the area of moving parts. Keep articles of cloth‐
ing and hair away from moving parts. Opening
1. Pull lever, arrow 1.
Hood is unlocked.
WARNING
There are protruding parts, for instance locking
hook, on the inside of the hood. There is a risk
of injury. If the hood is open, pay attention to
protruding parts and keep clear of these areas.
WARNING
An incorrectly locked hood can open while driv‐
ing and restrict visibility. There is a risk of an ac‐
2. After the lever is released, pull the lever again,
cident. Stop immediately and correctly close
arrow 2.
the hood.
Hood can be opened.
3. Be careful of protruding parts on the hood.
365
MOBILITY Engine compartment
Closing
Energetically close the hood from approx.

20 in/50 cm.
The hood must engage on both sides.
366
Operating materials MOBILITY
Operating materials
options
CAUTION
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ The use of poor-quality fuels may result in
cific and optional features offered with the series. harmful engine deposits or damage. Addition‐
It also describes features and functions that are ally, problems relating to drivability, starting and
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due stalling, especially under certain environmental
to the selected options or country versions. This conditions such as high ambient temperature
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ and high altitude, may occur.
tems. When using these functions and systems, If drivability problems are encountered, we rec‐
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ ommend switching to a high quality gasoline
served. brand and a higher octane grade — AKI num‐
ber — for a few tank fills. To avoid harmful en‐
gine deposits, it is highly recommended to pur‐
Fuel recommendation chase gasoline from Top Tier retailers.
Failure to comply with these recommendations
General information may result in the need for unscheduled mainte‐
Depending on the region, many gas stations sell nance.
fuel that has been customized to winter or
summer conditions. Fuel that is available in win‐
ter, for instance helps make a cold start easier. NOTICE
Even small quantities of the wrong fuel or
Gasoline wrong fuel additives can damage the fuel sys‐
tem and engine. Furthermore, the catalytic
General information converter is permanently damaged. There is a
For the best fuel efficiency, the gasoline should risk of damage to property. Do not refuel or add
be sulfur-free or very low in sulfur content. the following in the case of gasoline engines:
Fuels that are marked on the gas pump as con‐ ▷ Leaded gasoline.
taining metal must not be used. ▷ Metallic additives, for instance manganese
Fuels with a maximum ethanol content of 10 %, or iron.
i. e., E10, may be used for refueling. Do not press the Start/Stop button after refuel‐
Ethanol should meet the following quality stan‐ ing with the wrong fuel. Contact a dealer’s serv‐
dards: ice center or another qualified service center or
repair shop.
US: ASTM 4806–xx
CAN: CGSB-3.511–xx
xx: comply with the current standard in each
case.
367
MOBILITY Operating materials
Therefore, regularly check the engine oil level af‐

NOTICE ter refueling by taking a detailed measurement.
Incorrect fuels can damage the fuel system and The engine oil consumption can increase in the
the engine. There is a risk of damage to prop‐ following situations, for example:
erty. Do not use fuels with a higher percentage ▷ Sporty driving style.
of ethanol than recommended. Do not refuel
▷ Break-in of the engine.
with fuels containing methanol, e.g. M5 to
M100. ▷ Idling of the engine.
▷ With use of engine oil types that are classified
as not suitable.
NOTICE Different Check Control messages appear on the
Fuel that does not comply with the minimum Control Display depending on the engine oil
quality can compromise engine function or level.
cause engine damage. There is a risk of dam‐
age to property. Do not fill with fuel that does Safety information
not comply with the minimum quality.
NOTICE
Recommended fuel grade An engine oil level that is too low causes en‐
gine damage. There is a risk of damage to
BMW recommends AKI 91.
property. Immediately add engine oil.
Minimum fuel grade

BMW recommends AKI 89.
NOTICE
If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI Rating,
Too much engine oil can damage the engine or
the engine may produce knocking sounds when
the catalytic converter. There is a risk of dam‐
starting at high external temperatures. This has
age to property. Do not add too much engine
no effect on the engine life.
oil. When too much engine oil is added, have
the engine oil level corrected by a dealer’s serv‐
ice center or another qualified service center or
repair shop.
Electronic oil measurement
General information
The electronic oil measurement has two measur‐
ing principles:
Engine oil ▷ Monitoring.

▷ Detailed measurement.
General information When making frequent short-distance trips or

using a dynamic driving style, for instance when
The engine oil consumption is dependent on taking curves aggressively, regularly perform a
your driving style and driving conditions. detailed measurement.
368
Monitoring Functional requirements

▷ Vehicle is parked in a horizontal position.
Concept
▷ Selector lever in selector lever position N or P
The engine oil level is monitored electronically and accelerator pedal not depressed.
while driving and can be shown on the Control
▷ Engine is running and is at operating temper‐
Display.
ature.
If the engine oil level is outside its permissible
operating range, a Check Control message is Performing a detailed measurement
displayed.
Via iDrive:
A red indicator light indicates that the en‐
1. "CAR"
gine oil pressure is too low.
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Engine oil level"
4. "Engine oil measurement"
A current measured value is available after ap‐
prox. 30 minutes of normal driving. 5. "Start measurement"
The engine oil level is checked and displayed via
Displaying the engine oil level a scale.
Via iDrive:
Adding engine oil
1. "CAR"
2. "Vehicle status" General information
3. "Engine oil level" Only add engine oil when the message is dis‐
The engine oil level is displayed. played in the instrument cluster. The quantity to
be added is indicated in the message shown on
System limits the Control Display.
When making frequent short-distance trips or Only add suitable types of engine oil, refer to
using a dynamic driving style, it may not be pos‐ page 370.
sible to calculate a measured value. In this case, Safely park the vehicle and switch off drive-ready
the measured value for the last, sufficiently long state before adding engine oil.
trip is displayed.
Take care not to add too much engine oil.
Detailed measurement
Safety information
Concept
The engine oil level is checked when the vehicle WARNING
is stationary and displayed via a scale. Operating materials, for instance oils, greases,
If the engine oil level is outside its permissible coolants, fuels, can contain harmful ingredients.
operating range, a Check Control message is There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Fol‐
displayed. low the instructions on the containers. Avoid
the contact of articles of clothing, skin or eyes
General information with operating materials. Do not refill operating
During the measurement, the idle speed is in‐
creased somewhat.
369
materials into different bottles. Store operating Engine oil types to add
materials out of reach of children.
General information
The engine oil quality is critical for the life of the
NOTICE engine.
An engine oil level that is too low causes en‐ Only add the types of engine oil which are listed.
property. Immediately add engine oil. Safety information
NOTICE
NOTICE
Oil additives can damage the engine. There is a
Too much engine oil can damage the engine or
risk of damage to property. Do not use oil addi‐
the catalytic converter. There is a risk of dam‐
tives.
age to property. Do not add too much engine
oil. When too much engine oil is added, have
the engine oil level corrected by a dealer’s serv‐
ice center or another qualified service center or NOTICE
repair shop. Incorrect engine oil can cause malfunctions in
the engine or damage it. There is a risk of dam‐
age to property. When selecting an engine oil,
Overview make sure that the engine oil has the correct oil
The oil filler neck is located in the engine com‐ rating.
partment, refer to page 364.
Adding engine oil Suitable engine oil types

1. Open the hood, refer to page 365. Add engine oils that meet the following oil rating
standards:
2. Open the lid counterclockwise.
Gasoline engine
BMW Longlife-01 FE.
BMW Longlife-14 FE+.
BMW Longlife-17 FE+.
The BMW Longlife-14 FE+ and BMW Long‐

life-17 FE+ oil ratings are not suitable for the 50i
gasoline engine.
3. Add engine oil.
4. Close the cap. Alternative engine oil types
If an engine oil suitable for continuous use is not
available, up to 1 US quart/liter of an engine oil
with the following oil rating can be added:
370
Oil rating Coolant

API SL.
General information
API SM.
Coolant consists of water and additives.
API SN.
Not all commercially available additives are suita‐
ble for the vehicle. Information about suitable ad‐
Viscosity grades ditives is available from a dealer’s service center
or another qualified service center or repair shop.
Viscosity grades
SAE 0W-20. Safety information

SAE 0W-30.
WARNING
Viscosity grade SAE 0W-20 is not suitable for With the engine hot and the cooling system
the 50i gasoline engine. open, coolant can escape and lead to scalding.
There is a risk of injury. Only open the cooling
More information about suitable oil ratings and system with the engine cooled down.
viscosity grades of engine oils can be requested
from a dealer’s service center or another quali‐
fied service center or repair shop.
WARNING
Engine oil change Additives are harmful and incorrect additives
can damage the engine. There is a risk of injury
and risk of damage to property. Do not allow
NOTICE additives to come into contact with skin, eyes
Engine oil that is not changed in timely fashion or articles of clothing. Use suitable additives
can cause increased engine wear and thus en‐ only.
property. Do not exceed the service data indi‐
cated in the vehicle. Coolant level
The vehicle manufacturer recommends that you General information

have a dealer’s service center or another quali‐ Vehicles with gasoline engine feature two cool‐
fied service center or repair shop change the en‐ ing circuits. Always check the coolant levels of
gine oil. both coolant reservoirs and refill as needed.
The coolant level is indicated using minimum
and maximum markings in the filler neck of the
coolant reservoir.
Depending on the engine installation, the coolant
reservoir is located on the right side or the left
side of the engine compartment, refer to
page 364.
371
Checking the coolant level Washer fluid

1. Let the engine cool.
2. Open the hood, refer to page 365. General information
3. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir slightly All washer nozzles are supplied from one reser‐
counterclockwise to allow any excess pres‐ voir.
sure to dissipate, then open it.
Use a mixture of tap water and windshield
4. Open the coolant reservoir lid. washer concentrate. If desired, a windshield
5. The coolant level is correct if it lies between washer concentrate containing antifreeze can be
the minimum and maximum marks in the filler used.
neck. Recommended minimum fill quantity:
0.2 US gal/1 liter.
Safety information
WARNING
Some antifreeze agents can contain harmful
substances and are flammable. There is a risk
of fire and a risk of injury. Follow the instruc‐
tions on the containers. Keep antifreeze away
6. Close the cap.
from ignition sources. Do not refill operating
materials into different bottles. Store operating
Adding materials out of reach of children.
1. Let the engine cool. United States: the washer fluid mixture ratio is
2. Open the hood, refer to page 365. regulated by the U.S. EPA and many individual
3. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir slightly states; do not exceed the allowable washer fluid
counterclockwise to allow any excess pres‐ dilution ratio limits that apply. Follow the usage
sure to dissipate, then open it. instructions on the washer fluid container.
4. Open the coolant reservoir lid. Use of BMW’s Windshield Washer Concentrate
or the equivalent is recommended.
5. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant up to
the specified level; do not overfill.
6. Close the cap.
WARNING
7. Have the cause of the coolant loss eliminated
Washer fluid can ignite and catch fire on con‐
as soon as possible.
tact with hot engine parts. There is a risk of in‐
jury or risk of damage to property. Only add
Disposal washer fluid when the engine is cooled down.
Comply with the relevant environmental Next, fully close the lid of the washer fluid res‐
protection regulations when disposing of ervoir.
coolant and coolant additives.
372
NOTICE
Silicon-containing additives in the washer fluid
for the water-repelling effect on the windows
can lead to damage to the washing system.
add silicon-containing additives to the washer
fluid.
NOTICE
Mixing different windshield washer concen‐
trates or antifreeze can damage the washing
system. There is a risk of damage to property.
Do not mix different windshield washer concen‐
trates or antifreeze. Follow the information and
mixing ratios provided on the containers.
Overview
The washer fluid reservoir is located in the en‐

gine compartment.
Malfunction
The use of undiluted windshield washer concen‐
trate or alcohol-based antifreeze can lead to in‐
correct readings at temperatures below
+5 ℉/-15 ℃.
373
MOBILITY Maintenance
Maintenance
Vehicle features and General information
options Information on service requirements, refer to
page 159, can be displayed on the Control Dis‐
play.
It also describes features and functions that are Service data in the remote
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due control
to the selected options or country versions. This Information on the required maintenance is con‐
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ tinuously stored in the remote control. The deal‐
tems. When using these functions and systems, er’s service center can read this data out and
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ suggest a maintenance scope for the vehicle.
served.
Therefore, hand the service advisor the remote
control with which the vehicle was driven most
recently.
BMW maintenance system
The maintenance system indicates required
Storage periods
maintenance measures, and thereby provides Storage periods during which the vehicle battery
support in maintaining road safety and the opera‐ was disconnected are not taken into account.
tional reliability of the vehicle. If this occurs, have a dealer's service center or
In some cases, scopes and intervals of the main‐ another qualified service center or repair shop
tenance system may vary according to the coun‐ update the time-dependent maintenance proce‐
try version. Replacement work, spare parts, fuels dures, such as checking brake fluid and, if neces‐
and lubricants, and wear materials are calculated sary, changing the engine oil and the microfilter/
separately. Further information is available from a activated-charcoal filter.
Service and Warranty
Information Booklet for US
Condition Based Service
models and Warranty and
CBS
Service Guide Booklet for
Concept Canadian models
Sensors and special algorithms take into account
Please consult your Service and Warranty Infor‐
the driving conditions of the vehicle. CBS uses
mation Booklet for US models and Warranty and
these to calculate the need for maintenance.
Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models for
The system makes it possible to adapt the additional information on service requirements.
amount of maintenance corresponding to your
user profile.
that maintenance and repair be performed by a
374
Maintenance MOBILITY
ice center or repair shop. Records of regular Position

maintenance and repair work should be retained.
Socket for OBD Onboard

Diagnosis
General information
Devices connected to the OBD socket trigger
the alarm system when the vehicle is locked. Re‐
move any devices connected at the OBD socket There is an OBD socket on the driver's side for
before locking the vehicle. checking the primary components in the vehi‐
cle's emissions.
Safety information
Emissions
NOTICE ▷ The warning light lights up:
The socket for Onboard Diagnosis is an intri‐ Emissions are deteriorating. Have the
cate component intended to be used in con‐ vehicle checked as soon as possible.
junction with specialized equipment to check
▷ The warning light flashes under certain cir‐
the vehicle’s primary emissions system. Im‐
cumstances:
proper use of the socket for Onboard Diagno‐
sis, or contact with the socket for Onboard Di‐ This indicates that there is excessive misfiring
agnosis for other than its intended purpose, in the engine.
can cause vehicle malfunctions and creates Reduce the vehicle speed and have the sys‐
risks of personal and property damage. Given tem checked immediately; otherwise, serious
the foregoing, the manufacture of your vehicle engine misfiring within a brief period can seri‐
strongly recommends that access to the socket ously damage emission control components,
for Onboard Diagnosis be limited to a dealer's in particular the catalytic converter.
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop or other persons that have
the specialized training and equipment for pur‐
poses of properly utilizing the socket for On‐
board Diagnosis.
375
MOBILITY Replacing components
Replacing components
Vehicle features and not fold or switch on the wiper without a wiper
blade installed.
options
NOTICE
It also describes features and functions that are Folded-away wipers can be jammed when the
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due hood is opened. There is a risk of damage to
to the selected options or country versions. This property. Make sure that the wipers with the
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ wiper blades mounted are folded down onto
tems. When using these functions and systems, the windshield before opening the hood.
served.
Replacing the front wiper blades
1. To change the wiper blades, fold up the wiper
Onboard vehicle tool kit arms, refer to page 142.
2. Lift the wiper all the way off of the windshield.
The onboard vehicle tool kit is located under the

cargo floor panel. 3. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull out the
wiper blade, arrow 2.
Wiper blades
Safety information
NOTICE
The window may sustain damage if the wiper
falls onto it without the wiper blade installed.
There is a risk of damage to property. Hold the 4. Insert the new wiper blade and press it on un‐
wiper firmly when changing the wiper blade. Do til it you hear it snap into the holder.
5. Fold down the wipers.
376
Replacing components MOBILITY
Replacing the rear wiper blade Safety information

The wiper blade is engaged at the end of the
wiper arm. WARNING
1. Lift off the wiper fully and pull off the wiper Focused laser light can irritate or permanently
blade, arrow. damage the retina of the eye. There is a risk of
injury. The manufacturer of your vehicle recom‐
mends that the work on the lighting system in‐
cluding bulb replacement be performed by a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
WARNING
Intensive brightness can irritate or damage the
2. Attach a new wiper blade. The wiper blade retina of the eye. There is a risk of injury. Do not
must engage audibly. look directly into the headlights or other light
sources. Do not remove the LED covers.
3. Fold down the wipers.
Headlight glass
Lights and bulbs
Condensation can form on the inside of the
headlight glass in cool or humid weather. When
General information driving with the lights switched on, the conden‐
Lights and bulbs make an essential contribution sation evaporates after a short time. The head‐
to vehicle safety. light glass does not need to be changed.
All headlights and lights are made using LED or If despite driving with the headlights switched on,
laser technology. increasing humidity forms, for instance water
Some items of equipment use light-emitting di‐ droplets in the light, have the headlights
odes installed behind a cover as a light source. checked.
These light-emitting diodes are related to con‐
ventional lasers and are officially designated as
Class 1 light-emitting diodes. Vehicle battery
The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends
that you let a dealer’s service center or another General information
qualified service center or repair shop perform The battery is maintenance-free.
the work in case of a malfunction.
More information about the battery can be re‐
quested from a dealer’s service center or another
that you have a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop register
the vehicle battery to the vehicle after the battery
has been replaced. Once the battery has been
377
MOBILITY Replacing components
registered again, all comfort features will be avail‐ Starting aid terminals
able without restriction and any Check Control In the vehicle, only charge the battery via the
messages displayed which relate to comfort fea‐ starting aid terminals, refer to page 384, in the
tures will disappear. engine compartment with the engine off.
Safety information Power failure

After a power loss, some equipment needs to be
WARNING newly initialized or individual settings updated, for
Vehicle batteries that are not compatible can example:
damage vehicle systems and impair vehicle ▷ Memory function: store the positions again.
functions. There is a risk of personal and prop‐ ▷ Time: update.
erty damage. Only vehicle batteries that are
compatible with your vehicle type should be in‐ ▷ Date: update.
stalled in your vehicle. Information on compati‐ ▷ Glass sunroof: initialize the system.
ble vehicle batteries is available at your dealer’s
service center. Disposing of old batteries
Have old batteries disposed of by a deal‐
er’s service center or another qualified
Charging the battery
service center or repair shop or take
them to a collection point.
General information
Maintain the battery in an upright position for
Make sure that the battery is always sufficiently
transport and storage. Secure the battery so that
charged to guarantee that the battery remains
it does not tip over during transport.
usable for its full service life.
A discharged battery is indicated by a red
indicator light.
Fuses
The battery may need to be charged in the fol‐
lowing cases: Safety information
▷ When making frequent short-distance drives.
▷ If the vehicle is not used for more than a WARNING
month. Incorrect and repaired fuses can overload elec‐
trical lines and components. There is a risk of
Safety information fire. Never attempt to repair a blown fuse. Do
not replace a nonworking fuse with a substitute
NOTICE of another color or amperage rating.
Battery chargers for the vehicle battery can

work with high voltages and currents, which
Accessing the fuses
means that the 12 volt on-board network can
be overloaded or damaged. There is a risk of The fuses are located in the cargo area on the
damage to property. Only connect battery right side behind a cover.
chargers for the vehicle battery to the starting
aid terminals in the engine compartment.
378
Replacing components MOBILITY
Press the button, arrow 1, and open the cover,

arrow 2.
Information on the fuse types and locations, as

well as the positions of any other fuse boxes, is
found on a separate sheet in the fuse box.
Replacing fuses
The vehicle manufacturer recommends that you
have a dealer's service center or another quali‐
fied service center or repair shop replace the
fuses.
379
MOBILITY Breakdown assistance
Breakdown assistance
Vehicle features and Warning triangle
options
1. Unlock the cover of the left side panel, ar‐
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ row 1, and fold open, arrow 2.
served.
Hazard warning flashers 2. Take the warning triangle out in the direction
of the car's interior.
The button is located in the center console.

The red light in the button flashes when the haz‐
ard warning flashers are activated.
First-aid kit
General information
Some of the articles have a limited service life.
Check the expiration dates of the contents regu‐
larly and replace any expired items promptly.
380
Breakdown assistance MOBILITY
Storage Functional requirements

1. Unlock the cover of the left side panel, ar‐ ▷ Active ConnectedDrive contract, equipment
row 1, and fold open, arrow 2. version with Intelligent emergency call or
BMW ConnectedDrive services.
▷ Cellular network reception.
Starting Roadside Assistance

If the vehicle is equipped with Teleservices, sup‐
port is offered through Teleservice Diagnosis.
Via iDrive:
2. Remove the first-aid kit. 1. "COM"

2. "BMW Assist"
3. If necessary, "BMW Roadside Assistance"
A voice connection is established.
Teleservice Diagnosis
Teleservice Diagnosis enables the wireless
transmission of detailed vehicle data that is im‐
portant for vehicle diagnosis. This data is trans‐
mitted automatically.
BMW Roadside Assistance Starting Teleservice Help

Depending on the country, Teleservice Help en‐
ables an in-depth diagnosis of the vehicle by
Concept
BMW Roadside Assistance via wireless trans‐
Contact the BMW Group Roadside Assistance if mission.
assistance is needed in the event of a break‐
You can launch Teleservice Help by requesting it
down.
through BMW Roadside Assistance.
General information 1. Park the vehicle in a safe place.

In the event of a breakdown, data on the vehi‐ 2. Set the parking brake.
cle's condition is transmitted to the BMW Road‐ 3. Control Display is switched on.
side Assistance.
4. "Start TeleService Call"
BMW Roadside Assistance can also be con‐
tacted via a Check Control message, refer to
page 154.
381
BMW Accident Assistance Via iDrive:
1. "COM"
Concept 2. "BMW Assist"
BMW Group Accident Assistance can be con‐ 3. "Call BMW Accident Assistance"
tacted if assistance is needed in the event of an Follow the displays on the Control Display. A
accident. voice connection is established.
General information
If the vehicle sensors detect a minor to moder‐ Emergency Request
ately severe accident, which did not trigger any
airbags, a Check Control message appears on Intelligent emergency call
the instrument cluster. In addition, a text mes‐
sage appears on the Control Display. Concept
When BMW Accident Assistance is activated, In case of an emergency, an Emergency Re‐
data on the vehicle's condition is sent to BMW. quest can be triggered automatically by the sys‐
tem or manually.
▷ Active ConnectedDrive contract, equipment General information
version with Intelligent emergency call or Only press the SOS button in an emergency.
BMW ConnectedDrive services.
The Intelligent Assist system establishes a con‐
▷ Cellular network reception. nection with the BMW Response Center.
▷ Standby state is switched on. For technical reasons, the Emergency Request
cannot be guaranteed under unfavorable condi‐
Starting BMW Accident tions.
Assistance
Overview
If an accident is detected
automatically
A text message relating to BMW Accident Assis‐
tance appears on the Control Display.
The connection can be established directly:
"Call BMW Accident Assistance"
The Check Control message for BMW Accident
Assistance can also be called up from the stored
Check Control messages, refer to page 154, for
a certain length of time. SOS button.
Starting manually
BMW Accident Assistance can also be con‐
tacted independently of the automatic accident
detection function. ▷ The Assist system is functional.
382
▷ If the vehicle is equipped with intelligent

emergency call: the SIM card integrated in
Jump-starting
the vehicle has been activated.
General information
Automatic triggering If the battery is discharged, the engine can be
Under certain conditions, for instance if the air‐ started using the battery of another vehicle and
bags trigger, an Emergency Request is automati‐ two jumper cables. Only use jumper cables with
cally initiated immediately after an accident of fully insulated clamp handles.
corresponding severity. Automatic Collision Noti‐
fication is not affected by pressing the SOS but‐ Safety information
ton.
DANGER
Manual triggering
Contact with live components can lead to an
1. Touch the cover.
electric shock. There is a risk of injuries or dan‐
2. Press and hold the SOS button until the LED ger to life. Do not touch any components that
in the area of the button illuminates green. are under voltage.
▷ The LED is illuminated green when an Emer‐
gency Request has been initiated.
If a cancel prompt appears on the Control WARNING
Display, the Emergency Request can be If the jumper cables are connected in the incor‐
aborted. rect order, sparking may occur. There is a risk
If the situation allows, wait in your vehicle until of injury. Pay attention to the correct order dur‐
the voice connection has been established. ing connection.
▷ The LED flashes green when a connection to
the BMW Response Center has been estab‐
lished. NOTICE
The BMW Response Center then makes In the case of body contact between the two
contact with you and takes further steps to vehicles, a short circuit can occur during jump-
help you. starting. There is a risk of damage to property.
Even if you are unable to respond, the BMW Make sure that no body contact occurs.
Response Center can take further steps to
help you under certain circumstances.
Preparation
For this, data is transmitted to the BMW Re‐
sponse Center which serves to determine the 1. Check whether the battery of the other vehi‐
necessary rescue measures. E.g., the current cle has a voltage of 12 volts. The voltage in‐
position of the vehicle, if it can be established. formation can be found on the battery.
Even if you can no longer hear the BMW Re‐ 2. Switch off the engine of the assisting vehicle.
sponse Center through the loudspeakers, the 3. Switch off any electronic systems/power con‐
BMW Response Center may still be able to sumers in both vehicles.
hear you.
The BMW Response Center ends the Emer‐
gency Request.
383
Starting aid terminals battery, or to the corresponding engine or

body ground of assisting vehicle.
5. Attach the second terminal clamp to the neg‐
ative terminal of the battery, or to the corre‐
sponding engine or body ground of the vehi‐
cle to be started.
Starting the engine

Never use spray fluids to start the engine.
1. Start the engine of the assisting vehicle and

The starting aid terminal in the engine compart‐ let it run for several minutes at an increased
ment acts as the battery's positive terminal. idle speed.
Open the cover of the starting aid terminal. 2. Start the engine of the vehicle that is to be
started in the usual way.
If the first starting attempt is not successful,
wait a few minutes before making another at‐
tempt in order to allow the discharged battery
to recharge.
3. Let both engines run for several minutes.
4. Disconnect the jumper cables in the reverse
order.
Check the battery and recharge, if needed.
A special connection on the body acts as the
battery negative terminal.
Tow-starting and towing
Connecting the cables
Before you begin, switch off all unnecessary
Safety information
electronic systems/power consumers, such as
the radio, on the assisting and receiving vehicle. WARNING
1. Open the cover of the starting aid terminal. Due to system limits, individual functions can
malfunction during tow-starting/towing with the
2. Attach one terminal clamp of the positive
jumper cable to the positive terminal of the
battery, or to the corresponding starting aid
terminal of the vehicle providing assistance.
3. Attach the terminal clamp on the other end of
the cable to the positive terminal of the bat‐ Transporting the vehicle
tery, or to the corresponding starting aid ter‐
minal of the vehicle to be started.
General information
4. Attach one terminal clamp of the negative
The vehicle is not permitted to be towed.
jumper cable to the negative terminal of the
384
Safety information If the electrical system has failed, clearly identify

the vehicle being towed by placing a sign or a
warning triangle in the rear window.
NOTICE
The vehicle can be damaged when towing the Safety information
vehicle with a single lifted axle. There is a risk of
damage to property. The vehicle should only be
transported on a loading platform. WARNING
If the approved gross vehicle weight of the tow‐
ing vehicle is lighter than the vehicle to be
NOTICE towed, the tow fitting can tear off or it will not
be possible to control the vehicle's response.
The vehicle can become damaged when lifting
There is a risk of an accident. Make sure that
and securing it.
the gross vehicle weight of the towing vehicle is
There is a risk of damage to property. heavier than the vehicle to be towed.
▷ Lift the vehicle using suitable means.
▷ Do not lift or secure the vehicle by its tow
fitting, body parts, or suspension parts. NOTICE
If the tow bar or tow rope is attached incor‐
rectly, damage to other vehicle parts can occur.
Pushing the vehicle
There is a risk of damage to property. Correctly
To remove a broken-down vehicle from the dan‐ attach the tow bar or tow rope to the tow fitting.
ger area, it can be pushed for a short distance.
Roll or push, refer to page 144, the vehicle.
Tow bar
Tow truck The tow fittings used should be on the same
side on both vehicles.
Should it prove impossible to avoid mounting the
tow bar at an offset angle, please follow the fol‐
lowing:
▷ Maneuvering capability is limited going
around corners.
▷ The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it is
secured with an offset.
The vehicle should only be transported on a Tow rope

loading platform.
When starting to tow the vehicle, make sure that
the tow rope is taut.
Towing other vehicles Use nylon ropes or straps, which will enable the
vehicle to be towed without jerking.
General information
Switch on the hazard warning system, depend‐
ing on local regulations.
385
Tow fitting Screw thread for tow fitting
General information
Press on the mark on the edge of the cover to

push it out.
The screw-in tow fitting should always be carried For covers which have an opening instead of a
in the vehicle. marking, pull the cover out by the opening.
The tow fitting can be screwed in at the front or
rear of the vehicle.
Tow-starting
The tow fitting is located beneath the cargo floor
Do not tow-start the vehicle.
panel.
Start the engine by jump-starting, refer to
▷ Use only the tow fitting provided with the ve‐
page 383, if possible.
hicle and screw it all the way in.
Have the reasons for the starting difficulties cor‐
▷ Use the tow fitting for towing on paved roads
rected by a dealer’s service center or another
only.
▷ Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting, for in‐
stance do not lift the vehicle by the tow fit‐
ting.
Safety information
NOTICE
If the tow fitting is not used as intended, there
may be damage to the vehicle or to the tow fit‐
ting. There is a risk of damage to property. Fol‐
low the notes on using the tow fitting.
386
Care MOBILITY
Care
Vehicle features and Distances and temperature
▷ Maximum temperature: 140 ℉/60 ℃.
options
▷ Minimum distance from sensors, cameras,
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ seals: 12 in/30 cm.
cific and optional features offered with the series. ▷ Minimum distance from glass sunroof:
It also describes features and functions that are 31.5 in/80 cm.
to the selected options or country versions. This Automatic vehicle washes
tems. When using these functions and systems, Safety information
served.
NOTICE
Improper use of automatic vehicle washes can
Washing the vehicle cause damage to the vehicle. There is a risk of
damage to property. Follow the following in‐
General information structions:
Regularly remove foreign objects such as leaves ▷ Give preference to cloth vehicle washes or
in the area below the windshield when the hood those that use soft brushes in order to
is raised. avoid paint damage.
Wash your vehicle frequently, particularly in win‐ ▷ Before driving into the vehicle wash, make
ter. Intense soiling and road salt can damage the sure that the vehicle is not too large.
vehicle. ▷ Avoid vehicle washes with guide rails
higher than 4 in/10 cm to avoid damage to
Steam blaster and high-pressure the chassis.
washer ▷ Observe the tire width of the guide rail to
avoid damage to tires and rims.
Safety information ▷ Fold in exterior mirrors to avoid damage to
the exterior mirrors.
NOTICE ▷ Deactivate the wiper and, if necessary, rain

sensor to avoid damage to the wiper sys‐
When cleaning with high-pressure washers,
tem.
components can be damaged due to the pres‐
sure or temperatures being too high. There is a
risk of damage to property. Maintain sufficient
distance and do not spray too long continu‐
ously. Follow the operating instructions for the
high-pressure washer.
387
MOBILITY Care
Driving into a vehicle wash with a Completely remove all residues on the windows,
Steptronic transmission to minimize loss of visibility due to smearing and
to reduce wiper noises and wiper blade wear.
Safety information
Vehicle care
NOTICE
Selector lever position P is automatically en‐
Vehicle care products
gaged when standby state is switched off.
General information
switch standby state off in vehicle washes.
BMW recommends using vehicle care and
cleaning products from BMW. Suitable care
General information products are available from a dealer’s service
In a vehicle wash, the vehicle must be able to roll center or another qualified service center or re‐
freely. pair shop.
Roll or push the vehicle, refer to page 144.
Safety information
Some vehicle washes do not permit persons in
the vehicle. The vehicle cannot be locked from
the outside when in selector lever position N. A WARNING
signal sounds when an attempt is made to lock Cleansers can contain substances that are dan‐
the vehicle. gerous and harmful to your health. There is a
risk of injury. When cleaning the interior, open
Driving out of a vehicle wash the doors or windows. Only use products in‐
Make sure that the remote control is in the vehi‐ tended for cleaning vehicles. Follow the in‐
cle. structions on the container.
Switch on drive-ready state, refer to page 44.
Vehicle paint
Headlights
Do not rub wet headlights dry and do not use General information
abrasive or acidic cleaning agents. Regular care contributes to driving safety and
Soak areas that have been dirtied, for instance value retention. Environmental influences in
from insects, with shampoo and wash off with areas with elevated air pollution or natural con‐
water. taminants, such as tree resin or pollen can affect
Thaw ice with de-icing spray; do not use an ice the vehicle's paintwork. Tailor the frequency and
scraper. extent of your vehicle care to these influences.
Aggressive substances such as spilled fuel, oil,
After washing the vehicle grease or bird droppings, must be removed im‐
After washing the vehicle, apply the brakes mediately to prevent the finish from being altered
briefly to dry them; otherwise, braking action can or discolored.
be reduced. The heat generated during braking
dries brake discs and brake pads and protects
them against corrosion.
388
Care MOBILITY
Safety information Clean the upholstery down to the seams using

large sweeping motions. Avoid rubbing the ma‐
terial vigorously.
WARNING
Improperly performed work on the vehicle paint Safety information
can lead to a failure or malfunction of the radar
sensors and thereby result in a safety risk.
There is a risk of accidents or risk of damage to NOTICE
property. Have paintwork or paintwork repairs Open Velcro® fasteners on articles of clothing
on bumpers of vehicles with radar sensors per‐ can damage the seat covers. There is a risk of
formed by a dealer’s service center or another damage to property. Ensure that any Velcro®
qualified service center or repair shop only. fasteners are closed.
Matte finish Caring for special components

Only use cleaning and care products suitable for
vehicles with matte finish. Light-alloy wheels
When cleaning the vehicle, use only neutral
Leather care wheel cleaners having a pH value from 5 to 9. Do
Remove dust from the leather regularly, using a not use abrasive cleaning agents or steam jets
cloth or vacuum cleaner. above 140 ℉/60 ℃. Follow the manufacturer's
instructions.
Otherwise, particles of dust and road grime chafe
in pores and folds, and lead to increased wear Aggressive, acidic or alkaline cleaning agents can
and premature degradation of the leather sur‐ destroy the protective layer of adjacent compo‐
face. nents, such as the brake disc.
To guard against discoloration, such as from After cleaning, apply the brakes briefly to dry
clothing, clean leather and provide leather care them. The heat generated during braking dries
roughly every two months. brake discs and brake pads and protects them
against corrosion.
Clean light-colored leather more frequently be‐
cause soiling on such surfaces is substantially
more visible.
Chrome surfaces
Carefully clean Chrome surfaces, especially in
Use leather care products; otherwise, dirt and
case of exposure to road salt, with plenty of wa‐
grease will gradually break down the protective
ter and added cleanser as needed.
layer of the leather surface.
Rubber components
Upholstery material care
Environmental influences can cause surface soil‐
General information ing of rubber parts and a loss of gloss. Use only
water and suitable cleaning agents for cleaning.
Vacuum the upholstery regularly with a vacuum
cleaner. Treat especially worn rubber parts with rubber
care agents at regular intervals. When cleaning
If upholstery is very dirty, for instance with bever‐ rubber seals, do not use any silicon-containing
age stains, use a soft sponge or microfiber cloth vehicle care products in order to avoid damage
with a suitable interior cleaner. or noises.
389
MOBILITY Care
Fine wood parts Carpets and floor mats

Clean fine wood facing and fine wood compo‐
nents only with a moist rag. Then dry with a soft WARNING
cloth.
Objects in the driver's floor area can limit the
pedal distance or block a depressed pedal.
Plastic components There is a risk of an accident. Stow objects in
the vehicle such that they are secured and can‐
NOTICE not enter into the driver's floor area. Use floor
Cleansers that contain alcohol or solvents, such mats that are suitable for the vehicle and can
as lacquer thinners, heavy-duty grease remov‐ be safely attached to the floor. Do not use
ers, fuel, or such, can damage plastic parts. loose floor mats and do not layer several floor
There is a risk of damage to property. Clean mats. Make sure that there is sufficient clear‐
with a microfiber cloth. Dampen cloth lightly ance for the pedals. Ensure that the floor mats
with water. are securely fastened again after they were re‐
moved, for instance for cleaning.
Plastic components are e.g.:
The floor mats can be removed from the car's in‐
▷ Imitation leather surfaces. terior for cleaning.
▷ Roofliner. If the floor carpets are very dirty, clean with a mi‐
▷ Light lenses. crofiber cloth and water or a textile cleaner. To
▷ Matt black spray-coated components. prevent matting of the carpet, rub back and forth
in the direction of travel only.
▷ Painted parts in the car's interior.
Clean with a microfiber cloth. Mount for trailer hitch
Dampen cloth lightly with water. Keep the mount clean.
Do not soak the roofliner. Regularly grease or oil bearings and sliding surfa‐
ces with resin-free greases or oils.
Safety belts
Before using steam cleaners or high pressure
cleaners on the vehicle, remove the ball head
WARNING and insert the cover into the mount.
Chemical cleansers can destroy the safety belt
webbing. Missing protective effect of the safety Sensor/camera lenses
belts. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. To clean sensors and camera lenses, use a cloth
Use only a mild soapy solution for cleaning the moistened with a small amount of glass deter‐
safety belts. gent.
Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action and

thus have a negative impact on safety.
Use only a mild soapy solution for cleaning the
installed belt straps.
Safety belts should only be allowed to retract if
they are dry.
390
Care MOBILITY
Displays, screens, and protective

glass of the Head-up Display
NOTICE
Chemical cleansers, moisture or fluids of any
kind can damage the surface of displays and
screens. There is a risk of damage to property.
Clean with a clean, antistatic microfiber cloth.
NOTICE
The surface of displays can be damaged with
improper cleaning. There is a risk of damage to
property. Avoid pressure that is too high and do
not use any scratching materials.
Clean with a clean, antistatic microfiber cloth.

Clean the protective glass of the Head-up Dis‐
play, refer to page 165, using a microfiber cloth
and commercially available dish-washing soap.
Long-term vehicle storage

When the vehicle is shut down for longer than
three months, special measures must be taken.
Further information is available from a dealer’s
or repair shop.
391
392
REFERENCE
Technical data .......................................................................................... 394
Appendix ................................................................................................... 397
Everything from A to Z ............................................................................ 398
393
REFERENCE Technical data
Technical data
General information
The technical data and specifications in the urement method. Detailed values can be found in
Owner's Manual are used as guidance values. the approval documents, on labels on the vehicle
The vehicle-specific data can deviate from this, or can be obtained from a dealer’s service center
for instance due to the selected special equip‐ or another qualified service center or repair shop.
ment, country version or country-specific meas‐
Dimensions
The dimensions can vary depending on the racks or spoiler. The heights can deviate, for in‐
model version, equipment or country-specific stance due to the selected special equipment,
measurement method. tires, load and chassis version.
The specified heights do not take into account
attached parts, for instance a roof antenna, roof
BMW X5
Width with mirrors in/mm 87.3/2,218
Width without mirrors in/mm 78.9/2,004
Height in/mm 68.7-69/1,744-1,753
Length in/mm 194.3/4,936
Wheelbase in/mm 117.1/2,975
Smallest turning radius diam. ft/m 41.3/12.6
394
Technical data REFERENCE
Weights
X5 xDrive40i with two rows of seats
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 6,162/2,795
Load lbs/kg 849/385
Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,921/1,325
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 3,616/1,640
Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 220/100
X5 xDrive40i with three rows of seats
Load lbs/kg 1,246/565
X5 xDrive50i
Load lbs/kg 871/395
Trailer towing
The trailer load only applies to vehicles with a
factory-installed mount for trailer hitches.
Details about possible increases can be requested from a dealer’s service center or another qualified
Without brakes lbs/kg 1,653/750
395
REFERENCE Technical data
With brakes on uphill grades of up to 12 % lbs/kg 7,209/3,270
Maximum drawbar nose weight lbs/kg 551/250
X5 xDrive40i with three rows of seats
X5 xDrive50i
Capacities
BMW X5
Fuel tank, approx. US gal/liters 21.9/83.0
Observe further information on fuel quality, refer

to page 367.
396
Appendix REFERENCE
Appendix
General information
Any updates to the Owner's Manual of the vehi‐
cle are listed here.
Updates made after the

editorial deadline
These chapters of the printed Owner's Manual
contain updates made after the editorial dead‐
line.
▷ Quick Reference Guide: Buttons on the re‐
mote control, refer to page 20.
▷ General settings: Apple CarPlay preparation.
▷ Remote control: Overview, refer to page 77.
▷ BMW display key: Overview, refer to page 81.
▷ Tailgate: Lower tailgate.
▷ Displays: Trip data.
▷ Driving comfort: xOffroad package, refer to
page 264.
▷ Enlarging the cargo area: Folding down the
rear seat backrest electrically, refer to
page 305.
397
REFERENCE Everything from A to Z
Everything from A to Z
Index
0-9 Airbags 176
Airbags, indicator and warning light 178
2-axle air suspension 262 Air circulation, see Recirculated-air mode 272
Air conditioning 271
A Air distribution, manual 273
Air flow, automatic climate control 273
A/C button, see Air conditioning 271 Air outlets, see Ventilation 274
ABS, Antilock Brake System 213 Air pressure, tires 332
Acceleration Assistant, see Launch Control 147 Air suspension 262
Accessories and parts 10 Alarm system 105
Accident Assistance 382 Alarm, unintentional 106
Accident prevention, see Active Protection 210 Alertness assistant 211
ACC, see Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go All-season tires, see Winter tires 342
function 223 All-wheel-drive, see xDrive 215
Activated charcoal filter 274 Ambient air package 283
Activating trailer towing 319 Ambient light 174
Active Blind Spot Detection 201 Animal detection, see Night Vision 194
Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go function, Antifreeze, see Washer fluid 372
ACC 223 Antilock Brake System, ABS 213
Active damping control, see Adaptive suspen‐ Anti-slip control, see DSC 213
sion 267 Anti-slip rails 302
Active Guard Plus, see Intelligent Safety 179 Anti-theft protection, see Lug bolt lock 359
Active Guard, see Intelligent Safety 179 Apple CarPlay, connection to the vehicle 72
Active M sport differential 216 Approach control warning with City light braking
Active PDC, see Emergency brake function 239 function 181
Active Protection 210 Approach control warning with light braking func‐
Active roll stabilization 267 tion 181
Active seat ventilation 126 Approved axle load 395
Active Sport suspension, see Adaptive M Sus‐ Apps, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, En‐
pension Professional 268 tertainment, Communication 8
Active Steering, integral 218 Armrest heating 125
Adaptive brake assistant 213 Ashtray 290
Adaptive Light Control 171 Ashtray, front 290
Adaptive M chassis 267 Assistance when driving off, see Drive-off assis‐
Adaptive M suspension Professional 268 tant 213
ADAPTIVE, see Driving Dynamics Control 150 Assistance with breakdown 380
Adaptive suspension 267 ASSIST button, see Active Cruise Control 223
Additives, engine oil types 370 ASSIST button, see Cruise control 221
Adjustable speed limiter, see Manual speed lim‐ AUC Automatic Recirculating Air Control 272
iter 219
398
Everything from A to Z REFERENCE
Audio, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, En‐ BMW Assist, see Owner's Manual for Navigation,
tertainment and Communication 8 Entertainment and Communication 8
AUTO H button, see Parking brake 136 BMW Digital Key 91
Automatic climate control 269 BMW display key 81
Automatic cruise control with Stop&Go func‐ BMW display key, malfunction 84
tion 223 BMW Gesture Control 57
Automatic Curb Monitor, exterior mirror 122 BMW maintenance system 374
Automatic deactivation, front-seat passenger air‐ Bonus range, ECO PRO 324
bags 178 Bottle holder, see Cup holders 298
Automatic Differential Brake 216 Brake assistant 213
Automatic headlight control 168 Brake assistant, adaptive 213
Automatic Hold, see Parking brake 136 Brake Controller 320
Automatic locking 103 Brake discs, breaking in, see Brake system 312
Automatic Recirculating Air Control AUC 272 Brake pads, breaking in, see Brake system 312
Automatic Soft Closing 97 Brake system 312
Automatic tailgate 95 Braking, information 314
Automatic transmission, see Steptronic trans‐ Breakdown assistance 380, 381
mission 143 Breakdown, see FTM Flat Tire Monitor 355
Automatic unlocking 103 Break-in 312
Automatic vehicle wash 387 Break recommendation, see Alertness Assis‐
AUTO program, automatic climate control 271 tant 211
AUTO program, intensity 272 Brightness, Control Display 67
Auto Start/Stop function 133 Bulbs, replacing, see Lights and bulb 377
Axle loads, weights 395 Buttons on the steering wheel 38
Button, SOS, see Intelligent emergency call 382
B Button, Start/Stop 133
Bypassing, see Jump-starting 383
Backrest curvature, see Lumbar support 113
Backrest, seats 111 C
Backrest tilt 112
Backrest, width 113 Cable for tow-starting/towing 385
Bad road trips 312 Calendar, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation,
Bandages, see First-aid kit 380 Entertainment, Communication 8
Bar for tow-starting/towing 385 California Proposition 65 Warning 11
Basic position, rear seats 115 Camera-based assistance systems, see Intelli‐
Battery, changing, remote control of the vehi‐ gent Safety 179
cle 79 Camera-based cruise control, see Active Cruise
Battery, disposing of 378 Control with Stop&Go function 223
Battery, vehicle 377 Camera lenses, care 390
Being towed, see Tow-starting and towing 384 Camera, rearview camera, without Surround
Belts, see Safety belts 117 View 242
Beverage holder, see Cup holders 298 Camera, see Surround View 245
Blocking, power window, see Safety switch 108 Can holder, see Cup holders 298
Bluetooth connection 69 Care, Head-up Display 391
Blu-ray, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, Care of displays, screens 391
Entertainment, Communication 8 Care, see Washing the vehicle 387
399
Care, vehicle 388 Child safety locks 132

Cargo area 301 Child seat, mounting 129
Cargo area, enlarging 304 Child seats, see Transporting children
Cargo area, loading, see Stowing and securing safely 128
cargo 302 Chrome-plated surfaces, care 389
Cargo area, storage compartments 303 Chrome surfaces, care 389
Cargo cover 306 Cigarette lighter 291
Cargo cover electric 307 Cigarette lighter, front 291
Cargo, stowing and securing 302 Cigarette lighter, rear 291
Cargo straps, see Lashing eyes in the cargo Cleaning displays, screens 391
area 302 Cleaning, Head-up Display 391
Carpet, care 390 Climate control 269
CarPlay, connection to the vehicle 72 Clothes hooks 300
Car seats, see Transporting children safely 128 Coasting 325
Cartridge replacement, see Ambient air pack‐ Coasting with engine decoupled, see Coast‐
age 283 ing 325
Car wash 387 Coasting with idling engine 325
Car washing 387 Combination switch, see Turn signals 139
Catalytic converter, see Hot exhaust gas sys‐ Combination switch, see Washer/wiper sys‐
tem 313 tem 140
CBS Condition Based Service 374 Comfort Access 87
Cell phone, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, COMFORT, see Driving Dynamics Control 148
Entertainment and Communication 8 Communication, see Owner's Manual for Naviga‐
Center armrest 297 tion, Entertainment and Communication 8
Center armrest, front 297 Compact wheel, see Emergency wheel 362
Center console 41 Comparison of entries, see Entry comparison 47
Central Information Display (CID), see Control Compartments in the doors 296
Display 49 Compatible devices, see Suitable devices 69
Central locking system 86 Compressor 344
Central screen, see Control Display 49 Concierge Service, see Owner's Handbook for
Changes, technical, see For Your Own Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 8
Safety 10 Condensation, removing from the windows 274
Changing parts 376 Condensation water under the parked vehi‐
Changing wheels 358 cle 315
Changing wheels/tires 341 Condition Based Service CBS 374
Chassis number, see Vehicle identification num‐ Confirmation signal from the vehicle 103
ber 15 ConnectedDrive, see Owner's Manual for Navi‐
Check Control 153 gation, Entertainment and Communication 8
Checking the engine oil level electronically 368 Connecting device 68
Checking the oil level electronically 368 Connecting electrical devices, see Sockets 292
Children, seating position 128 Connecting, mobile devices 68
Children, transporting safely 128 Connecting mobile phone 68
Child restraint system LATCH 130 Connecting smartphone 68
Child restraint systems, mounting 129 Connecting telephone 68
Child restraint systems, see Transporting chil‐ Connections, Screen Mirroring 73
dren safely 128 Consumption display, ECO PRO 324
400
Consumption display, widget in the instrument Data, see Deleting personal data in the vehi‐
cluster 153 cle 67
Consumption, see Current consumption 153 Data, technical 394
Consumption, see Trip data 163 Date 64
Contacts, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, Daytime running lights 170
Entertainment, Communication 8 DCC, see Cruise control 221
Container for washer fluid 372 Defogging the windows 274
Continued driving with a flat tire 353, 357 Defrosting the windows 274
Control Display 49 Deleting personal data 67
Control Display, settings 63 Departure time, parked-car ventilation 279
Controller 49 Departure time, stationary climate control 282
Control systems, driving stability 213 Device list, displaying 74
Convenient closing with the remote control 78 Devices, managing 74
Convenient opening with the remote control 77 Diagnosis connection 375
Coolant 371 Differential lock 216
Coolant level 371 Digital Key 91
Coolant temperature 158 Dimensions 394
Cooling, maximum 271 Dimensions, see Technical data 394
Cooling system 371 Dimmable exterior mirrors 122
Cornering light 171 Dimmable interior mirror 123
Corrosion on brake discs 315 Direct dial buttons, see Programmable memory
Cosmetic mirror 290 buttons 48
Cross-country mobility, see xOffroad pack‐ Direction indicator, see Turn signals 139
age 264 Display in the windshield, see Head-up Dis‐
Crossing traffic warning 259 play 165
Cruise control 221 Display key, malfunction 84
Cruise control, active with Stop&Go func‐ Display key, see BMW display key 81
tion 223 Display lighting, see Instrument lighting 173
Cruise control with distance control, see Active Displays 151
Cruise Control with Stop&Go function 223 Displays and symbols 9
Cruise control without distance control, see Displays, ECO PRO 324
Cruise control 221 Displays, screens 391
Cruising range 159 Disposal, coolant 372
Cup holder 298 Disposal, vehicle battery 378
Cup holder, front 298 Distance control, see PDC 237
Cup holder, rear 299 Door handle lighting, see Welcome lights 170
Current consumption 153 Door lock, see Remote control 76
Door opening angle, Surround View 247
D Downhill control, see HDC Hill Descent Con‐
trol 216
Damage, tires 340 Drawbar nose weight 395
Damping control, active, see Adaptive suspen‐ Drink holder, third row of seats 300
sion 267 Drive-off assistant 213
Data memory 12 Drive-off assistant, see DSC 213
Data protection, settings 67 Driver activity, see Driver Attention Camera 66
Driver assistance, see Intelligent Safety 179
401
Driver Attention Camera 66 Emergency brake function when parking, Active

Drive-ready state, idle state, and standby PDC 239
state 43 Emergency service, see Accident Assis‐
Drive-ready state, see Starting the engine 44 tance 382
Driver profiles 97 Emergency service, see Breakdown assis‐
Driver profiles, welcome screen 98 tance 381
Driving 133 Emergency stop assistant 209
Driving Assistant, see Intelligent Safety 179 Emergency unlocking, fuel filler flap 331
Driving comfort 262, 267 Emergency unlocking, rear seat backrest 116
Driving Dynamics Control 148 Emergency unlocking, transmission lock 147
Driving instructions, break-in 312 Emergency wheel 362
Driving mode, ECO PRO 322 Energy recovery 153
Driving mode, see Driving Dynamics Con‐ Energy savings, see Gear shift indicator 160
trol 148 Engine, automatic Start/Stop function 133
Driving notes, general 313 Engine compartment 364
Driving on bad roads 312 Engine compartment, working in 365
Driving on racetracks 316 Engine coolant 371
Driving stability control systems 213 Engine idling when driving, see Coasting 325
Driving style analysis, ECO PRO 326 Engine oil, adding 369
Driving tips 313 Engine oil change 371
Drying air, see Air conditioning 271 Engine oil filler neck 369
DSC Dynamic Stability Control 213 Engine oil temperature 158
DTC Dynamic Traction Control 215 Engine oil types to add 370
DVD, Video, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga‐ Engine start, jump-starting 383
tion, Entertainment, Communication 8 Engine start, see Drive-ready state 44
Dynamic damping, see Adaptive suspen‐ Engine stopping, see Drive-ready state 44
sion 267 Engine temperature 158
Dynamic Stability Control DSC 213 Entering a destination, see Owner's Handbook
Dynamic Traction Control DTC 215 for Navigation, Entertainment, Communica‐
tion 8
E Entering an address, navigation, see Owner's
Manual for Navigation, Entertainment and Com‐
ECO PRO 322 munication 8
ECO PRO bonus range 324 Entertainment, see Owner's Manual for Naviga‐
ECO PRO displays 324 tion, Entertainment and Communication 8
ECO PRO driving style analysis 326 Entry comparison, navigation 47
ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL, see Driving Dynamics Equipment, interior 287
Control 148 Error indicators, see Check Control 153
ECO PRO, see Driving Dynamics Control 148 ESP Electronic Stability Program, see DSC 213
Efficient4x4, see xDrive 215 Evasion assistance 185
Electronic oil measurement 368 Exchanging wheels/tires 341
Electronic Stability Program ESP, see DSC 213 Exhaust gas system 313
E-mail, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, Exhaustion warner 211
Entertainment, Communication 8 Exhaust, see Exhaust gas system 313
Emergency brake 209 Exterior lighting during unlocking 77
Exterior lighting with the vehicle locked 78
402
Exterior mirror, Automatic Curb Monitor 122 Fragrancing, see Ambient air package 283
Exterior mirror, automatic dimming feature 122 Front airbags 176
Exterior mirrors 121 Front fog light, replacing, see Lights and
Exterior mirrors, malfunction 122 bulbs 377
External start 383 Front fog lights 173
External temperature 158 Front lights, replacing, see Lights and bulbs 377
Eyelet for towing 386 Front passenger seat, adjusting, see Gentleman
Eyes, see Lashing eyes in the cargo area 302 function 114
Front-seat passenger airbags, automatic deacti‐
F vation 178
Front-seat passenger airbags, indicator light 179
Factory settings 75 Front seats 111
Failure message, see Check Control 153 FTM Flat Tire Monitor 355
False alarm, see Avoiding unintentional Fuel 367
alarms 106 Fuel cap 330
Fan, see Air flow 273 Fuel filler flap 330
Fastening safety belts, see Safety belts 117 Fuel filler flap, unlocking manually 331
Fault indicators, see Check Control 153 Fuel gage 157
Filler neck for engine oil 369 Fuel quality 367
Finding charging stations, see Charging stations Fuel recommendation 367
and points of interest, see Owner's Handbook Fuel, tank capacity 396
for Navigation, Entertainment, Communica‐ Fuel, tank capacity, see Technical data 394
tion 8 Fuses 378
Fine wood parts, care 390
First-aid kit 380 G
Fittings for trailer safety chain, trailer towing 320
Flat tire, changing wheels 358 Garage door opener, see Integrated Universal
Flat tire, continued driving 353, 357 Remote Control 287
Flat tire message, FTM 356 Gasoline 367
Flat tire message, TPM 351 Gear change, Steptronic transmission 143
Flat Tire Monitor FTM 355 Gear shift indicator 160
Flat tire, repairing 343 General driving notes 313
Flat tire, see Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 348 General settings 63
Flat tire warning light, FTM 356 Gentleman function 114
Flat tire warning light, TPM 351 Gesture Control 57
Flooding 314 Gestures, see BMW Gesture Control 57
Floor carpet, care 390 Glare shield, see Sun visor 290
Floor mats, care 390 Glass sunroof, electric 108
Fog, removing from the windows 274 Glass sunroof, initialize the system 110
Fold-away position of the wipers 142 Glove compartment 295
Fold back rear seat backrests 304 GPS geolocation, vehicle position 66
Foot brake 314 GPS, navigation, see Owner's Handbook for
For Your Own Safety 10 Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 8
Fragrance cartridge, see Ambient air pack‐ Gross vehicle weight, approved 395
age 283 Gross weight, permissible for trailer towing 395
Fragrance, see Ambient air package 283 Ground clearance, see xOffroad package 264
403
H Hydroplaning 314
Handbrake, see Parking brake 136 I

Hand-held transmitter, alternating code 288
Hands-free device, see Owner's Handbook for iBrake – PostCrash 211
Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 8 Ice warning, see External temperature 158
Hazard warning flashers 380 Icy roads, see External temperature 158
HDC Hill Descent Control 216 Identification marks, tires 338
Head airbags 177 Identification number, see Vehicle identification
Headlight control, automatic 168 number 15
Headlight courtesy delay feature 170 Idle state, standby state, and drive-ready
Headlight courtesy delay feature, switching state 43
on 79 iDrive 46
Headlight flasher 139 Ignition key, see Remote control 76
Headlight glass 377 Indicator/warning lights 155
Headlights, care 388 Individual air distribution 273
Headlights, replacing, see Lights and bulbs 377 Individual settings, see Driver profiles 97
Head restraint pillow 121 Inductive charging of a smartphone, see Wireless
Head restraints and seats 111 charging tray, see Owner's Manual for Naviga‐
Head restraints, front 119 tion, Entertainment, Communication 8
Head restraints, rear 120 Inflation pressure monitor, see Tire Pressure
Head-up Display 165 Monitor TPM 348
Head-up Display, care 391 Inflation pressure, tires 332
Head-up Display, see Memory function 124 Inflation pressure warning FTM, tires 355
Head-up Display, standard view 165 Information 8
Heated steering wheel 124 Information window, Control Display 66
Heating, see Stationary climate control 280 Initialization, Flat Tire Monitor FTM 356
Heavy cargo, stowing cargo 302 Initialize, Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 350
High-beam Assistant 171 Instrument cluster 151
High beams 139 Instrument lighting 173
High beams/low beams, see High-beam Assis‐ Integral Active Steering 218
tant 171 Integrated key 85
Hill Descent Control HDC 216 Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle 16
Hills 315 Integrated Universal Remote Control 287
Hill start assistant, see Drive-off assistant 213 Intelligent Auto Start/Stop function 135
Holder for beverages, see Cup holders 298 Intelligent emergency call 382
HomeLink, see Integrated Universal Remote Intelligent Safety 179
Control 287 Intended use 10
Homepage 8 Intensity, AUTO program 272
Hood 365 Interior camera, see Driver Attention Camera 66
Horn 38 Interior equipment 287
Hot exhaust gas system 313 Interior lights 174
Hotline, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, Interior lights during unlocking 77
Entertainment, Communication 8 Interior lights with the vehicle locked 78
Humidity in the headlight, see Headlight Interior mirror 121
glass 377 Interior mirror, automatic dimming feature 123
404
Interior motion sensor 106 LED headlights, replacing, see Lights and
Internet connection 72 bulbs 377
Internet page 8 LED light carpet, see Welcome light 170
Intersection warning with City light braking func‐ LEDs, light-emitting diodes, replacing, see Lights
tion 187 and bulbs 377
Interval display, see Service requirements 159 Letters and numbers, entering 51
Ionization, see Ambient air package 283 Light-alloy wheels, care 389
Light control, adaptive 171
J Light-emitting diodes, LEDs, replacing, see
Lights and bulbs 377
Jacking points for the vehicle jack 360 Lighter, cigarettes 291
Jam protection system, glass sunroof 110 Lighting 168
Jam protection system, windows 107 Lighting, speakers 175
Joystick, Steptronic transmission 143 Light in the exterior mirror, see Active Blind Spot
Jump-starting 383 Detection 201
Jump-starting terminals 384 Light in the exterior mirror, see Crossing traffic
warning 259
K Light replacement, see Lights and bulbs 377
Lights 168
Keyless Go, see Comfort Access 87 Lights and bulbs 377
Key, mechanical 85 Light switch 168
Key, see BMW display key 81 LIM button, see Manual Speed Limiter 219
Kickdown, Steptronic transmission 143 List of all messages 63
Knee airbag 177 Load 302
Loading 301
Location, vehicle position 66
L Locking, automatic 103
Locking, see Opening and Closing 76
Label on recommended tires 341
Locking, settings 103
Lane control assistant, see Steering and lane
Locking using the remote control 77
control assistant 231
Lock, lug bolts 359
Lane control assistant with active side collision
Locks, child safety 132
protection, see Side collision warning 205
Low beams 169
Lane departure warning 198
Low beams, automatic, see High-beam Assis‐
Lane lines, Surround View 247
tant 171
Lane threshold, warning 198
Lower back support 113
Language, set on Control Display 65
Lower tailgate 96
Laser headlights, replacing, see Lights and
Lug bolt lock 359
bulbs 377
Luggage rack, see Roof-mounted luggage
Laser high beams 173
rack 315
Lashing eyes in the cargo area 302
Lumbar support 113
LATCH child restraint fixing system 130
Launch Control 147
Leather care 389 M
LED front fog light, replacing, see Lights and
bulbs 377 Maintenance 374
405
Maintenance requirements, see Condition Based Modifications, technical, see For Your Own
Service CBS 374 Safety 10
Maintenance, see Service requirements 159 Monitor, see Control Display 49
Maintenance system, BMW 374 Mount for trailer hitch, care 390
Make-up mirror 290 Mounting for trailer hitch 319
Malfunction, BMW display key 84 Mounting of child restraint systems 129
Malfunction, remote control 80 MP3 player, see Audio, see Owner's Handbook
Manual air distribution 273 for Navigation, Entertainment, Communica‐
Manual air flow 273 tion 8
Manual brake, see Parking brake 136 M sport differential, active 216
Manual mode, Steptronic transmission 143 Multi-function hook 303
Manual operation, fuel filler flap 331 Multifunction steering wheel, buttons 38
Map update, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga‐ Multimedia, see Owner's Manual for Navigation,
tion, Entertainment, Communication 8 Entertainment and Communication 8
Marking, run-flat tire 342 Music hard disk, see Owner's Handbook for Nav‐
Massage seat, front 125 igation, Entertainment, Communication 8
Master key, see Remote control 76
Matte finish 389 N
Maximum cooling 271
Maximum speed display, see Speed Limit Navigation, see Owner's Manual for Navigation,
Info 160 Entertainment and Communication 8
Maximum speed of winter tires 342 Neck restraints, front, see Head restraints 119
M chassis, adaptive 267 Neck restraints, rear, see Head restraints 120
Measurement, units of 65 Net, cargo area 303
Media of the Owner's Manual 16 Neutral cleaner, see Light-alloy wheels 389
Medical supplies, see First-aid kit 380 New wheels and tires 341
Memory function 124 Night Vision device, see Night Vision 194
Menu, instrument cluster, see Selection Night Vision with pedestrian and animal detec‐
lists 162 tion 194
Menus, operating, see iDrive 46 Nose weight, see Drawbar nose weight 395
Messages 63 Notes, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation,
Messages, see Check Control 153 Entertainment, Communication 8
Microfilter 274 No-touch opening and closing of the tailgate 89
Minimum tread depth, tires 340 Nylon rope for tow-starting/towing 385
Mirror 121
Mirror, see Memory function 124 O
Mobile communication devices in the vehi‐
cle 314 OBD Onboard Diagnosis 375
Mobile devices, managing 74 Object detection, see Night Vision 194
Mobile phone, see Owner's Manual for Naviga‐ Obstacle marking, rearview camera 243
tion, Entertainment and Communication 8 Obstacle marking, Surround View 247
Mobility System 343 Octane rating, see Recommended fuel
MODE button, see Active Cruise Control 223 grade 368
MODE button, see Cruise control 221 Oil, adding 369
Mode, ECO PRO 322 Oil change 371
406
Oil change interval, see Service require‐ Performance display, see Sport displays 164
ments 159 Personal data, deleting 67
Oil filler neck 369 Personal profile, see Driver profiles 97
Oil types to add, engine 370 Person warning with braking function 191
Onboard Computer, see Trip data 163 Pillow for head restraints in the rear 121
Onboard Diagnosis OBD 375 Plastic parts, care 390
Onboard literature, printed 16 PostCrash – iBrake 211
Onboard vehicle tool kit 376 Power failure 378
On-call service, see Accident Assistance 382 Power windows 107
On-call service, see Breakdown assistance 381 Pressure monitor, see Tire Pressure Monitor
Online Entertainment, see Owner's Handbook TPM 348
for Navigation, Entertainment, Communica‐ Pressure, tires 332
tion 8 Pressure warning FTM, tires 355
Opening and closing 76 Printed onboard literature 16
Operating concept, iDrive 46 Profiles, see Driver profiles 97
Outside air, see AUC 272 Programmable memory buttons, iDrive 48
Overheating of engine, see Coolant tempera‐ Protective function, glass sunroof, see Jam pro‐
ture 158 tection system 110
Overwintering, see Long-term vehicle stor‐ Protective function, windows, see Jam protec‐
age 391 tion system 107
Owner's Manual, printed 16 Push-and-turn reel, see Controller 49
P Q
Paint, vehicle 388 Queuing Assistant, see Steering and lane control
Pairing, mobile devices, see Connections 68 assistant 231
Panic alarm, see Panic mode 106
Panic mode 106 R
Panorama View, see Surround View 245
Panoramic glass sunroof, see Glass sunroof 108 Racetrack operation 316
Park Distance Control PDC 237 Radiator fluid 371
Parked-car ventilation 278 Radio-operated key, see Remote control 76
Parking aid, see PDC 237 Radio, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, En‐
Parking Assistant 252 tertainment and Communication 8
Parking assistant Plus, see Surround View 245 Rain sensor 141
Parking brake 136 Rear automatic climate control 276
Parking lights 169 Rear axle steering, see Integral Active Steer‐
Parking with Automatic Hold, see Parking ing 218
brake 136 Rear center armrest 297
Parts and accessories 10 Rear collision prevention 208
Passenger's side mirror, tilting, see Automatic Rear collision warning, see Rear collision preven‐
Curb Monitor, exterior mirror 122 tion 208
Pathway lines, rearview camera 243 Rear lights, replacing, see Lights and bulbs 377
PDC Park Distance Control 237 Rear seat backrest inclination 115
Pedestrian detection, see Night Vision 194 Rear seat backrest tilt 115
Performance Control 268 Rear seats 114
407
Rear ventilation, third row of seats, ventilation, Roadside Assistance, see Accident Assis‐
third row of seats 275 tance 382
Rearview camera, see Surround View 245 Roadside Assistance, see Breakdown assis‐
Rearview camera, without Surround View 242 tance 381
Rear window defroster 274 Roadside parking lights 169
Rear window wiper, operation 142 Roller sunblinds, rear side windows 108
Recirculated-air filter, see Microfilter/activated- Rolling code hand-held transmitter 288
charcoal filter 274 RON recommended fuel grade 368
Recirculated-air mode 272 Roofliner 42
Recommended fuel grade 368 Roof load capacity 395
Recommended tire brands 341 Roof-mounted luggage rack 315
Refueling 330 Rope for tow-starting/towing 385
Remote 3D View 252 Route, navigation, see Owner's Handbook for
Remote control 76 Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 8
Remote control, additional 79 RSC Run-flat System Component, see Run-flat
Remote control for audio, see Owner's Hand‐ tires 342
book for Navigation, Entertainment, Communi‐ RSU, see Remote Software Upgrade 60
cation 8 RTTI, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, En‐
Remote control, integrated key 85 tertainment, Communication 8
Remote control, loss 79 Rubber components, care 389
Remote control, malfunction 80 Run-flat tire 342
Remote control of the vehicle, changing the bat‐
tery 79 S
Remote control, universal 287
Remote control with display, malfunction 84 Safe braking 314
Remote control with display, see BMW display Safety belt reminder for driver's seat and front
key 81 passenger seat 118
Remote services, app, see Owner's Handbook Safety belt reminder for the rear seats 118
for Navigation, Entertainment, Communica‐ Safety belts 117
tion 8 Safety belts, care 390
Remote Software Upgrade 60 Safety locks, doors and windows 132
Removable ball head 319 Safety package, see Active Protection 210
Replacing parts 376 Safety switch, windows 108
Replacing wheels/tires 341 Safety systems, see Airbags 176
Reporting safety malfunctions 15 Safety systems, see Intelligent Safety 179
RES CNCL button, see Active Cruise Control Saving fuel 321
with Stop&Go function 223 Screen Mirroring, connection 73
RES CNCL button, see Cruise control 221 Screen, see Control Display 49
Reserve warning, see Range 159 Screwdriver, see Onboard vehicle tool kit 376
Reset settings 75 Sealant, see Mobility System 343
Reset, Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 350 Seat and armrest heating 125
Reset vehicle configuration 75 Seat heating 125
Reset vehicle settings 75 Seating position for children 128
Retreaded tires 342 Seats and head restraints 111
Reversing Assistant, see Parking Assistant 252 Seat, see Memory function 124
Seats, front 111
408
Seats, rear 114 SMS text message, supplementary 154

Seat ventilation, active 126 Snow chains 347
Securing cargo 302 Socket for OBD Onboard Diagnosis 375
Selection list in instrument cluster 162 Sockets 292
Selector lever, Steptronic transmission 143 Software Upgrade, see Remote Software Up‐
Self-leveling suspension, see 2-axle air suspen‐ grade 60
sion 262 SOS button, see Intelligent emergency call 382
Self-supporting tires, see Run-flat tires 342 Sound output, see Owner's Handbook for Navi‐
Sensors, care 390 gation, Entertainment, Communication 8
Service and warranty 11 Spare tire, see Emergency wheel 362
Service Center, see Accident Assistance 382 Speaker lighting 175
Service requirements 159 Special equipment, see Vehicle features and op‐
Service requirements, see Condition Based tions 9
Service CBS 374 Speed Limit Device, see Manual speed lim‐
Services, ConnectedDrive, see Owner's Manual iter 219
for Navigation, Entertainment and Communica‐ Speed limit display, see Speed Limit Info 160
tion 8 Speed limiter, manual 219
SET button, see Active Cruise Control with Speed Limit Info 160
Stop&Go function 223 Speed warning 65
SET button, see Cruise control 221 Sport chassis/suspension, see Adaptive M chas‐
Set speed, see Active Cruise Control with sis 267
Stop&Go function 223 Sport displays 164
Settings, locking/unlocking 103 SPORT INDIVIDUAL, see Driving Dynamics
Settings on Control Display 63 Control 148
Settings, seats and head restraints 111 SPORT PLUS, see Driving Dynamics Con‐
Setting up a driver profile 98 trol 148
Setup assistant 98 Sport program, Steptronic transmission 143
Shift paddles on the steering wheel 143 SPORT, see Driving Dynamics Control 148
Shift point indicator, tachometer 157 Sport suspension, active, see Adaptive M Sus‐
Side airbag 176 pension Professional 268
Side collision warning 205 Stability control systems 213
Side protection, Surround View 247 Standard equipment, see Vehicle features and
Side protection without Surround View 240 options 9
Signaling, horn 38 Standard view, Head-up Display 165
Signals when unlocking, see Confirmation sig‐ Standby state, idle state and drive-ready
nals from the vehicle 103 state 43
Sitting safely 111 Start/stop, automatic function 133
Size 394 Start/Stop button 133
Sizes, see Technical data 394 Starting aid terminals 384
Slide/tilt glass roof, see Glass sunroof 108 Starting, see Drive-ready state 44
Smartphone, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Starting the engine, see Drive-ready state 44
Entertainment and Communication 8 Stationary climate control 280
Smoker's package 290 Stations, AM/FM, see Owner's Handbook for
SMS, see Short messages, see Owner's Hand‐ Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 8
book for Navigation, Entertainment, Communi‐ Status control display, tires 350
cation 8 Status information, iDrive 47
409
Status of Owner's Manual 9 Tailgate, opening and closing with no-touch acti‐
Status, vehicle 164 vation 89
Steering and lane control assistant incl. Traffic Tailgate via remote control 78
Jam Assist 231 Tail lights, replacing, see Lights and bulbs 377
Steering, see Integral Active Steering 218 Technical changes, see For Your Own Safety 10
Steering wheel, adjusting 123 Technical data 394
Steering wheel, buttons 38 Telephone, see Owner's Manual for Navigation,
Steering wheel, see Memory function 124 Entertainment and Communication 8
Steptronic Sport transmission, see Steptronic Teleservices, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga‐
transmission 143 tion, Entertainment, Communication 8
Steptronic transmission 143 Television, TV, see Owner's Handbook for Navi‐
Stopping the engine, see Drive-ready state 44 gation, Entertainment, Communication 8
Storage compartment in the center console 297 Temperature, automatic climate control 270
Storage compartments 295 Temperature display, see External tempera‐
Storage compartments in the cargo area 303 ture 158
Storage compartments, locations 295 Temperature, engine oil 158
Storage, tires 342 Theft alarm system, see Alarm system 105
Storing the vehicle 391 Thermal camera, see Night Vision 194
Stowing and securing cargo 302 Thigh support 112
Straps for cargo, see Lashing eyes in the cargo Third row of seats 115
area 302 Tilt alarm sensor 106
Suitable devices 69 Tilt, backrest 112
Suitable mobile phones 69 Tilting the passenger's side mirror, see Auto‐
Summer tires, tread 340 matic Curb Monitor, exterior mirror 122
Sun visor 290 Time 63
Sun visor, sliding 290 Tire brands, recommended 341
Supplementary Owner's Manuals 16 Tire damage 340
Supplementary SMS text message 154 Tire identification marks 338
Surface heating, see Seat and armrest heat‐ Tire inflation pressure 332
ing 125 Tire inflation pressure monitor, see FTM Flat
Surround View 245 Tire Monitor 355
Suspension settings, see Driving Dynamics Con‐ Tire pressure 332
trol 148 Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 348
Swinging of trailer, see Trailer stabilization con‐ Tire repair kit, see Mobility System 343
trol 319 Tires and wheels 332
Switches, see Cockpit 38 Tires, changing 341
Switch for driving dynamics, see Driving Dynam‐ Tire sealant, see Mobility System 343
ics Control 148 Tire settings 349
Symbols and displays 9 Tires, run-flat 342
SYNC program, automatic climate control 273 Tire tread 340
Tone, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Enter‐
T tainment and Communication 8
Tool 376
Tachometer 157 Torque display, see Sport displays 164
Tailgate, automatic 95 Total vehicle weight 395
Tow bar 385
410
Tow fitting 386 Unpaved roads, cross-country trips 312

Towing 384 Updates made after the editorial deadline 9
Tow rope 385 Upgrade, see Remote Software Upgrade 60
Tow-starting 384 Upholstery material care 389
TPM Tire Pressure Monitor 348 Upper backrest, front 113
Traction control 215 USB connection 71
TRACTION, driving dynamics 215 USB interface, position in vehicle 293
Traffic bulletins, see Owner's Handbook for Navi‐ Used battery, disposing of 378
gation, Entertainment, Communication 8 Use, intended 10
Traffic Jam Assist, see Steering and lane control Using a smartphone via voice activation 56
assistant 231
Trailer hitch, care 390 V
Trailer hitch, removable ball head 319
Trailer hitch, view of rearview camera 243 Vanity mirror 290
Trailer hitch, view of Surround View 247 Variable steering, see Integral Active Steer‐
Trailer loads 395 ing 218
Trailer stabilization control 319 Vehicle battery 377
Trailer towing 317 Vehicle breakdown, see Breakdown assis‐
Trailer towing, activation 319 tance 380
Trailer towing, data 395 Vehicle, break-in 312
Transmission lock, electronic unlocking 147 Vehicle care 388
Transmission, see Steptronic transmission 143 Vehicle care products 388
Transporting children safely 128 Vehicle features and options 9
Travel & Comfort System 294 Vehicle identification number 15
Tread, tires 340 Vehicle key, see Remote control 76
Trip data 163 Vehicle paint 388
Triple turn signal activation 139 Vehicle position, vehicle location 66
Turning circle line, Surround View 247 Vehicle status 164
Turning radius lines, rearview camera 243 Vehicle storage 391
Turn signal, indicator light 156 Vehicle wash 387
Turn signal, replacing bulbs, see Lights and Vehicle, washing 387
bulbs 377 Ventilation 274
Turn signals, high beams, headlight flasher 139 Ventilation, see Parked-car ventilation 278
TV, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, En‐ Ventilation, see Stationary climate control 280
tertainment, Communication 8 Venting, see Ventilation 274
Vent, see Ventilation 274
U Version, see Remote Software Upgrade 60
Video, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, En‐
Unintentional alarm, avoiding 106 tertainment and Communication 8
Units of measurement 65 VIN, see Vehicle identification number 15
Universal remote control 287 Voice activation system 54
Unlock button, Steptronic transmission 143 Voice command response, see Owner's Hand‐
Unlocking, automatic 103 book for Navigation, Entertainment, Communi‐
Unlocking, see Opening and Closing 76 cation 8
Unlocking, settings 103
Unlocking with the remote control 77
411
W Wiper, fold-away position 142

Wiper, see Washer/wiper system 140
Warning/indicator lights 155 Wiper system 140
Warning against cross traffic 259 Wireless charging of a smartphone, see Wireless
Warning light in the exterior mirror, see Active charging tray, see Owner's Manual for Naviga‐
Blind Spot Detection 201 tion, Entertainment, Communication 8
Warning light in the exterior mirror, see Crossing Wireless charging tray, see Owner's Manual for
traffic warning 259 Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 8
Warning messages, see Check Control 153 Wood parts, care 390
Warning triangle 380 Wordmatch principle, see Entry comparison 47
Warranty 10 Wrench, see Onboard vehicle tool kit 376
Washer fluid 372
Washer nozzles, windshield 142 X
Washer system 140
Washing the vehicle 387 xDrive 215
Wash view, Surround View 247 xOffroad package 264
Water on roads 314
Water, see Condensation water under the parked
vehicle 315
Website 8
Weights 395
Weights, see Technical data 394
Welcome light during unlocking 77
Welcome lights 170
Welcome screen, driver profiles 98
Wheel cleaner, light-alloy wheels 389
Wheels and tires 332
Wheels, changing 341
Wheels, see FTM Flat Tire Monitor 355
WiFi connection 72
WiFi hotspot 72
WiFi hotspot, see Internet connection 72
Window defroster, rear 274
Window, defrosting and defogging 274
Windows, powered 107
Windshield washer fluid, see Washer fluid 372
Windshield washer nozzles 142
Windshield washer system, see Washer/wiper
system 140
Windshield wiper, see Wiper system 140
Winter storage, see Long-term vehicle stor‐
age 391
Winter tires 342
Winter tires, tread 340
Wiper blades, replacing 376
Wiper fluid, see Washer fluid 372
412
*BL289676500Z*
01402896765 ue
California Proposition 65
Warning
For vehicles sold in California:

The Ultimate
Driving Machine®
BMW DRIVER'S GUIDE APP.

Your customized information about the vehicle in an app.
Optimized for smartphones & tablets. Can be used offline.
*BL289676500Z*
01402896765 ue

2019 BMW x5 76615

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2019 BMW x5 76615

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2019 BMW x5 76615

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

LINK:

CONTENT & A-Z

Online Edition for Part no. 01402896765 - X/18

© 2018 Bayerische Motoren Werke

After a software update in the

BMW Driver’s Guide Web

Symbols and displays Vehicle features and

1. First action step. Status of the Owner's

This symbol on a vehicle component

California Proposition 65 Service and warranty

Event Data Recorder EDR

Vehicle identification If you believe that your vehicle has a defect

For Canadian customers

Reporting safety defects

Owner's Manual media

Production of the vehicle Integrated Owner's Manual

Opening when a Check Control ▷ "Quick link"

1. Press the button.

Comfort Access Opening and closing the tailgate

Grasp the handle of a vehicle door completely.

Locking the vehicle

Touch the grooved surface on the handle of a

▷ Unlock the vehicle and then press the button

▷ Press and hold the button on the re‐

1 Light switch element

iDrive If no other commands are possible, operate the

Buttons on the Controller

Opens the main menu.

Open the Apps menu.

Open the Communication menu.

Open the Media/Radio menu.

Open destination input menu for navi‐

Open navigation map.

Open the previous display.

Open the Options menu.

Activating the voice activation system

1. Press the button on the steering

Set-up and use

▷ Back: press the button and push the head re‐

Adjusting the head restraint

Push switch up or down.

Adjusting the exterior mirrors Storing

2. Press button on the door. The writ‐

Electrical steering wheel adjustment

1 Changing the entertainment source

Memory function Navigation destination entry

General information ▷ Press the button on the steering

3. "Connect new phone" 1. "COM"

Switching on Bluetooth and CarPlay

Pairing iPhone with CarPlay

1. Engage selector lever position P with the ve‐ Steptronic transmission

Auto Start/Stop function

A selector lever lock prevents the inadvertent Steptronic transmission, Sport

Releasing the selector lever lock

Activate the sport program/manual mode:

High beams, headlight flasher,

High beams, headlight flasher

Push the lever forward or pull it backward.

Turn signal Symbol Function